Home

Inter-Tel Axxess Telephone User Manual

1. PROMPT CONTENT Continued 201 Twenty fourth 202 Twenty fifth 203 Twenty sixth 204 Twenty seventh 205 Twenty eighth 206 Twenty ninth 207 Thirtieth 208 Thirty first 209 the voice mail system 210 The system is set to notify you between 211 is turned off 212 is turned on to call your pager at 213 with all new messages 214 with all priority messages 215 Starting at 216 ending at 217 For mailbox and group list maintenance press 2 218 To send a message to all subscribers press 1 219 To make a custom recording press 1 220 To select a custom recording press 2 221 Not used 222 Please enter the recording number 223 After the tone please record Then press POUND 224 Recording saved 225 To continue recording press POUND 226 Not used 227 No saved messages 228 To change and spell the first name press 5 229 To change and spell the last name press 5 230 Using the buttons on your telephone please spell the first name of the person Then press POUND For the letter Q press 7 For the letter Z press 9 231 No message left 232 last 233 an outside caller at 234 Message was sent from 235 This matches the mailbox of 236 an unknown caller 237 To turn off the envelope press 5 238 To accept the changes press POUND 239 The envelope is turned off 240 Please enter the application extens
2. PROMPT CONTENT Continued 075 To mark this message priority press 3 076 Message marked private 077 Message marked certified 078 Message marked priority 079 To send this message to additional mailboxes press POUND 080 To backup within your message or recording press 1 081 To pause at any time press 2 082 To advance press 3 083 To lower the voice mail volume press 4 084 To increase volume press 6 085 To save this message press 7 086 To delete this message press 9 087 To skip to the end of your message or re cording press POUND 088 To return to the main menu press STAR 089 To reply to this message press 2 090 To forward a copy of this message to another destination press 3 091 To skip back to the previous message press 4 092 To replay the message envelope press 5 093 To listen to your next message press 6 094 There are no previous messages 095 Message saved 096 Message deleted 097 There are no further messages 098 Message received 099 at 100 from 101 totaling 102 minutes 103 minute 104 Seconds 105 Second 106 Message received from an outside caller 107 To record an introduction with a copy of this message press 1 108 To change your personal greeting press 1 109 To change your name in the directory press 2 110 To change your password press 3 111 To change your message envelope
3. 12 Station Programming 1 ea dac ey Pad eR ICE Heke EAR EDU E AHORRO RR 14 System Programming su c4 esaqee Ri a dd REX REARRRG ARAS RESa qx Cada 18 Tronlkc Programming oes usted ru reri grr Ex eke Eee AR dU EPOR RR x TE 24 Programming System Speed Dial Numbers elles 31 Programming and Using DSS BLF Buttons 0 0 cc eee eee eee eee 34 Managing System and Network Alarms 00 e eee eee ee eee 37 System Alarms c SA cow gare spy tana outed E E E E E saa wu 37 Network ATS c e rese wrk trie ks ad e a ea Sot PR EE Ea P EEE EEA 37 Clearing Alans aid accion ox c ec d CC Re Roa D C ego Rg eRe V eie 39 Alarm QUU TTC C vr E 39 Assigning the CPC Modem to a DSS BLF Button sssesseeeeeeees 4 Resetting the Call Processing Card Modem 0 cee cece eee eee 42 Using the Network Group Diagnostics Feature 42 saura uo vc 43 Freezing Unfreezing the System History 2 0 0c eee eee eee ee 44 Freezing Unfreezing the Network History 0 2 0 cece eee ee eee eee 44 Voice Mail Administrator Features 0 ccc ccc cee c cece eee eee hn 45 Broadcasting Messages c1 esa deve ERA REX RH NOU eae eG RO eet ee Ro P nes 45 Maintaining Mailboxes and Group Lists lleeeeeeeeee eee 46 Importing Fax Documents v eo Sos dE Y x3 6A EX ao PRS EY dere C ar HENS AGERE 47 Creating Audiotex Recordings 0 0 0 0 0c ccc eee 48 Recordin
4. ANS ACCESS DAY ENTER STATION EXTENSION menu button a4 Y Press 2 or _ ANS ACCESS NIGHT Enter the desired extension number menu button E E Press 3 or Extension number YES NO 1 RING IN DAY E menu button v v Press 4 or Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO EN RING IN NIGHT menu button menu button menu button Press 5 or TOLL RESTRICTION p menu button r 1 TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION L E Press 1 or COS Press 2 or COS Press 3 or EXEMPT Press 4 or SUBJECT DAY menu button NIGHT menu button FROM ARS menu button TO TOLL menu button cnc eee zl dum SIS ener ees ES gt SET DAY NIGHT COS XX ul EXEMPT FROM ARS SUBJECT TO TOLL Y Y Y Y Y Y If necessary select COS number Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO to program by scrolling menu button menu button menu button menu button v v Press 1 or ON Press 2 or OFF menu button menu button v y Press 6 or E CN TRUNK LIST gt ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION menu button P Eae M Y Enter the desired trunk number de mm Extension number YES NO Y Y Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO menu button menu button pov c Page 30 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Ad
5. AT ANY LEVEL Press or the Speaker button to cancel any un saved changes and back up to exit program ming Press or ACCEPT to save changes and back up one display level INFORMATION IN THIS CHART IS SHOWN AS FOLLOWS YOUR INPUT PHONE DISPLAYS System Database Programming Flowchart Page 23 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 24 Trunk Programming The trunk information that can be programmed by an administrator station includes the follow ing Individual trunks Answer supervision type Answer supervision determines whether the system should consider a call valid when it receives polarity reversal from the central office or wait for the Valid Call timer to expire Any outside call put on hold becomes valid immediately regardless of Answer Supervision or Valid Call timer status There are three options available under answer supervision type Polarity Reversal A loop reversal must be received to consider the call valid When the first loop reversal is received the call is made valid immediately and the Inter Tel phone display will begin call cost When a second loop reversal is received the system will terminate the call NOTE If a second loop reversal is not received the system will not terminate the call unless the inside party hangs up or loss of loop is received from the Telephone company Valid Call Timer After the Valid Call
6. ues ENTER SYSTEM OPTION Lo menu button v Press 1 or Press 2 or Press 3 or DND MESSAGES PASSWORD REMINDER MSGS menu button menu button Press 4 or STN EXTENSIONS menu button If desired select another message to program SELECTDND CHANGE SELECT j Press 1 or Press 2 or MESSAGE PASSWORD REMINDER MSG CHANGE EXT SWAP EXTS L L 3 es f menu button menu button E d I Enter m i 2 nter message nter message number orselect Y paswoaand lumber or select PNEXTENSION EXTENSION DND message to p message to program E program by scrolling press by scrolling y y Enter the extension 3 r r E Enter the extension DND message VERIFY Reminder message number of the station 406 be ewapped SCROLL OR EDIT PASSWORD SCROLL OR EDIT to be changed and press v v Y E a E Enter the new Enter the new Enter the new CHANGE number SWAP extension message using alpha password again message using alpha SCROLL OR EDIT WITH EXTENSION or numeric mode and press or numeric mode f and press and press M Ep i Y v v If desired select another message to program Enter the new extension number for the station and press Enter the extension number of the second station to be swapped and press
7. Call is sent to Caller uses the Call is sent to mailbox Or a directory and the voice mail subscriber can select the designated enters his own name of dial 0 operator mailbox desired party Y Call is sent to selected mailbox MESSAGE IS LEFT IN A MAILBOX y Voice mail leaves a message waiting indica tion at the station designated as the message notification station for the mailbox Y Station user responds to message indication presses MSG button or enters feature code Y INTERCOM CALL IS PLACED TO MESSAGE NOTIFICATION RETRIEVAL APPLICATION Alternate Message Source Y Station user is prompted for the password to his mailbox Page 287 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Station users and outside callers gain access to the voice mail application in the following ways e By dialing the telephone number or extension number assigned to the voice mail appli cation e By being transferred to the voice mail by the automated attendant e By being forwarded to the voice mail when a called station is unavailable via the Call Forwarding or System Forwarding features e By responding to message waiting indications Callers will hear the voice mail company greeting and recorded instructions that tell them what to do next Users simply listen to the prompts and press the dialpad button that corresponds to the desired choice If
8. Ext 1001 10 min received throug other hunt Ext 1002 6 min groups direct ring ins or Ext 1003 1 min transfers NOTE The Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login flag affects how the longest idle time is calculated See page 143 for more information e Balanced Call Count To BALANCED CALL COUNT DISTRIBUTION balance the call load each ACD HUNT GROUP incoming call is sent to the Ext 2000 station that has received the l fewest calls through this hunt NUMBER OF CALLS group It does not count calls Ext 1000 e E that were received through ES ed i Are other hunt groups direct ring Next call will be sent here p Ext 1003 3 calls ins or transfers NOTE When an agent logs in to a balanced call count ACD hunt group or comes out of Do Not Disturb mode the system checks the average call count for that ACD hunt group and assigns that average count to the station logging in This prevents the agent who is logging in from receiving all of the incoming calls until the call count of the lowest agent catches up with his call count For example if there are five agents logged in whose call counts are 5 5 5 10 and 10 the average call count of 7 will be assigned to the next agent who logs in Page 139 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 140 If an extension list is included in an ACD hunt group set for Longest Idle or Balanced Call Count distribution it will treat eac
9. LCD Contrast Adjustment 303 Model 8000 Display Phones Only Adjusts the LCD con trast on the display The phone must be idle to use this feature Message 365 This feature code is used for leaving and retrieving a mes sage waiting indication at a called station or the called sta tion s message center Depending on how the message was left the called station user either retrieves the mes sage from his her message center or from the station that left the message Inter Tel phones use the MSG button Message Cancel 366 Allows the station user to cancel a message waiting indi cation that he or she left at another station Message Cancel Current 368 Cancels a message waiting indication that is waiting at the station without requiring the user to respond to it Inter Tel phones can use the asterisk button while viewing the message Message Silent 367 Leaves a message waiting indication at a station without first placing an intercom call This is the code that should be used by analog voice mail units connected to the sys tem Mute On Off 314 Inter Tel Phones Only Turns the microphone on or off during a call If muted the phone user can hear the other party but the party cannot hear the phone user Inter Tel phones can also use the MUTE button Page When followed by a paging zone code 0 9 or 0 49 it allows announcements to be made through phone
10. Send Alert Burst To Headset Station Flag The Send Alert Burst To Headset will send a single tone to a headset instead of normal phone ring tones when a call is ringing at the station non handsfree intercom call outside call queue callback or reminder message The tone is sent only once when the call is received and will not repeat even if the call continues to ring unanswered It is intended as a wake up tone for headsets that have a power saving function that allows the device to sleep if idle for a set period The flag is programmed on a station by station basis By default the flag is disabled Digital Phone Data Port Modules There are two types of Data Port Modules that can be connected to Model 8560 Model 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display and Associate Display Phones e PC Data Port Module PCDPM This is a digital device that is connected to the Model 8560 Model 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display or Associate Display Phone which supports data transmission between the phone and the system for DSS BLF off hook voice announce OHVA Desktop Interface and or serial port functions A PCDPM is required if a Modem Data Port Module or DSS BLF Unit will be installed or if the user wishes to receive OHVA calls NOTE A phone serial port should not be used as the Voice Processor communications port e Modem Data Port Module MDPM The MDPM is an a
11. ccc ccc ccc cece ccc cece nnn 4 Voice Mail Networks seed ie eave d ab Rao bar eee ee Rada d e Ee d es 5 Voice Mail Administrator Duties noana naaa se 6 Page 1 Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTRODUCTION This Administrator s Guide provides all of the information an administrator should need to know about the system hardware and features and it gives detailed instructions on their use Refer to the user guide provided with each phone for simplified instructions on using telephone and voice mail system features TELEPHONE SYSTEM The Inter Tel Axxess Telephone system is a state of the art digital voice data hybrid tele phone system As a hybrid system it incorporates many of the user friendly features of key systems with many of the expanded features and flexibility of private branch exchange PBX systems The system is designed to meet the needs of growing businesses In fact the system s unique digital signal processing DSP structure allows it to be easily adapted and expanded as busi ness communication needs change especially with the Caller ID Automatic Number Identifi cation ANI Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS and Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN features The modular design makes the system easy to install and service And the programmable features provide an abundance of user friendly applications to meet each customer s needs Highlights of the
12. 1 Inter Tel Phones Press the Special button and dial the Record A Call feature code 385 or press the RECORD A CALL menu button The display shows REQUEST ING RECORD A CALL Single Line Sets During a call hookflash and dial the Record A Call feature code 385 2 If required or allowed enter the desired mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX NUMBER If you do not enter a mailbox number and you have a default Record A Call mailbox the system will automatically select your default mailbox If you do not have a default mailbox the feature will time out or can be canceled by pressing EB or ACCEPT 3 You hear a confirmation tone when the Record A Call feature is activated The display shows RECORD A CALL IN PROGRESS 4 To turn off Record A Call repeat step 1 or end the call The display shows RECORD A CALL TERMINATED Page 215 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AGENT HELP Page 216 NOTE The Agent Help premium feature is required to use Agent Help The Agent Help feature allows a station user to request help from a designated Agent Help Extension during a two or three party call When the request for help call rings the Agent Help Extension can choose to join the call or reject the request The Agent Help Extension can be a supervisor or other station an extension list or a hunt group In Database Programming there are two fields for each station that affect how this fea
13. MGCP Gateway and Endpoints The system also supports IP based solutions for providing local Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN connectivity using the IPRC and a third party Media Gateway Control Proto col MGCP device For information about currently supported MGCP devices contact your local authorized Inter Tel dealer If an IP or SIP device user dials 911 from a remote location and an MGCP gateway is not present and configured properly the call will be placed from where the telephone system is located Because 911 services use Caller ID to help locate the caller emergency service could be misdirected or delayed Also the 911 service contacted may be local to the sys tem but not to the IP or SIP device All IP and SIP device users should be alerted to this situation and instructed to use a local telephone line for placing emergency calls if an MGCP gateway is not present and or functioning properly Also note that IP and SIP devices will not function in the event of a power failure at either the local site or the system location Inter Tel will not be held responsible for any problems resulting from an unavail able line that is connected to the MGCP gateway Inter Tel also recommends that users reg ularly test the MGCP gateway for dial tone IP and SIP Devices System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Devices The P2P audio feature available in software V8 1 and l
14. The system does not have enough disk space to import any more documents Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional doc uments The system currently is at or above the Maximum Fax Library Size Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional documents When prompted enter the fax document number Or to exit to the System Administra tor Menu press El One of the following occurs when you enter the number If the document number does not already exist the system asks you to verify the num ber Press EJ if the number is correct and go to the next step Or press Ell if you wish to re renter the number If the document number already exists the system asks if you wish to replace it Press EB if you wish to replace the document and go to the next step Or press if you wish to re renter the number If the document is currently being sent updated or deleted that document number can not be used right now You are prompted to enter a new number Repeat step 6 If you did not enter a valid number you are prompted to enter a new number Repeat step 6 When prompted press the Start button on your fax machine One of the following may occur If the system cannot communicate with your fax machine check that it is working prop erly and press EM to try again If the system runs out of disk space while importing the document or if the document
15. e f your station is programmed to select a trunk group when a Call button is pressed press a Call button for outgoing access e Referto the Automatic Route Selection ARS procedure on the next page e Enter the Outgoing Calls feature code 8 This automatically selects an outgoing trunk according to the programmed outgoing access mode for your station Single Line Sets Select a trunk using one of the following methods e Enter the Outgoing Call feature code 8 This automatically selects an outgoing trunk according to the programmed outgoing access mode for your station e Entera trunk group access code 92001 92208 e Referto the Automatic Route Selection ARS procedure on the next page Page 189 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 190 3 You hear one of the following signals e Outside dial tone Manually dial speed dial or redial the desired telephone num ber or use the outside directory Display phones show the numbers dialed When dialing is ended and the call is determined to be valid the display shows the elapsed time and call cost If you hear repeating reorder tones you dialed a restricted number Also if you dial too slowly and the Interdigit timers expire the call may be dropped and you will hear repeating reorder tones If using an Inter Tel phone that is on hook you may lift the handset to speak privately Go to the next step On Inter Tel phones an indiv
16. 184 Page 112 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Responding t Messages i cu cette bp E RECRHERHOUE S ndr EEN E CER XU ER d 184 Viewing Waiting Messages ie cra so rh ORR AERA ERAT 184 Answering Messages a scudo e med iba 4 RO Hrec EX ACER E d ORCI CR n 184 Canceling a Waiting MeSSage vasea eed E ERR Vx aad E ERRARE ROG RR 185 Alternate Message Source cvas deesse sexes qe d RES Satu ec be 186 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA cc cece cece cece cece hh hh nnn 187 Outside Calls iiie eres b eR sede ieee dees sees dtir eri AEE E 189 Placing O tsid CAS si esusae a SR RACER HER SHEER AE RUE don I Bade aa las 189 Receiving Outside Call cs pee Y bated E X Races tae vate ERRARE E ERE 192 ler Vel PHONGR ys 25 Stew acepy tbe Ku RA ERA d d EC ERE PERRA 192 Single Line S t eo dados Esa ete e eR E PRSE Rede edibus e sud dad 192 On Hook Monitoring any e te pU Rm RC one em RR TCR RORIS I RE AC 193 Group Listen Feature c ios duces Sor bic USO EO Ed CORO ebd XP epus 193 Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue sselelsleeeesus 194 Camp ON gc cs awd aw isi dV x ACE EG a eR EV ad ARRA ds Eta SEVER d ENA 194 Busy Trunk Callback CUBUE pct redo p IDE hoe GOUER ORE ER 194 Account Codes o sees heus eni ie E adiu e E RES S de aa enc d 195 Database Programmed Account Codes 00 00 cece ee eens 195 Optional Account Codes s osos a RR E RR ined RROOEEWRRA RR EY4 ERA
17. 4 Hang up to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names Page 235 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 236 Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers TO VIEW THE CONTENTS OF A SPEED DIAL BUTTON ON A DISPLAY PHONE 1 While on hook enter the Review Keys feature code 396 The display shows PRESS THE KEY TO REVIEW Press the desired speed dial button The display shows the currently stored number and name After viewing the number press the Speaker button ES or EM to exit or wait for the display to return to date and time TO VIEW THE STORED NUMBERS AND NAMES ON A DISPLAY PHONE 1 While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 The display shows PROGRAM STN SPD 0 9 OR SCROLL Do one of the following e Use a location code Dial the desired speed dial location code 0 9 When the name is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to view the number e Scroll through the displayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the Volume NEXT or PREVIOUS button The name and number are displayed for each location Use the Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone menu Use the menu buttons to select the desired speed dial location When the name is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to view the number After viewing the number press the Speaker button EJ or EM to exit or wait
18. A mailbox will listen for fax tones during the mailbox greeting and while a message is being recorded If the mailbox detects fax tones the call will be transferred to the speci fied extension or e mail address If the tones are detected after a recording has started the call will be disconnected Call Routing Applications will be able to detect fax tones during the greeting and up to time out The fax tone detection will also be disabled if the caller performs an action that removes them from the Call Routing Announcement transferring to an extension transferring to a mailbox etc If the fax card is busy when an incoming fax call is received the call will be disconnected UNIFIED MESSAGING REQUIRED FOR FAX E MAIL To send faxes to an e mail address using the Fax On Demand feature the Unified Messaging feature described on page 306 must also be enabled Note that programming a mailbox Fax E mail Address counts as one user FAX CARD REQUIRED To send and receive faxes the Voice Processor PC must have a fax card installed This can be the same fax card that supports the Fax On Demand feature The software will support up to eight fax ports FAX E MAIL MESSAGE FORMAT Page 310 The e mail message sent by the voice mail will have the following components To The TO line will contain the recipient s e mail address From The FROM line will contain the e mail address of the Voice Processor If an E mail Real Name has been
19. The Return Call feature allows voice mail users to return a call to the person who left a mes sage as long as the call was received from an extension number or an outside number with Caller ID It is part of the Reply option described in the following procedure Listening to Messages Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Whenever you access voice mail as a subscriber you are told how many new and saved mes sages you have FROM THE MAIN MENU 1 Listening to Messages EITHER Press Kl to listen to your new messages OR Press Eto listen to your saved messages The system plays each message in the queue selected While you are listening to a mes sage you can use the following options Press EM to skip to the end of the envelope or recording Press Kl to back up Press El to pause Then press any button to continue Press Kl to skip ahead Press El to lower the volume Press Ef to play the message envelope again Press KB to raise the volume Press HM to save the new message in your mailbox Press to delete the message from your mailbox When the message has finished playing you have the following options Press EH to replay the message from the beginning Press Kl to reply to the message You can then do one of the following Press Kl to leave a voice mail message for the caller f the caller had a mail box number it will ask you to verify the des
20. will cause the system to exceed the Maximum Fax Library Size you cannot import this document until one or more fax documents have been deleted from the system to create disk space Press El to return to step 6 When the fax transmission is complete the system tells you that the document was received Press EJ to continue importing documents or press EM to exit Page 47 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CREATING AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS Page 48 The voice mail administrator can create and select up to 500 custom audiotex recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant greetings call routing announcements and hunt group announcement overflow recordings Each recording has an assigned number Numbers are then assigned to specific applications using the system administrator s mailbox or through Database Programming Any recording number 001 500 can be assigned to any Voice Processor application In the default state Recording 001 is automatically defaulted to play the system provided voice mail main greeting and Recording 002 is the Automated Attendant main greeting The default recordings can be changed but will be returned to system provided values if the Voice Proces sor is defaulted A single recording may be used for multiple applications After making the required recordings the system administrator must determine which ones play during the telephone system s day and night
21. No Answer Advance Timer 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec 18 sec Announcement Timer 18 sec 7a Announcement Station a once only Overflow Timer 72 sec Overflow Station 4 i Overflow Timer 72 sec Overflow Station 4 Recall Timer 180 sec Can be an Extension p Recall Voice Processor Dest or a Hunt Group UCD Hunt Groups System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Announcement Stations When a call rings in or is transferred to a hunt group the Announce ment and Recall timers are started The incoming call circulates through the hunt group until it is answered or the Announcement timer expires When this timer expires the unanswered call is picked up by the designated announcement station which is a playback device that answers the call and plays a message Meanwhile the call continues circulating through the hunt group unless it was sent to a Voice Processor application and then transferred to a station If it is answered by an available hunt group station while the announcement station is connected to the call the call will leave the announcement station Each direct ring in call will transfer to the announcement station only once If it remains unanswered when the Overflow timer expires the call will be sent to the overflow station Or if there is no overflow
22. To have the data device disconnect the call Use the appropriate commands for the data device to instruct it to hang up When the call is disconnected the button is unlit To transfer the data call back to an associated Inter Tel phone before disconnect ing the call While on or off hook a Press the fluttering button The button goes off f desired speak to the party at the site of the remote data device This can only be done if the modem at the site of the remote data device can be turned off without disconnecting the trunk b To disconnect f off hook hang up If on hook press the Speaker button The button will flutter rapidly until the data device hangs up 8 Line IMX AIM Analog Phones on Dual Circuits If desired 8 line IMX AIM Analog Phones can be installed two to a circuit using the Analog Keyset Card AKSC To do this single Analog Keyset Card AKSC circuits are designated as dual circuits in System Configuration programming Other Inter Tel phone models can not be installed two to a circuit The designated dual circuit becomes two circuits that can be programmed individually Digital Phone LED Rates Page 93 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 94 Digital Phone Desktop Interface NOTE Your software license must include the appropriate premium feature s to use Desktop Interface and System OAI features Desktop Interface is a station level communications p
23. You hear intercom dial tone 2 Hang vp or place another call TO RETURN TO THE CALLER ON INDIVIDUAL HOLD Inter Tel Phones Lift the handset and or press the fluttering button for inter com calls or the Call button or individual trunk button or the button for outside calls Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 Placing Calls On Hold SYSTEM HOLD System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 NOTE This feature does not apply to single line sets TO PLACE AN OUTSIDE CALL ON SYSTEM HOLD INTER TEL PHONES ONLY 1 2 While on a call press the Special button and enter the System Hold feature code 335 You hear intercom dial tone and the associated Call button or individual trunk button flutters Hang up or place another call TO RETURN TO A CALL ON SYSTEM HOLD INTER TEL PHONES ONLY At any Inter Tel phone that shows a fluttering individual trunk button for the call and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk lift the handset and or press the fluttering button At the Inter Tel phone that placed the call on hold press the fluttering individual trunk or Call button NOTE Intercom calls and conferences cannot be placed on system hold If you attempt to do so the call or conference will actually be placed on individual hold CONSULTATION HOLD TO USE CONSULTATION HOLD SINGLE LINE SETS ONLY 1 3 HOLD RECALL While
24. cece eee eee een ene 89 Data Port Module for 12 Line and 24 Line Analog Phones 90 Optional Data Devices nia pene ER e RA ACER ERROR RA E eed ee ee Aa 90 8 Line IMX AIM Analog Phones on Dual Circuits llle 93 Digital Phone Desktop Interface 0 0 eee eee 94 POOPING awk atk raed e BG Ae Rou haa oe ba ee gb ea he ek AR eke ts 95 Sinple Line SEIS c za seq ade seid PEE ned xa du e PR Pd ados AE aded edt scien 95 Single Line Caller Ic us etna AW E Rec RYE REC OE EAR ERO 95 Single Line DTMF Sets 4 22 xu AE RR ATX CER YQ ERROR e Re dass 95 Single Line Set Message Lamps 4 i2 sase sas eh eR YR X ww Page ss 96 Single Line Ring Zones and Extended Ring Cadences 0 5 96 Off Premises Extensions OPX lllllissieseeeeeee les 97 Digital Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Units 98 Ir DS UIS 3 adore Et ud Une E ab eee bee Rd Rade ad Sd ades 98 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Pand SIP Wevices P 99 IP and SIP Phone Identification cc eed iue E WAT RDEORERXT RR RC X X et x RI s 99 Installation and Configurdliot usura caer rh ER CRY dS WC RC AGER 99 IP Limnos 24 hes sky eO Y SR eee Sae SORRY HERO EN Y oR EET ao 99 IP SoftPhon o c ueccd ad xe Ras CECI EY tAn VEEE CEEC RRELA Ea RR es 100 Model S600 rrm 100 MGCP Gateway and Endpoints x cores sa koe ee nh wens go eR RS 10
25. 1000 EXT 1001 EXT 1002 EXT 1003 Hunt Groups System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 e Distributed order To even out the call load distributed order shifts the starting point Hunt group pilot ber 2000 called of each call When a station e We user receives a call the next TUNE 1st call begins here EXT 1000 station or extension list in the 2nd call begins here EXT 1001 hunt group receives the next 3rd call begins here EXT 1002 incoming call If the receiv 4th call begins here EXT 1003 ing station is busy or all sta tions in the extension list are busy or if there is no answer before the No Answer Advance timer expires the call goes to the next station or extension list on the hunt group list DISTRIBUTED HUNT GROUP CALL PROCESSING NOTE See page 139 for information on the additional distribution types available in ACD hunt groups If an extension list is included in a hunt group a call will ring all stations on the extension list when it reaches that point in the hunt group list Therefore to create an all ring type of hunt group you can program the hunt group as either linear or distributed and then assign an exten sion list as the only hunt group member HUNT GROUP CALL PROCESSING Hunt group stations receive the following indications when a call is ringing in e Ifan outside call is ringing the station designated to rece
26. 3 Dial the voice mail extension number You hear the main menu Press EJ to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and default password Your default password is your mail box number If you want a password enter a new password using digits 0 9 up to 12 digits Then press EM Voice mail plays back your password If you do not want to use a password just press EJ Press EJ to accept the entry Or press if you wish to re enter your password The system prompts you to record your directory name After the tone record your first and last name When finished press EZ Press EJ again to accept the name Or press to replay the name you just recorded press El to add to your name or press El to erase and re record it The system then plays a prompt that introduces you to the basic voice mail features You can skip this introduction by pressing EM if desired Once your mailbox is initialized you may use any of the mailbox features provided To record a personal greeting or to change your password or directory name refer to page 301 Initializing a Subscriber Mailbox or Extension ID Page 295 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 LISTENING TO MESSAGES There are three types of voice mail messages Page 296 New Messages are messages that you have not yet heard including Broadcast Mes sages from the voice mail administrator and system sent messages
27. 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O Nor 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The character available depends on the software version The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language TO PERFORM A DIRECTORY SEARCH 1 While on or off hook enter the Directory feature code 307 The WEJ button lights and the Speaker button lights if on hook and the display shows DIR TYPE IC 1 OUT 2 FEAT 3 2 Pressone of the following e For Intercom Directory Press Kll or the IC DIRECTORY menu button to select the intercom directory The display shows INTERCOM NAME e For Outside Directory Press Ell or the OUTSIDE DIR menu button to select the outside number directory The display shows OUTSIDE NAME e For Feature Directory Press E or the FEATURE DIR menu button to select the feature code directory The display shows FEATURE NAME 3 Enter alpha and or numeric characters for the number code or user feature name up to 10 characters for intercom directory 16 for outside or feature directory If searching for a name the whole name does not have to be entered You may switch between modes by pressing the IET button or the USE NUMERIC MODE USE ALPHA MODE menu button If necessary press EM to cancel the
28. ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Page 272 CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Y Automated Attendant answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options y Y Caller selects option Caller does not select an option The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide automated call answering service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated attendant A Voice Processor is required for the Automated Attendant feature on the System Calls to the automated attendant application are processed as follows Y Y Y Call is sent to Caller uses the Call is sent to station hunt directory and the Automated group voice can select the Attendant s mail or opera name of designated tor destination desired party dial 0 operator Y Call is sent to station hunt group voice mail or operator destination When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instruc tions During or after the recording the caller may then directly dial a station extension num ber voice mail access number if there is no associated mailbox or hunt group pilot number Or the caller may use the directory to look up the desired extension Automated Attendant Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 When the automated attendant answers a call
29. Agent IDs are considered global throughout all nodes in which the Agent exists This means that if you create Agent ID 100 on one node you must also create Agent ID 100 on all other nodes that have a station that a user may wish to login to the hunt group using that ID The Remote Automatic Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature must be included in the software license where the hunt group resides as well as any node that wishes to have users login to the node spanning hunt group The ACD Hunt Groups premium feature is also required Because of this fact there are several cases that must be considered The following table shows the different displays and results for logging into and out of ACD hunt groups with the different combinations of the premium feature and the ACD Hunt Group enabled disabled HUNT mb GRP LOGIN DISPLAY LOGIN RESULT a Ar LOGIN ALL RESULT SPLAY NODE Yes Yes AGENT LOGGED Agent logged into AGENT LOGGED Agent logged into all INTO HUNT GROUP hunt group INTO ALL ACDS local and remote XXXX groups Yes No CANNOT ACCESS Agent not logged AGENT LOGGED Agent logged into all RESERVED FEATURE into group INTO ALL ACDS local hunt groups but not remote where fea ture disabled No Yes CANNOT ACCESS Agent not logged AGENT LOGGED Agent logged into all RESERVED FEATURE into group INTO ALL ACDS local but no remote groups No No CANNOT ACCESS Agent not logged AGENT LOGGED Agent logged i
30. Do Not Disturb Override 4 oe ueesa e a Rr REPE RIAIEAER RE TAE RA d 251 Remote Feature Programming eeeeeeeeeee enhn nh nnn 252 Station PassWord vusuqeaxu a d do o e RR DER RO eC CRED ER dE Ee e Ce 252 Remote Do Not Disturb Programming 000s 253 Remote Forward Programming 0 00 cece cece eee e ee ee ee nn 255 Default Station esssssussosesesssssssoscsceoesososcssecesssoeoseoeooe 256 OOK HAS Wh eeren ave EEEE E de dence i wee keds AEE 257 Reminder Messages duuceaedbacadaedoa ced e ao nev Fee eck ACIE dee dC dle MR deal Keds 258 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features 0 cece cece eee rececceee 260 Call Cost ACCOUNIING sssrds accom qe OR ACCU UR OB KC ACE I EE PEREPERE AN 260 System Brror Message Printing Luis exped acce Sore EY Y ad RR PAURA RO e ER 265 Page 114 INTRODUCTION System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The Inter Tel system in addition to its sleek modular appearance and easy installation and programming provides many user friendly features To describe the system features this chap ter has been divided into the following sections Access to the Features This section contains a list of the feature codes and their defi nitions System Organization This section describes possible administrator assignments attendant arrangements and hunt groups including UCD and ACD hunt groups Trunk Features This section explains the trunk fu
31. FIGURE 5 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets CUSTOM AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS If you record special recordings for the Voice Processor applications see page 51 for instructions record the information here RECORDING TEXT WHERE USED EXT Sample Thank you for calling XYZ Company All of our representatives are busy Ext 2011 Hunt Group p right now Please hold Overflow Station Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Page 65 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 5 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Continued STATION PROGRAMMING For each station to be programmed record the following information Station Extension Administrator station Yes or No Attendant station Yes or No House Phone Yes or No This station s attendant Username Toll restriction classes of service SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Record the following system wide information Administrator Database Programming Password Do Not Disturb Messages DEFAULT MESSAGE PRIMARY LANGUAGE MESSAGE SECONDARY LANG MESSAGE MESSAGE 01 DO NOT DISTURB MESSAGE 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE MESSAGE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL MESSAGE 04 IN MEETING MESSAGE 05 ON VACATION TIL MESSAGE 06 ON VACATION MESSAGE 07 CALL ME AT MESSAGE 08 AT THE DOCTOR
32. If it is unable to find a free route the system tries once again to use the first route If the first route is still busy the system camps on to the first route TO CAMP ON TO AN OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP 1 When you hear a busy signal after selecting an outgoing trunk do not hang up You camp on and hear music until a trunk in the trunk group is available The display shows WAITING FOR trunk name 2 When you hear a single progress tone and outside dial tone dial the desired telephone number The associated Call button or individual trunk button flashes slowly Busy Trunk Callback Queue If you attempt to select a busy outgoing trunk group and hear a busy signal or if you camp on you can request a callback queue and hang up until the system signals your station that a trunk in the trunk group is available Each station can place only one queue request at a time If a second request is made the first request is canceled and replaced by the second request A user cannot queue onto busy resources on another node Queue callbacks must be answered before the Queue Callback timer expires If a callback is not answered the queue is canceled If the station is busy when a trunk in the queued trunk group becomes available the queue request is placed at the end of the queue list TO QUEUE A BUSY OUTGOING TRUNK 1 Inter Tel Phones When you hear a busy signal while selecting a trunk Or if you are camped on press the QUEUE button or
33. Language 11 alphanumeric 13 date and time 10 Do Not Disturb 18 248 Inter Tel phones 258 multilingual capability 172 primary vs secondary 19 32 system speed dialing 230 Language Selection 172 Last Number Dialed Saved 243 Page 315 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 LCD Contrast Adjustment 79 LCD Touch Screen 100 Leaving Messages 183 Light Emitting Diode LED Indications 86 Light Emitting Diodes LEDs DSS BLF keys 98 indicators 73 phone 86 red green 88 Limited Warranty xii Linear Hunt Group 130 Liquid Crystal Display LCD 78 79 Listening to Messages 296 Listening to the Next Previous Name 283 Locating a Name 282 Longest Idle Search 139 Mailboxes 289 access 294 associated non associated 291 dial 0 destination 290 directory 281 301 directory names 281 295 envelope settings 301 initialization 295 message indications 182 message notification station 291 operator destination 290 passwords 289 301 personal greeting 301 personal options 301 receive only 289 remote messaging 289 standard 289 subscriber access 294 system administrator 46 289 Maintaining Mailboxes and Group Lists 46 Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups 147 Major Alarm 38 Major Alarms 37 265 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding 222 Manual Forwarding to Public Network 227 Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP 104 Members 140 Message Center 182 forwarding to 227 hunt group as 132 Message Envelope Contents 301
34. MESSAGE 09 ON A TRIP MESSAGE 10 ON BREAK MESSAGE 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE MESSAGE 13 OUT UNTIL MESSAGE 14 WITH A CLIENT MESSAGE 15 WITH A GUEST MESSAGE 16 UNAVAILABLE MESSAGE 17 INCONFERENCE MESSAGE 18 AWAY FROM DESk MESSAGE 19 GONE HOME MESSAGE 20 OUT TO LUNCH Page 66 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 5 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Continued Reminder Messages DEFAULT MESSAGE PRIMARY LANGUAGE MESSAGE SECONDARY LANG MESSAGE MESSAGE 01 MEETING MESSAGE 02 STAFF MEETING MESSAGE 03 SALES MEETING MESSAGE 04 CANCEL MEETING MESSAGE 05 APPOINTMENT MESSAGE 06 PLACE CALL MESSAGE 07 CALL CLIENT MESSAGE 08 CALL CUSTOMER MESSAGE 09 CALL HOME MESSAGE 10 CALL CORPORATE MESSAGE 11 CALL ENGINEERING MESSAGE 12 CALL MARKETING MESSAGE 13 CALL ACCOUNTING MESSAGE 14 CANCEL DND MESSAGE 15 CANCEL CALL FWD MESSAGE 16 TAKE MEDICATION MESSAGE 17 MAKE RESERVATION MESSAGE 18 REVIEW SCHEDULE MESSAGE 19 LUNCH MESSAGE 20 REMINDER Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Page 67 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTR
35. Message Lamp 116 Message Lamps 96 Message Notification 291 multiple mailboxes 291 stations 291 Message Notification Retrieval 4 287 Message Retrieval Order 301 Messages alternate message source 186 answering 184 canceling 183 Page 316 indications 182 inter station 65 182 mailboxes 182 reminder 258 viewing 184 voice mail 296 299 MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol 104 Microphone Mute 123 200 324 Microsoft Outlook Exchange 306 Mini DSS Units 98 Minor Alarm 38 Minor Alarms 37 265 Model 8000 Series SIP Endpoints 99 Model 8500 Phone keymap 80 speakerphone 75 Model 8520 Phone LCD 79 mini DSS 98 speakerphone 75 Model 8560 Phone alternate menu display 78 display 78 display oriented keys 78 FWD button 167 226 LCD 78 mini DSS 98 six line LCD 78 speakerphone 75 Model 8601 Softphone for Pocket PC 99 Model 8660 Phone 99 Model 8664 and 8665 Wireless IP Endpoints 99 Model 8690 100 Modem Data Port Module MDPM 89 MSG Button 182 Multi Language Feature on Network Operation 175 Multilingual Capability 172 alphanumeric mode 13 Do Not Disturb 18 248 Japanese displays 258 reminder messages 19 system date and time 10 11 system speed dialing 32 230 Multiple Attendant Operation 129 Music On Hold 108 171 background music 171 music source 171 network 171 Mute Button 200 N Network 73 account codes 196 agent help extension 217 alarms 37 39 ARS 155 call cost 260 call forward 225 campon 180 194 c
36. OL AL nSL IH2 VL v H 9 v n os as ns IHS VS i d J a I o 349 ny DM VM z ola y 4 e Oo 3 n V L 9 L xxSUaLOVYAVHS VNVMVIVM SYALOVYVHS HSITON3 LL OL 6 8 L 9 S v z L NOLInS aass3 d SI NOLLNG SINIL JO YIAWNN EJ sso 4 poJ03s 9q 0 SUISIP 8p 01 dn Joquinu y 19404 EE SSolg oules oy oureu IY HALIA OL El ssoid uou posero sr oureu oy nun K po1eedo GEMM 55244 uv q 31 oAe9 pue oureu zuIN IY ose OF suogynq ped erp 9y uo pagud s193 AY 0 puodsau100 S1949 12y XON pow oureumueqd e ur uoyewsozur ure18odd 03 yeyo SurMO 0J I 0 IJOY JopoVIVYD jxeu M 0 ooutAp o E ssord uonnq owes y Jopun p320 Je s1o3oe1euo Sururofpe UIYM PUI sr JoyovIeYO YNYM sourur 19 9p possoid s uoynq e sown jo 19quinu ou UONeNjoUnd pue sioquinu 10 9 POJISOP 9y 194U9 0 p sn ore suoynq pedperp apow sownuvydjv up Uo oo B SUILIO UD 10J posn sr uoynq Egi oy pue usydAy e Surs9jus 107 posn st a EJ u 6 0 s1oquinu 13u93 0 posn oie suoynq pedjerp oy apow i 2142mu uy Joquunu erp poods oy JO oureu poursop oy 19jug oureu oy ure1do4d 10 ogueqo op 666 000 opoo uoneoo erp poeds oq 124g TR CR EE EIE 70 09 yooy uo org SYAEWNN Vvid qaads WALSAS WV lo9O Hd OL Part Number 550 8001 ais INTZR TZL AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Issue 8 2 January 2004 Inter Tel Inc January 2004 printed in US NOTICE This Inter
37. Or press to replay your recorded name Ell to add to your name or press Kl to erase and re record your name To change your password press KB a Choose and enter a new password using digits 0 9 up to 12 digits Jf you do not want to use a password skip this step Press EM Your password is played back Press EM to accept the password as entered Or press if you wish to re enter your password To change your envelope contents press EZ A prompt plays to tell you the current status of your envelope contents a To enable or disable the time date option press Kl A prompt plays to tell you the current status of the time date option To enable or disable the message source option press EM A prompt plays to tell you the current status of the message source option To enable or disable the message length option press Kl A prompt plays to tell you the current status of the message length option To enable all options press El A prompt tells you that all options are enabled To disable all options press Kl A prompt tells you that all options are disabled To return to the Personal Options menu press or EM Personal Options Personal Options Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 To set up Remote Messaging press E NOTE In the following procedure some Inter Tel phones have menu buttons next to their displays which you can use instead of pressing the digits on the
38. Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Page 31 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 32 e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound E button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk Ell button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode e In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN When adjoining characters are located under the same button press Tl to advance to the next character For example 66 MALE 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the chart on the follow ing page to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons The Japanese characters will be available only if the Multilingual Support premium feature is included in your software license and Japanese is set as the Primary or Secondary Language NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O or 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7
39. This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electri cian to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not use an extension cord with this product s AC power cord The AC outlet for this product should not be used for any other electrical equipment Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Page xi Safety Regulations AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page xii 12 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but take it to a qualified serviceman when some service or repair work is required Opening or remov ing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the product is subsequently used 13 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service person nel under the following conditions a b C d e f When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed If liquid has been spilled into the product If the product has been exposed to rain or water If the product
40. Voice Processor 4 108 174 287 alarms 37 as announcement or overflow stations 136 as forwarding point 221 auto attendant recall destination 274 automated attendant 272 273 automated attendant recordings 274 call routing announcement 276 communication to system 136 225 custom recordings 277 dial 0 destination 273 287 digit translation 277 directory 273 275 281 extensionID 275 fax on demand 279 features 269 in hunt groups 135 message notification retrieval 287 networking 272 operator destination 273 287 phone serial port 89 Record A Call 5 214 record a call 271 284 recovering deleted messages 298 SMDR buffering 261 286 SMDR record retrieval 286 STAR 271 system prompts 51 toll restriction 155 voice mail 287 Volume Controls 89 164 W Warning Messages 265 Wav File Attachment 308 Wrap Up Mode for ACD Calls 143 Page 321 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 322 Default Feature Codes AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Default Feature Codes Trunk Access Codes FEATURE NAME CODE Automatic Route Selection ARS 92000 Trunk Group Access 1 208 92001 92208 Emergency Calls 911 Outgoing Call 8 These feature codes may differ depending on the software version Station Feature Cod
41. X represents the level and changes as the volume is raised or lowered e To change handset intercom voice volume Adjust the volume while on an off hook handset intercom call e To change handsfree intercom voice and paging volume Adjust the volume while on an on hook speakerphone intercom call e To change handset outside call voice volume Adjust the volume while on an off hook handset outside call e To change handsfree outside call voice volume Adjust the volume while on an on hook speakerphone outside call e To change headset intercom voice volume Model 8520 and 8560 Phones Only Adjust the volume while using the headset and on an intercom call e To change background music volume Adjust the volume while listening to music through the phone speaker NOTE The selected background music volume level is automatically saved e To change alerting tone ring tone volume on a digital phone Adjust the vol ume while the phone is ringing or idle OR while on hook press both edges of the Volume button to hear the currently programmed volume Then adjust the volume Inter Tel Phone Features System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 e To change alerting tone ring tone volume on an analog phone Adjust the vol ume while the phone is ringing or idle OR while on hook press the pound button EJ to hear the currently programmed volume Then adjust the volume NOTE The selected alert tone vol
42. XXXXX of the last station to handle the call is shown For a CO to CO call this field shows the extension number of the second trunk involved For a conference call it shows the station that initiated or answered the call For an unanswered ring in it shows An outgoing call that has been initiated by another trunk will show the initiat ing trunk s number TRUNK The extension number of the trunk used during the call is shown For an IP network call this field shows the extension number of the IP connection used for the call DIALED For an outgoing call The first 28 digits of the telephone number are shown if ARS was DIGITS used to place the call the modified number not the dialed digits are shown A gt at the end of the number indicates that more than 28 digits were dialed Some digits may be suppressed see the previous page for an explanation For a conference call this field shows the station that brought the trunk into the conference unless the conference ends as a call with only one station and one trunk or if all conference parties are put on individual hold in which case the field shows the last party to handle the call For an incoming call This field is determined by the service type of the trunk that was used for the call and whether the digits are being suppressed If the information is not suppressed it is included in the report as follows SERVICE TYPE CALL RECORD SHOWS RING IN RECORD SHOWS DID DNIS o
43. a The display shows ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION Enter the extension num ber of the trunk group to be programmed using one of the methods described on page 25 b The display shows ENTER TRUNK GROUP OPTION Select one of the following options To view the last three options on a display phone press the arrow or gt gt menu button at the bottom of the display Page 26 Trunk Programming Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Answer Access For Day Or Night Mode To program the station s that will have answer access for this trunk group for day mode press Kl or the ANS ACCESS DAY menu button To program for night mode press El or the ANS ACCESS NIGHT menu button When the display shows ENTER STATION EXTENSION do the following 1 Enter a station extension using one of the methods described on page 25 2 The display shows the extension number and a Yes No prompt Press or the YES menu button followed by EM to include the station in the list Or press Ell or the NO menu button followed by EM to exclude the station from the list 3 When the display returns to ENTER STATION EXTENSION select another extension number Or if finished programming the station list press EB or ACCEPT to continue Ring In For Day Or Night Mode To program the station that will have ring in for this trunk group for day mode press Kl or the RING IN DAY menu button To program for night mode
44. e Record All Conference Calls Records all conference calls If all conference parties exit except one station and one outside party the call is no longer considered a confer ence and when completed it will be recorded using the appropriate call cost for that outside call e Record All DID DNIS Calls Records all calls received through DID and DNIS Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Page 261 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 262 e Record All Trunk To Trunk Calls Records all calls made from one outside caller to another e Record All Network Calls Records all calls placed to and received from network nodes e Record All Off Node Devices Records all calls placed to and received from off node devices The programmer can determine whether absorbed digits equal access digits and or toll field digits appear in the SMDR printout As an example assume the following number was dialed 89 other system s trunk access code 10288 equal access code 1 toll field 602 area code 961 9000 seven digit number The following programming options can be used e Suppress Absorbed Digits Absorbed digits on local or PBX lines will not appear in the report if this option is selected In the sample above the absorbed digits the other system s trunk access code would be suppressed so that only 10288 1 602 961 9000 appears NOTE If absorbed digits are repeatable on a local line the a
45. features If you dialed an invalid or restricted telephone number you hear reorder tones and the display shows INVALID OUTSIDE NUMBER or RESTRICTED OUTSIDE NUM BER To use the speakerphone if equipped f off hook speak handsfree when the party answers If on hook press the Speaker button and hang up To change from speakerphone to handset Lift the handset and speak The Speaker button goes off You may later transfer back to the speakerphone by pressing the Speaker button and hanging up To terminate the call Zf on hook disconnect by pressing the Speaker button Jf off hook hang up Placing Outside Calls System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO PLACE A CALL USING AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION 1 Placing Outside Calls Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook enter the Automatic Route Selection feature code 92000 or press the ARS button You hear dial tone Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Automatic Route Selection feature code 92000 You hear a single progress tone followed by dial tone NOTE If required enter a forced account code using the dialpad or a pre programmed speed dial button see page 195 Display phones show ENTER ACCOUNT CODE and the digits as they are entered You hear a progress tone when the code is accepted Dial the telephone number Use the button to backspace if you make a mistake Include the area code if needed You hear one of the following
46. mated attendant or voice mail Recalls the transferring sta tion s transfer recall destina tion when the System Forwarding Advance timer expires at the last forward ing point If immediate forwarding is enabled rings the principal station until the applicable Transfer timer expires Then it recalls the transferring station s transfer recall destination If a conditional forwarding is enabled rings principal station until the System Forward Ini tiate timer expires Then it recalls the transfer ring station s transfer recall destination DISA including Call Routing to DISA Rings at last forwarding point until the Abandoned Call timer expires Rings at the principal station until the Aban doned Call timer expires Recalls Recalls the principal sta tion s attendant when the System Forwarding Advance timer expires at the last forwarding point If the principal station does not have an attendant the call continues to ring at the last forwarding point until the Abandoned Call timer expires If immediate forwarding is enabled rings prin cipal station until the Recall timer expires Then it recalls the principal station s attendant If a conditional forwarding is enabled rings principal station until the System Forward Ini tiate timer expires Then it recalls the principal station s attendant If the principal station does not have an atten dant the call continues to ring at the prin
47. prompt If an extension number is displayed press to exit instead of EB or ACCEPT If swapping stations 1 Press KM or SWAP EXTS The display shows ENTER STATION EXTEN SION Enter the first extension number to be swapped using one of the fol lowing methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When a valid number is entered the circuit information is displayed Press E or ACCEPT to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press the Edi button the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the extension number user name and circuit number of the sta tion that most closely matches the partial extension number Press EM or ACCEPT to continue or scroll to another station as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to continue NOTE If the feature times out while entering an extension number the displays shows INCOMPLETE EXTENSION System Programming Page 21 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 22 2 The disp
48. 131 Hunt Group Remove Replace and Do Not Disturb 0 000 cee eee ee 133 UCD int CIEOUDS ou sss PR Eur EE RO P EB E Cae ke ee HU awe ede e eee RR 134 Announcement and Overflow Stations 00 cece cece ee eee eee 134 Voice Processor Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations 136 UCD Hunt Group Priority List 136 UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring 137 ACD UN Groups EN t 139 ACD Call DISIDUIO 222 aA Ex ce seredbateaeicadek weedeat ea Een 139 ACD Agen IS Lo sd paroi REESE REPE SUE ake tenn needs 140 ACD Agent Login Logout esu aekodadeseteze9e EX PaDeke e e nade 141 Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag lessen 143 ACD Agent Wrap Up Timer Sa suus ades hrs eR Paebe ee RG Wee adres 143 Wrap Up Mode for Holding ACD Calls 0 0 0 0 eese 143 ACD Agent ID Automatic Connect Flag 2 0 0 eee eee eee 143 Group Call Pick Up C ght sapiat Y 3e e ed eae ee ae ee eee RR E pA S 144 ACD Hunt Groups Span Nodes 0 0 0 0 0 ccc ees 145 Database Procramming Jaume dX AUR ates dd RR Rade dCRA ER Rb eR ER d 145 Operational Changes 2 isch ace adiace dox d C ean decked aha ace e CR AR DC 146 Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups 0 000 cece eee 147 Page 111 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Trunk Features ueisecouuo esee Eo R adEERW EO EE IR ERESE AR ESFERA 148 Caller
49. 507 The system already contains the maximum number of fax documents allowed 508 The system does not have enough disk space to import any more documents 509 The system is currently at or above the Maximum Fax Library Size 510 Levels 1 through 9 are currently disabled 511 Your call will be answered in the order it was received 512 There is one call ahead of you 513 To change your transfer method press 5 514 Your current transfer method is unannounced 515 Your current transfer method is screened 516 Your current transfer method is announce only 517 To select unannounced transfers press 1 518 For screened transfers press 2 519 For announce only press 3 520 Who should say is calling 521 To replay the announcement press 1 522 To send this call to voice mail press 2 523 To forward this call to another extension press 3 524 To accept this call press POUND 525 To refuse this call press STAR 526 You have a call from 527 534 Not used 535 Please enter the extension number 536 537 Not used 538 For system prompt replacement or reinstatement press 6 539 Please enter the number of the system prompt 540 The system prompt has been replaced by the following custom prompt 541 The original system prompt is 542 To replace this system prompt with a custom prompt press 3 543 is not a valid system prompt number 544 To delete the custom prompt and reinstate the system prompt press 9 545 To replace this custom prompt
50. 8560 Phone users only Press the IC DIRECTORY menu button to look up and select a number NOTE If you dialed an invalid extension number your display shows FORWARD TO INVALID NUMBER you hear reorder tones and must try again If you dialed a station that is in Do Not Disturb the display shows DESTINATION IN DND you hear reorder tones and you must enter a new destination How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 If forwarding to an outside telephone number do one of the following e Diala trunk access code 8 or 92001 92208 The display shows ENTER PHONE Dial the desired telephone number e Inter Tel phone users only Press a trunk access button MES ARS trunk group button or trunk button The display shows ENTER PHONE 7 Dial the desired telephone number Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users only Press the OUTSIDE PHONE menu button The display shows ENTER PHONE Dial speed dial or redial the desired telephone number or press the OUTSIDE DIR menu button to look up and select a number NOTE If the forward destination is invalid because of toll restriction ARS Only restriction no outgoing access for the trunk no ARS or ARS route group for the dialed number or an invalid dialed number you hear reorder tones and must enter a new destination The display explains why the call was denied 3 Inter T
51. 9900 to turn off diagnostics mode The dis play shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF For example if you wanted to seize the T1 trunk on the tenth circuit of the T1C in card slot 3 circuit 3 10 0 the entries would be as follows ENTER BOARD 3 ENTER PORT 10 Device number not required However to select the first single line device connected to the second circuit of the KSC in card slot 5 circuit 5 2 1 the entries would be as follows ENTER BOARD 5 ENTER PORT 2 ENTER DEVICE 7 Page 43 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FREEZING UNFREEZING THE SYSTEM HISTORY When certain system failures occur service personnel might request a system history freeze This allows them access to the system database so that they can analyze system activity for the time period preceding the alarm TO FREEZE OR UNFREEZE SYSTEM HISTORY NOTE Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Enter the Freeze System History feature code 9993 or Unfreeze System History fea ture code 9998 The display shows HISTORY FROZEN or UNFROZEN f you attempt change the state of the system history to its current status the display shows HISTORY ALREADY FROZEN or UNFROZEN 3 Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn off diagnostics mode Th
52. ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTER TEL PHONES Inter Tel Phones The features supported by Inter Tel digital and analog phones are described in the following paragraphs NOTE Throughout this guide the term Inter Tel phone refers to the full feature phones man ufactured and sold by Inter Tel The term does not apply to industry standard single line dual tone multi frequency sets Model 8000 Digital Phones Standard Display Phone Associate Display Phone and Basic Digital Phone Speakerphones The following display and non display digital phones have a built in speaker and microphone that allow the user to answer intercom calls handsfree dial while on hook monitor calls and listen to background music e Model 8000 Digital Phones 8560 8520 and 8500 e Standard Display Phone e Associate Display Phone e Axxess Basic Digital Phone e Eclipse Basic Digital Phone These phones can be programmed in individual station programming to be allowed to use sys tem resources for standard and enhanced speakerphones Enhanced mode allows for full duplex operation over a limited volume range the range depends on trunk characteristics typi cally the range is 1 3 Enhanced speakerphones are explained below If a user presses the Speaker button while on hook the standard switched speakerphone func tion is activated and the speakerphone resource is assigned to that phone for the length of the call If a user requests the speaker
53. Agent Help Extension is an Inter Tel phone the microphone is muted and the supervisor cannot be heard unless he or she presses the button If the Agent Help Extension is a single line set the supervisor can be heard as soon as the conference is established In either case the supervisor can hear all other parties on the call NOTE Agent Help is not supported on an IP or SIP device engaged in a P2P call see page 105 Agent Help Agent Help System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 In a network setting the Agent Help Extension does not need to reside on the same node as the user requesting Agent Help The type of station instrument determines how the Agent Help Extension is alerted e Display Phones If the Agent Help Extension is a display phone the display shows that the incoming private call is an Agent Help request and identifies the username of the requesting station The Agent Help Extension can choose to reject the call by not answering it or by entering the Agent Help Reject feature code 376 The call appears under the button or a Call button if there is no button e Non Display Phones and Single Line Sets The Agent Help Request private call rings just as any private intercom call would there is no way to distinguish it If the Agent Help Extension is an extension list or hunt group the private call circulates as usual until it is answered If an Agent Help request is not answered before the Fo
54. CANCEL MESSAGE ON EXT If desired you can press the IC DIREC TORY menu button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Refer to page 238 for instructions Other Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook at your station enter the Cancel Mes sage feature code 366 The display shows CANCEL MESSAGE ON EXT Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Cancel Message feature code 366 Enter the extension number of the station that has the message indication that you wish to cancel You hear intercom dial tone if off hook or confirmation tone if on hook The display shows MESSAGE CANCELED FOR username If a message was not present at the called station you hear reorder tones and the display shows NO MES SAGES TO CANCEL RESPONDING TO MESSAGES Viewing Waiting Messages Page 184 TO VIEW RECEIVED MESSAGES AT A DISPLAY PHONE 1 If your WEJ button is flashing one or more messages are waiting and the display shows YOU HAVE XX MESSAGES Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones While on hook press the VIEW MESSAGES menu button Then press PREVIOUS or NEXT to scroll to the desired message Other Inter Tel Phones While on hook press the button repeatedly to view waiting messages A displayed message will show MESSAGE RECEIVED FROM EXT XXXX If desired you can answer or cancel a message while it is displayed as described below Answering Messages TO ANSWER MESSAGES AT A DISPLAY PHON
55. DTMF controlled devices An established conference can be transferred to another station using the call transfer feature described on page 203 While the transfer is taking place the parties in the conference remain connected to each other and may converse The transfer will appear at the destination station in the same manner as any other transferred call along with a CONFERENCE TFR FROM user name display and may be answered by the party NOTE While this system is designed to be reasonably secure against CO trunk misuse by out side callers there is no implied warranty that it is invulnerable to unauthorized intrusions If the central office does not provide supervision and does not disconnect the call when one party hangs up making it possible for a caller to remain connected to a CO trunk circuit If this hap pens and the caller begins dialing the call could be placed through the system and would then be billed to the system s owner The system cannot check this type of call for toll restriction and may not register the call in SMDR This problem could arise when a call is connected to a sta tion or when a call is in an unsupervised conference In a network setting a user can build a conference with party members stations and or trunks on other nodes The conference circuits used to build the conference will be allocated from the originating party s node Any party not just the originating party can add a party member to the conf
56. Disturb You can use the Queue Callback feature or if enabled on your phone use the Do Not Disturb Override feature to place a non handsfree call to the station by pressing the Special button and entering the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 or pressing the OVERRIDE DND menu button If the called station is busy in Do Not Disturb or there is no answer you can leave a message waiting indication with the station itself or with the station s message center For details refer to page 182 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the LEAVE MESSAGE or LEAVE VOICE MAIL menu button If the called station is a busy phone and if all the necessary conditions for OHVA are enabled you can complete the call using the Off Hook Voice Announce fea ture For a complete explanation of this feature refer to page 187 Page 179 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTERCOM CAMP ON AND QUEUE CALLBACK Page 180 Camp on and queue requests allow the caller to wait for an available resource A station user waiting for a specific resource a trunk or a station will be served before a station user waiting for a group that contains that specific resource trunk group or hunt group This includes camped on Emergency Call feature 911 calls if the Emergency Call feature uses a trunk group requests for specific trunks will be processed ahead of the emergency call Camp On Whe
57. El or ACCEPT to skip to the TIME XX XX prompt 2 Use the dialpad buttons to enter the month day and year For example press 020301 for February 3 2001 When finished the display shows TIME current time NOTE If using a station programmed for Japanese enter the date as year month date For example 010203 for February 3 2001 If you entered the date incorrectly the display shows INVALID DATE and you are prompted to enter a new date If you do not need to change the time press Ell or ACCEPT twice to exit The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED 3 Use the dialpad buttons to enter the time in hours and minutes For example enter 0900 for 9 00 NOTE If using a station programmed for Japanese the prompts will be reversed and you will set the AM PM before the hour and minutes If you entered the time incorrectly the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time 4 If the node is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM AM 1 PM 2 Press Kll or the AM menu button for AM or press El or the PM menu button for PM The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED If you press any button other than 1 or 2 the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time Setting Network Date and Time Page 11 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SYNCHRONIZING NETWORK TIME Administrators can synchronize the minutes
58. FEATURE CODES The following pages list the general feature codes When a default feature button can be used in place of the feature code it is indicated at the end of the explanation Refer to page 84 for a listing of the default phone feature buttons FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Account Code All Calls Following 391 Allows the station user to enter a forced or optional account code that will apply to all calls following the entry of this feature code and will appear in the SMDR To dis able the All Calls Following feature the feature code is entered again without an account code Account Code Optional 390 Allows the station user to enter an optional account code for SMDR reports during an outside call ACD Agent Login ACD Agent Logout ACD Agent Login Logout Toggle 326 327 328 These feature codes allow an ACD hunt group member agent to log into and out of the ACD hunt group s The agent will only receive calls through the ACD hunt group s while logged in ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 When an ACD agent completes a call no other ACD hunt group call will ring at the station until the ACD Wrap Up Timer expires or the agent enters this feature code to ter minate the wrap up session Agent Help 375 The Agent Help feature allows a station user to request help from a designated Agent Help Extension during a two or three party call Agent Help Reject 376 Wh
59. Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ATTENDANT STATIONS NOTE For information on automated attendants see page 272 in VOICE PROCESSING FEA TURES Attendant stations can be called by dialing 0 at the stations they serve Usually they are also programmed to provide these services e Central operators for incoming calls e Message centers e Recall stations for unanswered calls Any station can be designated as an attendant station during database programming Attendant stations should be equipped with display phones to show recall sources If using a digital display phone an attendant s station can also be used with a PC Data Port Module PCDPM and single or tandem DSS BLF Units for one button intercom dialing of extension numbers and for constant station hunt group status indications Non attendant digi tal display phones can also be equipped with DSS BLF Units Up to 20 DSS BLF units can be equipped per system up to four per phone NOTE Model 8520 and 8560 Phone also support the Mini DSS which provides 16 user pro grammable buttons The Mini DSS does not affect the number of DSS BLF Units that can attach to the phone A hunt group can be assigned to serve as an attendant However the individual stations in the hunt group are not required to be programmed as attendant stations and the database will not reflect that the individual stations serve as an attendant for any other stations This feature is es
60. KUDA SAI for Japanese press 2 e The digit translation for digit 1 would lead to an application that overrides the calling device s programming and uses only American English prompts e The digit translation for digit 2 would lead to an application that overrides the calling device s programming and uses only Japanese prompts In the example above the digit translations could be nodes that lead to various other American English only or Japanese only applications Or the first level can give more choices such as English voice mail or automated attendant and Japanese voice mail and automated attendant Either way the individual applications or nodes can be programmed to play only one language or they can use the device s language as needed Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MULTI LANGUAGE FEATURE ON NETWORK OPERATION In version 5 2 and earlier systems all nodes had to be set to use the same Primary and Second ary languages In version 5 3 or later all nodes do not have to match the languages because the voice mail system installs any existing language prompt not just the languages designated as Primary or Secondary Therefore for calls across network nodes if the language does not match between the two nodes the called voice mail system searches for the designated lan guage in its system in the following order Primary language Secondary language Ame
61. Module also requires a modem equipped data device Analog phones have a default DATA button Default Station 394 This single feature code cancels account codes for all calls following Do Not Disturb manual call forwarding background music ring intercom always and queue requests restores handsfree mode pages hunt group calls and system forwarding and returns phone volumes to default values Page 118 Station Feature Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Continued Directory 307 Display Phones Only Allows display phone users to search for extension numbers or system speed dial num bers The number can then be dialed if desired The Directories premium feature is required Display Outside Party Name On Off 379 Display Phones Only When the phone user enters this feature code while connected to a CO call that has out side party name information the display will toggle between the caller s name and number If there is no out side party name or the Expanded CO Call Information On Displays flag is disabled the user will hear a burst of reor der tone and see the CANNOT ACCESS FEATURE dis play If the Display Outside Party Name On Off feature code is programmed in a user programmable button with a lamp the lamp will be lit when the outside party name is enabled and off when the outside party number is en
62. NUMBER Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones Lift the handset or begin dialing as described above The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUM BER You may press one of the following menu buttons IC DIRECTORY Press this button to use the Intercom Directory feature Refer to page 238 for instructions OUTSIDE CALL If you would rather make an outside call press this button and refer to the instructions on page 189 Single Line Sets Lift the handset If the DTMF decoders are busy you hear silence Hang up and try again 2 Dial an extension number The number can be 0 for the attendant a station extension number or a hunt group pilot number Display phones show the number dialed If you dial too slowly the Interdigit timer may expire and you will hear reorder tones One of the following will occur a Jf calling a handsfree Inter Tel phone speak after you hear a double tone The dis play shows IC TO username b If placing a private call or calling a single line station a hunt group or an Inter Tel phone with handsfree disabled you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered The display shows CALL RINGING FOR username When the call is answered the display shows IC TO username Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press one of the following menu buttons while the call is ringing LEAVE MESSAGE This button appears only if you have called
63. OPTIONS Personal Options Personal Options allow you to customize your mailbox Each subscriber s mailbox has the fol lowing personal options Greetings Your primary or alternate greeting is played to callers when they reach your mailbox You can change your primary greeting at any time to reflect a change in status and or record and enable an alternate greeting If you elect not to record a personal greeting the default system greeting will be used NOTE There is a database option called Play Recording Instructions that affects mailbox greetings If this option is enabled the system prompt that tells the caller to leave a message after the beep will play after the primary or alternate greeting If dis abled the beep will occur as soon as the primary or alternate greeting ends In the default state this option is enabled Directory Name Your recorded name is used to identify you in the directory and to verify your mailbox number when messages are addressed to you by non subscribers and other subscribers Although your name is recorded when you first set up your mail box you can change it at any time Password Your password is used to prevent unauthorized access to your mailbox Although you create a personal password when you first set up your mailbox you can change it at any time NOTE To provide system security all mailboxes should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not mat
64. P Q R S 7 MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The character available depends on the software version The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO PROGRAM OR CHANGE SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AND NAMES NOTE If you make a mistake use the button to backspace Or press or CANCEL at any time to cancel the operation the name and number in memory remains unchanged and the display shows FEATURE CANCELED then start over While on hook enter the Program System Speed Dial feature code 9801 Display phones show PROGRAM SYS SPD 000 999 Enter the speed dial location code 000 999 The display shows ENTER NAME cur rent name If you do not continue to the next step the display times out after the Long Interdigit timer expires and you must start over To change or program the name Enter the desired name for the speed dial number using your dialpad as described on page 31 then press EJ or ACCEPT Refer to the chart on the previous page If you make a mistake use the button to back up and erase existing characters or the CLEAR button to erase the whole entry To erase the current name and leave it blank Press CLEAR
65. Page 5 Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATOR DUTIES As the voice mail administrator you can use special features that are not provided to other voice mail users The system administrator mailbox has all standard subscriber features plus the ability to do the following e Recorda broadcast message Perform mailbox and group list maintenance e Create and select custom audiotex recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant recordings call routing announcements and hunt group overflow and announcement station recordings e Import fax documents e Customize voice mail prompts Voice mail administrator features are described in detail on page 45 Page 6 Voice Mail Administrator Duties Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Administrator Procedures CONTENTS PAGE Introduce oll quaa aa x as hed ee eae OR CIC ICT AGRO VACCA ORE AREER RENEE o 8 System Administrator Features 660664 cee end e ewe yh he bee EE REX V ER e 8 Placing the System in Night Mode 0 0 cece cece eee 9 Placing Nodes in Day or Night Mode iiie a RR ARE E 4540086044 400065 9 Setting System Date and TIig c seed caine Ex a REY Sr EE Nx EE x 10 Setting Network Date and Ime 2 6 lt n4 92 46 cbse o ERR FERRE CER RYE XS 11 Synchronizing Network Time ununa saunaan ARR ER Pax E XAR XS 12 Programming the Database Using an Administrator s Station
66. Phones While the phone is idle or while listening to intercom dial tone press the button or press the Special button and enter the Redial feature code 380 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows LAST OUTSIDE NUM BER SAVED Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Redial feature code 380 When you hear the confirmation tone hang up TO REDIAL A NUMBER LAST NUMBER SAVED Inter Tel Phones While on a call or after selecting a trunk press the button or press the Special button and enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected The saved telephone num ber is dialed Single Line Sets While on a call or after selecting a trunk hookflash and then enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected The saved telephone number is dialed USING THE LAST NUMBER DIALED FEATURE Page 244 Use the following procedure to redial numbers at stations that are programmed to use the Last Number Dialed feature TO REDIAL A NUMBER LAST NUMBER DIALED Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook press the button or press the Special button and enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected and which digits are dialed Single Line Sets Lift the handset or hookflash Then enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the
67. Retry Call Attempts 292 Return Call Feature 296 Reverse Transfer 208 DSS BLF 36 transient call indication 166 208 Ring In 151 day night 162 DISA 162 hunt groups 131 Ring Intercom Always 176 Ring Principal Once 220 Ring Tone Selection 165 Ring When X Calls at Extension 81 85 Ring Zones 96 Route Groups 152 Routing Off 121 S Safety Regulations xi Sample Call Routing Announcement Tree 278 Save Key 81 82 Saved Messages 296 Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR 271 285 Screened Calls 207 Screened Transfer 206 277 301 Secondary Extension Appearances 85 Secondary Extension Buttons 166 167 Secondary Extension Keys 81 82 85 ring when x calls 81 85 transient call indication 85 Secondary Language Selection 173 Security Codes for DISA 163 Seizing a Device 43 Selectable Ring Tone 165 Send Alert Burst to Headset Station Flag 89 Send Network Alarms 37 39 Sending a Message 299 Sequence Number 266 Service Phone 241 Session Initiation Protocol SIP devices 99 Setting Network Date and Time 11 Setting System Date and Time 10 Setting Time and Date 10 11 Severe Messages 265 Show Desktop Icon 101 Silent Messages 183 Single Line Adapter SLA 95 Single Line Card SLC 95 96 Single Line Card SLC SLC 16 or SLC 16 74 Single Line Sets 95 192 211 message lamps 96 off premises stations 96 ring zones 96 SIP Session Initiation Protocol devices 99 SMDR and Error Message Recording Output Devices 108 SMDR In
68. SoftPhone allows you to make and receive phone calls on a PC This application uses the Executive Display Phone graphical user interface GUI and audio is handled by the PC s microphone and speakers The IP SoftPhone functions like an Executive Display Phone installed directly on the system except for the IP limitations listed above The IP SoftPhone ter minates on an IP Card IPC or an IPRC firmware V8 0 and earlier in the system cabinet NOTE The IP SoftPhone does not support V8 1 and later firmware or P2P audio Model 8690 The Model 8690 is an advanced IP phone that has an LCD touch screen that displays a tele phone interface A stylus pen provides access to elements on the interface which include a dialpad feature buttons menu buttons and navigation buttons The Model 8690 can operate in SIP mode or Axxess IP mode see page 105 This phone uses a customized version of Microsoft Windows CE NET V4 2 and includes ports and connectors for optional hardware and memory cards Network Connection The LAN PWR jack on the back of the Model 8690 phone provides access to the network and to the SIP and Unified Communicator UC servers SIP Server is a standards based SIP proxy server that allows SIP enabled devices and applications to communicate with the phone system Unified Communicator UC is a productivity tool designed to help stationary and mobile users manage their communication effectively For detailed information about SIP
69. System restarts ARS by clearing to ARS and the user per side number number and registers end of dial the number and returns outside forms a hookflash using ARS ing dial tone to the user House phone is connected N A The call is placed on consultation The trunk dials a hookflash and to an outside call and the hold and the user hears intercom toll restriction is restarted user performs a hookflash dial tone Party the house phone is N A User receives intercom dial tone System redials the house phone digits after the SL Wait for Discon nect timer expires Page 242 House Phone System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REDIALING The Redial feature can store one telephone number in redial memory at the station If the sta tion user reaches a busy number is disconnected or if there is no answer the number can be redialed easily The station user simply lifts the handset and presses the button or enters the Redial feature code A trunk access code is automatically entered and the telephone number is redialed If redialing while still connected to an outside call the connection is dropped and the trunk is reseized before the number is dialed Only one telephone number can be stored in the station s redial memory at a time This number can be stored in one of two ways depending on station programming e Last number saved The desired number is manually stored in redial memory by the statio
70. Tel Axxess Administrator s Guide is released by INTER TEL INC as a guide for system and voice mail administrators It provides information necessary to properly administer the system The contents of this guide which reflect current INTER TEL standards are subject to revision or change without notice Some features or applications mentioned may require a future release and are not avail able in the initial release Future product features and applications are subject to availability and cost Some features or applications may require additional hardware and or specific software Software pack ages released after the publication of this guide will be documented in addenda to the guide or succeed ing issues of the guide For additional information please contact your local INTER TEL service representative For sales service or technical support contact your local authorized Inter Tel dealer If you have any questions or comments regarding this guide or other technical documentation contact Inter Tel s Technical Publications Department at Tech_Pubs inter tel com All products and services mentioned in this publication are the trademarks service marks registered marks or registered service marks of their respective owners Inter Tel Axxess Executone Inside Track and Unified Communicator are registered trademarks of Inter Tel Incorporated Eclipse is a trademark of Inter Tel Incorporated IBM and OS 29 Warp are r
71. The display shows TRANSFER CALL TO EXTENSION Single Line Sets While on a call hookflash You hear tones followed by intercom dial tone EITHER Select an outgoing trunk group or press the OUTSIDE PHONE menu button and dial the desired telephone number f all trunks in the trunk group are busy select another trunk group or camp on and wait for a trunk If you hear repeating reorder tones you dialed a restricted telephone number To return to the caller on transfer hold press the lit Call button trunk button or button Inter Tel phone or hookflash twice single line set OR Dial the desired extension number or press a speed dial button the VOICE MAIL menu button or the MESSAGE CENTER menu button Executive Display Profes sional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can use the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button The number can be a station extension number Ji for the attendant a hunt group pilot number a voice mail extension number or a trans fer to park location number a Transfer to a station that is forwarded to voice mail You hear repeating double tones and the display shows DEST FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL b Transfer to voice mail The system waits for you to enter the mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX Enter the desired mailbox number Exec utive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can use the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button if the
72. The clear alarms feature codes are as fol lows e Clear Network Alarm 9851 This feature code clears network wide alarms on every node in the network but will not affect system alarms The Clear Network Alarm fea ture code may be entered on any node in the network but the Send Network Alarms flag must be set for you to clear alarms on other nodes in the network e Clear System Alarm 9850 This feature code clears all local and network wide sys tem alarm displays on your node After you enter the feature code the display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED and the highest priority alarm is cleared If another alarm is active the display shows that alarm Enter the feature code again to clear the next alarm in the queue only one alarm is cleared at a time When all alarms are cleared next highest priority alarm 1s displayed TO USE MENU BUTTONS TO CLEAR ALARMS e EITHER Press CLEAR ALARM to clear the currently displayed alarm The display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED and the next highest priority alarm is displayed If there are no more alarms the display shows the idle menu e OR Pres CLEAR ALL ALARMS to clear all alarms The display shows ALL ALARMS CLEARED and the idle menu is shown NOTE You can press IDLE MENU at any time to view the idle menu instead of the clear alarm menu Alarm Queue Software versions 8 2 and later support the Alarm Queue feature This feature prioritizes sys tem and network a
73. The station s button on DSS BLF Units and on other stations speed dial buttons flutters continuously Locate the station and replace the handset in the cradle The station s display shows STATION OFF HOOK NOTE Calls being transmitted over the secondary voice path are not affected or interrupted by an off hook alarm condition 11 XXXXX EMER A user has dialed the Emergency Call feature code 911 and the system has GENCY selected a trunk and dialed the programmed emergency number 32 13 amp 20 CHECK PRINTER The printer is not functioning properly Check that the cable and the power cord are connected and that it has paper and ribbon 14 SET DATE TIME The system real time clock has not been initialized or has been corrupted Set the system time and date as described on page 10 21 V MAIL 80 FULL 22 V MAIL 100 FULL The voice mail disk space is either 80 or completely full If it reaches 100 voice mail cannot accept any messages until disk space is made available 23 SMDR 80 FULL The SMDR disk space is either 80 or completely full If it reaches 100 before the 24 SMDR 100 FULL SMDR information is cleared no further SMDR recording will be possible 32 X ext INSUF The IP Network does not have enough bandwidth to support the IP call that is cur BAND rently connected to the extension If this alarm is generated frequently it could indi cate a network problem that requires the attention of your netw
74. UO sseidwog z966 3IAVN 3 3n1v34 3002 3IAVN 33n1v34 3002 uoisugjx3 dung onsouBeid zz66 duinq deed ogsouBeiq v66 uo doous ysy onsouBeid 7266 Jo doous vsv onsouDeig 9266 SONSHEIS uorsseJduo 1966 S3d02 33n1Vv3J SOLLSONOVIG L1nv4agq HH3O NO SOILSONDVIG sMoys Ae dsrp ou opour sonsousSerp o qesrp e qeuo 0 0066 9poo 21nj 9j opoJA s nsouZerq y 19juo 5 ooq uo AUM 300 N SOILSONOVIG W31SAS 318vslg 318VN3 OL xx66 epoo 91n329 sonsouSeip V 1ojuo UBD NOA o10Joq opoui sonsouSeIp o qeuo jsnur noA OPPI SI u1o3s S IY uou ure1dodd sonsouserp oy uni NOA jeu popuoeululoool SI 31 oou urroj1od uiojs s Sjoogr opoui sonsouserp osneoog sosodund Surjoougso qnoJ 10j oorAop e SUIZIOS pue sso ogessoui Surjurid oseqejyep oy Surzooqjun SurzooJ se qons suonoung sonsouSerp urioj1od 03 10je1jsrururpe uiojs s B SMOT S opoui sonsouserp urojs g Sasnivaid SOLLSONSVIG WALSAS pepqeuo SI omeo engur n nur oy J o qe reAe ATUO oJe sJojoereqo osouedef Lys UOISIOA DIVMIJOS SY uo spuodop o qe reA 19joe1euo SUL 6ug eq ed N OM VM O i 9 0 of ON 3H ny WW VH 6 Z A xX M 6 nh OA DA VA 8 D A a l 8 eA OW AN NW IN VN 2 S Yy oO d L ns OH SH Na lH VH 9 4 oN O N IN 9 o ON N N IN VN S o 1 M f Ei 9
75. Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT RECALL DESTINATION When a station receives a call that has been routed through the automated attendant the call is handled as a transferred call and the display shows TFR FROM description If the call is not answered the call recalls the automated attendant s recall destination The recall destination is usually the Automated Attendant Recall Destination application which announces that the called station is unavailable and allows the caller to choose to leave a message if the station has an associated mailbox or dial another extension number CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT y Automated Attendant answers and transfers the call to the desti nation selected by the caller Y The party receiving the transfer does not answer before the Transfer Voice Processing timers expires Y Call goes to the Automated Attendant Recall Destination where caller selects option Call is sent to station Call is sentto station s hunt group voice associated mailbox mail or operator des tination If the Recall Destination fails to answer a call it is automatically sent to the recall destination s programmed attendant If the call is not answered there it is disconnected after the Abandoned Call timer expires If an invalid number is dialed the caller is prompted to enter another numbe
76. When the system prompts for a node number enter the desired node number or zero 0 for all nodes within a network If the node does not exist an error message saying INVALID NODE NUM BER appears and prompt the user for a node number again After entering a node number the system displays a confir mation message on the phone display This helps for the user to analyze which nodes are up and which nodes are down the word down does not mean that the node is completely down it simply means the node is unreach able For Example If all nodes are up the display shows ALL NODES ARE UP X The X represents the total number of the nodes If node 3 and 5 of a 5 node network are down the display shows NODES DOWN2 35 Diagnostic Heap Statistics 9947 This feature code outputs miscellaneous heap information to Message Print as well as putting up a message on the phone that indicates the percentage of available dynamic heap memory This feature code is useful in determining if the system is losing heap memory and how quickly the system may be losing it Diagnostic ISDN View 9948 This feature code is toggles through the three different ISDN view output modes Entering the feature code the first time puts the ISDN view feature into headers only mode In this mode the system outputs all ISDN messages to message print in header for mat i e it does not contain any ISDN information ele ments Entering the feat
77. You have a call from caller s name and gives you the following options To accept the call press El or the ACCEPT menu button The call will ring at your station To replay the announcement press Klll or the REPLAY menu button To send the call to voice mail press Kl or the SEND TO V MAIL menu button The caller is transferred to your mailbox and hears your personal greeting To forward the call to another extension press E or the FORWARD menu but ton Then enter the extension number The call is sent to the other station If that station has screened or announced transfers the caller s name is played again for that station To refuse the call press or the REFUSE menu button or simply hang up The caller receives a recording that says you are not available and offers them the option of leaving a message e Unannounced Calls This is the default method for transferring a call The call is transferred to your station without any kind of announcement Page 207 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REVERSE TRANSFER Page 208 Calls ringing or recalling at a station a hunt group or a transfer to park location can be picked up at any other station using this feature Calls on hold can also be picked up from stations and from transfer to park locations A user can reverse transfer a call from a station or a hunt group on another node If more than one call is ringing or h
78. a station Press this button to leave a message waiting indication at the station Refer to page 182 for details LEAVE VOICE MAIL This button appears only if the called station has a voice mailbox Press this button to call the station s voice mailbox C If you dial an invalid number you hear reorder tones Display phones show INVALID NUMBER If you do not have an assigned attendant and you dialed 0 the display shows NO ATTENDANT PROGRAMMED If you dialed a hunt group number with no assigned stations the display shows NO MEMBERS IN HUNT GROUP Placing Intercom Calls Placing Intercom Calls System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 If the called station is busy the display shows username IS BUSY You have the following options in addition to the menu buttons described previously 1 Disconnect Hang up and try later f dialing handsfree Inter Tel phones only press the Speaker button to disconnect 2 Camp on Do not hang up your call camps on When the called station is available a private call is placed Refer page 180 for details 3 Request a callback queue This is similar to camping on except that you hang up and wait for the busy station to be available For more information refer to page 181 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the QUEUE menu button If you hear a repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause the station 1s in Do Not
79. access to the outgoing trunks all trunk groups using DISA should have a security code During database programming the programmer can determine the number of times that a caller may unsuccessfully attempt to enter a security code and or dial an extension number If the user does not succeed within the determined number of attempts the call will be discon nected if the security code is invalid or transferred to the primary attendant if the extension number is invalid Using DISA NOTE If DTMF decoders are unavailable when a DISA call is received the incoming DISA call is automatically sent to the primary attendant TO USE DISA 1 From a DTMF telephone dial the telephone number of the DISA trunk When the call is answered by the system you hear system intercom dial tone If you hear a single progress tone enter the appropriate day or night DISA security code followed by pound 2 Dialan extension number or a hunt group pilot number To call the primary attendant dial 0 You hear music or ringing until the call is answered DISA ves Axxess Caller dials DISA number hears dial tone and enters password Caller can dial a Voice Processor if required station or hunt group extension number Page 163 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTER TEL PHONE FEATURES Page 164 The following sections describe how to use Inter Tel Phone fea
80. allows you to have the headset and the handset connected to the phone at the same time You must still however enable disable the headset using the Headset Mode feature code TO CONNECT A HEADSET TO A MODEL 6560 OR 8520 PHONE 1 Insert the headset plug into the vacant headset jack on the back of the phone 2 While on hook enter the Headset On feature code 315 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE ON TO CONNECT A HEADSET TO ALL OTHER INTER TEL PHONES 1 Remove the coiled handset cord from the base of the phone Leave the handset in the cra dle 2 Insert the headset plug into the vacant handset jack 3 While on hook enter the Headset On feature code 315 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE ON Page 88 Digital Phone LED Rates System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO DISCONNECT THE HEADSET FROM A MODEL 6560 OR 8520 PHONE 1 Unplug the headset cord from the back of the phone 2 While on hook enter the Headset Off feature code 316 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE OFF TO DISCONNECT THE HEADSET FROM ALL OTHER INTER TEL PHONES 1 Unplug the headset cord from the base of the phone 2 Plug the coiled handset cord into the base of the phone 3 While on hook enter the Headset Off feature code 316 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE OFF
81. and or whether the system encountered busy resources when attempting to place a remote messaging call ACCESS TO A MAILBOX A SUBSCRIBER CAN ACCESS HIS OR HER MAILBOX BY FOLLOWING THESE STEPS 1 Dialthe voice mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press EJ to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Enter your mailbox number and personal password Page 294 Using Voice Mail Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INITIALIZING A SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX OR EXTENSION ID The first time a subscriber uses voice mail he or she must customize the mailbox System prompts will instruct the subscriber to Change the default password number same as the mailbox number to a personal pass word NOTE To provide system security all mailboxes should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times The default password should be changed the first time the user logs in This is especially important in the system administrator s mailbox which allows programming access to the Voice Processor Record a name to identify the mailbox owner in the company directory Directory names can be up to 1 minute in length Listen to the voice mail application introduction You can skip this introduction by pressing ES if desired TO INITIALIZE A MAILBOX OR EXTENSION ID 1 2
82. another station as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or PREVIOUS to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EJ or ACCEPT to continue Station Programming 5 Station Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The display shows ENTER STATION OPTION Select one of the following a Station Flags This option allows you to set the Administrator Station Attendant and House Phone flags To select it press Klll or the STATION FLAGS menu but ton There are three flags that can be programmed Administrator Attendant and House Phone However you cannot program the Administrator flag for your own station or for a single line station To program the flags do the following 1 To scroll to the desired flag Press the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or PRE VIOUS to scroll backward To enable or disable a displayed flag Press Kl or the ON menu button to enable the flag Or press El or the OFF menu button to disable the flag To save your programming when all flags are set correctly Press EM or ACCEPT to save the new flag settings The display shows DATABASE UPDATED and then returns to the ENTER STATION OPTION prompt To exit
83. application hunt group or off node device can be designated as the message center for a station However a station cannot be programmed as its own message center If the designated message center is a voice mail hunt group the voice mail hunt group is called after the Message Wait timer expires When the voice mail unit answers the call the called party s mailbox is automatically dialed The caller can then leave a message in the mailbox The called party s IET button flashes and the message display indicates that the message was left by the voice mail hunt group Each station user can leave message waiting indications at more than one station If more than one message is received from one station the message display will show only the first mes sage and all other requests will be ignored When a station is forwarded or has system forwarding and a caller leaves a message waiting indication after calling the forwarded station the message indication appears at the original station instead of the station that received the forwarded call Inter Station Messages System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 LEAVING MESSAGES TO LEAVE A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION Leaving Messages 1 When calling a station if you hear a busy signal Do Not Disturb signal repeating sig nal of four fast tones and a pause or the call is not answered Inter Tel Phones Press the WEJM button Or press the Special button a
84. are available If the call is being monitored by a hunt group supervisor the monitoring feature 1s terminated when the Agent Help Extension joins the call an Agent Help conference call cannot be moni tored TO USE THE AGENT HELP FEATURE 1 Inter Tel Phones While on a call press the Special button and then enter the Agent Help feature code 375 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the AGENT HELP menu button Single Line Sets While on a call hookflash and then enter the Agent Help feature code 375 If you hear reorder tone the Agent Help feature is not available at your station you already have four parties in your call no conference circuit is currently available or the Agent Help Extension is in Do Not Disturb Depending on programming you may be prompted to enter an extension number If so enter the extension number of the station you wish to call for help f you do not enter a valid extension number you hear reorder tones and must start over The display shows REQUESTING AGENT HELP If the Agent Help Extension accepts the call you will hear the Agent Help tone if enabled Display phones show AGENT HELP IN PROGRESS When the Agent Help Extension hangs up your display shows AGENT HELP TERMINATED If the Agent Help Extension rejects the call you will hear a confirmation tone Display phones will show AGENT HELP REJECTED TO RESPOND TO AN AGENT HELP REQUEST AT A DISPL
85. are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN When adjoining characters are located under the same button press the BELOM button to advance to the next character For example 66 Bl 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the chart on the next page to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons TO PROGRAM STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AT A DISPLAY PHONE NOTE If you make a mistake press or CANCEL then start over The number in memory remains unchanged Or use the button to backspace 1 While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 The display shows PROGRAM STN SPD 0 9 OR SCROLL Do one of the following e Use a speed dial button Press the speed dial button to be programmed e Use a location code Dial the desired speed dial location code 0 9 e Scroll through the displayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the Volume NEXT or PREVIOUS button Use the Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone menu Use the menu buttons to select the desired speed dial location 2 When the display shows ENTER NAME do one of the following e To change or program the name Enter the desired name for the speed dial num ber using your dialpad as described on page 232 Refer
86. calls using trunks 1n that trunk group Each station has a default outgoing access code programmed in the database When the user presses the button presses an idle Call button or enters the Outgoing Call feature code 8 the system automatically selects an outgoing trunk NOTE Because the network does not allow users to directly access trunks on other nodes each trunk group s Outgoing Access can contain only stations on the local node Users must use ARS to access trunks on other nodes e Allowed answer access to a particular trunk group permits the station user to answer incoming calls on the trunks in that trunk group even if the station does not have ring in assignment for that trunk group Stations cannot have allowed answer assignment for trunk groups on other nodes On Inter Tel phones the individual trunk button flashes if one exists to indicate the ringing call If a station is programmed with allowed answer access only no ring in for a trunk group direct ring in calls on that trunk group can be answered by entering the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 or pressing the flashing individual trunk button e Ring in assignment for a particular trunk group can be assigned to one or more stations extension lists or Voice Processor applications to a hunt group to DISA or to a call routing table A trunk can ring in to a station or Voice Processor application on another node The ring in destination s for the trunk gro
87. consist of one digit repeated several times The station password can be up to 8 digits in length The default password is the extension number of the station The password can be changed by entering the Program Station Password feature code at the station or when using the Remote Programming feature It can also be pro grammed through Individual Station programming If the password is changed from a station the user will be prompted for the old password then the new password and will be asked to verify the new password If it is programmed through Remote Programming the user will already have entered a correct password In this case the user is prompted only for the new password and then asked to verify the password Should the verified password and new password not match the old password will be retained and the programming session canceled TO CHANGE THE STATION PASSWORD FROM YOUR STATION 1 Enter the Program Station Password feature code 392 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows ENTER PASSWORD 2 Enter your current password followed by 7 At default it is your extension number If you have a display it Shows NEW PASSWORD NOTE f you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASSWORD and your station will return to the idle state Enter the new password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone 4 Enter the new password again for verification followed by EM You hear a confi
88. default state all Call buttons are programmed for ARS access On display phones the dialed number is displayed with hyphens separating the toll field equal access field area code office code hookflashes pauses asterisks pounds Centrex codes and or absorbed digits When the system absorbs local trunk digits the digits are displayed even when they are not dialed For example if 423 is absorbed and 6767 is dialed 423 6767 is dis played NOTE When placing a call begin dialing before the Dial Initiation timer expires If the timer expires the system drops the trunk connection and sends repeating reorder tones This pre vents a trunk from being tied up accidentally TO PLACE AN OUTSIDE CALL 1 Liftthe handset Inter Tel phone users can dial on hook by skipping this step 2 Select an outgoing trunk using one of the methods below The associated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly If on hook the Speaker button is lit NOTE You must have outgoing access to a trunk to seize it Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones Press the OUT GOING menu button Any Inter Tel Phone Select a trunk using one of the following methods Press an individual trunk button for direct access e Enter a trunk group access code 92001 92208 or press a trunk group button This selects a trunk in the chosen trunk group If the group has not been programmed the display shows NO TRUNKS IN TRUNK GROUP
89. des ignated Record A Call mailbox Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox messages Redial 380 Redials the last outside telephone number dialed or saved at the station up to 48 digits Also used to save numbers at phones programmed for last number saved Inter Tel phones use the REDIAL button Redirect Call 331 This feature allows the phone user to route ringing out side intercom and camped on calls to another station hunt group or outside number Routing of the redirected call is still subject to trunk and toll restrictions This feature provides these options in addition to the currently avail able options which allow the station user to redirect calls to voice mail or Do Not Disturb The Redirect Ringing Call feature does not require any premium features Reminder Message Reminder Message Cancel 305 306 Inter Tel Phones Only The phone user can set reminder messages that signal the station at specific times Or the user can cancel all reminder messages for the station Remote Programming 359 Allows a user to place a phone in Do Not Disturb mode or forward the station s calls either from another station or through DISA Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up Picks up a call ringing or holding at a station or hunt group Review Keys 396 Inter Tel Phones Only User programmable feature but tons and station speed dial buttons can be vi
90. does not Caller selects option select an option Timeout Y Y Call is sent to sta tion hunt group voice mail operator destination digit translation node or directory as deter mined by digit pro gramming Call is sent to sta tion hunt group voice mail operator destination digit translation node or directory as deter mined by Timeout programming When a Call Routing Announcement application is used as a hunt group announcement or overflow station calls to the application automatically stop circulating through the hunt group If the caller selects a valid digit translation option This allows the application to send the call to other stations without the call being pulled back into the hunt group when a hunt group station becomes available and answers the call However if the caller does not dial a valid digit translation option the call will be pulled back if a hunt group member answers Page 276 Call Routing Announcement Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CALL ROUTING CUSTOM AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS When accessed the Call Routing Announcement application will play a custom audiotex recording and then hang up Call routing announcements are recorded using the voice mail administrator s mailbox as described on page 48 Each announcement is assigned to use a custom greeting number in Database Programming Recordings for
91. does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance 14 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 15 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Save These Instructions CAUTION This exclamation point within a triangle which for example is silk screened on the front of the system cabinet is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the litera ture accompanying the product Be sure to read and follow all of the instruc tions included in this manual Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Introduction CONTENTS PAGE Introduction uode hes oir eese ea hen Senco o ee seca e users o E ese ae erar iin ace 2 Telephone System sack ARR RR OR CEW OC wie ee EORR REN OR CAO AUN aw ewe 2 INGUVOLEDB cL uu curae oe rac Race ASS SO dee Rae aos e RO eh OE EA Nea C 2 System Administrator Duties 00 0000 3 Voice Processor
92. each node has its own music source s If a caller on Node 1 is holding for a user on Node 2 the caller hears the music on node 2 Note that if a caller is holding for a user on Node 1 and the call moves to Node 2 due to a transfer forward or recall the user will stop hearing the music on Node 1 and will begin hearing the music on Node 2 The music on hold option that will be heard by outside callers on the trunks in the trunk group can be set for music silence tick tones ringback or silence Throughout the manual the term music refers to the selected option Background music is interrupted for calls pages phone programming and ringing NOTE If you receive complaints from IP phone users about losing background music there may be a firewall issue Contact your local Inter Tel dealer for assistance TO TURN PHONE BACKGROUND MUSIC ON OR OFF While on or off hook enter the Background Music On Off feature code 313 or press the analog phone s MUSIC button If off hook hang up The display shows BACK GROUND MUSIC ON or OFF Music On Hold and Background Music Page 171 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MULTILINGUAL CAPABILITY STATIONS Page 172 NOTE This feature must be enabled in Premium Features It requires O feature units but it is installer programmable to prevent unintentional language changes by users in an all English System The system provides a choice between American Englis
93. enter the exten sion followed by the POUND button 370 If you are calling from your fax machine press 1 371 Press the start button on your fax machine now 372 All of our fax lines are currently busy 373 Please try again later 374 Your fax will be delivered to 375 Your fax will be delivered shortly 376 am unable to communicate with your fax machine Please make sure it is operating properly and try again 377 Please enter the 10 digit area code and telephone number of your fax machine 378 The number you enter may be up to twenty digits in length 379 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered at 380 Please enter a document number 381 When you have finished importing documents press star 382 Document number 383 is currently in use 384 already exists 385 To replace this document press POUND 386 Document received 387 Press POUND to continue 388 To import a fax document press 4 389 If this is an international call enter 011 followed by your country code and your fax number Then press POUND 390 I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number 391 To receive your documents please hang up and call from your fax machine 392 The system does not have enough disk space to import your document 393 The system is unable to import your docu
94. extension has a mailbox transferring the call to another extension accepting the call or rejecting the call e Unannounced The call is transferred to the associated extension number without announcing the call This is the default method In a network setting the Voice Processor can provide call screening for a destination extension on another node However the node where the Voice Processor is connected must have an off node device programmed for the destination extension and access to the remote node Page 206 Call Screening Call Screening System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Receiving an Announced Or Screened Transferred Call Depending on the Transfer Method programmed for your mailbox or extension ID one of the following will occur when you receive a call transfer from the automated attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application e Announce Only Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The Voice Processor then places a private call to your station When you answer it plays You have a call from caller s name It then completes the transfer and the transferred call rings at your station Answer as usual e Screened Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The Voice Processor then places a private call to your station When you answer it plays
95. feature code is entered the phone sys tem initiates pings from each Inter Tel IP device and deter mines if the other devices respond to the ping If a device does not respond to the ping or if a firewall is detected the System issues a Message Print message Diagnostic Print Auxdata 9972 Not Programmable Sends a report to a designated printer or file that shows system reset history information to be used for troubleshooting purposes Diagnostic Print Message Log 9975 Not Programmable Sends a report to a designated printer or file that lists system error messages to be used for trou bleshooting purposes Diagnostic Print Network Log 9976 This feature code prints the network log to message print This feature is useful in determining the system of a net worked system Diagnostic Query Node Traffic 9978 Using this feature code you can query the status of various devices on the system based on the status of the traffic flags in Database Programming The output is sent to Mes sage Print Diagnostic Show Version 9928 To check the call processing software version at an admin istrator s phone you can enable diagnostics mode then enter this feature code to view the version and date of the call processing software NOTE Feature code 9928 displays the firmware version of the endpoint if it is in SIP mode see page 105 Diagnostic Spare 1 3 9910 9912 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and ca
96. forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound EI button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk Ef button is used for entering a colon For example 1ESIOO would enter 1 00 in numeric mode e In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN in English When adjoining charac ters are located under the same button press MITIS to advance to the next character For example 66 BITE 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the chart below to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons The Japanese characters will be available only if the Multilingual Support premium feature is included in your software license Japanese is programmed as a Primary or Secondary Language and the administrator s station is set for Japanese NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l 7 4 TA CHI ITSU TE TO e 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O or 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7
97. in to all of your ACD hunt groups that do not use Agent IDs Press EM The display shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that do not use Agent IDs Hang up if off hook ACD Agent Login Logout Page 141 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 142 TO LOG IN TO ONE OR MORE HUNT GROUPS USING THE ACD AGENT LOGIN FEATURE CODE 1 While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login feature code 326 The display shows AGENT LOGIN ACD NUMBER Enter the pilot number of the desired ACD hunt group Or you can press EM to log in to several ACD hunt groups at once If you entered an invalid hunt group number the display shows NOT AN ACD HUNT GROUP and you hear reorder tones The display shows AGENT LOGIN AGENT ID Then do one of the following To log in to ACD hunt group s using Agent IDs Enter your Agent ID The dis play shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that you requested in step 2 that use the Agent ID that you entered in this step If another Agent ID is already logged in at this station you hear reorder tones and the display shows DIFFERENT AGENT ID ALREADY USED You must have the other agent log out before you can use that station To log in to ACD hunt group s that do not use Agent IDs Press EM The dis play shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into on
98. is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Jap anese messages when programing a reminder message NOTE Only digital display phones will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese prompts Page 258 Reminder Messages System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO REQUEST REMINDER MESSAGES NOTE Lift and replace the handset to stop the process without selecting a message 1 While on hook enter the Reminder Message feature code 305 Display phones show SELECT REMINDER MSG 01 20 2 To select a specific message Enter the two digit message code 01 20 Display phones show the selected message and SCROLL OR ACCEPT To scroll through the messages View the available messages by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll forward or pressing the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to scroll backward Each message displays for 0 5 seconds before another can be selected When the desired message is displayed press EB or ACCEPT 3 Enter the time that you wish to receive the message If using a station programmed for Japanese these prompts will be reversed and you will set the AM PM before the hour and minutes a Enter the hour and minutes using four digits e g 0900 for 9 00 b Ifthe system is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM Press Kl or the AM button for AM or press El or the PM butto
99. is the application call routing announcement automated attendant etc that will be used when the scheduling information applies to the incoming call e Start Stop Date If the schedule is going to be active on a single day or for a period of days it will have Start and Stop Dates To have the schedule active on only one day the Start and Stop Dates can be the same day e Days of the Week The schedule can be used on specific days of the week e Specific Times or Day Night Mode The schedule can be set to be active for a specific period of time on the selected day s Or it can be set to be active in day or night mode The chart below shows several samples of STAR entries Note that there are two entries for Labor Day and Memorial Day and that Christmas Day and Christmas Holiday overlap The first entry in the table is checked first and so on until a match is found So it is important that you program the applications in the correct order For example e The Labor Day entry with a specific time comes before the Day Night entry so that a different message is played from 10 00 to 2 00 only e The early time intervals come before the later intervals on Memorial Day e Dec 25 comes before the range of dates Dec 24 Jan 4 so that the special holiday mes sage will be played on that day only Once a match is found the application corresponding to the matched entry is invoked If no match is found the application programmed in the Def
100. mailbox If the call goes to a personal number the system will play a prompt announcing that the call is from voice mail play the directory name or mailbox number that originated the call and play user instructions The listener can then enter the mailbox number s pass word to gain access to the mailbox and hear the message The listener has three chances to enter a correct password If the system receives an incorrect password three times the voice mail system will disconnect the call immediately and the attempt is consid ered unsuccessful Page 293 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 USING VOICE MAIL Voice mail subscriber features include the following Listen to new messages if any Send a message Listen to saved messages if any Set personal options Set up remote messaging if enabled When a subscriber enters the mailbox the voice mail application may play one of the follow ing messages e Mailbox almost full or full If a mailbox is full no new messages can be received at that mailbox until the subscriber deletes waiting or saved messages e Message count A prompt tells the subscriber how many messages are waiting to be heard if any and how many are priority messages e Remote messaging A prompt will indicate whether primary or alternate remote mes saging is selected when remote messaging is enabled It will also alert the subscriber if a programming error has been detected
101. mode or Session Initiation Protocol SIP mode Axxess IP mode supports nearly all of the system features except for the limitations listed above SIP mode offers basic phone features and the flexibility of shared extensions which means you can use one extension with up to five different devices on the telephone and voice mail systems IP and SIP Devices Page 105 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SIP Default Feature Codes The following table lists the default feature codes for features supported in SIP mode FEATURE CODE FEATURE NAME FEATURE CODE FEATURE NAME Answer Ringing Call 351 Headset On Off 317 Call Forward All Calls 355 Hold Individual 336 Conference 5 Microphone Mute On Off 314 Do Not Disturb 370 Redial 380 Do Not Disturb Cancel 371 Redirect Call 331 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up 4 Group Listen 312 Ring Tone Selection 398 Headset On 315 Transfer To Ring 345 Headset Off 316 Axxess IP Default Feature Codes The following table lists the default feature codes for features supported in Axxess IP mode FEATURE NAME FEATURE CODE FEATURE NAME FEATURE CODE Account Code Following Calls 391 Hunt Group Remove 322 Account Code Optional 390 Hunt Group Replace 323 ACD Agent Log In 326 Hunt Group Remove Replac
102. non handsfree intercom calls by pressing the pound EJ but ton before dialing the extension number Or the station can be programmed to always send and or receive private calls using the Ring Intercom Always or Handsfree Disable features Ring Intercom Always A station user can always place private calls by programming the station with the Ring Inter com Always feature code While this feature is enabled the called party hears repeating double tones and must lift the handset or press the Speaker button button or but ton to answer If the station does not have an button the call will appear under a Call button In the default database all single line stations have this feature enabled TO TURN RING INTERCOM ALWAYS ON OR OFF Inter Tel Phones While on hook enter the Ring Intercom Always On Off feature code 377 The display shows RING IC ALWAYS ON or OFF Single Line Sets Lift the handset Enter the Ring Intercom Always On Off feature code 377 Handsfree Enable Disable An Inter Tel phone user can always receive private calls by disabling the phone Handsfree Answering feature using the Handsfree On Off feature code as described in the following paragraph The phone user hears repeating double tones when receiving an intercom call and must lift the handset or press the Speaker ENSIGN or button to answer while Handsfree Mode is disabled TO ENABLE OR DISABLE HANDSFREE MODE While on hook enter the Handsfree On O
103. number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX Enter the desired mailbox number f you do not enter a mailbox number before you hang up the caller will be connected to the voice mail unit and must enter the mailbox number after listening to the intro ductory prompts C Transfer to park If transferring to a park location hang up or press the Hold but ton to complete the transfer Then page the desired party and announce the call The party must reverse transfer the call Note that 1f the call is not answered it will recall your station if transferred directly or it will recall the called transfer to park location s attendant if transferred to hold If desired wait for an answer and announce the call If you are calling a device that does not accept handsfree calls such as an automated attendant or transfer to park loca tion the display shows HANG UP TO FINISH TRANSFER You have the following options To complete the transfer Hang up or press another Call button The display shows CALL TRANSFERRED TO username To transfer the call to hold Press the Hold button or press MESS and enter the Indi vidual Hold feature code 336 The call will not ring or send call waiting signals until the Hold timer expires To try another station Press another DSS BLF button To return to the caller Press the lit Call button trunk button or button REVERSE TRANSFERRING PICKING UP A CALL RINGING OR HOLDING AT ANOTHER EXTENSION EITHER enter
104. of any length limited only be the available disk space The default is 30 minutes In a network setting the Record A Call destination does not have to be on the same node as the station but the Voice Processor must have a mailbox for that station For more information on using the Record A Call feature refer to page 214 Record A Call Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SCHEDULED TIME BASED APPLICATION ROUTING STAR Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR allows you to have applications with alternate greetings and or different programming set up for holidays weekends and other scheduled events A STAR application is basically a routing table for Voice Processor applications When a direct ring in call from a trunk group or call routing table rings in to a STAR application it sends the call to another application according to its programmed schedule The caller will not be aware of this transfer but will hear the programmed day or night greeting for the destination application The STAR application itself does not play a greeting STAR can be used with any type of application except Auto Attendant Recall and Record A Call You can even send calls from one STAR application to another thereby chaining the applications to increase the number of available schedules A STAR application can contain up to 20 scheduling entries with the following fields e Application This
105. one or more single line sets to predetermined trunks during a power or system failure Night transfer equipment Night transfer equipment can be installed to turn on or off lights an alarm system or other devices Optional System Equipment Page 109 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 110 Optional System Equipment System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 System Features CONTENTS PAGE Introduction ME ee enes eae ee PLES cow ede Re ee ee ees 115 Access to the Features 2 ico ues c4 x x a doct RW S ER Na ede ed eK dd V eee d 115 Special Button and Hookllash ied aec po RH SOR ex EROR bna 115 Message Lamp 444454650 YO EET EEERRRG X RESeaNCRRIMRIRI E DA Td RAS 116 Feat re Codes OP 116 Trunk Access Cod S Aa exc iae ee e es oe e CO cien UR dU E SR S Sd 117 Administrator Feature Codes i c4 caves e hx ERE FEE se 123 Externe NUMDE S cs scs eA bade ENDE ERA ea RAE eee aE RTE RE PNE 127 Attendant Stations selbdu tre o rtr ates deet tee E RE pP IE PR B kao d aes 128 Network and Local Primary Attendants 00 0 0 e eee eese 128 One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation 129 Attendant Reval cos supe es aede X23 E EG ed Cb E en f cadre a rd 129 Hunt GFOUDS LL oda ar X ER YE AA EARRREECERRPEKERRARAETREA QE RR XU FX dq REA ET 130 Hunt Group Call Distribution ios cs da EXER e CORSO DeC eade See ead 130 Hunt Group Call Processing 123243 wave oe EX ada oo Seer seed E Nue a
106. other displays are shown In these circumstances use the following procedure to redisplay the date time username and extension number for five seconds TO DISPLAY THE DATE TIME USERNAME AND EXTENSION NUMBER Press the Special button and enter the Display Time Date feature code 300 The date time username and extension number are displayed for five seconds ALL TRANSIENT DISPLAYS STATION FLAG The All Transient Displays station flag when enabled will allow all transient call handling displays to appear on the phone display If it is disabled the CALL TRANSFERRED TO XXXX and MESSAGE LEFT FOR XXXX transient displays will not appear Each transient display is shown for five seconds before another display can take its place Dis abling the flag allows high traffic stations such as attendants to change displays more quickly after a message is left by the station user or after a call is transferred This station option cannot be programmed by the user It is a database programmable flag DKTS ALTERNATE TRANSIENT DISPLAY TIMER STATION FLAG AND TIMER As an alternative to or in addition to disabling the call transfer and message transient dis plays as previously described the programmer can use a combination of a station flag and a timer to control all of the station s transient displays not just the call transfer and message dis plays The DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer station flag if enabled allows all t
107. pager dial string press 3 341 To call an internal extension press 1 342 To call an outside number press 2 343 Not used 344 Please enter the digits for your digital pager and wait for further instructions 345 The new pager number is 346 Mailbox Number 347 New Message Count 348 Pause 349 You must program a telephone number first 350 You have chosen not to have a pager number 351 Cascade Level 352 You did not enter a valid document number 353 This document is currently unavailable 354 is not a valid document number 355 You have already selected that document 356 To cancel press STAR 357 You have selected the maximum number of documents allowed 358 To send your fax press pound 359 You have selected one document 360 You haven t selected any documents yet 361 You may select one more document during this call 362 You may select up to 363 more documents during this call 364 Selections Canceled 365 The number that will appear on your fax cover sheet is 366 You have chosen not to have your extension appear on your cover sheet Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 367 If you would like to have your fax automatically delivered to you later press pound 368 To re enter the number press 3 369 If you wish to have your extension appear on your cover sheet
108. previous page to determine which trunk is selected and which digits are dialed Using the Last Number Saved Feature REDIRECT CALL Redirect Call System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The Redirect Call feature code is located under System Devices and Feature Codes Feature Codes The Redirect Call Feature feature code 331 allows Inter Tel phone users to route ring ing outside intercom and camped on calls to another station hunt group or outside number Routing of the redirected call is still subject to trunk and toll restrictions This feature provides these options in addition to the currently available options which allow the station user to redi rect calls to voice mail or Do Not Disturb The Redirect Ringing Call feature does not require premium features Some specific aspects of this feature are described below If the user has an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone the display will show a call menu option which reads SEND TO DEST The user may choose this option or enter feature code 331 The display then prompts the user to enter the destination number directly or by scrolling through the IC directory For non display phones calls are redirected using the feature code 331 This code is entered followed by the desired destination number If the phone receiving the redirected call is a display phone it will show EXT XXXX FWD FROM EXT XXXX just as it does for a manually forw
109. rate A call is ringing in Lift the handset and or press the flashing individual trunk button flashing Call button or ENSIGN button Executive Display Profes sional Display and Model 8560 Phone users that have a programmed voice mail exten sion can press the SEND TO V MAIL menu button to transfer the call to voice mail The individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly during the call Display phones show trunk name RINGING IN Intercom call or page announcing a call and a Call button or individual trunk but ton is flashing at the fast rate A call has been transferred to your station Lift the handset and or press the flashing individual trunk button flashing Call button or EXE button Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users that have a programmed voice mail extension can press the SEND TO V MAIL menu button to transfer the call to voice mail The individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly during the call Display phones show TG XXXX or group name TFER FROM EX XXXX or username An individual trunk button is flashing at the fast rate there is no ring signal and you have allowed answer for the trunk You may hear ringing on another phone Press the fast flashing individual trunk button as described above or enter the Auto matic Trunk Answer feature code 350 The button cannot be used to answer these calls Single Line Set You hear a page announcing a transfer and or repeating long double
110. saved in two separate locations for backup pur poses If the phone loses power during a registry update the registry will be destroyed However the last saved version of the registry can be recovered upon reboot To safeguard registry settings it is recommended that you save the registry after you make changes to preferences and before you power down the phone TO SAVE REGISTRY SETTINGS 1 Press Start Programs Save Registry 2 Press Yes When the Registry Saved Successfully message appears press OK It is now safe to power down the phone NOTE The Windows file includes an executable file you can use to delete and reset the regis try Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel TO DELETE AND RESET THE REGISTRY 1 From the desktop navigate to My Computer Windows 2 Double press DeleteReg exe to run the executable 3 Immediately reset the phone by removing and then replacing the ethernet cable from the LAN PWR jack on the back of the phone Audio The telephone application s audio feature has priority over the operating system s audio fea ture For example if you are running Windows Media Player to play music and your phone receives a call the audio for Media Player is cut off and audio output switches to the phone call When the call ends audio is switched back to Media Player You can configure audio properties under Start Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds
111. saved telephone number Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the access code used on the last outside call and dials the last telephone number dialed After selecting a trunk but before dialing Redials the saved telephone number on the currently selected trunk Note that the current trunk is used instead of the saved trunk access Redials the last telephone number dialed using the currently selected trunk After selecting a trunk and dialing one or more digits Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the saved telephone number Releases the current call reseizes the trunk using the access code used on that call and redials the digits that were dialed On an incoming outside call Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the saved telephone number Releases the current trunk seizes a trunk using the same trunk access code used on the last outgoing call and dials the last number dialed Redialing Page 243 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 USING THE LAST NUMBER SAVED FEATURE Use the following procedures to save and redial numbers at stations that are programmed to use the Last Number Saved feature TO SAVE A NUMBER ON A STATION PROGRAMMED FOR LAST NUMBER SAVED NOTE The saved number is replaced each time you repeat this procedure Inter Tel
112. speakerphone call For example if an Executive or Pro fessional Display Phone user makes an enhanced speakerphone call puts it on hold and estab lishes another enhanced speakerphone call the first call will be turned back into a standard speakerphone call Inter Tel Phones Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 A digital phone user can set up a conference and then once it 1s established presses the ERE Special button and Speaker or presses SS and enter the Enhanced Speakerphone feature code 310 to have an enhanced speakerphone call in the conference Analog IDS and Wave Phone Speakerphones NOTE The volume adjustment range of non AIM and non DVK analog phones may not be suitable in all user environments In such cases Inter Tel recommends using AIM and or DVK phones if possible Every Analog IDS and Wave Phone station has a built in integrated speakerphone that allows the user to dial while on hook and allows handsfree operation on outside calls and inside inter com calls In addition the speaker may provide background music 1f an external music source is installed and is used to receive pages Analog IDS and Wave Phones cannot use the shared speakerphone resources or the Enhanced Speakerphone option that is provided for the digital display and non display phones NOTE IDS Model 12 and Agent Terminal Phone have only a speaker They do not have a microphone The sp
113. station changes from English to Japanese while in Do Not Disturb mode with message 02 the display would change from American English message 02 to Japanese message 02 NOTE Only digital display phones display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese prompts Multi Language Feature on Network Operation Page 175 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTERCOM CALLS CAUTION When the procedures tell you to hookflash quickly press and release the hookswitch If you press the hookswitch to hang up hold it down until the SL Hookflash Maximum timer expires default value is 1 2 seconds otherwise the system recognizes it as a hookflash The intercom can be used to place station to station calls that can be answered handsfree Or it can be used to place private non handsfree calls A station user that reaches a busy station can camp on request a callback queue leave a message or use the Off Hook Voice Announce feature if enabled Other features that apply to both outside and intercom calls as described later in this section of the manual include placing calls on hold call waiting call transfer reverse transfer and call forwarding The network allows handsfree intercom calls when calling from one node to another unless the call camps on to the node before being sent to the other node PROGRAMMING FOR PRIVATE INTERCOM CALLS Page 176 A station user can place private
114. station see page 247 for details NOTE This feature has no effect on ACD hunt groups See page 141 for ACD login logout information When the Hunt Group Remove feature 1s enabled the user will still receive the camp on dis play and tone and the individual trunk button flashes if one exists for calls to the hunt group The station continues to receive calls placed to its extension number Hunt group overflow and announcement stations cannot block hunt group calls using this feature If a phone user has programmed a button for entering the Hunt Group Remove Replace feature code and if that button has a lamp the lamp will be lit whenever the station is removed from the hunt group TO REMOVE THE STATION FROM ITS HUNT GROUP S OR REPLACE THE STATION IN ITS HUNT GROUP S Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook enter the Hunt Group Remove feature code 322 to halt hunt group calls or enter the Hunt Group Replace feature code 323 to return the station to its hunt group s Or use the Hunt Group On Off feature code 324 to toggle the hunt group mode on or off You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows ACCEPT or DIVERT HUNT GROUP CALLS f off hook hang up Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Hunt Group Remove feature code 322 to halt hunt group calls or enter the Hunt Group Replace feature code 323 to return the station to its hunt group s Or use the Hunt Group On Off feature code 324 to toggle the h
115. station the call will be sent to the recall destination station when the Recall timer expires Overflow Stations The Overflow timer is started when the Announcement timer expires or if there is no announcement station when the call is received by the hunt group If an incoming hunt group call is unanswered when the Overflow timer expires the call is picked up by an overflow station The overflow station is a playback device that answers the call and plays a message Meanwhile the call continues circulating through the hunt group unless it was sent to a Voice Processor application and then transferred to a station If the call is answered by an available hunt group station while the overflow station is connected to the call the call will leave the overflow station The Overflow timer restarts each time the unanswered call leaves the overflow station An unanswered call will return to the overflow station each time the Overflow timer expires until the call is answered by a hunt group station or it is sent to the recall destination station The following chart shows the path that an incoming hunt group call will follow for all possi ble combinations of announcement and overflow stations ANN OVERFLOW STATION STATION CAEL PATH No No Call remains in hunt group Yes No Call goes to announcement station only once after Announcement timer expires No Yes Call goes to overflow station after each expiration of Over flow t
116. the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and then press the DSS BLF button of the station where the call is ringing OR press the desired DSS BLF button and then press ESM and enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 Programming and Using DSS BLF Buttons Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MANAGING SYSTEM AND NETWORK ALARMS To allow one administrator to monitor multiple nodes the system provides both system alarms and network wide alarms System Alarms The system s Alarm Reporting feature detects equipment failures If there is a system failure that affects service a major alarm is displayed at all affected phones If all Inter Tel phones in the system are inoperative any alarm messages are sent to the system s primary serial port on the CPU When a minor equipment failure occurs a minor alarm is generated and appears on the pri mary attendant s display and if enabled at administrators stations If enabled in the Message Print programming the alarm also appears in the error message report Alarms 1 99 indicate problems that can be corrected without calling service personnel Alarms 100 199 telephone system and 200 299 voice mail require attention from service personnel Note that when a voice mail alarm is in effect the telephone system may be functioning prop erly but the Voice Processor may be inoperative Network Alarms Each node has two flags which determine whethe
117. the button The user then dials the number and hears silence until the trunk is seized and dialing is completed The user will not hear the digits being dialed The call appears under an available Call button or trunk button AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION EXAMPLE Station user enters 1234 account code and dials 1 602 961 9000 Checks the number and l finds dialing pattern 602 in Route Group 2 ARS does the following gt e Selects a facility group Axxess m with an available trunk Checks toll restriction and l outgoing access Uses dial rules to modify CO the number Echo 3 Digits After Toll I Echo Local Address Add Account Code Dials the modified num OUTGOING CALL ber DIALED 1 602 961 9000 1234 Automatic Route Selection ARS System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TOLL RESTRICTION The following features provide toll restriction on the system They are described in further detail in this section Trunk Group Toll Restriction Each trunk group can be designated as subject to toll restriction or not subject to toll restriction in Database Programming If subject to toll restriction station class of service is checked when the trunk group is selected for placing an outgoing call The exceptions to trunk group toll restriction are as follows Emergency Call Feature When the Emergency Call feature code is enter
118. the caller will hear the company greeting fol lowed by instructions and the list of available options The caller then has the following options Dial a station extension number If an extension number is dialed the call is trans ferred to the selected station If ringback tones are enabled the caller hears ringing while the call is being transferred If ringback is not enabled the caller hears music If the called station is forwarded the call follows the programmed forward Dial a hunt group number When a hunt group number is dialed the call is transferred to the selected hunt group The call rings or circulates according to how the hunt group is programmed If ringback tones are enabled the caller hears ringing while the call is being transferred Dial the voice mail application s extension number The caller can reach the voice mail main greeting by dialing the application s extension number assigned to the voice mail feature The caller can then leave a message as a non subscriber or access any of the voice mail subscriber features See page 286 for voice mail information Use the directory If the caller does not know the extension or mailbox number of the desired party he or she can spell the name using the dialpad buttons and look up the number in the directory This option can be disabled in the database Or if there are no names recorded for the individual mailboxes or for the system s extension IDs this option will no
119. the extension ID password is the same as the extension number If the Extension ID has not been initialized calls can still be transferred to the associated extension number However they cannot be accessed from the directory If the Extension ID s username has not been recorded it cannot be heard when callers access the Extension Direc tory The name must be recorded in order to fully initialize the Extension ID See page 295 for more information on initializing Extension IDs NOTE To provide system security all extension IDs should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the station s extension number or consist of one digit repeated several times The default password should be changed the first time the user logs in Once a password has been set up and the name recorded the extension owner may access Extension ID Options which allows the associated directory name and password to be modi fied If an Extension ID has not been created for a station callers using the automated attendant can not be transferred to that destination Instead these callers will receive a system recording noti fying them of an invalid entry and are routed back to the automated attendant s main menu Individual extension IDs can be programmed as Private in Database Programming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed if the caller knows the number but the extension number informatio
120. the registry including UC preferences will be lost if you upgrade the operating system or if the phone resets You can view the available amount of system memory using the System Properties dialog box System memory is divided into Storage Memory see caution above and Program Memory Program Memory is used for executing programs TO VIEW SYSTEM MEMORY 1 Press Start Settings Control Panel 2 Double press System 3 Select the Memory tab NOTE While using the Memory tab you can re assign the system memory Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel Storage Manager Prior to shipment the Model 8690 Phone s available 8MB of space is formatted and partitioned using the Storage Manager StartSettings Control Panel When the 8MB of space is for matted the Mounted Volume folder is created This folder is the only location on the phone where data and files persist across power loss and resets The Model 8690 phone application and its associated files reside in the Mounted Volume folder NOTE While using the Storage Manager you can reformat the file system Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel IP and SIP Devices Page 103 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 104 System Registry The information stored in the Windows CE registry is not accessible The registry contains a number of settings and preferences that are
121. the system operating voltages e Relays for connecting power failure transfer equipment e Circuitry for connecting an external music source radio tape player etc Page 73 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 STATION INSTRUMENTS To allow system flexibility and cost efficiency a variety of Inter Tel and industry standard third party station instruments can be used on the Inter Tel phone system These include e Model 8000 Digital Phones 8560 8520 8500 e Digital Display Phones Executive Professional Standard and Associate e Digital Non Display Phones Axxess Basic and Eclipse Basic e AIM Analog Phones 8 12 and 24 Line e Inter Tel DVK Analog Phones 8 12 and 24 Line e GMX Analog Phones 12 and 24 Line e IMX Analog Phones 8 12 and 24 Line e IDS Phones Model Numbers 160 64 32 18 and 12 and Agent Terminals e Wave Phones 29 and 17 Button e Smgle Line Sets e DSS BLF Units single or tandem 60 50 and 48 Button e Mini DSS Units Available for Model 8560 and 8520 Phones Only e IP SIP Endpoints Model 8690 Model 8662 Model 8620 Model 8600 Model 8660 Model 8664 Model 8665 Model 8601 IP Phone Plus IP Single Line Adapter IP SLA IP SoftPhone and Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP endpoints System software will support any configuration of station instruments with the limitation that there must be a minimum of one Keyset Card The act
122. times for a hookflash or four times for a pause You can enter more than one or hookflash in a row by pressing the SIDE button to move to the next character not necessary after pauses f you make a mistake press to back up and erase or press ES or CANCEL to leave the number unchanged then start over at step 1 e To erase an existing number and leave it blank press DIH until the number is erased 4 Press E to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored TO PROGRAM STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AT A SINGLE LINE SET NOTE If you make a mistake press ES then start over The number in memory remains unchanged 1 Liftthe handset and enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 You hear a confirmation tone 2 Dial the desired speed dial location code 0 9 If you hear reorder tones you entered an invalid speed dial location code try again 3 Do one of the following e To enter or change a number Dial the extension number or telephone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored To include a hookflash or a pause in the number hookflash once for an asterisk twice for a pound three times for a hookflash or four times for a pause f you make a mis take press El to leave the number unchanged then start over at step 1 e To erase an existing number and leave it blank Overwrite the existing number by entering only a hookflash as the new number
123. to ext 1002 and hears busy signal CALL FROM 1103 After 5 seconds call is camped on See page 180 established on speaker if not blocked When the OHVA Screening timer expires and if the phone s secondary voice path is available you are automatically connected to the called party s speakerphone TO PLACE AN IMMEDIATE OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL INTER TEL PHONES WITH DSS BLF BUTTONS ONLY NOTE This method can only be used if the database has been programmed to allow Inter Tel phones with DSS BLF buttons to bypass the Camp On and OHVA Screening timers 1 When an intercom call is placed using a DSS BLF button to a busy OHVA enabled Inter Tel phone do not hang up Press the DSS BLF button for that phone again If the phone s secondary voice path is available you are immediately connected and may speak TO RECEIVE AN OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL OHVA ENABLED INTER TEL PHONES ONLY 1 While on a call using the handset you hear a camp on tone The display shows CALL ANNOUNCE FROM username Do nothing When the OHVA Screening timer expires you hear a double tone You are connected with the intercom caller via the speakerphone Your original call remains connected on the handset NOTE If you press while speaking to the caller on the speakerphone the handset microphone will be muted and the caller on the handset will not hear you or the OHVA caller Press again to enable the handset To termi
124. transferred or holding at the other station TO REVERSE TRANSFER A CALL EITHER Lift the handset Inter Tel phones can remain on hook and enter the Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up feature code 4 then dial the extension or pilot num ber where the call is ringing or holding You are automatically connected to the caller OR Lift the handset Inter Tel phones can remain on hook and dial the extension or pilot number where the call is ringing or holding then press the Special button or hookflash and enter the Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up feature code 4 You are automatically connected to the caller Reverse Transfer System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONFERENCE CALLS Conference Calls Station users can establish multi party conference calls without operator assistance There can be up to four parties in a conference In addition to the initiating station the conference can include any combination of up to three intercom and or outside calls The CPU provides 12 conference channels 24 on a triple or quad cabinet system Additional channels can be added via DSP programming on the Options card to support conferencing NOTE During a conference some reduction in voice volume may be noticed depending on CO trunk quality During a conference if any station user presses a dialpad button the DTMF tones will be heard by all other parties in the conference This allows conference callers access to
125. uo qq424sso PIOM ssed pue Joquinu xoqj reur Jojeujsrumupe ulojsAs oy 199guo uou EN ssouq Iequinu uorsuojxe Pew 90A OU JLO J9YSSIN LSVOAVONA v qsooas OL S3univ3id HOIVHISINIINQV TIVIN 39IOA aiqesiq uepow 2986 eul HOMN ZJUOJYIU S 4486 ejgeu3 wapoy 9996 ejeg eul es 0096 IUBIN OMEN ejgeu3 1996 awl a 2q MOMION 38S 0186 Aeq 4J0MJON eigeu3 Z986 Jeiq peeds uiejsAg we ord 1086 JO uO sonsouDeiq 0066 HO UO Bury 1u6IN 0996 uue v uejs s 129 0 0986 yesey UepoW 6986 WIEN xXloMjeN Je8 4986 SINVN 33n1v33 3d02 SINVN 33n1v33 3d02 S302 3JXN1V34 HOLIVHISININGV LINVAAG seuoisiH ulejs g ezeeju AioisiH ulejs S 9666 euoz Z 14 YIOMON onsouDeiq 6 66 9ezoal4 KuojsiH ulejs S 666 jeses jou onsouDeiq 966 jueoseino se yey onsouDeid 9p66 syeo se yey onsouBbeiq Sp66 yosoy Jofeyy oysoubeig 7966 MIA NASI 9nsouBeiq L766 eoMeqgezies 4 66 eseqejeq uejDold ZE66 sKe dsig welA onsouDeiq 866 AjojsiH ulejs gs onsouDeiq 9 66 166 e edg onsouBeig 0166 sonsnejis deeH onsouDeiq v66 uoISJoA MOUS onsouBeig 9266 uoneuioju epoN dung ogsouDeiq 9 66 ayes epoN ieno onsouDeid 9 66 607 JOMJON JUL onsouBeid 9766 501 abesseyy Jud onsouDeiq 8 66 ejepxny uid onsouBeig 27 66 dnoig x10 9N onsouBeiq 966 seuoisiH W JS S euoz ezeejju i OMEN onsouBeiq 6966 JO
126. wheel to adjust the contrast level This wheel is located on the back of the phone and can be adjusted while viewing the display Inter Tel Phones Page 79 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 80 TO ADJUST THE LCD CONTRAST ON THE MODEL 8520 PHONE 4 While the phone is idle locate the contrast control wheel on the back upper right section of the phone 5 Adjust the contrast of the LCD screen by turning the wheel clockwise lighter or counter clockwise darker Node and Circuit Number on Power Up To aid in installation and troubleshooting procedures display phones show their station identi fication for five seconds when power is turned on when the system is reset or when the phone line cord is first plugged in or removed and replaced The extension number and assigned username appear on the top line of the display and the node number and circuit number appears on the bottom line for example circuit 1 1 1 on node 2 would appear as 2 1 1 1 After the five second identification display the phone returns to the appropriate display depending on its current status Keymaps A keymap group determines the layout of the buttons for all the stations assigned to that group If any of the buttons in the keymap group are user programmable or undefined they can be changed by the station user There can be up to 250 different phone keymap groups Each node contains its own keymap programming There
127. with a new custom prompt press 3 Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 546 You have no deleted messages 547 You have one deleted message 548 deleted messages 549 To recover deleted messages press 2 550 To recover this message press 7 551 Message recovered 552 To purge this message press 9 553 Message purged 554 To listen to deleted messages press 1 555 To recover all messages press 2 556 To purge all messages press 3 557 Imessages recovered 558 messages purged 559 message recovered 560 message purged 561 For message options press 5 562 For more options press 9 563 To change the fax destination number press 1 564 Please enter the extension number of your fax destination followed by the button 565 Your fax destination is 566 You have chosen not to have a fax destination 567 Invalid extension 568 Fax destination saved 569 Fax destination erased 570 To cancel unheard sent messages press 1 571 All sent messages have been heard 572 Enter the destination mailbox 573 This mailbox has one unheard message 574 unheard messages 575 To append to t
128. you can press the asterisk J or Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes at any time during the following procedure Entering extension numbers When the procedure asks you to enter a station trunk or trunk group extension number you can use any of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reor der tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When the circuit information is displayed press E again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the Ei menu button The display shows the extension number username and circuit number of the station trunk or trunk group that most closely matches the partial extension number Press EB or ACCEPT to accept the displayed extension or scroll to another station as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EJ or ACCEPT to continue TO PROGRAM TRUNK INFORMATION Trunk Programming 1 2 While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 If a password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to en
129. your message Press Kl and continue your message as described in step 3 e To erase and re record your message Press KB e To use the special delivery options Press EE Go to the next step e To send your message Press EM If you wish to mark the message certified pri vate and or priority do so before completing this step If you wish to send another message return to step 1 Outside Caller Use of Voice Mail Page 305 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 5 You can do one or more of the following if you selected special delivery options above e Press Klllto mark the message private This prevents the recipient from forward ing it to other subscribers e Press J to mark the message priority This will place your message ahead of all other waiting messages in the receiving mailbox e Press El to cancel delivery options After the message has been sent with special delivery options you may choose to do either of the following e Press EM and enter another mailbox number to send the message to another desti nation e Press to exit UNIFIED MESSAGING Page 306 NOTE This feature is available in the NT Voice Processor only The Unified Messaging feature links Inter Tel s NT version of the Voice Processor with e mail and or provides outgoing fax capabilities There are three levels of Unified Messaging features They are Level 1 Voice Mail As E
130. 08 Denied Numbers COS 09 Allowed Numbers 2 Exempt from ARS To program the Exempt from ARS option press IE or the EXEMPT FROM ARS menu button When the display shows EXEMPT FROM ARS press Kl or the YES menu button to enable the option Or press Ell or the NO menu button to disable it Then press EB or ACCEPT to continue Page 27 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 28 Subject to toll restriction To program the trunk group Subject to Toll Restric tion option press Kl or the SUBJECT TO TOLL menu button When the display shows SUBJECT TO TOLL press Kl or the YES menu button to enable the option Or press Ell or the NO menu button to disable it Then press EJ or ACCEPT to continue Trunk List To program the list of trunks for the trunk group press Ell or the TRUNK LIST menu button When the display shows ENTER TRUNK EXTEN SION enter trunks into the list as follows 1 2 Enter a trunk extension using one of the methods described on page 25 The display shows the extension number and a Yes No prompt Press Hl or the YES menu button followed by EJ to include the trunk in the list Or press El or the NO menu button followed by EJ to exclude the trunk from the list When the display returns to ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION select another extension number Or if finished programming the trunk list press EJ or ACCEPT to continue To exit press EM or ACCEPT to move backward t
131. 196 Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls Following Feature 197 Placing Calls On Hold esc cen on d pon ORDER RC RD CR ICE RR OC dcn 198 Individual Hold aa 4 iexa au acea RRS RA RETAAURS Raa X RR EGO X 198 System LIO iu as erregeri ee ME OSLER dre ee Nel Y s rw o RU e adea 199 Consultation Hold coucou atio A ROC ER QU age ed eee male OS 199 GIG AM act pee ltr USES eb dete XR abdo eco d rode eite nup Sce doa 199 oben stiarnduin 200 Call Waitin opo accio pero RCR wedges a ieee ade aeta E da cU Rp 201 Call Transfer i esx ces oceia iecit di eo FERRE ER da VR E md d ex edd E Us 203 Feat re Codes sas eq eda EY EY EE ae ERE Se Curie aded Ur Se ons AC deles 203 Transfer to Park Locations uoo rator x x woes ae sew ny RE QA RR PA S CRT CAR 203 Transferring Conference Calls edo e C eR EE ER EROR E e 203 Transfer to a System Forward iia dass uen Stet hg 4 Rr IER ERE den ehe 203 Transfers and Outside Calls 2 ick et ded can AERE ERR AA RA a dk 203 Transfer To Connect Station Flag 4c2 208400 eu p RR ERRARE ERR 203 WS OR Nahe ete ogee ea Wen wa E Se ate ee Rn ae Ae E a 204 Transfer to Hold cua ea dick ORLA ROX UI REAR RACE ORES EER RES d 205 Transfer Recalls uice ce XI DOE ode ENEE E EE NEE Per e SOC E ee Rs 205 Call Screening 23i oed do eae OME ELAR RRA RO DACRE RA CAR GARTEN CR ARDR AA CR 206 Reverse Transfer ic escees renes m e RR ER eR EX RR ORE REOR e o pE dade ace 208 Conference Calls 5
132. 32 AM A012 is placed in the queue after A010 If the queue contains 30 alarms the oldest lowest priority alarm is overwritten with the new alarm For example if the queue currently holds 30 alarms 20 of which are prior ity 4 and a priority 3 alarm is generated the oldest priority 4 alarm is overwritten Repetitive alarms such as A125 are placed in the queue only once If the alarm is regenerated the alarm that is currently in the queue is overwritten with the new alarm data if applicable and time For example A125 is overwritten each time it is regener ated which is every five minutes This prevents the queue from being filled with dupli cate alarms The following table shows which alarms have a numbered priority PRIORITY ALARM NUMBER PRIORITY ALARM NUMBER 1 A011 4 A017 2 A119 4 A018 2 A121 4 A020 2 A122 4 A021 2 A123 4 A022 2 A125 4 A023 2 A203 4 A024 2 A204 4 A025 3 A104 4 A026 3 A109 4 A032 3 A110 4 A100 3 A111 4 A101 3 A112 4 A102 3 A114 4 A103 3 A115 4 A105 3 A120 4 A106 3 A124 4 A107 3 A126 4 A108 3 A127 4 A116 4 A010 4 A117 4 A012 4 A118 4 A013 4 A200 4 A014 4 A201 4 A015 4 A202 4 A016 Alarm Queue Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Networked systems containing nodes that are running version 8 1 or earlier require special attention because not all nodes will have an alar
133. 4 Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Devices 0 00 ec eee ee eens 105 Axxess IP and SIP Operating Modes 0 cece eee eee eee 105 SIP Default Feature Codes xa ecc REA OROX eX IC RC Rn UR Ro ete Cc cg 106 Axxess IP Default Feature Codes 2 3 add bee ar REY Ee dE Re 106 Power SUDDIIeR aaa xam deca E TEs dR ERE ERA GERE Xa Ca 107 IP Troubleshooting 2i44622624 bene eeadnes ERREUR CC PE 107 Optional System Equipment eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee rnnt nn 108 Page 72 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTRODUCTION Introduction The Inter Tel hardware houses the system power supply unit and the circuit cards Together the circuit cards in the phone system s cabinet perform the switching activities for the system detect incoming calls process data controlled features and control the interaction of station instruments trunks intercom calls and Voice Processor applications The basic cabinet has slots for up to seven circuit cards For increased port capacity two three or four basic cabinets may be connected together to form one expanded cabinet For maximum capacity up to four dual cabinet systems can be connected via an Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Switch creating an eight cabinet system The actual number of phones and lines available depends on the number and type of cards and stations installed on the system For example there could be as many as 512 outside lines
134. 448 Inter Tel phones or 512 single line sets depending on the circuit card configuration The circuitry and software in the basic cabinet combine to produce an integrated switching matrix of 128 time slots voice channels A quad cabinet system has 512 time slots With system software version 5 0 and later you can connect two or more systems to form a network that provides a seamless interface between the systems To the user the network appears as though it is one integrated system With few exceptions the user can perform all of the functions across the network that can be performed on a single system Standard system hardware features include e A Central Processing Unit CPU Card for storing the system software programs the customer s database and call processing history files e Light emitting diode LED indicators for showing main processor operation database error occurrences minor system alarms and database back up battery connection e External ports for connecting a personal computer PC or modem to program the sys tem database and or for connecting output devices for the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and programming reports Ports are also provided for the Voice Processor interface e Database back up battery for preserving the system database in the event of a power failure e Reset switch to manually reset the system during troubleshooting e Easily accessible voltage test points for checking
135. 4derker PRG ERR ES ExAL RR DEREMKERX RE A EEQN E ORE XE edd 209 Placing aC onterence Call 22 edo aces de Rar oe Ea beset ot eS RI EU Ee e eke 210 Add Parties to a Conference nunnan xk mex RO o Res Fa RR RH RR ers 211 Exiting Conference lt lt 6426 idan ER ERE EGRE GE EEE ERE ERECTA YER 211 Exiting and Re Entering the Conference 0 cc cece cence eee 212 Ending the Conference and Placing All Parties on Hold 212 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold 14er RR PERRO 213 Page 113 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE R ecord A Calla s oie PX PER RE es reet nEn EEDE EDE ENE CEPECED VE ERE 214 Agent Heli caida RUE WC EROR EAR RE EEE EE REE eee eee COE a 216 System Forwarding Lu uae RA COR XGA dO CRGA Rae ROCCO RON CR 219 Individual Station Forwarding Points llle eee 221 Hunt Group Forwarding Points nananana cece ccc eh 221 Handsfree Announce System Forward Option 00 000 cece eee eee 221 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding 0 0000 e eee eee 222 System Forward Enable Disable i suas uer at ER hy RERRAG GRATIE EFE end 223 Unanswered System Forward Calls i425 ad Eu sace EX a ES RR CE 224 Call Forwarding 4664 3 Oodd CARO C RO RA MARA RA ER ER ae o M ole e d 225 FWD BHO err E EFE EPI Pete E paced eset X Water at PUn de tud ER 226 Forward to an Outside Number 0 000 cece cence eens 227 Forward to the Messag
136. 53 Forwarding feature for this station The on off feature code System Forward On Off 354 can be used to toggle the feature on or off The System Forwarding premium feature is required System Speed Dial 381 Dials one of the 1000 system speed dial telephone num bers when followed by a location code 000 999 Also used for reviewing system speed dial numbers Inter Tel phones use the SYS SPD button Transfer to Hold 346 Transfers a call to another station and places it on individ ual hold so that it does not ring or send call waiting sig nals until it recalls Transfer to Ring 345 Transfers a call to another station or to an outside tele phone number Inter Tel phones use the TRANSFER but ton Page 122 Station Feature Codes ADMINISTRATOR FEATURE CODES System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The following feature codes may be used only at designated administrator stations Non administrator station users hear reorder tones if they attempt to use these feature codes FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Clear Network Alarm 9851 Clears network wide alarms on every node in the network but will not affect system alarms The Clear Network Alarm feature code may be entered on any node in the network but the Send Network Alarms flag must be set for the administrator to clear alarms on other nodes in the network Clear System Alarm 9850 Clears all local and network wide syst
137. 6 or later This is because the older systems do not understand specific languages and expect to receive only Primary Lan guage or Secondary Language values Secondary Language Selection Page 173 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 DO NOT DISTURB AND REMINDER MESSAGES The system has default Do Not Disturb and reminder messages in both languages The mes sages that use Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through an administrator s sta tion see page 18 or Database Programming The language of the messages seen by the station user both when programming his or her sta tion and when calling another station that is in Do Not Disturb are determined by the station s programmed language That is if a station is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Japanese messages when programing a message If a Japanese programmed station calls an English programmed station that has selected Do Not Disturb message 02 the Japanese sta tion s user will see the Japanese version of message 02 NOTE Only digital display phones will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese prompts When Do Not Disturb or reminder messages are reprogrammed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Language Do Not Disturb message 02 is changed to PAGE ME a similar message should be programmed for the Secondary La
138. 85 SPCL button 115 speakerphone 75 user programmable buttons 167 volume controls 89 Pilot Numbers 130 Placing 9 calls on hold 198 conference call 210 entire conference on hold 213 intercom calls 178 nodes in day or night mode 9 outside calls 189 system in night mode 9 Playback Device 109 announcement station 135 call routing announcement 276 overflow station 135 Polarity Reversal 24 Power Failure Capabilities 267 Power Failure Transfer 109 267 Power Supplies 107 Power Supply 73 Premium Features advanced CO interfaces 24 148 ARS 152 156 directories 230 system OAI 94 139 UCD 134 Previous Key 81 82 Primary and Alternate Notification 291 Primary Attendant 128 129 Principal Station 219 Priority Level 136 Private Calls 176 Private Number extensionID 275 mailbox 283 Private Trunk Group 151 Professional Display Phone Forward Button 167 Professional Phone lamp rates 87 Professional Associate and Basic Lamp Rates 87 Program Station Toll Restrictions 14 Program Usernames 14 Programming administrator station 12 DSS BLF Buttons 35 private intercom calls 176 station speed dial numbers and names 232 system speed dial numbers 31 Programming and Using DSS BLF Buttons 34 Programming the Database 12 Page 318 Prompts alphanumeric 13 date and time 10 Do Not Disturb 18 248 multilingual capability 172 network date and time 11 reminder messages 19 258 system speed dialing 32 230 Q Queue feature code 123 324 stati
139. 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Stan dard Display or Associate Display Phone attached to an MDPM is not possible during a data call since the data call is using the secondary voice path Calls can be transferred back and forth between an associated phone s primary voice path and data port as often as needed provided that the data port is on hook at the time of the transfer attempt For example a call can be placed using the data device then transferred to the phone s primary voice path to announce the call and then transferred back to the data device so that it can communicate with the called device Note that transferring to the phone s primary voice path disconnects the data device from the call During that time the call cost display for the data call is shown on the phone Digital Phone LED Rates System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Operation of the data device begins with the initiation of a call in one of four ways e The user may initiate a call using the phone while on or off hook and then transfer it to the data device e The user may lift the handset to answer a ringing call and then transfer it to the data device e The user may initiate a call using the data device without touching the phone e The data device may receive a call directly without using the phone The phone user can place or receive a data call using the phone and then transfer it to the data device It ca
140. 911 operators See the latest version of the P Devices Installation Man ual for details IP Devices and Local Loop Support If an IP or SIP device user dials 911 from a remote location and an MGCP gateway is not present and configured properly the call will be placed from where the telephone system is located Because 911 services use Caller ID to help locate the caller emergency service could be misdirected or delayed Also the 911 service contacted may be local to the sys tem but not to the IP or SIP device All IP and SIP device users should be alerted to this situation and instructed to use a local telephone line for placing emergency calls if an MGCP gateway is not present and or functioning properly Also note that IP and SIP devices will not function in the event of a power failure at either the local site or the system location Inter Tel will not be held responsible for any problems resulting from an unavail able line that is connected to the MGCP gateway Inter Tel also recommends that users reg ularly test the MGCP gateway for dial tone Page 161 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 DAY AND NIGHT MODES There are separate lists in the database for class of service outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments for day and night modes When an administrator enters the Night Ring feature code the system uses the night mode lists When the system is in day mode the day lists are used A
141. ARY STATION TO A SECONDARY EXTENSION BUTTON 1 While on hook enter the Program Keys feature code 397 Display phones show PRESS THE KEY TO PROGRAM 2 Press the desired feature or secondary extension button The display shows the current feature station or speed dial location name and KEY VALUE feature extension or location code User Programmable Feature Buttons Page 167 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 168 4 Enter the feature code or extension number to be stored under that button f program ming the TB button only Call Forwarding feature codes 355 358 will be accepted You hear a single progress tone when the programming 1s completed Display phones show the newly programmed feature If you attempt to program a non programmable button or enter an invalid code you will hear repeating reorder tones and the feature code assigned to the button will remain unchanged Display phones show NON PRO GRAMMABLE KEY or FEATURE CODE INVALID NOTE If you do not enter a feature code the programming mode times out when the Long Interdigit timer expires the feature code assigned to the button remains unchanged To program other buttons repeat the procedure NOTE Speed dial buttons are programmed using the procedure shown below Entering an extension number using the above instructions will create a DSS BLF button for that extension number not a speed dial button even if the button
142. ATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 5 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Continued Changing Station Extension Numbers Swapping Stations Page 68 OLD EXTENSION NUMBER NEW EXTENSION NUMBER EXTENSION NUMBER SWAPPED WITH EXTENSION Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 5 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Continued TRUNK PROGRAMMING Individual Trunks Record the following information for each trunk to be programmed Answer Supervision Type Polarity Reversal or Valid Call or Valid Call with Polarity Reversal Caller ID Yes or No Hybrid Balance Normal or Short Signaling DTMF or Dial Pulse Trunk Group Number Username Trunk Groups Record the following information for each trunk group to be programmed Stations with Day Answer Access Stations with Night Answer Access Stations with Day Ring In Stations with Night Ring In Toll Restriction Classes of Service Trunks in Trunk Groups Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets Page 69 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 70 Administrator Database Programming Planning Sheets
143. AY PHONE When you receive a private call from an Agent Help request you will see a display that shows name REQUESTS HELP You can do one of the following To accept the call Answer as usual or press the ANSWER menu button You hear the Agent Help Tone if enabled Your display shows AGENT HELP IN PROGRESS To reject the call Enter the Agent Help Reject feature code 376 or press the REJECT HELP menu button You hear confirmation tone To place your station in Do Not Disturb to block the call Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or press the DITE button or the IC CALL TO DND menu button Agent Help System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SYSTEM FORWARDING System Forwarding NOTE The System Forwarding premium feature is required to use system forwarding System forwarding provides the ability to program the system so that calls ringing at a station will follow a database programmed forwarding path that routes the call based on the type of call and the status of the intended station The Call Forwarding station feature can be used to override System Forwarding Several terms will be used to describe this feature including Principal Station Original station being called Forwarding Point A destination station hunt group or off node device to which the system forwarded call is directed Each forwarding path can contain up to four forward ing points Forwarding Path The sequenc
144. BLIC NETWORK There is a station flag called Manual Forwarding to Public Network When the Manual For warding to Public Network station flag is disabled it prevents the station from manually for warding calls to the public network This prevents users from calling in to a local station and reaching toll numbers via forwarding FORWARD TO THE MESSAGE CENTER Station users can forward calls to their message centers Inter Tel phone users can forward calls to their designated message center by pressing the IIT button and then the WEJ button or MESSAGE CENTER menu button Single line users must use the call forwarding proce dure and dial the extension number of the message center FORWARD TO AN ATTENDANT Station users can forward calls to their attendant by pressing the lI button and then EM or by entering a Call Forwarding feature code and dialing Mi FORWARD TO VOICE MAIL If a station is forwarded to voice mail or if the message center is a voice mail hunt group the user s mailbox number is automatically dialed when the voice mail unit answers the forwarded call If a chain of forwarded stations ends in voice mail the mailbox number of the first station in the chain will be selected when the voice mail unit answers the call If a trunk group is assigned direct ring in to multiple stations and one of those stations is for warded to a voice mail unit incoming calls on that trunk group are not forwarded to the voice mail unit Fo
145. BUTTONS On all Inter Tel phones except the Model 8000 Series phones handsfree mode is controlled by a Speaker EIS button On the Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones an illustration of a speaker 4 represents the Speaker button HOLD BUTTONS On all Inter Tel phones except the Model 8000 Series phones the Hold feature is controlled by a Hold Qe button On the Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones the international hold illustration represents the Hold button HOT DIALPAD BUTTONS VS SPCL KEY REQUIRED FOR FEATURE CODE ENTRY FLAG Unless programmed to use the Special button when entering a feature code all Inter Tel phones have hot dialpad buttons that allow dialing of feature codes extension numbers and trunk access codes without pressing the Special button or lifting the handset As soon as a dial pad digit is pressed the digit is recognized by the system There is a system wide option called SPCL Key Required For Feature Code Entry that if enabled it requires Inter Tel phone users to always press the Special button before entering a feature code Regardless of programming if an Inter Tel phone user presses the Special button while on hook the display shows ENTER FEATURE CODE and the Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone menu shows a list of feature codes The user can enter the desired code or press a menu button FEATURE CODES Page 116 Each of the station features 1s ass
146. Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF 128 CPC modem 41 programming and using 34 reverse transfer 36 transferring calls 36 167 Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Unit 98 LEDs 98 Directories 175 281 Directory 286 automated attendant 273 feature code 238 intercom 238 mailbox recording 295 301 name 301 services 4 271 speed dial 238 voice mail 301 Voice Processor 273 275 281 Disconnecting a Headset 89 display phone 166 Displays 149 Distributed Hunt Group 131 DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer Station Flag and Timer 166 DNIS 148 Do Not Disturb 247 call forwarding 225 messages 247 override 247 251 programming 18 remote programming 253 Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages 174 Down Key 81 DSS BLF Key 81 Dual Circuits 93 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signaling 24 E Eclipse Basic Volume Control 164 Elapsed Time in Seconds for SMDR 262 E Mail Format 308 Emergency Call Feature 155 157 Emergency Calling Party Number 160 Emergency Calls 157 159 minor alarm 158 network 159 toll restriction 156 using ARS 153 Emergency Numbers 159 Emergency Outgoing Access 157 Emergency Phone 241 Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls Following Feature 197 Enabling Disabling the Call Processing Card Modem 41 End the Conference and Place All Parties on Hold 212 Enhanced Speakerphone 76 digital phones 76 feature code 123 324 Entering a Name 282 Entering Alphanumeric Information 13 Envelope Settings 301
147. DER CALLS queued in the order they were PRIORITY ARE RECEIVED LEVEL received by the phone system Non Eu TESSmens UCD hunt groups are treated as 1f 1 Ext 2000 2 they have a priority level of 0 HUNT GROUP Ext 2001 HUNT GROUP 3 Ext 2002 Voice Processor Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring The Station Monitor feature allows hunt group supervisors to monitor the calls of anyone in a specified hunt group It can be useful in training or in evaluating the performance of hunt group members NOTE As a courtesy hunt group members should be notified in advance that their calls may be monitored In addition a programmable option can be enabled that sends a tone to the sta tion being monitored whenever the hunt group supervisor joins an ongoing call Note that call monitoring may be illegal in some locations It is up to the end user to ensure that use of this feature is in compliance with local laws In Database Programming each hunt group can have one or more stations assigned as the hunt group supervisor s The supervisor must reside on the same node as the hunt group members An extension list can be assigned as the supervisor to provide multiple supervisors The supervisor is usually not a member of the hunt group If the supervisor is a member of the hunt group th
148. Display phones show CNF IN PROGRESS The button and a Call button flash slowly Single Line Sets When all parties are on conference wait hold hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 All parties are connected Placing a Conference Call System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 NOTE If the number of parties in your conference exceeds the capacities of the system resources you will hear reorder tone and see a display that tells you MAX NUMBER OF PAR TIES EXCEEDED To complete the conference setup return to the parties on conference wait hold one by one Inter Tel phone users press the associated Call or button single line set users enter the Individual Hold feature code twice and release parties until there are fewer than the maximum Then repeat step 5 to connect the conference ADD PARTIES TO A CONFERENCE TO ADD PARTIES TO AN EXISTING CONFERENCE ANY INSIDE PARTY NOTE This procedure cannot be performed if the maximum number of conference participants has been reached Inter Tel Phones 1 During the conference press the button The other parties remain connected The Call button and button flutter 2 Place an intercom or outside call to the other party or return to a call on hold to be included in the conference and press the button 3 Toconnect all parties in a conference Press the button again 4 To add another party Repeat steps 1 3 again Single Line Sets 1 During the co
149. E 1 When the desired message is displayed as described above press the EJ button or the REPLY menu button while on or off hook Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to either the station that left the message or your message center NOTE If when you respond to the message the called station is unavailable does not answer a private call is busy or is in Do Not Disturb your IET button continues to flash and the display indicates a waiting message unless you immediately leave a message before hanging up or cancel the message after hanging up The message waiting indications are canceled automatically only when you have actually connected with the called station Message indications from voice mail will only be cleared if you save or delete the waiting voice mail message The GH button will re light if you clear the message indication without saving or deleting the voice mail If the IE button continues to flash there is another message display shows the next message Repeat step 1 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication That You Left System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO ANSWER MESSAGES AT A NON DISPLAY PHONE OR SINGLE LINE SET 1 Inter Tel Phones If you see a flashing phone button press the MEJE button Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to either the station that left the message or your message center Single Line Sets If
150. Error Reporting 265 Executive Display Phone 79 alternate menu display 78 display oriented keys 78 FWD button 167 226 LCD 78 six line LCD 78 speakerphone 75 Executone Phone 86 Page 313 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Exempt from ARS 155 Exiting a Conference 211 Exiting and Re Entering the Conference 212 Expanded CO Call Information 149 Extension ID 273 275 289 Extension Lists in ACD hunt groups 140 inhuntgroups 131 Extension Number Username Time and Date Display 166 Extension Numbers 127 directory 281 programming 18 External Music Source 108 171 External Paging 108 F Facility Groups 152 Facsimile FAX Machine 108 Fault Code 266 Fax Card Required 310 Fax Destination Number 301 Fax E Mail Message Format 310 Fax On Demand 4 271 279 audiotex recordings 277 importing documents 47 nodes 277 FCC Regulations viii Feature Buttons 115 feature codes 123 324 programmable 167 Feature Codes 116 203 323 directory 238 general 117 323 trunk access 116 Feature Keys 81 initialized values 84 phones 81 Features 116 network group diagnostics 42 peer to peer P2P 105 Forced all calls non validated 195 all calls validated 195 local toll calls non validated 195 local toll calls validated 195 long distance toll calls non validated 196 long distance toll calls validated 196 Page 314 Forced Account Codes 195 entered 190 validated 195 Forward to an attendant 227 to an outside num
151. For example the house phone would automatically dial the extension number of a service representative or hunt group number of the service department e Intercom network House phones could be placed in specific locations throughout a building such as examination rooms in a doctor s office and could be programmed to call a specific station or group of stations such as a nurses station Any station may be designated as a house phone in Database Programming however this fea ture is usually assigned to single line sets The primary attendant should not be a house phone The number dialed by the house phone is determined by the station s speed dial programming The number programmed through the database or in station speed dial location 0 is automati cally dialed during day mode and the number in location 1 is dialed during night mode This number can be either an extension number or an outside telephone number If it is an outside number it must be preceded with a trunk access code and a pause if necessary Once the house phone status has been programmed the speed dial number can only be changed while on hook if it is an Inter Tel phone or through individual station information special purpose station programming because lifting the handset will cause the station to dial the designated number Incoming calls take precedence over outgoing calls If using a single line set or an Inter Tel phone that is programmed for automatic t
152. ID DNIS ang ANI s 6 ucc tata co C ER o ER Ro e ania TE 148 Inter Tel Phone Displays cats amc mad acte REX IS RR E LAUR RC E RR x 149 Outgoing Access Allowed Answer and Ring In Assignments 151 Automatic Route Selection ARS Liu ouase xa kr RE a Rx E XR RENS 152 JOD RESTICH S oes sce C RE tur eR PAUCOS NECS ER ee Adde led gs 155 Eme ergency Call Peaite lt 726454604 qp E E RR tex d eR ed 157 Emergency Outgoing Access Lists llis 159 Ten Emergency Numbers aep PER sag te E RR CEOs M kN ee 159 Calling Party Number Field 4 24 deae a hates dicem a dearer oio ied 160 IP Devices and Local Loop Support lt 2o ciue d Rn ER RR RA 160 Security CodeS MMC n 163 Using DISA ciae sc qa AXE Ra aaa da EXER ie die xdv x dd 163 Inter Tel Phone Features 4 4 2adesco i3 RR RA DRE T LEEEARRE QE ENS ERREUR E eA S 164 Volume COntOlS M rmm 164 Selectable Ring Tone e videa SCR ina shh ENCORE EEN ee Eb E Rode ioi ied 165 Extension Number Username Time and Date Display 0 166 DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer Station Flag and Timer 166 Transient Call Indication On Call Answer Station Flag 000 166 User Programmable Feature Buttons 20 0 167 Standard Alternate Keymap Switching 20 cece eee eee ee eens 169 Automatic Call ACCESS iieri ea rex na Rn dena CARA REXOSARARAEEEEXCKES ER 170 Music On Hold and Background Music 0 0 ccc cece ee
153. KC REG GG RT 283 Requesting Additional Information lslseeleeeeee ees 283 Lisrmio the Directories oa eoe arnp reser MER D re o e d OP wR IP ee 283 R ecord A Call 422244 che oe E ees eee ede Kabel aeu de ew ld RO e es 284 Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR eere 285 SMDR Information Storage and Retrieval ccc cece eee rere eee eeee 286 Voice Mail auaxsaieskeXEex eR weticikteRE4e X ERE EEDIERE RE REGERE DRSRATA EE RE 287 Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Applications 287 PTGS oido peint es qois a auta sei E E Rc us na Rafa 289 Sung HU ee 290 Message Notification to Stations Ludo Ves eT drew YS Y e eR Y Xx id EY Rua 291 Cascading Remote Message Notification 0 0 cece eee eee eee 291 Primary and Alternate Notification i osse eX RACE REPRE XGA RE UE 291 All Messages Priority Only and Each New Message Flags 292 Retry Call Attempts cay vaca deceXr uda e amkaxerGcra ee decade GA n 292 Notification INDIBBEES o uuo a UO Hut eee eae aub SUR EHE Ode pt qo 293 Page 269 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Using Voice Mail sa ek eh Ged Pees ores tend REG YO RA ENG EREE EDENES Ede 294 Access gaps qe goo A xa eens MSG Ra tk eR a eee Ke oe 294 Initializing a Subscriber Mailbox or Extension ID 00 000 eee eee 295 List ning to WIGSSASES saa Cue du
154. L DO NOT DISTURB Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone While on hook press the lit DITE button The button goes off and the display shows DO NOT DIS TURB OFF Other Inter Tel Phones While on hook press the lit EEN button or enter the Can cel Do Not Disturb feature code 371 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 The button goes off and the display shows DO NOT DISTURB OFF Single Line Set Lift the handset enter the Cancel Do Not Disturb feature code 371 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 and hang up Do Not Disturb System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO PLACE YOUR BUSY STATION IN DO NOT DISTURB WHILE A CALL IS CAMPED ON If while on a call you hear call waiting signals and you wish to let the caller know you do not want to be disturbed Inter Tel Phones Press the EXE button or press the Special button and then enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The button lights The display shows DO NOT DISTURB ON The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications Single Line Sets This procedure will interrupt your call in progress Hookflash and enter the a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications Hookflash twice to return to the current call DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE If your Inter Tel phone is enabled for Do Not Disturb overr
155. MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 Ww X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 i 0 WA WO N pa ba long The character available depends on the software version The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language Programming the Database Using an Administrator s Station Page 13 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 14 Station Programming You can use your administrator station to program the following station information Create or delete Administrator stations You can program any other Inter Tel phone to be an additional administrator station or you can delete administrators You cannot program this for your own station or a single line station Create or delete Attendant stations You can program any station to be an Attendant station or you can delete Attendants Create or delete House Phones You can program any station to be a House Phone or you can delete House Phones Assign stations to Attendants You can change the assigned Attendant for each sta tion Program usernames You can program or change the username for any station Program station toll restrictions You can program toll restriction classes of service for the stations Station toll restrictions are described in detail on page 155 The Station Database Programming process is summari
156. MESSAGE AS A NON SUBSCRIBER 1 Ifyou hear the voice mail greeting or menu dial the desired mailbox number If you do not know the number you can press EJ to access the mailbox directory to locate and select the mailbox See page 286 for directory instructions If you hear a subscriber s personal mailbox greeting skip this step 2 Ifthe mailbox is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot receive messages How ever it will allow you to leave a message at another mailbox Leave your message with another subscriber or try again later 3 After hearing the subscriber s greeting and a tone record your message You have the following options while recording your message e To pause while recording Press KM To continue press any button except IG e To erase and re record your message Press E e To call the mailbox user s attendant Press R e To cancel the recording and return to the main menu Press ES If you exceed the maximum allotted time for message length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send the message as it is If voice mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot accept your message Hang up and try again later NOTE If the system detects silence for longer than 5 seconds it will prompt you to speak up The recording if any will remain unchanged 4 When you have completed your message you have the following options e To hear your message Press KM e To add to
157. Mail Attachments This provides users the ability to receive a voice mail message as an e mail message with a voice attachment The voice attach ment will be in the form of a wave wav file that can be played on any computer equipped with a sound card speakers and multimedia software such as Sound Recorder Users can choose to receive the messages as voice mail and e mail Copy amp Forward or as e mail only Forward Only The e mail server can use SMTP POP3 VIM MAPI protocol The number of users with Level 1 is limited by a security button attached to the Voice Processor PC Level 2 with Microsoft Outlook Exchange To use this Voice Processor level the mailbox E mail Gateway field must be programmed for Unified Messaging and the user s PC must have Microsoft Outlook Exchange and the Unified Messaging Client software installed Voice mail messages are sent to the voice mail server and are stored on the Voice Processor This allows the user to play the messages using the Inter Tel phone speakerphone or the PC s speakers The number of users with Unified Messaging is limited by a security button attached to the Voice Processor PC Level 3 with Microsoft Outlook Exchange and Outbound Fax This level is the same as Level 2 with outbound fax server features added Use of the outbound fax server functionality does not require a mailbox only the Microsoft Outlook Exchange and Unified Messaging Client software Therefore the number of out
158. NISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 290 When you are finished entering mailbox numbers press POUND 291 Otherwise press POUND 292 For PM press 2 293 For Sunday press 1 294 For Monday press 2 295 For Tuesday press 3 296 For Wednesday press 4 297 For Thursday press 5 298 For Friday press 6 299 For Saturday press 7 300 For Monday through Friday service press 1 301 For all the days of the week press 2 302 Thousand 303 The hard disk is 304 percent full 305 I m sorry Voice mail is full and cannot re cord any messages 306 Zero 307 POUND 308 STAR 309 Group list number 310 Please speak louder 311 You have recorded for the maximum time permitted 312 Not used 313 Resuming playback 314 You have one priority message 315 Use 2 digits for the hour and 2 digits for the minutes 316 317 Not used 318 You have chosen not to have a password 319 I m sorry This mailbox is currently in use and cannot be accessed Please try again later 320 Not used 321 If you are calling from a rotary type telephone please stay on the line and your call will be answered 322 You can not reply to a system sent message 323 Zero is not a valid entry To spell a name please press one number on the tele phone dialpad for each letter of the person s name you are
159. O VIEW SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AND NAMES NOTE If you make a mistake use the button to backspace 1 5 While on hook press or enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows REVIEW SYS SPEED 000 999 Enter the desired location code 000 999 or press the SEARCH menu button The dis play shows the programmed name and number If desired scroll forward through the speed dial locations in alphabetical order by press ing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button or scroll backward by press ing the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each speed dial location to be viewed Or press or CAN CEL to terminate this feature To automatically select a trunk and dial the displayed number press EM Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers TO DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AT AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 2 If desired lift the handset and select an outgoing trunk You may skip this step Press or enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows REVIEW SYS SPEED 000 999 Non display phone users hear a confirmation tone Enter the location code 000 999 for the desired number f you have not selected a trunk press EJ or the ACCEPT menu button to accept the number and automatically select a trunk Or press the ARS button a trunk button a trunk group button or the button to select a trunk The number is automatically dialed Display phone
160. OFF While on hook enter the Night Ring On Off feature code 9860 You hear a single confirmation tone The display shows NIGHT MODE IS ON or OFF Then if night mode was turned on the display shows THE SYSTEM IS IN NIGHT MODE until day mode is turned on PLACING NODES IN DAY OR NIGHT MODE An administrator station can place one or more nodes in day or night mode The day night mode determines which lists the system will use for trunk access toll restriction etc The network determines the day night mode status of a call based on the day night mode status of the node where the trunk resides TO TURN NIGHT MODE ON 1 While on hook enter the Enable Network Night feature code 9861 2 You are prompted to enter a node number Enter the desired node number 3 You hear a single confirmation tone The display shows NIGHT MODE IS ON Then the display shows NODE X IS IN NIGHT MODE until day mode is turned on TO TURN DAY MODE ON 1 While on hook enter the Enable Network Day feature code 9862 2 You are prompted to enter a node number Enter the desired node number 3 You hear a single confirmation tone The display shows DAY MODE IS ON Placing the System in Night Mode Page 9 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SETTING SYSTEM DATE AND TIME Page 10 NOTE Software versions 8 2 and later support the automatic Daylight Saving Time feature To enable the automatic Daylight Saving Time f
161. RATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ONE ATTENDANT OR MULTIPLE ATTENDANT OPERATION Each node can be set up with one attendant or several attendants as follows e One Attendant One attendant provides all of the attendant services listed on the previ ous page All trunks except private trunks are usually programmed to ring in at this attendant s station e Multiple Attendants Any or all stations can be programmed as attendants For exam ple there may be one or more attendants to serve each department in a business Trunks are programmed to ring at any or all attendant stations Multiple attendants can be arranged in a hierarchy That is one attendant may be the attendant for another In this case the serving attendant is reached by dialing 0 at the served attendant ATTENDANT RECALL When a call is placed on hold or is transferred from one station to another the Hold and Trans fer timers limit the amount of time the call may remain unattended After that time the call recalls the station that transferred it or placed it on hold and the Recall timer is started If the call remains unanswered at the station until the Recall timer expires it recalls the station s attendant and the Abandoned Call timer starts If there is no attendant the call continues to recall at the station that transferred it or placed it on hold If the attendant station is busy the call camps on and the display shows the source of the recall If the c
162. ROGRAM INTERCOM CALL ACCESS To change the current intercom access option to its opposite toggle on or off enter the Automatic Intercom Access On Off feature code 361 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows AUTO IC ACCESS ON or OFF Automatic Call Access System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MUSIC ON HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC The Music On Hold feature not only makes waiting on hold as pleasant as possible but it assures the holding party that the call is still connected Inter Tel phone users can choose to listen to background music by entering the Background Music feature code 313 The system can be equipped with one or more optional external music sources for the Music On Hold feature The music source can be a customer provided radio tape player or other device connected to the Central Processing Unit CPU Card and or the Option Card s in the system cabinet When a music source is installed music on hold is enabled or disabled in Database Programming If music is not desired the system can be programmed for tick tones or silence on hold The Background Music feature uses the music source connected to the CPU Card only NOTE In some circumstances there may be broadcast restrictions associated with the music heard by callers on hold Check with the music s original distributor and or the radio station for copyright and broadcast restrictions concerning music on hold In a network
163. Recalls d Camped on calls NOTE Group Call Pick up can only retrieve calls from stations that are currently logged in to the hunt group You cannot use this feature to pick up calls from members who have logged out using the Hunt Group Remove feature code Also Group Call Pick up cannot be used on ACD Hunt Groups that use Agent IDs It can only be used on hunt groups that use lists of extensions If the ACD Hunt Group flag is enabled the Group Call Pick up flag will be dimmed To pick up a call that is ringing at a hunt group 1 Lift the handset and or enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 You hear a single progress tone 2 Dialthe pilot number of the hunt group where the call is ringing Inter Tel Phones If the system is programmed for direct connection of reverse trans ferred calls you are immediately connected If not press the flashing CALL individ ual trunk or button Single Line Sets You are automatically connected Group Call Pick Up System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ACD HUNT GROUPS SPAN NODES There is a premium feature called Remote Automatic Call Distribution Hunt Groups It allows ACD hunt groups to span nodes Node spanning ACD hunt groups can have either members or ACD Agent IDs Members ACD hunt group members may include off node phones off node single lines and Hunt Group Member extension lists ACD Agent IDs Unlike members there are no off node Agent IDs
164. S ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 4 Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 52 PROMPT CONTENT 001 To leave a message please enter a mailbox number 002 For the directory press pound 003 To reach an operator press 0 004 I m sorry 005 is not available 006 The number entered is not valid 007 Using the buttons on your telephone please spell the last name of the person then press POUND For the letter Q press 7 For the letter Z press 9 008 To exit the directory press STAR 009 Mailbox number 010 If this is correct press POUND 011 For the previous name in the directory press 1 012 To hear additional information press 2 013 To hear the next directory name press 3 014 To spell a new name press 4 015 Extension number 017 is not a valid choice 018 Please try again 019 After the tone please record your message When finished you may hang up to deliver the message or press POUND for more options 020 Message delivered 021 To replay press 1 022 To erase and re record press 3 023 To append this recording press 2 024 To accept press POUND 025 Please record after the tone To end press POUND 026 Recording erased 027 Recording stopped 028 Please begin speaking after the tone 029 Message play stopped To continue press POUND 030 Enter the dest
165. Server and UC see the latest versions of the SIP Server and Unified Communicator Installa tion and Configuration Manuals In addition to the LAN PWR jack the phone has additional ports and connectors for adding memory cards and connecting optional hardware For information about using the ports and connections on the back of the phone see the latest version of the P Devices Installation and Configuration Manual Optional USB Connections To connect a standard USB keyboard to the Model 8690 Phone use the USB client port on the back of the phone The operating system will automatically detect the device when the phone is powered on You can configure the keyboard properties under Start Settings Control Panel Keyboard The USB client port can also be used to connect a mouse To connect both a mouse and a key board to the phone connect the mouse to the keyboard and then connect the keyboard to the USB client port on the phone The operating system recognizes all daisy chained USB devices You can configure mouse properties under Start Settings Control Panel Mouse IP and SIP Devices IP and SIP Devices System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Microsoft Windows CE NET Operating System The operating system on the Model 8690 Phone is a customized version of Windows CE NET When you first power up the Model 8690 Phone the screen remains blank for approximately 10 seconds After this period the Window
166. System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 System Hardware CONTENTS PAGE Introduclid 2 sek xo9wokRePERERIRE RES ERE SRPERUPRREREAPESEPEREREERA RE RARE 73 Station Instruments 52aes een terae ra heh duces hb a RE Ee 74 Inter IE PHONES 4 ido aed pao dae pr de de bete heo i do del de CR dodi dos 75 Model 8000 Digital Phones Standard Display Phone Associate Display Phone and Basic Digital Phone Speakerphones lille esee 75 Executive and Professional Display Phone Speakerphones 76 Enhanced Speakerphones for Digital Phones slsleleeee esses 76 Analog IDS and Wave Phone Speakerphones 000 00s eeu 77 Six Line Liquid Crystal Display LCD 1 544454 Re RR TRAE Rh 78 Dye Lane io ceu S a gen Pad a ENS ASG VAT eee ee pee E ads 79 LCD Contrast Adjustment aas o 440 ak ER Ex ER T4 pr RERO Fede Eos 79 Node and Circuit Number on Power Up 000 cece eee eee 80 Dinos ATP 80 Default Inter Tel Phone Feature Buttons 00 0 0 ee eee eese 84 Secondary Extension Appearances lt 4 ss vaca vend ERRRERXYXRRRRERXA Y ERR 85 Light Emitting Diode LED Indications 00 0 0 c eee eee eee 86 Red and Green LEDS s sucia dait et ext ETE Encore actae baa deoa es 88 LonneoHnmp a Headset iua xerit EE r EROS EE SORA EX EE RUE AU ER ee 88 Send Alert Burst To Headset Station Flag liliis lees 89 Digital Phone Data Port Modules 0 0
167. T GROUPS ACD Hunt Groups NOTE The Automatic Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature is required to use ACD hunt group features To take full advantage of all hunt group features the Uniform Call Distribu tion Hunt Groups premium feature should also be included in your software license Automatic Call Distribution ACD can be programmed to distribute hunt group calls to equal ize call time or call count among the available members If the System OAI Events premium feature is included in your software license ACD hunt groups can also be programmed to send call information records that can be processed by an external device connected to a system serial port such as Call Center Suite ACD hunt groups can use the standard hunt group features described on page 130 and or the UCD features described on page 134 if the UCD Hunt Group premium feature is included in your software license ACD Call Distribution When an intercom or outside call is transferred or rings in to the ACD hunt group it can circu late in linear or distributed order as described on page 130 or using one of the following ACD distribution methods e Longest Idle An incoming LONGEST IDLE DISTRIBUTION call is sent to the station that ACD HUNT GROUP has not been involved in a call Ext 2000 to this hunt group for the l longest period of time It TIME IDLE does not count calls that were Ext 1000 3 min h h othert Next call will be sent here
168. TAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l z 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O or 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The character available depends on the software version The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language Page 234 Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO PROGRAM STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AT A NON DISPLAY PHONE NOTE If you make a mistake press or CANCEL then start over The number in memory remains unchanged Or use the button to backspace 1 While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 2 Press the speed dial button to be programmed or dial the desired speed dial location code 0 9 If you hear reorder tones you entered an invalid speed dial location code try again 3 Do one of the following e To enter or change a number Dial the extension number or telephone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored 7o include a hookflash or a pause in the number press the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound three
169. The order in which the messages are played depends on your message retrieval setting see page 301 except that messages marked priority are played first Some special messages that may be played include the following Message receipt If you send a certified message a system message will be played when the recipient has listened to the message Caller Information If a call was placed to your mailbox on a trunk that supports the Caller ID feature and the caller hung up without leaving a message a system message will be played informing you that the calling party did not leave a mes sage It will also include within the corresponding message envelope the number of the calling party as the message source Security violation The voice mail system has an extra security measure built in which plays a message when you log into your mailbox that tells you if three invalid attempts have been made to access your mailbox within a single call This announcement message will be sent to your mailbox each time this situation occurs It is received as a new message and is accompanied by a message envelope Saved Messages are messages that you previously listened to and saved or deleted and restored You can play them back as necessary based on your message retrieval set ting Undeliverable Messages are messages you have left for a mailbox on another node that cannot be delivered They are returned to you as undeliverable
170. Timer expires the call is validated All polarity reversals received before and after the Valid Call Timer are ignored Valid Call Timer with Polarity Reversal If a loop reversal is received before the Valid Call Timer expires the call will be made valid immediately and the Inter Tel phone display will begin call cost When a second loop reversal is received the system will terminate the call If a loop reversal is not received before the Valid Call Timer expires the call will be made valid by the timer If a loop reversal is received after the timer expires the loop reversal is ignored but the call cost is reset If a second loop reversal is then received the system will terminate the call NOTE If a second loop reversal is not received the system will not terminate the call unless the inside party hangs up or loss of loop is received from the Telephone company Caller ID When selected the Caller ID option indicates that the associated trunk will provide caller identification signals This cannot be programmed unless the Advanced CO Interfaces premium feature is included in your software license Hybrid balance Hybrid balance can be set to Normal or Short to allow the installer to adjust the hybrid impedance of the trunk based on local central office conditions Short The short balance is used when trunks are supplied by other equipment located within the same building using private copper wire termination e g an OPX s
171. U 9010A pu 103 eJjsrururpe uiojs s posn puenboyjj JSOU OY 10g SUOTIONI SUT 3Iseq IY oe osau SAYNLVA4 HOLVHISININGV SOILSONSVIQ ANY IYW 39IOA IN31SAS OL 3ainc JONAYSISY NINH jixo 0 Egi ssoud 10 sjuoun oop Suryodui onunuoo 0 gi ssoid ojo duroo st uoissiusuen xez oy UYM eurgoeur xej INCA uo 3V LLS ssoid poyduioud uyy equinu MOU Iojuo aquinu pipa p Jajua jou pip nod fp dn Suey Jo Jaquinu Mou e 19jugp MOU IZU posn oq 31ouugo JoquINU Py pajajap 40 pajppdn Yuas Bulag si ju2umoop ay JT Iequinu 1oqjoue 19409 0 Kl ssoud yO juoumnoop y ooe dox 0 J ssoid s7s x2 Apvasjo saquinu juawnsop ay Jf JOQUINU ou 193u21 o1 pu E ssoid yO 1901109 SI Joquinu oy JI J ssoid Ysixa Appasjp jou saop saqunu 1u2umoop ay JT equinu jueumoop xez oup iejug EE ssoud usw i ssoig pio ssed pue 1equinu xoqjreui 10je3jsrururpe uiojs s ou 19juo uou pue Ei ssouq UOISU9 X9 IEW 90A ot Ted UOL xej e FUSAN LN3IA12OG XV 4 V LYOdWI OL Tensn se syduroud oy Surwo oj suondo yeuosiad oy ure1801q peurue18o1d aq 0 1equinu yst dnors 10 qg uorsuojxo xoq rur y Iq EA oduop EN ssozg PIOM ssed pue Joquinu xoqj reur Joyensturwupe ulojsAs oy 1909 uou E ssou4 Iequinu uorsuojxe IU 90A OU JLO 3ONVN3ANIVIN XOS IV IWHO333d OL suondo e1our 10 EJ ssoid yo dn Suey oSessouir mod pojo duioo oA q no Udy AA edessour INCA pIoooy HE ssoid
172. Unified Messaging refer to the Unified Messaging User Guide part number 560 8006 The Outlook message that contains the voice mail will have the following components To This line will contain the recipient s name and mailbox number From This line will contain the sender s name and mailbox or Caller ID if known or Unknown Subject This line will say Voice Mail Message If the message has been forwarded it is preceded by FW Sent This line contains the date and time that the voice mail was received by the mail box Priority Messages If the message is marked Priority the subject line will be pre ceded by an exclamation mark and in the Options tab the Importance field is High Private Messages If the message is marked Private the Sensitivity field in the Options tab will be set to Private Certified Messages If the voice mail message is marked for certified delivery the Track Option on the Options tab is checked Page 309 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AUTOMATIC FAX DETECTION NOTE This feature is available in the NT Voice Processor only With Automatic Fax Detection Call Routing Announcement applications and mailboxes can be programmed to automatically route incoming fax calls to a specified extension or to an e mail address If the feature is enabled the mailbox or Call Routing Announcement Application will automat ically listen for fax tone
173. a group of stations and to be automati cally transferred to an available station within the group Up to 75 hunt groups can be pro grammed in the database Hunt group lists can contain individual stations and or extension lists Non ACD hunt group stations must reside on the same node off node devices must be ACD hunt group members The order in which hunt group stations receive incoming calls is determined by a list stored in the database A station or extension list can appear in a single hunt group more than once and it can appear in multiple hunt group lists if desired Hunt groups have their own extension numbers defaults to 2000 2074 Individual stations within the hunt group can be called using their assigned extension numbers Two other Premium Feature hunt group types are also available UCD Hunt Groups and ACD Hunt Groups For UCD information refer to page 134 For ACD refer to page 139 HUNT GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION Page 130 When an intercom or outside call is transferred or rings in to the pilot number it circulates through the hunt group in linear or distributed order until answered as described below e Linear order Incoming calls LINEAR HUNT GROUP CALL PROCESSING always start circulating by Hunt group pilot ringing at the first station or number 2000 called extension list on the hunt 1 group list that 1s stored in the Calls will alwa h ys HUNT GROUP MEMBERS database begin search here gt EXT
174. a mailbox owner 3 Enter the system administrator mailbox number and password 4 Press Eto access the System Administrator Menu 5 When you hear the System Administrator Menu press Gl to select the System Prompt Replacement option 6 Enter the desired prompt number 001 545 followed by EB or the ACCEPT menu but ton If the number is valid the current system and or custom prompt is played f the number is not valid you hear an error message and must choose another prompt num ber 7 Do one of the following To hear the prompt again press Zl If you wish to replace the current system or custom prompt with a new custom prompt press Ell and continue to the next step To delete a custom prompt and reinstate the system prompt press KB If you wish to leave the prompt unchanged and return to the previous menu press ES 8 Record the new prompt To pause while recording the prompt press KM To continue press any button If the Voice Processor PC disk is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot accept your prompt Hang up and try again later 9 When you have completed recording your prompt you have the following options If you are satisfied with your prompt hang up If you wish to hear your prompt press KM If you wish to add to your prompt press Kl and continue as described in step 8 To erase and re record your prompt press KM Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Page 51 Administrator Procedures AXXES
175. a non subscriber message the operator destination is called The operator can be one of the following types GROUP LISTS Group lists are programmed in the database They are lists of mailboxes that can be used by any Subscriber for sending messages to several mailboxes simultaneously The information that is programmed for group lists include the following Page 290 Mailbox If the operator is a mailbox the caller will hear the operator destination s per sonal greeting after pressing IG Station extension number If the operator destination is an extension number the caller will hear the Automated Attendant transfer prompt while the call is placed to the extension number Please hold while I transfer your call to unless it has been dis abled at the mailbox If the station user does not answer the caller will be asked if he wants to leave a message 1f the operator s extension has an associated mailbox If the caller chooses not to leave a message the call returns to the main menu of the applica tion being used Call Routing Announcement voice mail or Auto Attendant Application extension number If the operator destination is an application s exten sion number the call is transferred to that application s main menu Operator If the operator destination is set to Operator the caller will be transferred to the operator destination programmed in the Voice Processor database None If the operator destination is s
176. a solidly lit lamp Continuous Flutter The associated resource is causing a STATION OFF HOOK system alarm In Database Programming DSS BLF buttons may also be programmed for direct access to other resources such as paging zones or they can be assigned feature codes see page 167 Busy lamp indication is provided to show the idle busy status of the resource or feature NOTE Programming a DSS button as a resource does not always provide a transfer capability For example a DSS button programmed for paging will not transfer a party to the paging sys tem Programming and Using DSS BLF Buttons Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROGRAMMING DSS BLF BUTTONS 1 With the handset in the cradle dial EN EJ EA 2 Press the DSS button s and dial the desired extension number Once programmed you can use your DSS button as follows e You can place an intercom call to the extension that the DSS button is programmed for by pressing the button once e You can transfer a call to the extension that the DSS button is programmed for by press ing the button once and hanging up For transferred calls that are forwarded to voice mail you will hear repeating double tones and the display will show DEST FOR WARDED TO VOICE MAIL e Ifthe DSS button has a lamp you can visually monitor the status of the extension PLACING AN INTERCOM CALL USING DSS BLF BUTTONS 1 To use the handset Lift th
177. a station by station basis The DID E amp M Receive Busy Instead Of Camp On station flag determines whether E amp M and DID callers will receive busy signal or receive ringback and camp on when calling a busy sta tion In the default state busy tones are disabled and the callers will hear ringback while camped on to the called station This flag is programmed on a station by station basis TO RESPOND TO CALL WAITING USING AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 If while on a call you hear a single camp on tone and or see the button a Call button or an individual trunk button flashing rapidly you have a call waiting The dis play indicates the type of call that is waiting intercom outside recall etc If you are a hunt group member the display shows the number of calls camped on to the hunt group Do one of the following e If you wish to end the current call hang up A waiting outside call rings as an incoming call an intercom call rings as a private call Answer as usual e Ifyou wish to place the current call on hold press the Hold button or press the Spe cial button and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The Call button indi vidual trunk button or button flutters unless an intercom call is camped on in which case the button flashes rapidly until the camped on call is picked up then the button flutters Answer the waiting call by pressing the flashing Call button individual trunk button or button e fusing an Executiv
178. a warning that the recording has not yet been made If it is the correct recording press EM Return to step 7 Creating Audiotex Recordings Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECORDING CUSTOM VOICE MAIL PROMPTS All of the pre recorded prompts in the Voice Processor can be customized using the voice mail administrator s mailbox If the Multilingual feature is enabled and the Secondary Language prompts have been loaded the system administrator can change either the Primary or Secondary Language prompts When the system administrator s phone is in the Primary Language mode those prompts will be changed when the following procedure is performed If the system administrator s phone is in Secondary Language mode those prompts will be changed A list of all pre recorded prompt numbers 001 595 and their text is provided in Figure 4 beginning on page 52 The Secondary Language prompts have the equivalent text in the same prompt numbers If you change any of the prompts you should create a chart that shows the new text NOTE If you change the text of the prompts keep the content similar to the default text Other wise the prompts will not make sense to the listeners when played by voice mail TO RECORD CUSTOM SYSTEM PROMPTS OR RESTORE SYSTEM PROMPTS 1 Dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press EM to identify yourself as
179. able Messages 296 Unheard Message Cancel 300 Unified Messaging 306 level 1 307 level 2 306 level 3 306 Unified Messaging Required for Fax E Mail 310 nlisted Number extension ID 275 mailbox 283 Unsupervised CO Timer attendant recall 129 fel call forwarding 227 Up Key 81 83 Use Green LEDs for Direct Ring 88 Use Primary Language 173 Use Secondary Language 173 User Keyed Extension 216 Username display 164 programming 14 User Programmable Buttons 167 c ser Programmable Keys 81 82 85 t sing directories 283 DISA 163 DSS BLF Buttons 34 last number dialed feature 244 last number saved feature 244 voice mail 294 Using the Network Group Diagnostics Feature 42 V Valid Call Timer 24 Validated Account Codes 195 Version Feature Code 126 324 View Call Processing Version 126 324 Viewing station speed dial numbers 236 system speed dial numbers 231 waiting messages 184 Voice Mail 4 271 286 287 alternate message source 186 as message center 182 broadcast messages 45 custom recordings 48 directory 281 301 group lists 46 mailbox maintenance 46 mailboxes 289 295 messages 296 299 networks 5 subscribers 289 294 system administrator 45 289 system prompts 51 transfer to 36 204 Voice Processor 287 Voice Mail Administrator Duties 6 Voice Mail Administrator Features 45 Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Applications 287 Voice Mail Flowchart 325 Voice Processing Features 269 271
180. abled Display Time Date 300 Display Phones Only Temporarily displays the system date and time username and extension number during a call or when other displays are shown NOTE Feature code 300 displays the IP Address of an endpoint if it is in SIP mode see page 105 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Cancel Do Not Disturb On Off 370 371 372 The Do Not Disturb feature code halts all intercom calls transferred calls and pages to the station The Cancel code returns the station to normal operation The on off code can be used to turn Do Not Disturb on or off Inter Tel phones use the DND button Do Not Disturb Override 373 Inter Tel Phones Only If enabled in the database allows the phone user to break through another station s Do Not Disturb mode when placing an intercom call Enhanced Speakerphone Enable 310 Digital Phones Only When entered at a Digital Phone station this feature code enables the enhanced speaker phone as described on page 76 Digital Phones can also use the Special button Speaker buttons Feature Key Default 395 Inter Tel Phones Only Phones have user programmable feature buttons that can be set to enter feature codes This code returns the user programmable buttons to the database default values Group Listen 312 Inter Tel Phones Only Allows a user to transmit a con versation over the phone speaker while in handset or headset mode Hand
181. addition transfer to park locations can be set up by the installer A transfer to park location Is a station circuit with an extension number that 1s not equipped with a station instrument Calls can be transferred to these locations and then reverse transferred by any station user If all station circuits are equipped you cannot create a transfer to park location TRANSFERRING CONFERENCE CALLS An established conference can be transferred to a station While the transfer 1s taking place the parties in the conference remain connected to each other and may converse The transfer will appear at the destination station in the same manner as any other transferred call along with a CONFERENCE TFR FROM username display and may be answered by the station user TRANSFER TO A SYSTEM FORWARD When a station user transfers a call to the principal station of a system forwarding path the Handsfree Announce System Forward system wide flag determines what the caller will hear If enabled the caller will place a handsfree call to the principal station and can announce the transfer the call does not enter the forwarding path If the option is disabled the transferring station user will hear ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered by the principal station or one of the forwarding points TRANSFERS AND OUTSIDE CALLS If a station user answers another call while a party is waiting on transfer hold the waiting party will be moved to individua
182. ain digit patterns when an outside call is dialed Trunk group COS is not checked when ARS is used CLASS OF SERVICE COS Toll Restriction Each station and each trunk group that is subject to toll restriction is assigned toll restriction classes of service COS that restrict or allow certain dialing patterns on outside calls The classes of service COS are programmed individually for stations Voice Processor appli cations and trunk groups There are separate COS designations for day and night modes A station or trunk group can be completely unrestricted or can have any combination of the classes of service The first nine COS designations 01 09 have default values COS designations 10 16 do not have default values and are blank All of the classes of service are programmable Each may be specified as an allowed or denied class of service dialing patterns can be programmed for each and each can be assigned to stations and trunk groups as needed Page 155 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 156 The default values of COS 01 09 are as follows COS NAME RESTRICTION 01 ARS Only This is a station class of service only It is not used for trunk groups Also the Automatic Route Selection premium feature is required Calls can only be placed using the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature The user will hear reorder tones when attempting
183. al bin CNF Programmable Button 7 Conference 5 HOLD Programmable Button 8 Individual Hold 336 TRANSFER Programmable Button 9 Transfer to Ring 345 SYS SPD Programmable Button 10 System Speed Dial 381 REDIAL Programmable Button 11 Redial 380 PAGE Programmable Button 12 Page 7 QUEUE Programmable Button 13 Queue Request 6 MUSIC Programmable Button 17 Background Music 313 PAGE ZONE 1 Programmable Button 19 Selects Page Zone 1 for making a page STN SPEED DIAL Programmable Button 20 Station Speed Dial 382 FWD Call Forward All Calls 355 Also used for canceling Call Forward SPECIAL Signals the system to expect a feature code ANSWER Answer 351 OUTGOING Selects a trunk for placing an outgoing call using the station s Outgo ing Call feature 8 SPEAKER Speakerphone On Off MSG Message 365 Also retrieves messages when the flashing MSG button is pressed MUTE Microphone Mute On Off 314 This is a fixed function button on Digi tal Phones DATA Data 340 STATION SPEED DIAL KEYS 0 9 Used for storing and dialing one station speed dial number each UNDEFINED Some Analog Phones have several undefined buttons that can be programmed as desired Inter Tel Phones Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Secondary Extension Appearances The Secondary Extension Appe
184. al the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press El to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and password When you hear the Main Menu list of options press E to select Message Options Some Inter Tel phone users will also see Message Options on their display menu The next prompt gives you the option of recovering deleted messages Press El to con tinue Your options are e Press to listen to your deleted messages and choose which ones to delete or recover After each message you can Press Hl to replay the message Press Zl to reply to the message Press E to forward the message to another mailbox Press E to listen to the previous message Press El to replay the message envelope Press KB to listen to the next message Press to recover the message Press E to purge the message from your mailbox e Press Zl to recover all of your deleted messages and store them as saved messages e Press to purge all of your deleted messages so that they are erased from voice mail Recovering Deleted Messages Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SENDING A MESSAGE As a subscriber you can record and send voice messages to other users from the subscriber Main Menu FOLLOW THESE STEPS Sending a Message 1 2 Dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main men
185. alanced count 139 call circulation 139 login logout 141 142 longest idle 139 using extension lists 140 wrap up timer 143 ACD Hunt Groups Span Nodes 145 Add Parties to a Conference 211 Adjusting LCD Contrast 79 Administrator feature codes 123 324 freeze unfreeze 44 network alarms 37 night mode 9 programming 14 setting time and date 10 11 speed dial programming 31 system alarms 37 system database programming 12 14 Administrator Duties 8 Administrator Procedures 7 Administrator s Station 12 Agent Help 138 216 AgentIDs 140 AgentSet 95 Alarm Messages 265 Alarm Priority 40 Alarm Queue 39 Alarms clearing 39 major 38 minor 38 network 37 39 system 37 All Messages Priority Only and Each New Message Flags 292 All Transient Displays Station Flag 166 Allow Green LEDs 88 Allowed Answer 151 day night 162 feature code 151 All Ring Hunt Group 131 Alphanumeric Mode 13 32 Alternate Hold Timer 198 Alternate Keymap 80 169 Alternate Menu Displays 78 Alternate Message Source 132 186 Alternate Transient Display Timer 166 Analog Keyset Card AKSC 93 Analog Keyset Card AKSC Executone Keyset Card EKSC 74 Analog Phones display 79 Off hook Voice Announce 187 speakerphones 77 volume control 89 ANI 2 148 149 ANI in SMDR 262 Announce Only Calls 207 Announced Transfer 206 277 301 Announcement and Overflow Stations 134 Answer Feature Code 151 Answer Supervision 24 Answering Messages 184 ARS Only Class Of Service 156 Assign St
186. all by pressing the Speaker button When the feature is active in headset mode the Speaker lamp is lit Pressing the button will disconnect the call The Group Listen feature code can be programmed under a feature button or DSS BLF button just like any other feature The button functions as a toggle If the button has a lamp it is lit when the feature is activated and unlit when the feature is turned off If the Group Listen feature is active when an OHVA call is received by the phone the OHVA call will camp on because the speaker is busy On Hook Monitoring Page 193 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TRUNK CAMP ON AND BUSY TRUNK CALLBACK QUEUE Page 194 Camp on and queue requests allow the caller to wait for an available resource A station user waiting for a specific resource a trunk or a station will be served before a station user waiting for a group that contains that specific resource trunk group or hunt group This includes camped on Emergency Call feature 911 calls Camp On When a station user attempts to select a busy outgoing trunk or trunk group the system sends a busy signal The station user can wait off hook to camp on until the trunk is available A user can camp on to busy resources on other nodes and will hear the other node s music on hold while camped on When the system has several routing options for a call it tries to use each route in order until it finds a free route
187. all is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the system disconnects the call If an attendant station transfers a call and it is not answered before the Attendant Transfer timer expires it will recall the attendant station If a station user transfers or forwards an outside call to an outside telephone number it becomes an unsupervised CO to CO call because no inside parties are involved The CO to CO call is limited by the Unsupervised CO timer When the timer expires the call recalls the primary attendant station and causes the button to flash Display phones show UNSU PERVISED CNF RECALL This serves two purposes e Itallows the attendant to monitor the length of CO to CO calls When a CO to CO call recalls the attendant can disconnect the call or allow it to continue e Ifthe callers hang up before the attendant receives the recall the system may not have disconnected the trunks because a disconnect was not received from the central office The attendant must disconnect the call When a recall rings at the attendant s station a Call or individual trunk button flashes at the medium rate If the attendant has calls forwarded recalls from stations follow internal call forward requests Recalls do not forward to outside telephone numbers but recall the attendant s station until they are answered or the Abandoned Call timer expires Placing the attendant s station in Do Not Disturb does not block recalls or dir
188. all waiting signals until the Hold timer expires Transfer to Ring System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TRANSFER TO HOLD A call transferred to hold at a station does not ring or send a display message while holding After the Hold timer expires the station rings or sends call waiting signals Also calls trans ferred to hold do not recall the transferring party they recall the receiving party s attendant if unanswered after the Hold and Recall timers expire Besides the procedure listed below Inter Tel phone users have an alternative method for transferring calls to hold refer to step 4 in the previous procedure TO TRANSFER A CALL TO HOLD 1 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones While on a call press the TRANSFER TO HOLD menu button The display shows TRANSFER CALL TO EXTENSION Other Inter Tel Phones While on a call press the Special button and enter the Trans fer To Hold feature code 346 The display shows TRANSFER CALL TO EXTEN SION Single Line Sets While on a call hookflash and enter the Transfer To Hold feature code 346 2 Dial the desired extension number Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can use the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button 3 Hangup to complete the transfer TO PICK UP A CALL THAT WAS TRANSFERRED TO HOLD If a call was transferred to hold at your station Inter Tel Phones W
189. am ming and using DSS BLF buttons see page 34 Version 7 0 software supports a Mini DSS that has 16 user programmable buttons This unit attaches directly to the Model 8520 or 8560 Phone and does not require a PCDPM or AC trans former Like the DSS BLF Unit these buttons contain lamps that light or flash depending on the status of a station or the button s programming For details about the lamps see the previ ous section NOTE Version 7 0 or later software is required to use the Mini DSS Digital Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Units System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 IP AND SIP DEVICES IP and SIP Devices Devices using Axxess IP and Session Initiation Protocol SIP allow users to communicate using the Local Area Network LAN and the telephone system The telephone system sup ports the following IP and SIP devices e Model 8000 Multi Protocol Endpoints e Model 8664 and 8665 Wireless IP Endpoints e Model 8601 Softphone for Pocket PC e Model 8660 IP Phone e IP PhonePlus e IP Single Line Adapter SLA e IPSoftPhone As of V8 1 IP and SIP calls can be routed through the system cabinet or they can be config ured as members of the same Network Group If the devices are routed through the system cab inet they terminate at the 32 Device Internet Protocol Resource Card IPRC see page 74 If the devices are configured to be members of a Network Group they can use the pee
190. an entry when using numeric mode Digital Phones use the Volume button by pressing both arrows at once Cancel Key No further programming is necessary This button will be used to cancel a feature or cancel an entry when in numeric mode Call Key Up to 10 Call buttons can be assigned in each keymap These buttons are used for call access They are not associated with specific trunks Instead they are assigned to calls in the order that the calls are placed or received In the following example the user has three Call buttons ACTION CALL KEY 1 CALL KEY 2 CALL KEY 3 User places call 1 Shows status of call 1 Call 2 rings in Shows status of call Shows ring flash for while call 1 is 1 call 2 active Calls 1 and 2 on Shows hold flash for Shows hold flash for Shows status of call hold call 3 placed call 1 call 2 3 If there are more calls in progress than there are Call buttons e g if another call rings in to the phone in the example the new call will not have an available call button and will camp on to the station until a Call button becomes available it will then appear under the available button Pressing an idle Call button will enter the programmed Out going Call feature for that station If there is no button programmed in the key map intercom calls will appear under Call buttons NOTE All keymaps should have at least one Call button if there is not an individual trunk bu
191. ancel 306 Remote Programming 359 Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up 4 Review Keys 396 Ring Intercom Always On Off 377 Ring Tone Selection 398 Routing Off 304 Station Monitor 321 Page 323 Default Feature Codes AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Diagnostics Feature Codes The Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 must be entered before the following feature codes can be used FEATURE NAME CODE Station Speed Dial 382 Station Speed Dial Program 383 Switch Keymap 399 System Forward Enable 352 System Forward Disable 353 System Forward On Off 354 System Speed Dial 381 Transfer to Hold 346 Transfer to Ring 345 Administrator Feature Codes FEATURE NAME CODE Clear Network Alarm 9851 Clear System Alarm 9850 Diagnostics On Off 9900 Enable Network Day 9862 Enable Network Night 9861 Modem Enable 9866 Modem Disable 9867 Modem Reset 9869 Night Ring On Off 9860 Program System Speed Dial 9801 Set Network Date Time 9810 Set Time Date 9800 Synchronize Network Time 9811 Page 324 FEATURE NAME CODE Compress On Off 9962 Compression Statistics 9961 Diagnostic ASAI Snoop Off 9926 Diagnostic ASAI Snoop On 9927 Diagnostic Heap Dump 9943 Diagnostic Dump Extension 9933 Diagnostic Dump Node Information 9936 Diagnostic Heap Statistics 9947 Dia
192. and then press Kl or press the MSG SEARCH ORDER menu button This allows you to deter mine how to retrieve your new or saved messages based on the date and time they were received Press Hl to change the search order for new messages or press Ell to change the search order for saved messages Your options are e Press E or the 1ST IN 1ST OUT menu button to retrieve the earliest received messages first e Press Kll or the LAST IN 1ST OUT menu button to retrieve the latest received messages first To change your Transfer Method press Kl for More Options and then press EM The system tells you what your current Transfer Method is You can then select the desired Transfer Method as follows a To select unannounced transfers press Kill or the UNANNOUNCED menu button b To select screened transfers press Ell or the SCREENED menu button c To select announce only transfer press or the ANNOUNCE ONLY menu but ton Personal Options Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 OUTSIDE CALLER USE OF VOICE MAIL Callers who do not have a subscriber mailbox can leave messages for subscribers Also Sub scribers can use this method for leaving messages without accessing their mailboxes If a non subscriber message is left using a station with an associated mailbox the receiving mailbox Subscriber can reply to the message if desired and the reply will be sent to the caller s associ ated mailbox TO LEAVE A
193. answered When programmed for automatic outside call access a station user with allowed answer but without ring in for a ringing trunk must always press an individual trunk button for that trunk or enter the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 to answer the incoming call Trans ferred calls and recalls can be answered by lifting the handset Camped on calls cannot be answered by simply lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker but ton For example a station is programmed to automatically answer ringing outside calls but requires pressing the button to answer ringing intercom calls If a private intercom call rings in and is immediately followed by an outside call ringing in the display shows the inter com call message and the outside call camps on The intercom call also camps on when the handset is lifted The user can then choose between the camped on calls by pressing either the button or the Call or individual trunk button or ESSIEN button The automatic call access options outlined below can be programmed at Inter Tel phones only Single line sets are designed to automatically answer ringing intercom and outside calls by lift ing the handset and cannot be changed TO PROGRAM OUTSIDE CALL ACCESS To change the current outside call access option to its opposite toggle on or off enter the Automatic Trunk Access On Off feature code 360 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows AUTO TRNK ACCESS ON or OFF TO P
194. application s message can be programmed to include the caller s queue position and or estimated wait time The queue position announcement tells the caller how many calls are ahead of his or her call This includes calls being served and waiting calls however all calls being served count as one call The estimated wait time is based on a programmed Average Connect Time Per Call multiplied by the number of calls ahead of the caller in the queue divided by the number of available hunt group members avg connect time per call x no of waiting calls available members See page 276 for details If a Voice Processor application is used as an announcement or overflow station or as the recall destination and the system is unable to communicate with the Voice Processor outside calls will not be sent to the announcement or overflow application They will continue to camp on to the hunt group UCD Hunt Group Priority List Some stations may be members of more than one UCD hunt group For this reason hunt groups are assigned a priority level The priority level determines which hunt group s calls should be received first when calls ring in or camp on to several hunt groups at once UCD priority levels range from 0 priority LEVELS low to 75 high If a station is a Calls ring in or member of multiple hunt groups that camp on to all have the same priority level calls hunt groups received by those hunt groups will be OR
195. arances feature allows calls ringing or on individual hold at one primary station to appear on a secondary extension button at another station For example a secretary or assistant can have a secondary extension button for a supervisor s station or one station can have several secondary extension buttons each associated with a different primary station The primary station and the secondary station must reside on the same node A secondary extension button functions as follows e When a call is ringing or holding on any Call button at the primary station pressing the secondary extension button will answer the call This includes recalls transfers call backs and hunt group calls e Ifthe secondary extension button is unlit pressing the button places an intercom call to the primary station If the button is flashing an intercom call can still be placed without answering the incoming call by pressing the pound EJ button before the secondary extension button by pressing a DSS button or by manually dialing the primary sta tion s extension number There are two programmable options that determine the type of call indications the station user will receive for calls on a secondary extension button e Ring When n Calls At Extension This programmable option allows the station to co receive a burst of ringing when n number of calls are present at the associated pri mary station The ring signal will repeat periodica
196. ard Destination Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 If the principal station receives a PRINCIPAL STATION IS MANUAL manually forwarded call not a sys FORWARD DESTINATION tem forward that call will not fol low the principal station s system SYSTEM forwarding path FORWARD Principal System Station Forwarding Point Manually forwarded calls will stop here and will not be sent to System Forwarding Point If an infinite forward loop results INFINITE LOOP CAUSED BY from the combination of manual for SYSTEM AND MANUAL CALL FORWARD wares and syste TOPWGFOIIE DAS sese ci dd by this station the station that was originally will not follow the manual intended to receive the call will ring forward if other two stations are even if the station is in Do Not Dis Unavailable turb FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD SYSTEM FORWARD ENABLE DISABLE The station user has the option of entering feature codes that will disable or enable the use of system forwarding at that station Note that this flag does not affect the station s appearance on any other station s call forwarding path The flag merely determines whether the station will have its own calls system forwarded TO ENABLE OR DISABLE SYSTEM FORWARDING e Inter Tel Phones Enter the System Forward On 352 System Forward Off 353 or System Forwar
197. arded call Calls may not be redirected back to the originating station This will result in a message on the display saying CALL FORWARDED TO SOURCE For non display phones the call will simply ring back at the station Calls may not be redirected to restricted outside numbers to stations in Do Not Disturb mode or to stations that are forwarded Redirected calls will not follow call forwarding Agent Help Request calls queue callbacks and recalls cannot be redirected these types of calls do not follow call forwarding Calls cannot be redirected to another station s mailbox because redirected calls will not follow forwarding If the call is redirected to an unreachable destination it will not be redirected and will ring back at the original station If an ARS trunk group or trunk number is entered the system will prompt the user to enter the destination telephone number Calls may not be redirected to a node number but may be directed to a station on another node by entering the correct extension num ber If the applicable Forwarding timer expires before the user completes the redirection process the system terminates the call Page 245 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PAGING Page 246 The Paging feature allows announcements to be made through phone internal speakers Optional external paging equipment amplifiers and paging speakers may also be installed There can be up to 10 pag
198. arded to a station in DND will ring the DND station per the rules of DND If your station is in Do Not Disturb and you have call forwarding programmed the call is still forwarded unless you enabled Forward No Answer With Forward No Answer intercom call ers will see the Do Not Disturb display that you programmed and the call will not be for warded If calls are forwarded to a Voice Processor application and the system is unable to communi cate with the Voice Processor PC the call will not be forwarded It will remain at your station Call forwarding overrides system call forwarding at the principal station Page 225 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 If a station 1s programmed for Forward No Answer or Forward No Answer Busy and receives a transferred call the Forward No Answer timer is started when the intercom call from the transferring station begins ringing The Forward No Answer timer is restarted 1f the transfer ring station completes the transfer before the timer expires the transferred call will then be for warded when the timer expires Agent Help Request calls queue callbacks and recalls do not forward except that a recall at an attendant s station will forward to another station FWD BUTTON Page 226 Some Inter Tel phones use a combination of the default MEUM key and forwarding menu keys When the default MEA key is pressed the display shows a menu of call forwarding options Th
199. are also 20 maps for DSS BLF Units Each Inter Tel phone is assigned a standard keymap and can also have an alternate keymap See page 169 for information about switching between standard and alternate keymaps When the system is in the default state all phones are assigned to the default Keyset Keymap 01 There are no individual pre programmed keymaps for each of the specific phone types Previous software had an Executive Standard map and a Basic map If you convert from a pre vious version to the current version those keymaps will be preserved However in the current software the default Speaker Bea and buttons are not programmable NOTE The Model 8560 8520 and 8500 Phones have more buttons and lamps than the Exec utive Display Standard Display and Basic Digital Phones If running system version 6 0 or ear lier software the additional buttons and lamps will not operate To use the buttons and lamps version 7 0 or later software is required Contact your local Inter Tel dealer for upgrade informa tion As part of the installation procedure the installer must make sure the phone buttons are labeled to match their functions Inter Tel Phones Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The buttons in each keymap can be assigned the following functions Accept Key This button type is not required for Digital Phones It is intended for Analog Phone use This button is used to accept
200. art ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag The Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login flag determines where an agent is placed in a longest idle queue when he or she logs back in to a hunt group When enabled the agent s idle time is reset to zero whenever he or she logs in 1 e that agent will be least likely to receive the next distributed call If disabled the agent s idle time includes the time the agent was logged out of the hunt group 1 e that agent will be most likely to receive the next distributed call By default this flag is disabled This flag is programmable for each individual hunt group ACD Agent Wrap Up Timer Each time an agent ends an ACD hunt group call the station goes into wrap up mode and the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is started Until that timer expires the agent will not receive another call through any ACD hunt group However the agent can receive non ACD hunt group calls direct ring in calls and transfers The range of the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is 1 to 65535 seconds The default value is 15 seconds It is programmed individually for each ACD hunt group If an agent wishes to terminate the wrap up mode before the timer expires he or she can use the following procedure TO TERMINATE ACD AGENT WRAP UP While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Wrap Up Terminate feature code 329 The display shows ACD WRAP UP TERMINATED If you were not logged in to an ACD hunt g
201. ary Notification cascade If Primary Notification is turned off or if the day or time does not match the voice mail system will immediately make the same check for Alternate Notification and possibly place calls to the numbers in the Alternate Notification cascade When the Voice Processor makes a notification call it moves through the appropriate notifica tion cascade level by level as determined by the notification and retry programming described below When the system reaches the last level in the cascade it will return to level 1 and begin again if necessary If the system is not able to place the call within the parameters of the programmed notification day and time due to busy facilities or invalid programming the mailbox will receive a mes sage stating that notification could not be completed the mailbox owner will hear the message next time he or she accesses the mailbox The number of calls that the Voice Processor can process simultaneously is determined by the Maximum Number of Outgoing Calls flag It defaults to 2 but can be programmed to use all of the enabled Voice Processor voice channels Message Notification to Stations Page 291 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 292 All Messages Priority Only and Each New Message Flags When the mailbox is being programmed for remote notification message notification can be set to place the notification call when any message is rec
202. ate and time and re synchronize clocks in the network e Make database changes see page 12 for a list of programming areas e Program system speed dial numbers on the local system e Receive and clear displayed system and network alarms e Use diagnostic mode features to Freeze and unfreeze database history on the local system or other systems in the network Print error logs Seize specific devices for troubleshooting purposes Administrator features are described in detail beginning on page 8 Any Inter Tel phone can be designated as an administrator station through Database Program ming All designated administrator stations should be equipped with display phones to show system alarms and make programming easier NOTE Single line sets can not be used as an administrator station System Administrator Duties Page 3 Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 VOICE PROCESSOR Page 4 The system Voice Processor can be used for any of the following applications Voice Mail This application handles all calls that are directed to voice mail other than through the Message Notification Retrieval application by subscribers and non sub scribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox Message Notification Retrieval The Message Notification Retrieval application pro vides voice mail message no
203. ater allows certain IP and SIP devices to transmit and receive audio directly with each other rather than through the system cabinet The P2P feature reduces delay and packet loss for IP and SIP devices Devices that support P2P audio include e AudioCodes MP 104 MGCP gateway and associated endpoints e IP phones except the IP SoftPhone e Miulti Protocol endpoints e SIP endpoints To use P2P the IPRC and the IP and or SIP devices must be upgraded with V8 1 firmware In addition the devices must be programmed as members of the same Network Group Calls between IP and SIP devices that are members of separate Network Groups are routed through the cabinet and do not use P2P Version 8 1 supports a Network Group Diagnostics feature that allows an administrator to ver ify that the Network Groups are programmed properly See page 42 for instructions on how to use the Network Group Diagnostics feature IP devices that use P2P audio do not use cabinet resources when they are connected in a P2P call Therefore the following features will not work during a P2P call e Agent Help e Record A Call e Station Monitor NOTICE Passing real time streaming data such as audio through encrypted virtual private networks VPNs may significantly impact the network performance router and firewall functional ity and audio quality Axxess IP and SIP Operating Modes The Model 8000 Multi Protocol Endpoints have the ability to operate in Axxess IP
204. ates the Directory feature e To dial a displayed outside number Press EM the CALL menu button or a Call button The system automatically dials the number using your programmed outgo ing access code e To dial a displayed feature code Press EJ or the ACCEPT button The system automatically dials the feature code e To search for another name or number Repeat the procedure beginning at step 3 Page 240 Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directory System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 HOUSE PHONE House Phone This feature provides users with the ability to place a pre designated intercom or outside call simply by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button if using an Inter Tel phone on a designated house phone In a network the house phone can be programmed to dial an off node device There are several applications for this feature such as e Courtesy paging phone Visitors hear pages instructing them to pick up the house phone such as the paging phones used in airport terminals When they lift the handset they are connected to a pre programmed station user who can give them a message or connect them to a call e Emergency phone The house phone can be programmed to automatically dial the Emergency Call feature code default is 911 This could save time in an emergency e Service phone Customers can use the house phone s to place orders or receive special services from the lobby
205. ation has the same meaning as the Primary Language message The default mes sages are 01 DO NOT DISTURB 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL 13 OUT UNTIL 04 IN MEETING 14 WITH A CLIENT 05 ON VACATION TIL 15 WITH A GUEST 06 ON VACATION 16 UNAVAILABLE 07 CALL ME AT 17 IN CONFERENCE 08 AT THE DOCTOR 18 AWAY FROM DESK 09 ON A TRIP 19 GONE HOME 10 ON BREAK 20 OUT TO LUNCH When two languages are enabled and DND messages are changed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Language message 02 is changed to PAGE ME a similar message should be programmed for the Secondary Language message 02 Select an administrator Database Programming password Entry to the Database Programming feature at the administrator stations can be protected using a password A password would prevent unauthorized users from altering the system database Define reminder messages System reminder messages can be changed using an administrator s station See page 258 for information about using reminder messages The messages can have up to 16 characters each When Primary and Secondary Lan guages are enabled the system has default reminder messages in both languages The current language of the programming phone determines which list is programmed See page 172 for a description of the Change Language feature Each Secondary Language translation ha
206. ation in Do Not Disturb halts all pages incoming intercom calls camped on calls and transferred calls to that station Queue callbacks recalls and direct ring in calls are not blocked Another user calling the station while it is in Do Not Disturb hears a repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause display phones show the Do Not Disturb message the user cannot camp on but can queue or leave a message at the station NOTE Direct ring in calls that are forwarded to a station in DND will ring the DND station per the rules of DND If desired individual stations can be prevented from using Do Not Disturb by disabling the Do Not Disturb option in the database If a hunt group station is in Do Not Disturb calls to the user s hunt group do not cause the phone to ring but the individual trunk button will flash if all other stations in the hunt group are busy forwarded have hunt group remove enabled or are in Do Not Disturb Hunt group announcement stations and overflow stations can use Do Not Disturb to block hunt group calls by using Do Not Disturb Inter Tel phones may be given Do Not Disturb override permission These stations when reaching a station in Do Not Disturb can enter the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 to place a non handsfree intercom call to the station Single line stations cannot be enabled to use the Do Not Disturb Override feature When a station is placed in DND the user may select one of 20 system stor
207. ations to Attendants 14 Assigning the Modem to a DSS BLF Button 41 Associate Phone lamp rates 87 Attendant Console 94 Attendant Recall 129 Attendant Stations 128 Attendants 128 DSS BLF units 128 forwarding to 227 hunt groups as 128 primary 128 129 programming 14 recall 129 serving other attendants 129 transfer timer 129 AudioCodes MP 100 160 Audiotex Recordings 48 274 277 Page 311 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Automated Attendant 4 271 272 applications 273 custom recordings 48 274 directory 273 recall destination 271 274 Voice Processor 272 Automatic Call Access 170 Automatic Daylight Saving Time 10 Automatic Fax Detection 310 Automatic Intercom Answer 170 Automatic Outside Call Answer 170 Automatic Route Selection ARS 152 155 191 323 Auxiliary 267 Axxess Basic Volume Control 164 Axxess IP and SIP Operating Modes 105 B Background Music 108 171 Backlight 102 Balanced Count Hunt Group 139 Basic Digital Phone key map 80 speakerphone 75 Basic Phone lamprates 87 Bit Rate 89 90 Broadcast Messages 45 Broadcasting Messages 45 Busy Signal Instead of Camp On DID E amp M 201 Busy Station Queue Callback 181 Busy Trunk Callback Queue 194 Busy Trunk Option 24 C Call Center Suite 139 Call Cost Accounting 260 Call Forwarding 65 225 allcalls 225 FWD button 226 huntgroups 132 ifbusy 225 ifno answer busy 225 remote programming 255 system 219 toanextension 228 to att
208. ault Application field is used When programming the days and times be careful not to overlap For example if you place a date entry for Dec 25 after a day of the week entry for Monday and Christmas falls on a Mon day the Monday application will be selected instead of the Dec 25 application ENTRY DESCRIPTION DATE DAY TIME INTERVAL DAY NIGHT APPLICATION Labor Day Sep 1 10 00am 2 00pm 2600 2 Labor Day Sep 1 Both 2601 3 Memorial Day May 30 8 00am 5 00pm 2605 4 Memorial Day May 30 5 00pm 8 00am 2606 5 Christmas Day Dec 25 Both 2607 6 Christmas Holiday Dec 24 Jan 2 Both 2608 7 Weekends Sat Sun Both 2612 8 Lunch Break M F 11 00am 1 00pm 2613 9 Night Shift M F Night 2614 10 Day Shift M F Day 2615 Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR Page 285 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SMDR INFORMATION STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL Page 286 The Voice Processor PC can be used to capture Station Message Detail Recording SMDR information The SMDR information is stored in a file on the Voice Processor PC s hard disk for later retrieval Every time a call is completed the SMDR feature records the call formats it according to SMDR programming see page 261 and sends the record to the SMDR output device if enabled The formatted record is also sent to the Voice Processor if SMDR buffering is enabled The Voice Proc
209. avail able the system checks the other groups in the list until it finds an available trunk e Facility Groups A facility group contains trunk group node lists and dial rules The trunks can include local trunk groups or nodes The dial rules tell the system what to dial The system can have up to 32 dial rules 26 of which are programmable Each facility group can use up to 32 dial rules For example if the selected route group requires that the number contain 1 but no area code the dial rules include the 1 and drop the area code The modified tele phone number can contain up to 32 digits If SMDR is enabled the modified tele phone number not the digits dialed will appear in the SMDR call record When programming ARS you can use preset dial rules or create new dial rules that add up to 16 digits each The pre programmed dial rules are Dial Rule 1 Echo Equal Access This non programmable dial rule includes the equal access digits 1OXXX or 101 XXXX in the number if dialed Dial Rule 2 Echo Toll Field The toll field 1 0 01 or 011 is included in the number if dialed This dial rule is non programmable Dial Rule 83 Echo 3 Digits After Toll Field With this non programmable dial rule the three digits after the toll field are included in the number These digits are usually the area code or country code Dial Rule 4 Echo Local Address This non programmable dial rule allows ARS to dial th
210. be heard The Speaker button is lit and the button is lit if the microphone was muted 2 To return to the conversation You may lift the handset or speak handsfree If the microphone was muted press the lit button or the UNMUTE menu button to speak The button goes off GROUP LISTEN FEATURE The Group Listen feature allows an Inter Tel phone user to transmit a conversation over the phone speaker while in handset or headset mode This allows other people in the room to listen to the conversation However the phone microphone remains disabled so that only the headset or handset user can speak This feature cannot be used on a handsfree call The user must be on a call using the handset or a headset before entering the feature code Group Listen cannot be used on single line sets TO TURN THE GROUP LISTEN FEATURE ON OR OFF DURING A CALL While on a call using the handset or a headset press the Special button and enter the Group Listen feature code 312 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows GROUP LISTEN ON or GROUP LISTEN OFF The other party will not hear the confirmation tone NOTE If using a headset on a Model 8500 8520 or 8560 Phone when Group Listen is enabled the volume control adjusts the volume of the headset not the speaker When the Group Listen feature is active in handset mode the Speaker button lamp will remain unlit This allows the user to place the call into handsfree mode at any time during the c
211. ber 227 to the message center 227 to voice mail 227 Forward FWD Button 167 Forward FWD Key 81 Executive Display and Model 8560 Phones 167 226 programming 226 Forwarding Path 219 Freeze Zones 44 Freeze Unfreeze 44 Freezing Unfreezing the Network History 44 Freezing Unfreezing the System History 44 G Greetings 301 Group Call Pick Up 143 208 Group Listen Feature 193 Group Lists 46 290 299 H Handsfree announce system forward 203 221 enable disable 176 network calls 176 Headsets connecttone 88 enable disable 123 324 Hold alternate hold timer 198 button 116 consultation 198 199 feature codes 123 324 individual 198 recall 198 199 system 198 Hookflash 115 257 Hot Dialpad Buttons 116 House Phone 241 mode 242 programming 14 Hunt Group call distribution 130 key 81 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Hunt Groups 130 as alternate message source 132 as attendants 128 as message center 132 average wait time 136 call circulation 130 call forwarding 132 call processing 131 campon 131 capacity 130 DISA calls 162 distributed 131 do not disturb 247 forwarding points 221 linear 130 pilot number 130 queue position 136 remove replace 133 ringin 131 station lists 130 supervisor 137 system forwarding point 221 using extension lists 131 Hybrid Balance 24 IC Key 81 82 Importing Fax Documents 47 Index 311 Individual Hold 198 Individual Station Forwarding Points 221 Indiv
212. bound fax users is not limited by the security button only the number of mailboxes with Unified Messag ing enabled are limited Unified Messaging LEVEL 1 Level 1 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 When a mailbox receives a voice mail message or uses the voice mail Record A Call feature one of four things can occur depending on how the mailbox s E Mail Gateway field is pro grammed e Ifthe field is programmed to DISABLED the voice mail or Record A Call message is delivered to the mailbox just as normal and no e mail is sent e Ifthe field is programmed to FORWARD ONLY the Voice Processor will convert the voice mail or Record A Call message to an 8 bit WAV file build an e mail message attach the WAV file and send the e mail message to the address specified in the mail box s E mail Address field Once the e mail message is sent the original message will be deleted from the mailbox If the e mail message cannot be delivered to the specified address it will be stored as a voice mail message in the mailbox and will not be deleted NOTE Mailboxes programmed for FORWARD ONLY cannot use the Remote Notifica tion feature Because all messages are automatically sent to the E mail Address there is no voice mail message to trigger the Remote notification e Ifthe mailbox s E mail field is programmed to COPY amp FORWARD the voice mail or Record A Call message will be stored in the mailbox a
213. bsorbed digits will not appear in the SMDR report even when repeated e Suppress Equal Access Digits Equal access digits will not appear in the report if this option is selected In the sample above the equal access code field would be suppressed to print only 89 1 602 961 9000 e Suppress Toll Digits When this option is selected toll digits will not appear in the report In the sample above the toll field would be suppressed so that only 89 10288 602 961 9000 prints Any combination of the above can be used If all three fields are suppressed only 602 961 9000 will print The programmer can also suppress or allow call information in the SMDR report Dialed Dig its field The following options are available e Suppress Outside Party Number Caller information that is received through ANI or Caller ID will not appear if this option is selected e Suppress Trunk Number Information received through DID or DNIS will not be included in the report if this option is selected The programmer can determine which equipped station s and or trunks will be included in the report and whether off node devices will be included in reports However for incoming calls DISA calls conference calls and or ring in diagnostics all calls are recorded even when they involve stations not in the programmed station list SMDR can be programmed to record the elapsed time of calls in seconds S XXXXXX or hours and minutes HH MM If programmed t
214. call from the data device when the required voice path is not available the secondary voice path of the attached phone is busy the data device will not receive dial tone The activity on the phone s secondary voice path continues uninterrupted TO PLACE A DATA CALL USING THE DATA DEVICE 1 Following the procedures of your data device s communications software instruct the device to come off hook and dial the extension number or a trunk access code and the telephone number of the data device to be called The call will be processed and will be automatically connected when answered The button is lit until dialing is com pleted then it flutters 2 Operate the data device according to the manufacturer s instructions The data device can be called directly intercom or outside calls and receive transferred calls via its extension number When a call is placed directly or transferred to the device s intercom number the data device will receive ring signal If the data device does not have auto answer capability the user must manually answer the call using the data device Transferring a call to the data device using the button places the call without providing ring voltage to the data device The user must manually cause the data device to answer the call While ring signal is being sent to the data device the button flashes As soon as the data device answers the button flutters The button continues to flutter for the dura
215. call is disconnected Station users will hear reorder tones Remote Do Not Disturb Programming Page 253 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 254 5 To turn on Do Not Disturb a d Enter the Do Not Disturb On feature code 370 The On Off feature code cannot be used in remote programming f you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again NOTE f the station you are programming is not allowed to use DND you will hear reorder tones and the display will show CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEA TURE Outside callers will be returned to dial tone and stations will return to the idle state Enter the desired Do Not Disturb message number 01 20 Jf you entered an invalid message number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the optional second line message text if desired using any combination of the following methods Remain in numeric mode Press the dialpad buttons to enter the desired number Use the pound button EJ for a hyphen and the asterisk button EJ for a colon Inter Tel phone users can press the ITI button once to leave a space or press the button to backspace Change to alphanumeric mode Inter Tel phones only Press the IEEE button the button lights or the USE ALPHA MODE menu button then enter the desired characters Refer to the chart and instructions in your user guide Inter Tel phone users can press the ME b
216. caller on the handset will not hear you or the OHVA caller When you press again the handset microphone is re enabled You cannot mute the microphone on your phone while your call is on hold at another station NOTE If you receive complaints from IP phone users about losing audio on muted calls there may be a firewall issue Contact your local Inter Tel dealer for assistance MUTING THE PHONE MICROPHONE 1 To temporarily turn off your microphone while on a call press the button or MUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the Microphone Mute On Off feature code 314 The button is lit and the display shows MICROPHONE MUTE ON If off hook do not hang up unless you press the Speaker button first 2 Press the lit button or UNMUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the feature code 314 to turn the microphone on The button goes off and the display shows MICROPHONE MUTE OFF Microphone Mute CALL WAITING Call Waiting System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 While a station is in use incoming intercom and outside calls camp on until the busy station is available The busy party hears a single camp on tone every 15 seconds unless the Camp on Tone timer is changed or camp on tones are disabled at the station A station programming flag Camp On Indications allows camp on tones to be enabled or dis abled for incoming intercom and outside calls This flag is programmed on
217. calling an extension number hookflash and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 Then hang up 2 When the queued station is available your station will ring Display phones show user name IS NOW AVAILABLE Lift the handset or press the button A private call is automatically placed to the queued station Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones You may press one of the following menu buttons e CANCEL QUEUE To cancel the queue request press this button without lifting the handset ANSWER You may press this button instead of lifting the handset to answer the queue callback using the speakerphone TO CANCEL A QUEUE REQUEST BEFORE THE QUEUED STATION BECOMES AVAILABLE e Inter Tel Phones While on hook enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 The dis play shows QUEUE REQUEST CANCELED e Single Line Sets Lift the handset enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up Busy Station Queue Callback Page 181 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTER STATION MESSAGES Page 182 Intercom callers may leave a message waiting indication if a called station is busy if there is no answer if the station 1s in Do Not Disturb or when they are connected to or placed on hold by another station Users are allowed to leave message for and respond to messages from users on other nodes There are two messaging options e Have the called party return your call Dis
218. ccessful the system will stop attempting remote notification It is assumed that the mailbox user listened to the message when the mailbox was accessed How ever the button at the station will remain lit if there are any messages that have not been heard Each level also has a Number Called Busy timer and a Pager Notification Retry timer or Per sonal Number No Answer timer These timers determine how long the Voice Processor will wait before making the next notification attempt when messages are waiting to be heard unless it is overridden by the Each New Message flag These timers can be set to a value of 0 255 minutes If set to 0 it retries the cascade level immediately for as many attempts as allowed by the Number of Call Attempts field If the message s has not been picked up by then the system moves to the next cascade level The default setting for the Pager Notification Retry timer is 20 minutes The Number Called Busy and Personal Number No Answer timers default to 5 minutes NOTE The 0 minute timer value should be used cautiously If the system is forced to make several calls in quick succession it will impair the Voice Processor s ability to place other outgo ing calls It should be used primarily with cascades in which all of the members wish to receive notification at approximately the same time In this case all levels except the last could be set to 0 minute retries with 1 allowed call attempt However the last level in the ca
219. ce code FIC instead pro vide the telephone company with DID answer supervision code AS 2 and the FIC for the requested T1 service Page ix FCC Regulations AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CAUTION THE TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS SYSTEM HAVE HEARING AID COMPATIBLE HANDSETS THAT ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 68 316 OF THE FCC RULES THE IP SLA COMPLIES WITH UL1950 CSA950 AND EN 60950 STANDARDS AND COMPLIES WITH EN 55022 AND PART 15 OF FCC RULES Notice This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used prop erly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rule Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient the receiving ant
220. ces that support the vocoder The IP phones are pro grammed for P2P audio but they do not support the same number of audio frames per IP packet Remove the IP devices from the Network Group Consider adding them to a Network Group that contains IP devices that support the same number of audio frames per IP packet A call was established but the device cannot send DTMF digits The IP phones are pro grammed for P2P audio but they do not support the same DTMF encoding setting Remove the IP devices from the Network Group Consider adding them to a Network Group that contains IP devices that support the same DTMF encoding setting IP and SIP Devices Page 107 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 OPTIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT Page 108 The following optional equipment can be purchased and installed with the Inter Tel system Complete specifications and installation instructions are provided in the Inter Tel Axxess Installation and Maintenance Manual Voice Processor Provides multi port integrated voice processing features voice mail auto mated attendant hunt group announcement and overflow SMDR storage Record A Call etc The Voice Processor is available with Windows NT and OS 2 The NT version is required for the Unified Messaging and Fax Recognition features Attendant Console Allows attendants to use their personal computers PCs to answer and manage inco
221. ces are in effect is e Conference or call on transfer hold e Ringing ring in recall or camp on conference e Conference on hold e Active conference TO PLACE THE CONFERENCE ON HOLD ANY INSIDE PARTY 1 During a conference call Inter Tel Phones Press the Hold button or press the Special button and enter the Indi vidual Hold feature code 336 The conferenced parties remain connected The call and buttons flutter Single Line Sets Hookflash and then enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The conferenced parties remain connected NOTE If you do not return to the conference before the Hold timer expires the confer ence will recall your station If the recall is not answered the conference will recall to your attendant s station At the attendant the call will be terminated automatically after the Abandoned Recall timer if no inside parties are still in the conference and if it is not answered by the attendant If the attendant answers the call a conference is re estab lished with the attendant station as one of the conference parties 2 Toreturn to the conference Inter Tel Phones Press the Hold button button or the fluttering Call button Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Conference feature code 5 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold Page 213 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECORD A CALL Page 214 NOTE The Record A Call premium feature is required
222. cess codes 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 The Page timer limits the length of pages If it is set to 0 pages are unlimited in length TO MAKE A PAGE 1 Lift the handset 2 Inter Tel Phones Press the PAGE button or enter the Page feature code 7 The dis play shows SELECT PAGE ZONE 0 9 Single Line Sets Enter the Page feature code 7 3 Enter the zone code 0 9 or 0 49 for the desired zone 4 After the single progress tone make your page before the Page timer expires If you hear reorder tones and the display shows PAGE ZONE NOT PROGRAMMED there are no stations in the selected page zone If the display shows PAGE ZONE BUSY TRY AGAIN LATER the necessary system resources are busy or the paging zone is being used by another station Users cannot camp on to or queue the paging system 5 Hangup Paging System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REMOVE FROM PAGING An Inter Tel phone user can prevent the phone from receiving pages or allow it to receive pages again using these feature codes If the phone is assigned to more than one page zone all zones are removed or replaced the user cannot toggle individual zones TO HALT OR ENABLE ZONE PAGES 1 While on or off hook enter the Page Receive On Off feature code 325 to prevent the phone from receiving pages You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows PAGE RECEIVE ON or OFF 2 foff hook hang up DO NOT DISTURB Placing a st
223. ch the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times The default password should be changed the first time the user logs in This is especially important in the system administrator s mailbox which allows programming access to the Voice Processor Message Envelope Contents Each message is preceded by an envelope message that can include the time and date the message was left the source of the message and the length of the message You can choose the contents of the envelope or disable the envelope completely Even if the envelope is disabled the subscriber can still enter the code to play the envelope when listening to the message Remote Messaging Remote messaging is described in detail on page 291 Fax Destination Number If your station is programmed to receive incoming faxes you can program the extension number of the fax machine receive the faxes that are sent to your mailbox Message Retrieval Order This option allows you to determine how to retrieve your saved or new messages based on the date and time they were received You can listen to the earliest received messages first First In First Out or the latest received messages first Last In First Out Transfer Method When a call is received by an Automated Attendant or Call Routing Announcement application and the caller enters an extension number the programmed Transfer Method determines how the call will be transferred See page 206 for a list of Tra
224. cipal station until the Abandoned Call timer expires Unanswered System Forward Calls System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CALL FORWARDING Call Forwarding With call forwarding a station user can route incoming intercom and outside calls including direct ring in calls to another station to a hunt group or to an outside telephone number if allowed by toll and trunk restrictions In a network setting the network allows the user to for ward calls to stations or hunt groups on another node See also page 253 The four forward ing options are e Forward all calls All incoming calls are immediately forwarded e Forward if no answer Incoming calls are forwarded if they are not answered before the Forward No Answer timer expires e Forward if busy Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the station is busy e Forward if no answer or busy Incoming calls are forwarded immediately if the sta tion is busy or if calls are not answered before the Forward No Answer timer expires If forward all calls is enabled display phones show the call forwarding status and destination until the request is canceled If one of the conditional forwards is enabled no answer busy or no answer busy display phones show the forward status for five seconds and then return to normal If the station receiving the forward is a display phone it shows EXT XXXX FWD FROM EXT XXXX for each forwarded call received Stat
225. ctive calls are not affected when the mode is changed Night mode also affects the night transfer relays on the Options Card OPC The relays are activated when the system 1s placed in night mode Administrators can place any or all remote nodes into night mode or day mode The default feature code for Enable Network Night is 9861 The default feature code for Disable Network Night is 9862 NOTE The Night Ring On Off feature code 9860 affects only the node on which the adminis trator resides See page 8 for a complete explanation of administrator features DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA Page 162 DISA is a programmable feature that allows an outside party to dial into the system from an external DTMF telephone and then dial extension numbers hunt group pilot numbers and off node device extensions DISA callers do not have access to outgoing trunks or page zones Any of the trunk groups can be programmed to receive incoming DISA calls in day and or night mode When not in use for DISA the trunk group can be used for placing outgoing calls by stations with outgoing access permission NOTE Due to the natural characteristics of the trunk the volume level of DTMF tones trans mitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the system This natural degradation in tone volume may adversely affect the reliability of the DISA feature Other factors which can affect DISA performance are trunk noise and the quality a
226. cument by entering a document number or using digit translation depending on digit translation node pro gramming If the document is selected by number the system will ask the caller to ver ify the entry by pressing If the number is invalid the system alerts the caller and returns to the introductory recording The system checks the availability of the document and one of the following occurs e fthe document is available the system tells the caller how many documents have been selected and how many more documents can be requested as determined by the Maximum Selections Allowed value in the database It then returns to the recording to allow the caller to select more documents or end the selection process e If the document has been deleted or is being updated the caller is told that the doc ument is unavailable and returns to the recording If desired the caller selects additional documents and the system checks for their avail ability as described above If the maximum number of allowed documents has been reached the system informs the caller and gives the option of returning to the greeting or ending the selection process If a caller selects the same document more than once the system informs the caller of the error and allows another selection If desired the caller can cancel the document selections at this point by pressing the Cancel Fax Selections digit usually However once the next steps are completed the fax
227. d INTER TZL Axxess Administrator s Guide v LOv7 GE8 ON Hed SN ul pejuud eooz Jequie oN OUI ej 4eju uonoe ejyerido1dde oy oye pue apiny s40jDajsmunupy oy ut wwe y dn yooq uurery o joN 10215 NU IE E E Sursoyuo yo uet uojsAs 130 EN EA ERE KJ Suou Aq wwe y 1eo yooy uo AYM UONCULIOJUL Uee I4 UMOP YUM sqeodde uoneorpur were Tour e uM JOVSSAW WYV1V NV OL GNOdSHH OL ZH EA ERI EI 1 09 Yooy uo opu 3INLL MHOMLAN 3ZINOHHONAS OL Wd 10 EA ssoid 10 Wy 107 gy ssoid 70 40 dvjdsip 4nou z 4of 12s S1 wajsds oJ eum eg SUISULYS jnogirA Xd 0 oor EF ssoud YO 00 6 103 0060 19109 ord WX9 104 sojnurur pue SINOY ur owy 3y 19409 0 suojng pedp erp sy SN eyep oy Surgueqo moyym peoye drys o Eg ssoud yO 0007 c Asenuer Joy QOEOTO Sseud o durexo 104 eo pue Aep uow y 1947U9 0j suognq ped erp y os j eurrp ojeq 340439N EE PI KJ KJ 2109 yo Cuwa wss E EN KR BG 1 05 yooy uo opu HINLL ANV ALVG MYOMLAN YO IN31SAS LAS OL Ioquinu opou poursop oy 19709 UL opojy Av IOMON ojqeug EA EJ KA KJ 20 05 YO PON ISIN OMION ALUT NS KEN KEN IGE 20 09 yooy uo yM JGOW LHSIN YO AVC NI 3GON ATONIS V ADV 1d OL TE EN EJ EJ 2 0 yooy uo opu GOW AVG YO LHOIN NI W31SAS 3H1 39 Vd OL S3s8n1V33 NHOLIVHISININQV WALSAS APN s 40gjD4jsiunupy IY 0 19go1 sony 9 SOY uo uomeullojur po Iejop 104 soJnj 9j 10je3 srurup IC
228. d But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also the customer will be advised of the right to file a complaint with the FCC if necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures which may affect the operation of this equipment If so the customer shall be given advance notice so that any necessary modifications can be made in order to maintain uninterrupted service FCC Regulations AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 If trouble is experienced with this equipment contact a local authorized factory service representative for repairs and or warranty information The customer users and unau thorized technicians should not repair make adjustments to or attempt to service this equipment in any way In the event of trouble with the telephone line s this equipment must be disconnected from the telephone line s If trouble ceases the equipment must be repaired by an authorized factory service representative If the trouble continues to occur with the equipment disconnected the telephone company should be notified that they have a problem If this is the case repairs or adjustments made by the telephone company will be made at their expense Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 of FCC rules This equipment retur
229. d On Off 354 feature code The display shows SYSTEM FORWARD ON or OFF If disabled the system will ignore any system forwarding paths pro grammed for this phone until you re enable system forwarding e Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the System Forward On 352 System For ward Off 353 or System Forward On Off 354 feature code If disabled the system will ignore any system forwarding paths programmed for this phone until you re enable system forwarding System Forward Enable Disable Page 223 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 UNANSWERED SYSTEM FORWARD CALLS If a call that is following a system forwarding path is not answered or all forwarding points are in Do Not Disturb or busy its final destination depends on the type of call as shown below Page 224 ALL FWD POINTS ARE BUSY TYPE OF CALL OR DO NOT ANSWER ALL FWD POINTS ARE IN DO NOT DISTURB Intercom Rings at the last forwarding Call never leaves the principal station point until it is answered or the caller hangs up Call routing ring in except DISA Rings at last forwarding point until it is answered or caller hangs up Rings at the principal station until it is answered or the caller hangs up Direct ring in Rings at last forwarding point until it is answered or caller hangs up Rings at the principal station until it is answered or the caller hangs up Transfer from a station auto
230. d again for verification followed by You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows PASSWORD SAVED Outside callers will hear dial tone and stations return to the idle state REMOTE DO NOT DISTURB PROGRAMMING TO PLACE A STATION IN DO NOT DISTURB MODE USING THE REMOTE PROGRAMMING FEATURE NOTE After each entry non display phone users will hear a confirmation tone Outside callers using a DISA line will hear confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone Display phone users will not hear confirmation tones but will see a prompt asking for the next entry If calling from an outside telephone access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone If programming from another station lift the handset or press the Speaker button Enter the Remote Programming feature code 359 If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Enter the extension to be placed in DND If you have a display it shows ENTER PASS WORD f you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the extension s password followed by EJ If you have a display it shows ENTER FEATURE CODE NOTE f you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASSWORD and the
231. dialpad a Press Kl to set up a Primary cascade or press EM to set up an Alternate cascade A prompt tells you what the cascade s current status is If desired press EJ to return to the Personal Options Menu Then perform one of the following steps b To program a cascade level Press Klil then program the following 1 Enter the number of the level you wish to program 1 9 A prompt tells you the current status of the level 2 You have the following options Press Kl to enable or disable this level You cannot enable the level until a notification number is programmed Press KM to set up or change the personal telephone number If it is an extension number press EE Or if it is an outside number press EM Then enter the number If your Inter Tel phone has menu buttons you can enter the special characters for pause mailbox and new message count by pressing the corresponding menu buttons A prompt will play back the number for your verification If you entered an invalid or toll restricted number you will hear a warning and must enter the number again Press to set up or change the pager telephone number Then enter the number If your Inter Tel phone has menu buttons you can enter the spe cial characters for pause mailbox and new message count by pressing the corresponding menu buttons a prompt will play back the number for your verification If you entered an invalid or toll restricted number you wi
232. display phones The criteria are listed from highest priority to lowest priority Display Line 1 The following criteria are used to display the name on the top line of the ring in display This assumes that all of the necessary station flags are properly set and usernames are correctly filled in or left blank at the programmer s discretion for Call Routing Tables and Trunk Group Names 1 Outside Party Name provided by the Desktop Application if available 2 Outside Party Name provided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level 3 Outside Party Name provided by system speed dial If the collected number matches a number in a speed dial bin the system uses the name of the corresponding speed dial bin Outside Party Number provided by the Desktop Application Outside Party Number provided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level Outside Party Number provided by ANI service if enabled at the system wide flag level 7 Call Routing Table Name if the name is not blank 8 Trunk Group Name if the name is not blank 9 Default Trunk Group Name TG XXXXX Inter Tel Phone Displays Page 149 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 150 Display Line 2 The following criteria are used to display the number on the bottom line of the ring in display This assumes that all of the necessary flags are properly set 1 2 3 5 Outside Party Number provided by the Deskto
233. duled Time Based Application Routing STAR eese 285 SMDR Information Storage and Retrieval cece cece cece e erences 286 Vorce Mail Cac euo Cn OC ERE RRS e ee REE Ree CHOR KS CORO C SE ER 287 Using Voice Mal icp 3 ERERIEEREPECRETA GG ettn tune EP IFEJ4EIPAxueYa 4E dE 294 Page vi Table of Contents AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Uni ed Messaging 446a aee eo eee y de a 6 kde RC CREE CR GC CAE UR as 306 Automatic Fax Detection ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees cece nnn 310 Index 311 Default Feature Codes 323 Voice Mail Flowchart 325 Page vii FCC Regulations AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FCC Regulations Page viii Important 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules On the side of the equipment cabi net is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment Customers connecting this equip ment to the telephone network shall before such connection is made give notice to the telephone company of the particular line s to which such connection is to be made and shall provide the telephone company with the following information Complies with Part 68 of FCC rules FCC registration number BE2USA 64572 MF E for MrF rated systems BE2USA 64573 KF E for KF rated systems or BE2USA 24359 PF E for PBX systems USOC numbers of required
234. e e You cannot select a node as the message print output port backup e If Message Print output programming forms a loop the system will send the output to the node s backup Message Print port For example if the Message Print port on Node routes to Node 2 and the Message Print port on Node 2 routes to Node 1 the configu ration will cause an infinite loop Message Print reports for Node 1 would be printed to the backup serial port on Node 2 and vice versa e A two digit node number is inserted in front of the sequence number to indicate the node where the message originated The following is an example of the new message print string format for a message the originated on node 3 e 03 001 15 30 03 20 M6009 WRN EG CP e Corrupted Queue Was Cleared HISTORY QUEUE e Message Print will not route diagnostic messages that apply to another node except during manual Message Print requests Those messages will only be printed locally System Error Message Printing Page 265 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Message Print will not route messages during a startup or reset The system will wait one minute before starting to send messages Startup messages will only be printed locally Messages may not be printed in time sequence order on remote nodes The order of an incoming message print depends on how the message print was routed to the destination node Therefore a message print could possibly arrive at
235. e lift the handset You are immediately connected Page 205 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CALL SCREENING Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application can be screened announced or unannounced Separate programming flags in the database determine the methods used for transferring calls to stations with mailboxes stations with extension IDs and extensions without mailboxes or IDs When a call is received by an automated attendant or Call Routing Announcement application and the caller enters an extension number the programmed Transfer Method determines how the call will be transferred The Transfer Method flags can be programmed in the database If allowed in mailbox programming they can also be programmed by the mailbox user See page 301 in VOICE PROCESSING FEATURES The available Transfer Methods are as fol lows e Announce Only The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is transferred to the associated extension number When the station user answers the transfer the Voice Processor plays the caller s name and completes the transfer e Screened The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is transferred to the associated extension number When the station user answers the transfer the Voice Pro cessor plays the caller s name The station user has the options of replaying the name sending the call to voice mail if the
236. e 324 ACD Agent Log Out 327 LCD Contrast Control 303 ACD Agent Log In Out 328 Message 365 ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 Message Cancel Message Left 366 Agent Help Request 375 Message Cancel Message On 368 Phone Agent Help Reject 376 Message Silent Message 367 Answer Ringing Call 351 Microphone Mute On Off 314 Automatic Intercom Access On Off 361 Page 7 Automatic Line Access On Off 360 Page Receive On Off 325 Automatic Line Answer 350 Program Buttons 397 Background Music On Off 313 Program Station Password 392 Call Forward All Calls 355 Queue Callback Request 6 Call Forward If Busy 357 Record A Call 385 Call Forward If No Answer 356 Redial 380 Call Forward No Answer Busy 358 Redirect Call 331 Conference 5 Reminder Message 305 Default Station 394 Reminder Message Cancel 306 Directory 307 Remote Programming 359 Display Time And Date 300 Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up 4 Do Not Disturb 370 Review Buttons 396 Do Not Disturb Cancel 371 Ring Intercom Always On Off 377 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 Ring Tone Selection 398 Do Not Disturb Override 373 Routing Off 304 Feature Button Default 395 Station Speed Dial 382 Group Listen 312 Station Speed Dial Programming 383 Handsfree On Off 319 System Forward Enable 352 Headset On 315 System Forward Disable 353 Headset Off 316 System Forward On Off 354 Headset On Off 317 System Speed Dial 381 Hold Individual 336 Switch Keymap 399 Hold System 335 Transfer To Hold 346 Hookflash 330 Transfer To R
237. e Center paced nannan enna 221 Forward to an Attendant iu vases dva y ap xr PR YR ape XX sr oto Y OES 227 Forward to Voice Mall seres diusde by xA xor CE eS TR e SOR ean 227 How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number nnana nannaa 228 Speed Dialing iced dcr wes pde dc Ca ess o oe de AC RI EOE D C a d 230 System Speed Dialing s oa2 clever cei ae Ree ann EXAA A E eRe GR EA 230 Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers 4 42259 bbe RERO Y WA A 231 Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers 00 0 0 eese 231 Station Speed Dialing rg uk pia cxx oes a urur Rau VER ug e eas 232 Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names 45 232 Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers 0 00 cece cece ee eens 236 Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers 0 000 cece eee eee 237 Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directory eens 238 House Phone vC rrr REC aet oa e Wa e e S P e s 241 Bedialine 4 ici e EREREYRRER UO ESE LOLOL OST ee AUR ado AC EC Eo 243 Using the Last Number Saved Feature iid sick RR ER ER C IRE 244 Using the Last Number Dialed Feature nonna 0 0 00 244 Redirect Call 4 eee oui wine sav ren hh rem de ea rada To dle ite ncm ee eiie i ce 245 POSING 6 skied ees pce e dt geet nes Ced e MEN EGRE Ca co C C bio ceat iie d 246 Remove from Paging ianosseseeekbuecrerkecees otc hse eR ETE S PEE Ce Ee 247 Do Not Distar cede eS rn ER a IR ERROR Ra CRI RI ERR EH RARO ER Sie xe 247
238. e Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone You may press one of the following menu buttons ANSWER Press this button to end the current call and answer the ringing call SEND TO V MAIL This button appears only if you have a voice mailbox Press this button to transfer the call to your mailbox IC CALL TO DND Pressing this button will send Do Not Disturb tones to the caller If using a display Inter Tel phone the caller will see DO NOT DIS TURB 2 To return to the holding call Press the fluttering individual trunk button Call button Or button Page 201 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 202 TO RESPOND TO CALL WAITING USING A SINGLE LINE SET When you hear a single camp on tone every 15 seconds while you are on a call another call is waiting Do one of the following 1 If you wish to end the current call hang up The call rings at your station Lift the hand set to speak to the waiting caller If you wish to place the current call on hold hookflash and then enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected with the waiting caller To return to the first call on hold If you wish to end the current call hang up Return to the holding call by lifting the handset and entering the Individual Hold feature code 336 If you wish to place the current call on hold and connect with the original call Hook flash and then enter the Individual Hold f
239. e Hunt Group Remove Replace feature can be used at any time without affecting the Station Monitor ability If desired one station can be assigned as the supervisor for more than one hunt group To monitor a hunt group member s call the supervisor enters the Station Monitor feature code 321 and dials an extension number The supervisor 1s then connected to the call and can hear both parties but cannot be heard by either one If the monitored call is terminated transferred or placed on hold by the hunt group member the monitor function is terminated In the associated hunt group the supervisor may monitor any active intercom or CO to inter com call both hunting and non hunting including incoming outgoing and DISA to intercom calls Conference calls and calls that do not involve hunt group members cannot be monitored If the supervisor attempts to monitor a station that is not on an active call that allows monitor ing the system sends reorder tones and the supervisor must enter the feature code again to try another number If the supervisor attempts to monitor a station that is not in the hunt group or an idle station in the hunt group the system sends reorder tones and cancels the Station Call Monitor feature Station monitoring requires conferencing circuits If resources are not available when a super visor attempts to monitor a station the supervisor s display will show NO CNF CIRCUITS AVAILABLE and the monitor will not be allow
240. e Record the mailbox greeting and set personal options for a mailbox e Setthe password for a mailbox or extension ID NOTE To provide system security all mailboxes and extension IDs should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times This is especially important in the system administrator s mailbox which allows programming access to the other mailboxes The system administrator does not need to know the mailbox s password to perform mainte nance on another mailbox TO PERFORM MAILBOX GROUP LIST MAINTENANCE 1 Dialthe voice mail application access number You hear the main menu 2 During or after the greeting press El to identify yourself as a mailbox owner 3 Enterthe system administrator mailbox number and password 4 Press EE to access the System Administrator Menu 5 When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 6 Dialthe mailbox extension ID or group list number to be accessed If programming a mailbox or extension ID you hear the Personal Options menu Fol low the instructions on page 301 to program the personal options name password message envelope or greeting for the selected mailbox If programming a group list the current name is played You are prompted to enter a name After the tone record the name for the selected list W
241. e button begins to flutter when the data device answers and the display returns to date and time The phone can now be used as usual 4 Operate the data device according to the manufacturer s instructions The device must be able to come off hook and answer the incoming call If you wish to return the active data call to your primary voice path press the flutter ing button The call cost and elapsed time of the data call are displayed The data device can be used for initiating a data call without the use of an Inter Tel phone The user causes the modem to select a trunk or intercom channel and dial the desired number The data device can dial an extension number or a trunk access code followed by a pause and then a telephone number As soon as the data device comes off hook the button is lit at the associated phone s to indicate that the data port is busy The button remains lit until the data device finishes dialing outside call or the station user answers intercom call This pro tects the call during dialing to ensure that the dialing is not interrupted An Inter Tel phone user who attempts to transfer another data call to the data device or pick up the data call while the button is lit will hear a burst of reorder tone Digital Phone LED Rates Page 91 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 92 When a data device places an intercom call the call is placed in the non handsfree mode This ca
242. e dis play shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF FREEZING UNFREEZING THE NETWORK HISTORY Page 44 Administrators can freeze or unfreeze the fault history for any node in the network Service personnel can then pull the information from each node for troubleshooting purposes Nodes are assigned to freeze zones by the database programmer to allow selective freezes You must know which zone to freeze unfreeze and then enter the freeze feature code followed by the zone number A node can be in more than one freeze zone If you freeze a zone that contains a node that 1s already frozen the display will show SOME NODES ALREADY FROZEN and the node will remain frozen If you unfreeze a zone with unfrozen nodes in it the display shows SOME NODES ALREADY UNFROZEN To determine the individual freeze status of the nodes check the message print output NOTE Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel TO FREEZE OR UNFREEZE NETWORK HISTORY 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Enter the Network Freeze Zone System Histories feature code 9939 or Network Unfreeze Zone System Histories feature code 9989 Display shows SELECT FRZ ZONE 0 9 3 Enter the number of the zone you wish to freeze or unfreeze The display shows FREEZE ZONE XX IS FROZEN or UNFROZEN If you attempt change the state of the system history to its curre
243. e fixed button will light FWD Button System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FORWARD TO AN OUTSIDE NUMBER When programming a station for call forward to an outside telephone number a trunk access code is programmed before the telephone number If the station is called while the selected trunk group is busy the call will not be forwarded Calls will ring at the forwarded station until the call is answered or the caller hangs up The forwarded station s display shows FORWARD TO BUSY TRUNK The forwarded station s not the intercom caller s trunk and toll restrictions are checked when an intercom call is forwarded to an outside number When an outside call is forwarded to an outside number the Unsupervised CO timer is acti vated When the timer expires the call recalls the attendant If the attendant does not answer the recall before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected Stations with Forced Local Toll Call and Forced Long Distance Toll Call account codes cannot forward calls to outside numbers If a trunk group is assigned direct ring in to multiple stations and one of those stations is for warded to an outside number incoming calls on that trunk group are not forwarded to the out side number NOTE There may be some reduction in voice volume when an outside call is forwarded to an outside telephone number depending on central office trunk quality MANUAL FORWARDING TO PU
244. e handset The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUM BER To use the speakerphone While on hook press the Speaker button or GH The Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER 2 Ifyou want to place a private non handsfree call to an Inter Tel phone press the pound EJ button The display shows RING EXTENSION NUMBER 3 Press the desired DSS BLF button If calling an Inter Tel phone with handsfree answering enabled you are immediately connected If placing a private call calling a hunt group calling a single line set or calling an Inter Tel phone with the Handsfree feature disabled you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered If the called OHVA enabled station is busy and your station is enabled for immediate OHVA transmit do not hang up when calling a busy phone Press the DSS BLF button again If the phone s secondary voice path is available you are immediately connected for an off hook voice announce call and may speak Programming and Using DSS BLF Buttons Page 35 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 36 TRANSFERRING CALLS TO STATIONS 1 While on a call press the desired DSS BLF button The call is placed on transfer hold a Transfer to a station that is forwarded to voice mail You hear repeating double tones and the display shows DEST FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL b Transfer to voice mail The system waits for you to enter the mailbox
245. e hate teaver bd Re oe Seb to ea 296 Recovering Deleted Messages caus naccuedace kk hk eR RACE RACE ROC CE REC 298 S nding a MesedBE cud ur we aud na Rhee ed ea Ee K nd KERR SEES ER RR dd EE RR 299 Canceling Unheard Messages ices e deen eR RA RERO RARE OR REOR 300 Personal ODUONS cx 244 35 EO URSACHEN EHE ERR dE 301 Outside Caller Use of Voice Mail iu sudes a ER EY 4a e EE a Re E ead 305 Unified Messaging uud ica ee CR RICE Ee CR okay ted CU e ge ac Ce Ra eC cid 306 E C REM 307 Levels 2 dnd 5 wy an wea orari wo a dob eR E aH IRE EUR onc arg s ed V eid 309 Automatic Fax Detection ice ek br ae RI Ex ERR EE ew Rh rar ER a Rec 310 Unified Messaging Required for Fax E Mail 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 310 Fax Con Regulted a vosexu Yet ies S3 eR o oie a d Ea ao Ru bo Y eas 310 FAX E Mail Message Format 0 0 cece cee teen eens 310 Page 270 INTRODUCTION Introduction Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The Voice Processor can be used for any of the following applications Each application is described in detail in this chapter Automated Attendant The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide automated call answering service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated attendant When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instructions After hear
246. e hunt group call 1f the station is not busy until the Forward No Answer timer expires At this point 1f the hunt group s No Answer Advance timer has not expired then the call will be forwarded Once the No Answer Advance timer expires the call will circulate to the next station in the hunt group list e Hunt group calls will not forward to some destinations Hunt group calls will not forward to voice mail outside numbers or system forwarding paths e Announcement and overflow stations can forward hunt group calls If an announcement or overflow station has call forward enabled hunt group calls will fol low the forward and the forwarding destination station will act as the announcement or overflow station e Hunt groups can receive forwarded calls Stations can forward calls to a hunt group s pilot number Hunt groups can be assigned as message centers and or alternate message sources for individ ual stations Page 132 Hunt Groups and Call Forwarding System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 HUNT GROUP REMOVE REPLACE AND DO NOT DISTURB Hunt group members can temporarily stop hunt group calls from ringing at their stations by entering the Hunt Group Remove feature code as described below If a station is assigned to more than one hunt group this halts calls from all hunt groups Hunt group assignments cannot be removed individually Do Not Disturb can also be used to halt hunt group and other calls to the
247. e mail hunt group and the voice mail hunt group s pilot number is assigned as the alternate message source for each of the individual voice mail ports When a user responds to a message left by one of the voice mail ports the pilot number is automatically dialed and the call circulates through the hunt group until a voice mail port is available Without the alternate message source hunt group the call would return only to the port that left the message and would not circulate through the hunt group A station s message center or alternate message source does not need to be on the same node as the station It can be a station hunt group Voice Processor application or any off node device Alternate Message Source System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE OHVA The Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature allows an intercom caller either single line set or Inter Tel phone to establish voice contact with the called Inter Tel phone user even though the user already has a call in progress on the handset The called phone user can then talk freely on both connections using the handset for the original call and the speakerphone for the OHVA intercom call Note that the caller on the handset call will be able to hear the OHVA call In a network intercom callers can establish OHVA calls to Inter Tel phones on other nodes A PC Data Port Module PCDPM must be installed on a digital display pho
248. e new message as described on page 13 3 Press EM or ACCEPT to save the new message The display shows DATA BASE UPDATED and then returns to the SELECT DND MESSAGE prompt Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED System Programming Page 19 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 20 4 5 To program another message scroll to the desired message and repeat these steps Press EJ again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt b Password This option allows you to set a password that limits access to the admin istrator programming feature To select it press E or the PASSWORD menu but ton Then do the following 1 The display shows CHANGE PASSWORD TO Enter a password of up to eight digits then press EM Or to erase the password and leave it blank just press EM The display shows VERIFY PASSWORD Enter the password exactly as you did in the step above followed by EJ The display returns to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt If you hear reorder tones and see an error mes sage the passwords did not match and you must start over at the CHANGE PASSWORD prompt Reminder Messages This option allows you to program the reminder messages used by the stations To select it press E or the REMINDER MSGS menu but ton Then do the following C 1 2 3 4 9 d The display shows SELECT REMINDER MSG Enter a message numb
249. e of forwarding points to which the call will be sent Forwarding paths are programmed in the database Up to 200 unique paths can be pro grammed Each station can have up to three forwarding paths Two system timers are used with this feature System Forwarding Initiate This timer determines how long a call will ring unan swered at the principal station before moving to the first forwarding point The default value is 15 seconds and the range is 2 255 seconds System Forwarding Advance This timer determines how long the call will ring unanswered before moving to the next forwarding point The default value is 15 sec onds and the range is 2 255 seconds For each forwarding path assigned to the station the system checks the following three criteria to determine if and when a call should be forwarded Type of incoming call Up to six different types of calls can be programmed to be sent to the forwarding path They are Outside calls received through a call routing table including DID and E amp M calls but not including DISA calls Ringing outside calls Transferred outside calls including automated attendant and voice mail transfers Recalling outside calls DISA calls including DISA calls received through a call routing table Intercom calls Page 219 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 220 e Station status The system recognizes four different types of stat
250. e sets or DID devices e TI Card TIC and T1 E1 Card circuits can be used for installing off premises single line stations Single Line Caller ID Version 8 1 and later system software supports the transmission of Caller ID to single line sets For more information about Caller ID on single line sets see page 150 Single Line DTMF Sets Single line DTMF set users gain access to the features by hookflashing pressing and releasing the hookswitch quickly and entering feature codes Page 95 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Single Line Set Message Lamps The optional Lamp Option Card LOC for the SLC or SLC 16 supports message waiting lamps To enable a message waiting lamp on a specific single line station the station must have the Message Lamp station flag enabled In the default state it 1s disabled SLAs TIC and T1 E1 Card circuits cannot support message waiting lamps Single Line Ring Zones and Extended Ring Cadences In some installations where more than one single line device is connected in series to an SLC or SLC 16 circuit zoned ringing may be necessary The system can support devices with up to 3 Ringer Equivalences REs per circuit However the system can only ring 8 REs per board If the installation exceeds eight REs on any SLC or SLC 16 the system wide SLC Ring Zones flag must be enabled Also all circuits on the SLC or SLC 16 should have the Extended Ring Cadences station flag
251. e telephone number that was dialed by the station user Automatic Route Selection ARS System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Dial Rule 5 Add Account Code This non programmable dial rule causes the system to dial the account code that is associated with the call when it is available The account code can be entered using any of the account code types including All Calls Following as long as the system receives the account code before the end of dialing To use an optional account code the code must be entered before the number is dialed Dial Rule 6 Add Extension Number This non programmable dial rule tells the system to include the extension number of the station or Voice Processor applica tion that is being used to place the call Dial Rule 7 Add This dial rule adds a pound to the number dialed This dial rule can be programmed When ARS is selected the user dials the number including the area code if needed and the system does the following 1 Checks the dialed number and matches the dialing pattern to a route group The system checks the route groups in numerical order and selects the first group that applies to the dialing pattern of the number that was dialed NOTE If the Emergency Call feature is programmed to use ARS the emergency calls will always go through Route Group 1 regardless of route group programming Selects a facility group If all of the trunks a
252. e user enters the feature code the system will toggle the language to the station s Secondary Language which is Spanish To avoid this situation simply change the station s Secondary Language to Japanese and the station s Language field to Japanese NOTE Setting a station s Secondary Language field to a specific language will not work across nodes unless all nodes in the system are at least 5 2F6 or later This is because the older sys tems do not understand specific languages and expect to receive only Primary Language or Secondary Language values TRUNKS A flag in Database Programming determines the language that will be used by each trunk The language choices are Use Primary Language Use Secondary Language American English British English Japanese or Spanish This field can be set to any specific language so that the system can support more than two languages If the trunk is programmed for the Primary Lan guage callers who reach a Voice Processor application will hear the voice prompts in the Pri mary Language unless overridden by a Call Routing Announcement as described on the following page If programmed for the Secondary Language the voice prompts will be in the Secondary Language unless overridden By default all trunks are set for the Primary Lan guage NOTE Setting a trunk or digit translation Language field to a specific language will not work across nodes unless all the nodes in the system are at least 5 2F
253. e user must then select the desired option by pressing the corresponding key next to the display If the MEH key is programmed to use any other Forward feature code 355 358 the forwarding options will not be displayed when the ITI key is pressed the Inter Tel phone will operate the same as any other Inter Tel phone Any Inter Tel phone user can make any user programmable button a IST button that uses one of the forwarding feature codes 355 358 Refer to the procedures on page 167 for pro gramming user programmable buttons A user programmed IP button is lit only when the station is programmed for the call for warding condition enabled by that button For example if a user programmed SIDE button is set to forward calls when the station is busy the button will be lit when the Forward If Busy feature is enabled but not if the Forward If No Answer feature is enabled If an Inter Tel phone user has both a fixed XIII button and a user programmable EEUE button the fixed button will always light when the station is forwarded However the user pro grammable Pl button will be lit only when the forwarding option activated by that button has been selected For example if the user has the Forward All Calls feature programmed under a user programmable button that button will light 1f either the fixed or programmable BD button is used to select that feature However if the fixed button or a feature code is used to set the Forward If Busy feature only th
254. e variation in charges among network car riers the system s call cost calculation cannot be used as a prediction of actual charges This feature can only be used as a management tool to estimate call cost If call cost is set to zero call cost will not display during the call and the SMDR printout will show 00 00 In a network setting the call cost shown on the display and SMDR output use the factors and rates for the node on which the trunk resides In other words if a station on Node 1 dials what is considered a long distance number on Node 1 but the call is routed to Node 2 where the number is considered local the Inter Tel phone will use the local call cost rate from Node 2 The call rate used for calls between nodes will be based on the Network call rate Record Keeping and Maintenance Features System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 All outgoing calls using a trunk that is not subject to toll restriction are classified as one of the following call types for call cost calculation call cost type is programmed in the database e Free e Local e Toll Local e Toll Long Distance e Incoming Operator e Network e International STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is a system feature that provides a detailed record of outgoing and incoming calls The system records only valid calls Outgoing calls become valid when the Valid Call timer expires or polari
255. eakerphone can be disabled with the Handsfree Answering feature see page 176 If the handsfree option is enabled the speakerphone can still be used for receiving handsfree inter com calls but the user must lift the handset to speak when placing intercom calls and when placing or receiving outside calls The button is lit when the speaker is activated for outside calls or outgoing intercom calls Call monitoring and on hook dialing are not affected NOTE On certain handsfree to handsfree intercom calls voice volume levels may cause feed back to occur If this happens one user should pick up the handset Page 77 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Six Line Liquid Crystal Display LCD All Model 8560 Executive and Professional Display Phones have a six line LCD Each line has 16 characters A picture of the Model 8560 display is shown in the Figure below A pic ture of the Executive display is shown on the following page The top two lines are for stan dard call information and show the same displays as other display phones The remaining four lines are used for displaying feature related menus that change with the function being per formed by the phone intercom call outside call programming etc These lines have menu selection buttons on both sides eight buttons that are used for menu features When there are two prompts on a line like PREVIOUS and NEXT the button next to the word is the one tha
256. easier to recognize On all Inter Tel phones the tone is changed by entering a fea ture code and a code as described below There are ten ring tone options 0 9 Selection 0 will turn off the ring signals TO CHANGE PHONE RING TONE 1 Selectable Ring Tone While on hook enter the Program Ring Tone feature code 398 The display shows SELECT RING TYPE 0 9 OR SCROLL To select a specific ring tone Enter a number 1 9 for the desired ring tone The display shows RING TYPE X SELECTED To scroll through the tones Press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVI OUS button to scroll backward through the tones Press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll forward You cannot scroll to selection 0 you must enter 1t as described below The display shows RING TYPE X SELECTED To turn off ringing Enter ll or press the RINGER OFF menu button The display shows RING TYPE OFF SELECTED Lift and replace the handset or press the pound button EJ both ends of the Volume button or the ACCEPT button to exit The selected tone will be heard when the phone rings unless ringing was disabled The display shows RING TYPE X SAVED Page 165 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 EXTENSION NUMBER USERNAME TIME AND DATE DISPLAY When a display phone is idle the extension number username time and date are displayed While on a call in Do Not Disturb or unconditionally forwarded
257. eature the Enable Daylight Saving Time flag in Database Programming must be set to Yes In systems running software versions 8 1 and ear lier you must reset the system time whenever Daylight Saving Time begins and ends A system administrator can manually reset the system time or date when it is necessary for example when the system is defaulted or for daylight saving time Any administrator can change the date and time that appears on all display phones and in the SMDR reports The day of the week is automatically calculated and set by the system when the date is entered TO SET THE SYSTEM DATE AND TIME NOTE If you make a mistake press to backspace or press EJ or CANCEL to leave it unchanged and start over 1 While on hook enter the Set Date Time feature code 9800 Your display shows DATE current date If you do not need to change the date press El or ACCEPT to skip to the TIME XX XX prompt 2 Use the dialpad buttons to enter the month day and year For example press 020301 for February 3 2001 When finished the display shows TIME current time If you entered the date incorrectly the display shows INVALID DATE and you are prompted to enter a new date NOTE If using a station programmed for Japanese enter the date as year month date For example 010203 for February 3 2001 If you do not need to change the time press El or ACCEPT twice to exit The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED 3 Use the dial
258. eature code 336 twice TO MOVE A CAMPED ON INTERCOM CALL TO DO NOT DISTURB While on a call you hear call waiting signals Phones with menu buttons Press the DO NOT DISTURB or IC CALL TO DND menu button Other Inter Tel Phones Press the DIT button or enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The XE button lights The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications Hookflash twice to return to the current call Call Waiting System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CALL TRANSFER FEATURE CODES There are two feature codes for transferring intercom and outside calls to other stations Voice Processor applications hunt groups off node devices or outside telephone numbers The call transfer options are as follows e Transfer to ring You can transfer intercom or outside calls to another station a Voice Processor application a hunt group or an outside telephone number e Transfer to hold Either intercom or outside calls can be transferred to another station and placed on hold using this feature NOTE For information on screened and announced transfers from automated atten dants refer to SYSTEM FEATURES and VOICE PROCESSING FEATURES in the Installation Manual TRANSFER TO PARK LOCATIONS In
259. eatures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 268 Customized System Programming Reports Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Voice Processing Features CONTENTS PAGE Introd ction up tt snene sumed hes eeeeeeee eens wae ee wees 271 Automated Attendant lt 2 uuu dis coe oe E re RERO eee KS ear dees ERA CR eens 272 Automated Attendant Applications llllleseleeee ees 273 Automated Attendant Recall Destination 0 0 cc eee eee 274 Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings 0 00002 e eee 274 Extension ID uud AGA dee OR OR REC EK ROREM E RCER CR AREA CRONACA IC ERS 275 Call Routing Announcement 0 ccc ccc cw cece cece e cere eee e eens 276 Call Routing Custom Audiotex Recordings 0 cc eee eee ait Call Screening he sa dated wn tare gare hes QU ed ba i ee ee ee ee idc a d 277 Digit Translation o anaana ERRXARRE CRETA VXEXTAWE CE Ead A ER 277 Dieu Translation Nodes 44344 ob dote Ea SR bade Sot EG a EER ade EN 2A bLax On Demaond 252423 deu tropa Ra RACK RGAERCAOURRCE ORO OCA ewneee see ee 279 Dnic4njg PD Imm 281 Locating M ANG ra TETTE TEICOOTI DOO 1 759 07 22 027 1012 ST 282 Enters d NANG cessu xod A eee Per kx ade a Hee Rhee adobe at 282 Changing the First Last Name Search 0 00 0 cece eee 282 Listening to the Next Previous Name 0 cece eee eee ee 283 JROGEDIBE a NANG uses yx RU esri ten nr UTEE ERR AREE
260. ect ring in calls If there is not a primary attendant recalls remain at the stations and ring until answered or dis connected by the system One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation Page 129 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO ANSWER A HOLD OR TRANSFER RECALL AT AN ATTENDANT STATION When you see a hold or transfer recall display XXXX RCL FROM YYYY and hear a recall ringing 1 If desired lift the handset 2 Outside call recall Press the medium flashing Call button or individual trunk button Or press the button If more than one trunk is recalling pressing the button selects the outside call indicated on the display Intercom call recall Press the button or the ANSWER menu button If you are busy when the intercom call recalls it will camp on The button flashes at the medium rate but you do not hear recall ring signals Conference call recall Press the flashing button to connect with the confer ence call The button flashes slowly and the display shows CONFERENCE IN PROGRESS f the parties are still talking press the button again and hang up to return the parties to their conversation The button flutters You can enter the conference at any time by pressing the fluttering button If the Hold timer expires the conference recalls your station again f the parties have hung up hang up to disconnect the call HUNT GROUPS The Hunt Group feature permits calls to be placed to
261. ed Multiple supervisors can monitor the same station providing that a conference circuit is available for each supervisor The supervisor station cannot use the Agent Help feature while monitoring a call NOTE Station Monitoring is not supported on an IP or SIP device engaged in a P2P call see page 105 UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring Page 137 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 138 TO MONITOR A HUNT GROUP CALL DESIGNATED SUPERVISOR ONLY 1 To use the speakerphone While on hook enter the Station Call Monitoring feature code 321 You hear a confirmation tone and the Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXT TO MONITOR To use the handset Lift the handset and enter the Station Call Monitoring feature code 321 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows ENTER EXT TO MONI TOR Dial the extension number or press the lit station speed dial or DSS BLF button of the station to be monitored You are automatically connected to the call and the display shows MONITORING username To monitor another hunt group member s call Enter the Station Call Monitoring feature code 321 and dial the extension number or press the speed dial button To terminate the monitor feature off hook hang up Jf on hook press the Speaker button UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ACD HUN
262. ed the designated trunk access code is used to seize a trunk and the programmed emer gency number is dialed regardless of any station or trunk group toll restrictions Automatic Route Selection ARS Calls placed using ARS except Emergency Call feature calls are always subject to toll restriction regardless of the selected trunk group s toll restriction programming Note that only the station s COS is checked the trunk group s COS is not Network ARS Calls When determining toll restriction for an ARS outgoing call the network checks the station toll restriction based on the database information on the node on which the station resides not the node that contains the trunk which the system uses to place the call The system does not check the trunk COS for ARS calls Exemption From ARS Only Restriction Each trunk group may be designated as exempt from automatic route selection ARS only If exempt station users with the ARS Only class of service can select the trunk group directly Absorbed Digits Trunk groups that are subject to toll restriction can be programmed to absorb ignore the first digit s dialed This allows the system to handle the dialed digits just as they would be by the local telephone company or PBX to which the sys tem is connected Station And Trunk Group Classes Of Service Each station and trunk group can be assigned one or more classes of service COS which can restrict or allow cert
263. ed intrusions and toll fraud If the central office does not provide supervision it will not disconnect the call when one party hangs up it is possible for a caller to remain connected to a CO trunk cir cuit If this happens and the caller begins dialing the call could be placed through the sys tem and would then be billed to the system s owner The system cannot check this type of call for toll restriction and may not register the call in SMDR This problem could arise when a call is connected to a station or when a call is in an unsupervised conference CALLER ID DNIS AND ANI NOTE The Advanced CO Interfaces premium feature is required to use the following features The system supports Caller ID ANI and DNIS These features provide information about the source of the call Page 148 Caller ID Caller ID information gives the caller s telephone number and or name ANI Automatic Numbering Identification ANI information identifies the caller s telephone number The system receives a specified number of digits ANI This is a form of ANI that does not have a specified number of digits The sys tem receives a star before the ANI digits to signal the beginning of the caller s tele phone number Then there is another star after the digits to signal the end of the ANI information DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS identifies the number that was dialed to reach your location The system receives a ba
264. ed messages that will appear on the top line of the display unless Do Not Disturb is enabled while the user is on a call or off hook in which case message 1 1s automatically selected When a station in Do Not Disturb is called by a display phone user the caller sees the selected message Remove from Paging Page 247 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Do Not Disturb messages can be programmed in the database or using an administrator sta tion Default Do Not Disturb messages are programmed as follows 01 DO NOT DISTURB 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL 13 OUT UNTIL 04 IN MEETING 14 WITH A CLIENT 05 ON VACATION TIL 15 WITH A GUEST 06 ON VACATION 16 UNAVAILABLE 07 CALL ME AT 17 IN CONFERENCE 08 AT THE DOCTOR 18 AWAY FROM DESK 09 ON A TRIP 19 GONE HOME 10 ON BREAK 20 OUT TO LUNCH Do Not Disturb works as follows in a network setting e Each node has its own list of Do Not Disturb messages that can be used only on that node e Anintercom caller will see another user s Do Not Disturb display when calling across nodes e The network allows DND override across nodes The system has default Do Not Disturb messages in both the Primary and Secondary Lan guage However messages that use Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through an administrator s station see page 18 The language of the messages seen by the station user both when programming hi
265. ed to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 33377744432999 would enter FRIDAY When adjoining char acters are located under the same button press the IIT button once to advance to the next character For example 6 BT 666 IDE 6632999 would enter MON DAY Refer to the chart below to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O or 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO JN pa ba long The character available depends on the software version The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language When using either mode phone users may use the speed dial buttons and or the button to enter stored numbers or messages Speed dial numbers can be chained together when enter ing messages that require more that 16 keystrokes to create the de
266. eed dial number e System Directory Intercom and Outside The intercom directory enables display phone users to look up intercom extension numbers and usernames The outside directory enables display phone users to look up system speed dial numbers and asso ciated names NOTE The Directories premium feature is required to use the system directory SYSTEM SPEED DIALING Page 230 Speed dialing allows station users to dial stored telephone numbers quickly Up to 1000 48 digit system speed dial numbers can be stored in system memory If desired an identifying name can also be stored with each number See also the System Directory feature on page 238 and Caller ID on page 148 Each node in a network has its own system speed dial numbers System speed dial numbers can be used only on the node where they are programmed To keep system speed dial numbers confidential some or all can be programmed as non dis play numbers Non display numbers can be used by any station user but are displayed only on the programming station s phone Non display numbers cannot be redialed or saved as station speed dial numbers at a display phone Non display numbers will appear in the SMDR report System speed dial names can be programmed by an administrator using English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination The programmed language for the phone does not affect the characters that can be viewed That is no matter what language t
267. eetings not the STAR applica tion The STAR routes the call to the right application Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Information Storage SMDR informa tion can be stored on the Voice Processor s hard disk and then processed using call record sorting software such as Inter Tel s Inside Track VOICE MAIL NETWORKS A Voice Processor can be installed on any or all nodes in the system network These Voice Pro cessors can also be networked together to allow a caller to leave a message on the local Voice Voice Mail Networks Processor for a mailbox located on another Voice Processor in the network The maximum capacities of the network are listed in the following table FEATURE DEVICES CAPACITY Voice Processors per network 100 Local or Off Node Mailboxes and or Extension IDs per 10 000 Voice Processor node System Audio Interface Ports per node 40 Applications per node 150 Group Lists per node 1000 Members per group list 1500 Remote Message Notification Numbers per mailbox 18 Audiotex Recordings per node 500 Message Notification Retrieval Applications per node 1 System Passwords per node 4 Time Slot Groups per node 10 This is the maximum number of nodes supported by the software System traffic may limit the actual number of nodes that can be supported without affecting system performance gt This is the maximum number of mailboxes supported by the NT based software
268. egistered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation MS DOS and Microsoft Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation AudioCodes is a trademark of AudioCodes Ltd Table of Contents AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Table of Contents CONTENTS PAGE FCC Regulations wiccssicccccsaiesdewtddset ReRe ARP ESCE a XR SS REGE EE viii Safety Re9 latlolis co codes ook eom nonno on Gen We Ros escenas RR n UR ir ed e xi Introduction 1 isguviiiurDu END 2 Telephone System 24d orae d do ICI e e d C Ei DICK ee o d Gp Dane c CR oda 2 VOICE PROCESSOF uico a koe Poe dea X ae dee t d IE ab dR D bie dU ab ie Dae d D C ded 4 Administrator Procedures 7 Introduction uod acida babe d le c RC Ee de Ca Scd OR Ca be ap E RR Re ce de 8 System Administrator Features l eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ehh nnn n 8 Voice Mail Administrator Features 0 ccc ccc ccc ce eee cece eee rnt 45 System Hardware 71 Tutroductio ix xw ace xo e Ear Roc RAN REE CR 4 do ROCA CARER ra da 73 Station Instruments ies rra dd XR EX OR oe ERROR ECC ADORA eee een keke ees 74 Optional System Equipment 46s cide secs kx deve wees ERE Rd a 108 System Features 111 Introduc Ri 4a de x e ER HC AR IQ eee be de E CC ACCRUE See eee ER 115 Access to the Features a aae eoo a Re COE SCRECIGRIA ROC CROCO CURA COR OR RR RR es 115 Attendant Stations 1c xoa CR ROGA WCG OC SERRE ROE OR eRe eee eS 128 Hunt FOIS 6o cacao Gee P
269. eived or only when priority messages are received This defaults to All Messages Another mailbox flag called Call For Each New Message determines when the Voice Processor will attempt to make the notification call when more than one message is waiting to be heard e Ifthe Call For Each New Message flag is enabled the Voice Processor will attempt immediate notification each time a new message or priority message depending on the option selected is received regardless of the status of the applicable retry timer If a retry is in progress it will place the call to the number on the cascade table that would have received the retry call as described below For example if the Voice Processor was on level 3 of a cascade attempting retries it will not start over again at level 1 It will place the call to level 3 e Ifthe Call For Each New Message flag is disabled new messages will not generate a remote notification attempt until the Subscriber has logged on and listened to the wait ing message s However retry calls will be attempted 1f the applicable retry timer expires as described below Retry Call Attempts The mailbox can be programmed to retry notification calls when it encounters a busy trunk or trunk group Each cascade level can be programmed with a Number of Call Attempts value of 1 1000 calls If the mailbox user accesses the mailbox between the time the message is received and when remote notification is su
270. eize it Toll restriction is applied to any calls placed after the seizure of the trunk TO SEIZE A DEVICE 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Press the Special button and enter the Seize Device feature code 9973 The display shows ENTER BOARD 3 Enter the board number on which the device to be seized is located if you enter a single digit press EJ after the digit to continue If you enter an invalid board number the display shows INVALID BOARD NUMBER Do not enter the CPU board number 0 The display shows ENTER PORT 4 Enter the port circuit number of the device to be seized if you enter a single digit press E after the digit to continue Valid numbers depend on the type of board If you enter an invalid board number the display shows INVALID BOARD NUMBER If there is only one device on the selected port the selected device is seized as if the user had directly entered the extension or trunk number If there is more than one device on the selected port the display shows ENTER DEVICE Enter the number of the device to be seized Valid numbers depend on the type of devices installed If you enter an invalid board number the display shows INVALID BOARD NUMBER When the device has been selected it is seized as if the user had directly entered the extension or trunk access number 5 Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code
271. el Phones f off hook hang up You hear a progress tone and the Tl vvt ton is lit The display shows FWD condition TO XXXX If you attempted to forward calls to a station that is unconditionally forwarded to your station or if the forwarding path already has 10 stations your display shows INVALID FORWARD PATH you hear reorder tones and you must enter a new destination Single Line Sets Hang up TO CANCEL ANY CALL FORWARD REQUEST e Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones Press the IH button and then press the FWD OFF menu button You hear a progress tone and the BUD button is unlit The display shows ANY CALL FORWARD CANCELED e Other Inter Tel Phones Press the lit BYTE button the Speaker button lights then press the Speaker button both buttons go off You hear a progress tone Display phones show ANY CALL FORWARD CANCELED Single Line Sets Lift the handset enter any Call Forwarding feature code 355 358 and hang up How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number Page 229 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SPEED DIALING Three system features provide speed dialing They are as follows e System Speed Dialing Up to 1000 48 digit system speed dial numbers can be stored in the system e Station Speed Dialing Each station user can program up to 10 16 digit station speed dial numbers Display phone users can program a 16 character name for each station sp
272. elcome to Fax On Demand For a product list press 1 For a price list press 2 When you have made your selec tions press to continue Or to cancel your selections press Or you can use a series of digit translation nodes that break the document selection into categories and or allow callers to dial individual document numbers If fax delivery times are set to specific days or times the introductory recording should also include this information Fax On Demand DIRECTORIES Directories Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 There are two types of Voice Processor directories that can be enabled or disabled in the sys tem Mailbox and Extension e The Voice Mailbox Directory is a list of mailbox subscribers their recorded names and mailbox numbers e The Automated Attendant Directory provided to all Auto Attendant callers is a list of all mailbox subscribers and extension ID owners and their recorded names The directories can be selected in the following ways e From the voice mail or Automated Attendant main menu Press the EB button Using a Call Routing Announcement application Press the Digit Translation digit designated for directory access See page 276 for a detailed explanation of digit trans lation e Asa voice mail subscriber Subscribers can access the directory by pressing E when ever they are prompted to enter a mailbox number If a directory is disabled or em
273. em alarm displays on your node Compression On Off 9962 Compresses call processing messages sent to Database Programming speeding up transfers You should not dis able this feature unless instructed to do so by Inter Tel per sonnel Compression Statistics 9961 Dumps various statistics related to the Database Program ming compression algorithm This feature should be used only when directed to do so by Inter Tel personnel Diagnostics On Off 9900 Enables or disables system diagnostics mode to perform diagnostics functions such as freezing unfreezing the data base printing message logs and seizing a device for trou bleshooting purposes NOTE Because diagnostics mode affects system perfor mance it is recommended that you run the diagnostics pro gram when the system is idle Enable Network Day 9862 Places any or all remote nodes into day mode you are prompted for the node number Enable Network Night 9861 Places any or all remote nodes into night mode you are prompted for the node number Modem Enable 9866 Enables a local or off node modem in the system using the modem s assigned extension Modem Disable 9867 Disables a local or off node modem in the system using the modem s assigned extension Modem Reset 9869 Resets a local or off node modem if the modem is unable to answer an incoming call or sync up with the external modem Night Ring O
274. en a request for help call rings the Agent Help Exten sion can choose to join the call or enter this feature code to reject the request Answer Ringing Call 351 Answers the call that has been ringing or holding the long est at that station Refer to page 151 for the priority list Inter Tel phones use the ANSWER button Trunk Access Codes Page 117 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Continued Automatic CO Access On Off 360 Inter Tel Phones Only Allows the phone user to deter mine how ringing outside calls will be answered simply by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button auto matic answer or by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button and pressing a Call button individual trunk button or the ANSWER button Automatic IC Access On Off 361 Inter Tel Phones Only Allows the phone user to deter mine how ringing intercom calls will be answered simply by lifting the handset automatic answer or by lifting the handset and pressing the IC button or a Call button if there is no IC button Automatic Trunk Answer 350 Using this feature code station users with allowed answer can pick up trunks that are ringing into the system but that are not actually ringing at their stations This feature does not pick up transferred calls or recalls that are ring ing at the station Backg
275. enabled to allow the longer cadence to be used instead of the short inter nal cadence With ring zones enabled devices 1 3 on the card will ring first 4 6 ring next and so on until all devices have rung The table below explains the difference between standard and extended ring cadences for the various types of single line devices used on the Inter Tel phone system in the United States SINGLE LINE DEVICE CADENCE TYPE DESCRIPTION SLA SLC SLC 16 or T1 Standard IC Ring This is a repeating 2 second cadence that rings OPX twice Each ring lasts 200 ms and is separated from the next ring by 400 ms of silence The remaining 1 2 seconds is silent Extended IC Ring This is a repeating 6 second cadence that rings twice Each ring lasts 800 ms and is separated from the next ring by 400 ms of silence The remaining 4 seconds is silent Standard CO Ring This is a repeating 6 second cadence that rings once for 2 seconds followed by 4 seconds of silence Extended CO Ring Same as Standard CO Ring cadence Model 8560 Model 8520 Standard IC Ring This cadence has two 250 ms rings every 2 Professional Executive seconds Standard and Associate MDPM Extended IC Ring This is a repeating 3 second cadence that rings once for 1 second followed by 2 seconds of silence Standard CO Ring This is a repeating 6 second cadence that rings once for 2 seconds followed by 4 seconds of silence Extended CO Ring This
276. endant 227 to message center 227 to outside number 227 to voice mail 227 unsupervised CO timer 227 Call Key 81 Call Pick Up 208 Call Processing Card CPC 41 Call Processing Version Feature Code 126 324 Call Routing Announcement 4 271 276 277 Page 312 Call Routing Custom Audiotex Recordings 277 Call Routing Table 219 Call Screening 206 277 301 Call Transfer 203 Call Waiting 201 Callback Queue station 180 181 trunk 194 CallerID 148 displays 149 inSMDR 262 Caller ID DNIS and ANI 148 Caller Information 149 Calling Party Number 159 Calling Party Number Field 160 Camp On 180 194 hunt groups 131 moving call to DND 202 station 180 tones 201 trunk 194 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication That You Left 184 Canceling a Waiting Message 185 Canceling Unheard Messages 300 Cascading Remote Message Notification 291 Cascading Remote Messaging 291 Central Processing Unit CPU Card 73 Change Language Feature Code 175 Changing the First Last Name Search 282 Circuit Cards 73 Circuit Number Display 79 Class Of Service COS 155 ARS only 156 day night 162 speed dial override 230 Clear Network Alarm 39 Clear Network Alarm 9851 39 Clear System Alarm 9850 39 Clearing Alarms 39 Conferencing 209 adding parties 211 exiting parties on hold 212 exiting re entering 211 placing on hold 213 Connecting a Headset 88 Consultation Hold 198 199 Courtesy Paging Phone 241 CPC Modem 41 enable disable 41 programming a DSS BLF but
277. enna e Relocate the equipment cabinet with respect to the receiver e Check that the equipment cabinet and receiver are not on the same circuit the equip ment cabinet must be powered from an isolated dedicated AC outlet If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC help ful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00398 5 If RFI problems persist contact Inter Tel Customer Support The Axxess system is now product safety certified by Canadian Standards Association CSA for use in both the United States and Canada Page x Safety Regulations AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Safety Regulations Important Safety Instructions CAUTION The NRTL C indicator adjacent to the CSA mark on the product label signifies that the Axxess System has been evaluated to the applicable ANSI UL and CSA Standards for use in both the United States and Canada NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory is a designation granted by the U S Occupational Health and Safety Administration OSHA to laboratories which have been accredited to certify products to U S Standards Before installation also check the local electrical codes for important information concern in
278. entering For the let ter A press the number 2 button one time and for the letter F press the number 3 button one time When you are finished press POUND 324 Zero is not a valid entry To spell a name please press the associated number on the telephone dialpad with the desired letter of the person s name you are entering For the letter A press the number 2 button once for the letter B press it twice and for the letter C three times When you are finished press POUND 325 Please select the days of the week 326 To select individual week days press 3 Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 59 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 60 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 327 Service is set for Monday through Friday 328 Service is set for each day of the week 329 Recording canceled 330 The system was busy and could not deliver message notification at the speci fied time 331 The system was unable to deliver message notification due to a programming error 332 Extension ID 333 the operator 334 the operator 335 Remote Messaging will call 336 To change a cascade level press 1 337 To select a message notification category press 4 338 Please enter the cascade level you wish to program 339 with a pager number of 340 To change the
279. er L 4 Attendant s new extension username v v If necessary select COS number to program by scrolling v v Press 1 or Press 2 or ON menu button OFF menu button to enable COS to disable COS AT ANY LEVEL Press or the Speaker button to cancel any unsaved changes and back up to exit pro gramming Press or ACCEPT to save changes and back up one display level INFORMATION IN THIS CHART IS SHOWN AS FOLLOWS YOUR INPUT PHONE DISPLAYS Station Database Programming Flowchart If desired select another COS number to program by scrolling Page 17 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 18 System Programming You can use your administrator station to program the following system wide information Define Do Not Disturb messages The messages for the Do Not Disturb feature can be reprogrammed through an administrator s station See page 247 for information concerning their use Administrators can delete or change messages 01 20 to any value up to 16 characters When the system has a programmed Primary and Secondary Lan guage the system has default Do Not Disturb messages in both languages Available languages are American English British English Spanish and Japanese The current language of the programming phone determines which list is programmed See page 172 for a description of the Change Language feature The Secondary Language transl
280. er or scroll to the desired message To scroll to the correct message press the Vol ume button or the SCROLL plus NEXT and PREVIOUS menu buttons When the display shows the desired message enter the new message as described on page 13 Press EJ or ACCEPT to save the new message The display shows DATA BASE UPDATED and then returns to the SELECT REMINDER MSG prompt Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED To program another message scroll to the desired message and repeat these steps Press EM again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt Station Extensions This option allows you to assign new extension numbers to sta tions To select it press Kl or the STN EXTENSION menu button If programming a station 1 Press KB or CHANGE EXT The display shows ENTER STATION EXTEN SION Enter the extension number of the station to be programmed using one of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When a valid number is entered the circuit information is displayed Press Edi again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the extension number username and circuit number of the station that most closely matches the partial
281. erence e Ifthe party who adds the new member is on the originating party s node the party will be added to the conference circuit already allocated This conference is still restricted to the four party limit e Ifthe party who adds the new member is not on the originating party s node a new con ference circuit is allocated from the second node Because this allows more than four parties in a conference users should be warned that voice levels can be degraded as more parties are added to the conference Page 209 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PLACING A CONFERENCE CALL Page 210 TO PLACE A CONFERENCE CALL 1 While on a call Inter Tel Phones Press the button or press the Special button and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music and the button flutters The display shows CALL NEXT PARTY TO CNF Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music Place an intercom or outside call to another party or return to a call on hold to be included in the conference Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones users can press the IC DIRECTORY or OUTSIDE DIR menu button to look up numbers if desired NOTE An existing conference is not a valid party for another conference Place the party on conference wait hold Inter Tel Phones Press the button aga
282. es FEATURE NAME CODE Account Code All Calls Following 39 Account Code Optional 390 ACD Agent Login 326 ACD Agent Logout 327 ACD Agent Login Logout Toggle 328 ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 Agent Help 375 Agent Help Reject 376 Answer Ringing Call 351 Automatic CO Access On Off 360 Automatic IC Access On Off 361 Automatic Trunk Answer 350 Background Music On Off 313 Call Forward All Calls 355 Call Forward If Busy 357 Call Forward If No Answer 356 Call Forward If No Answer Busy 358 Change Language 301 CO Hookflash 330 Conference 5 Data 340 Default Station 394 Directory 307 Display Outside Party Name On Off 379 Display Time Date Axxess IP Mode 300 Display IP Address SIP Mode Do Not Disturb 370 Do Not Disturb Cancel 371 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 FEATURE NAME CODE Do Not Disturb Override 373 Enhanced Speakerphone Enable 310 Feature Key Default 395 Group Listen 312 Handsfree On Off 319 Headset Enable 315 Headset Disable 316 Headset On Off 317 Hold Individual 336 Hold System 335 Hunt Group Remove 322 Hunt Group Replace 323 Hunt Group Remove Replace 324 LCD Contrast 303 Model 8000 Phones Only Message 365 Message Cancel 366 Message Cancel Current 368 Message Silent 367 Mute On Off 314 Page 7 Page On Off 325 Program Bit Rate 393 Program Keys 397 Program Station Password 392 Queue Request 6 Record A Call 385 Redial 380 Redirect Call 331 Reminder Message 305 Reminder Message C
283. es will be delivered When the caller ends the selection process by pressing the End Fax Selections digit usually or reaches the allowed maximum number of documents the system requests fax dialing information from the caller The caller enters and verifies his or her extension number to be printed on the cover sheet and the caller s fax machine telephone number The system checks the entered number and one of the following occurs e Ifthe number is valid the system tells the caller when the document will be deliv ered this depends on the programmed fax delivery times in the Voice Processor database and returns to the recording e If the number cannot be dialed by the Message Notification Retrieval application due to toll restrictions the system tells the caller that the number cannot be dialed and asks for a new number e Ifthe caller enters an invalid number the system tells the caller the number is invalid and asks for a new number Page 279 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 280 9 The caller hangs up or returns to step 2 to select more documents If more documents are selected and canceled the documents that were selected and accepted previously will still be sent Each time the caller accepts the documents and enters the dialing information the documents are prepared for transmittal They cannot be canceled after that point 10 The Message Notification Retrieva
284. esides When changing an Agent ID on the node where the hunt group resides the remotely logged in station using that Agent ID will be logged out even though the Agent ID still exists on the remote node The hunt group will then contain the new Agent ID in its removed list making the new Agent ID available for log in use When changing an Agent ID on the node on which the logged in station resides a node remote from the hunt group the remote member will be logged out and the old Agent ID will no longer exist on that node The hunt group on the original node will contain the old Agent ID in its removed list because this ID still exists on that node e During a database restore on a node containing ACD hunt groups that use Agents IDs all Agents IDs are placed into each hunt group s removed list All stations will be logged out during the restore e When the extension number of a logged in station is changed the new extension will be logged in with the same Agent ID and will not be disconnected This applies to stations logged in both remotely and locally Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups Page 147 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TRUNK FEATURES This section explains the trunk functions and programmable features CAUTION While this system is designed to be reasonably secure against CO trunk misuse by outside callers there is no implied warranty that it is not vulnerable to unauthoriz
285. ess code for easier trunk selection and number dialing Station users can also program pauses and or hookflashes into the stored outside telephone numbers For example the number can contain a specialized common carrier SCC local number a pause and an access code When programming speed dial numbers each hookflash and each pause is considered one digit The durations of the hookflash and the pause are determined by the programmable CO Hookflash and Pause Dialing Digit Length tim ers Station Speed Dialing System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Display phone users can program an associated name for each station speed dial number Speed dial names can contain up to 16 characters To program speed dial names dialpad but tons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation in English Spanish and or Japanese Katakana Only digital display phones can display Japanese characters Analog phones and Executone IDS phones do not support Japanese displays When programming speed dial names you can press the button or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound EJ button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk E button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode e In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons
286. ess to a mailbox a fax on demand function or a station or hunt group that has an associated mailbox or extension ID Digit translation can be programmed for each digit 0 9 and plus a Timeout that is used when the caller does not enter a digit Each digit can lead to a digit translation node that has its own digit translation values This layered Call Rout ing Announcement digit translation creates a tree of programmable digit transla tion nodes Voice Processor Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Record A Call This feature allows a station user to record an ongoing call in a voice mailbox message When a station user enters the Record A Call feature code the sys tem places a call to the station s assigned Record A Call application When the applica tion answers the system sets up a conference call with the station s Record A Call mailbox If programmed the mailbox plays a greeting to indicate that the recording 1s in progress STAR The Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR enhances the pro grammability of the voice mail application greetings With STAR applications can be programmed to play alternative greetings for holidays and weekends A STAR applica tion is a table of up to 20 entries that serves as a routing table which tells the Voice Processor which application will be used based on day and time information in the table The applications are programmed to play the gr
287. essor PC adds each call record to the SMDR buffer file as it is received The amount of disk space allocated for SMDR storage is determined in Database Programming The default value is zero megabytes of memory If the call records use disk space exceeding 80 of the allotment the system generates an alarm and displays it at the primary attendant station and all telephone system administrator stations Another alarm message is generated if the allotted space is 100 filled If the maximum buffer capacity is exceeded the oldest call record s are discarded as new ones arrive NOTE Since each SMDR call record takes up approximately 81 bytes on the Voice Processor PC nearly 13 000 calls can be stored in each megabyte of hard disk space The SMDR records which are stored in ASCII binary format are buffered until they are cleared by the programmer If desired the programmer may save and or restore SMDR data along with the system database to floppy disks using the Voice Processing Save and Restore feature If desired the SMDR records can be retrieved and processed using Inter Tel s Inside Track a separate call accounting software package to create customized reports In a network setting the Voice Processor will buffer SMDR records that are sent from other nodes in the network SMDR Information Storage and Retrieval Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 VOICE MAIL The voice mail feature all
288. et to None the Ell will be ignored Group list description Group list number Mailboxes included in the list There can be up to 1000 group lists in the system and up to 1500 entries per group list Group Lists are not included in the Automated Attendant or voice mail directories Instructions for using group lists are given on page 299 Group Lists Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TO STATIONS Each mailbox has a programmed Message Notification Station This is usually the extension number that matches the mailbox number associated mailbox However a different number can be used for the mailbox s message notification station non associated mailbox e Associated When the extension number message notification number and mailbox number for a station all match that station user can forward calls to voice mail and have the call go directly to the associated mailbox s personal greeting Even if other mail boxes use that extension number as their message notification extension e Non Associated The extension number assigned as the Message Notification Station for a non associated station is an extension number that does not match the mailbox number For example a hunt group pilot number can have a mailbox but the message notification must be sent to a specific station so that a message lamp can be lit or mes sage notification signal can be sent If a
289. ewed using this feature code Ring Intercom Always On Off 377 Enables disables the feature that allows the station to always place private non handsfree intercom calls Ring Tone Selection 398 Inter Tel Phones Only Selects the type of ringing alert tone that will be heard from the phone Routing Off 304 Disables System OAI Offering Control for third party apli cations This feature requires you to enter a password Once you disable routing you cannot enable it again i e only the third party application can enable routing Station Monitor 321 Hunt Group Supervisors Only Allows a designated hunt group supervisor to monitor a call of anyone in the associ ated hunt group Station Feature Codes Page 121 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Continued Station Speed Dial 382 Dials programs one of the 10 station speed dial numbers Station Speed Dial Programming 383 when followed by a location code 0 9 Inter Tel phones use the Station Speed Dial button plus a location code for programming and dialing or they can program speed dial buttons for one button dialing Switch Keymap 399 Inter Tel Phones Only This allows a phone user to switch between standard and alternate keymaps System Forward Enable 352 Enables or disables the database programmed System System Forward Disable 3
290. example of a Call Routing Announcement application with a multi layered tree is shown on the next page Call Routing Custom Audiotex Recordings Page 277 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 13 Sample Call Routing Announcement Tree EXT 2500 Thank you for calling X Company if you know the party 5 extension number you may dial it now For a company directory press For Sales information press 3 For technical support press 4 CALLER DIALS CALLER DIALS A eae DIALS A CALLER DIALS 3 CALLER ah s 4 NUMBER THAT BEGINS NUMBER THAT BEGINS WITH 1 WITH 2 Company Call is sent to extension Transfer to Sales Node To Transfer to Hunt Group Directory number dialed speak to the operator press 0 To 2001 Tech Support select Sales information by fax press 1 To speak to a Sales repre sentative press 2 C ALLER DIALS 0 CALLER DIALS 1 CALLER DIALS 2 Transfer to Transfer to Node Sales Info Fax If Transfer to Extension Operator you know the fax document number please 2000 Sales Hunt Group dial it now If you wish to speak to the oper ator dial 0 For a product list dial 2 For a price list dial 3 For training information dial 4 Then press to check your selec tions and enter your fax number or press to cancel CALLER DIALS 0 Transfer to Operat
291. extension number Press EB or ACCEPT to program the displayed station or scroll to another station as described below System Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EJ or ACCEPT to continue 2 The display shows CHANGE X number TO EXTENSION Enter the new extension number for the station If you enter an invalid number you hear reorder tones and must try again f you entered an extension number that is already assigned the display shows CONFLICTING EXTENSION and you hear reorder tones When the display returns to ENTER STATION EXTEN SION you must start over and select a new extension number 3 Press EM or ACCEPT to exit to the ENTER STATION EXTENSION prompt The display shows UPDATING DATABASE for four seconds and then DATABASE UPDATED Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED NOTE Although the system begins to update the database when you press EJ or ACCEPT it may take longer than the four second display to change the extension in the system especially in a large or busy system 4 Press EM or ACCEPT again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION
292. fax documents should include all dialing instructions The recording should state whether documents can be selected by number and or list all options If fax delivery times are set to specific days or times the recording should also include this information CALL SCREENING Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application can be screened announced or unannounced Separate programming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to stations with mailboxes stations with extension IDs and extensions without mailboxes or IDs See page 206 for details DIGIT TRANSLATION Digit translation allows callers to dial a single digit to access a designated extension number mailbox or hunt group Up to 12 digit translation storage locations 0 9 are available for each Call Routing Announcement application To use digit translation the Call Routing Announcement application must have special programming After the application is created and programmed the voice mail administrator s mailbox is used to make a custom audiotex recording that explains the options to callers as described on page 48 The custom audiotex recording is then assigned to the Call Routing Announcement application A caller who listens to the Call Routing Announcement recording can dial the sin gle digit location number to reach the designated destination For example if the hunt group extension for a customer support grou
293. ff feature code 319 The display shows HANDSFREE MODE ON or OFF Intercom Calls System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 STATION TO STATION CALLING Receiving Intercom Calls TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL ON AN INTER TEL PHONE If you hear a double tone and a call announcement handsfree call and the Speaker button is lit respond handsfree or lift the handset Display phones show TO username to identify the source of the call If you hear repeating double tones private call lift the handset or press the Speaker EXE or button to respond handsfree Display phones show INTER COM CALL FROM username to identify the source of the call Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones Instead of answering the call you may press one of the following menu buttons SEND TO V MAIL This option appears only if you have a voice mailbox Pressing this button sends the call directly to your mailbox greeting IC CALL TO DND Pressing this button will send Do Not Disturb tones to the caller and allow you to program a Do Not Disturb message If using a display phone the caller will see DO NOT DISTURB See page 247 for detailed instructions on using Do Not Disturb TO RECEIVE AN INTERCOM CALL ON A SINGLE LINE SET When you hear repeating double tones lift the handset TO RECEIVE A TRANSFERRED TO HOLD INTERCOM CALL NOTE If the station does not have an button the call will ap
294. for the display to return to date and time Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers TO DIAL A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER AT A SINGLE LINE SET 1 Liftthe handset Inter Tel phones can remain on hook 2 If placing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS If placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 Hookflash and enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 You hear a confirmation tone Then dial the location code 0 9 The number is dialed TO DIAL A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER AT A NON DISPLAY PHONE 1 Lift the handset or remain on hook 2 If placing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS If placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 Inter Tel phone with a speed dial button Press the speed dial button of the desired number The number is dialed Inter Tel phone without a speed dial button Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 You hear a confirmation tone Then enter the location code 0 9 The number is dialed TO DIAL A STATION SPEED DIAL NUMBER AT A DISPLAY PHONE 1 Lift the handset or remain on hook 2 fplacing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS f placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 I
295. formation Storage and Retrieval 286 Source 267 SPCL Button 115 116 SPCL Key 81 84 116 Speaker Key s 81 82 Speakerphone 75 enhanced 76 123 324 standard 76 Special Button and Hookflash 115 Special Delivery Messages 299 Speed Dialing 230 feature codes 123 324 house phone 241 location codes 230 non display numbers 230 pauses hookflashes 31 232 PBX 31 232 programming 31 232 station 232 system 230 Speed Dial Buttons 167 168 Speed Dial Keys 81 82 Standard Account Codes 195 Standard Display Phone LCD 79 speakerphone 75 Standard Keymap 80 169 Standard Speakerphone 76 Standard Alternate Keymap Switching 169 STAR 5 Station Feature Codes 117 Station Features Return to Default 256 Station Instruments 74 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 73 261 account codes 195 buffering 261 286 display elapsed time in seconds 262 information storage 5 271 options 261 record retrieval 286 report format 262 suppressed digits 262 Station Monitor 137 Station Off Hook Alarm 37 Station Password 252 Station Programming 12 14 Station Programming Using an Administrator s Station 14 Station Speed Dialing 232 feature code 123 324 pauses hookflashes 232 PBX 232 programming 232 Page 319 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Stations 172 programming at administrator station 14 toll restriction COS 155 Station To Station Calling 177 Subscriber 289 294 Supervisors 136 Suppress Absorbed Digits 262 Suppress E
296. g Custom Voice Mail Prompts 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 51 Page 7 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTRODUCTION During database programming any Inter Tel phone can be designated as a system administra tor and or a voice mail administrator All administrator stations should be equipped with dis play phones to show system alarms and to make programming easier This section gives you all of the instructions for using the Administrator Features of the system and voice mail e System Administrator Features begin below e Voice Mail Administrator Features begin on page 45 A quick reference card is located in the front of this book for your convenience Refer to the System Features and Voice Processing Features chapters for detailed descriptions of the system and Voice Processor and for general user procedures NOTE The telephone system provides a choice between American English British English Spanish and Japanese prompts and displays As an administrator you must know which lan guage is considered Primary and which is Secondary for the system SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR FEATURES Page 8 Any display Inter Tel phone attendant or non attendant can be assigned as a telephone system administrator System administrator stations provide the following services e Place the local node or other nodes in the network in night or day mode e Setthe date and time of the local node e Setthe
297. g node trunk groups on other nodes However when ARS is used to place an emergency call Route Group 1 1s used even if it contains nodes This means that the network can access a trunk on a node other than the user s node if the user accesses ARS and dials the emergency number Local trunks must be installed and used for emergency number trunk access and nodes should not be used in Route Group 1 When a user places an emergency call every administrator in the network receives an emergency alarm Emergency Outgoing Access Lists Page 159 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 160 Calling Party Number Field Each station can be programmed to send an identifying number when a call is placed The Calling Party Number field is located in Devices and Feature Codes Stations Individual Station programming This information is required for emergency 911 calls in some states You can program any number up to 48 digits in the Calling Party Number field However check with your service provider to determine their specific requirements for this field This number will be sent in the ISDN setup message in the Calling Party Number Information Element In addition the system will also send the extension number of the station in the Calling Party Number Subaddress Information Element The CO should ignore this information element if it does not support it NOTE There is no default number for this field It is up to the prog
298. g the installation of telephone and electronic equipment The following safety information is reprinted from UL 1459 When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire elec tric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 2 10 11 Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example in a wet basement Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or covered This prod uct should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated in the manual If you are not sure of the type of power source to your building consult your dealer or local power company This product is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet
299. g the system software license If disabled the modem and extension is placed into DND In DND the modem rejects all calls and does not allow camp ons Any outside calls that attempt to ring a disabled modem are automatically transferred to the Primary Attendant TO ENABLE DISABLE A MODEM NOTE Programming off node modems across an IPRC connection is not supported 1 While on hook enter the Modem Enable 9866 or Modem Disable 9867 feature code The display shows ENABLE DISABLE MODEM EXT 7 2 Enter the extension of the modem local or off node to enable disable The display shows MODEM ENABLED DISABLED NOTE If an invalid modem extension is entered the display shows INVALID MODEM EXTENSION ASSIGNING THE CPC MODEM TO A DSS BLF BUTTON To easily monitor the CPC modem it is recommended that you program a Direct Station Selec tion Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF button to reflect the modem s status see page 34 When programmed for a local or off node CPC modem the DSS BLF button indicates the following states e Unlit Modem is not active e Fast Flash Modem is ringing e Slow Flash Modem is disabled e Solid Modem is connected to a call Enabling Disabling The Call Processing Card Modem Page 41 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RESETTING THE CALL PROCESSING CARD MODEM CAUTION Do not reset the modem if it is connected to a Database Programming session If you do the
300. gital Phones It is intended for Analog Phone use No further programming is necessary This button can be used for scrolling forward through displays When the phone is idle it can be used for adjusting volume in place of the Volume button Digital Phones use the Volume button NOTE The volume adjustment button on the Digital Phones also can be used for scrolling through displays However the Analog Phone volume buttons are used only for adjusting volume Analog Phones need to have Previous and Next buttons pro grammed in their keymaps to scroll through displays They also need an Accept button to accept entries when in numeric programming mode Page 83 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Default Inter Tel Phone Feature Buttons When the system is in the default state all phones are in the same keymap group and have the following feature buttons Feature code descriptions start on page 116 The Special button is represented by keycaps with MSN on the Inter Tel phone KEY FUNCTION CALL KEYS 1 4 Selects an outgoing trunk if idle or answers a call on the button IC Selects a voice channel or picks up a holding or camped on intercom call DND Programmable button 1 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 PROGRAMMABLE Undefined values Can be programmed with any feature code trunk KEYS 2 6 14 16 18 and 21 35 access code or extension number or can be programmed as a sta tion or system speed di
301. gnostic ISDN View 9948 Diagnostic Major Reset 9962 Diagnostic Mark As Leaks 9945 Diagnostic Mark As Quiescent 9946 Diagnostic Minor Reset 9964 Diagnostic Network Freeze Zone 9939 System Histories Diagnostic Network Unfreeze Zone 9989 System Histories Diagnostic Network Group 9963 Diagnostic Print Auxdata 9972 Diagnostic Print Message Log 9975 Diagnostic Print Network Log 9976 Diagnostic Query Node Traffic 9978 Diagnostic Show Version 9928 Diagnostic Spare 1 3 9910 9912 Diagnostic System History 9974 Diagnostic View Displays 9983 Program Database 9932 Seize Device 9973 System History Freeze 9993 System History Unfreeze 9998 VOICE MAIL FLOWCHART NOTE At any menu level you can press Ed to cancel or return to the previous menu or press EM to accept SUBSCRIBER MAILBOX MENU Send a Broadcast Message EB EITHER Press the MSG button to respond to a message from voice Mailbox Group List Maintenance Zl mall Create Custom Recording EZ i OR Call the voice mail extension number press Ea and enter your Assign Custom Greeting 4 mailbox number ACCESSING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR S MAILBOX Enter your password and then JE Press EN to access administrator features Enter Mailbox Number Enter Group List Number PERSONAL OPTIONS CREATE CUSTOM RECORDING Record Greeting If existing recording plays Record Di
302. h British English Spanish and Japa nese prompts and displays The system selects the language to use for each call as determined by the trunk station and Voice Processor programming as described below Japanese prompts can be viewed only on the digital display phones Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japa nese displays Language Selection The system can be programmed to use a Primary Language and a Secondary Language The available languages are American English British English Spanish and Japanese A station flag in Database Programming determines the language that will be used by each station For example 1f the station 1s programmed for American English all Inter Tel phone displays will appear in American English Also when the station is used for calling a Voice Processor application the voice prompts will be in American English unless overridden by a Call Rout ing Announcement as described on page 174 If programmed for Japanese the displays will be in Japanese Katakana characters and the voice prompts will be in Japanese unless over ridden By default all stations are set for the system s Primary Language NOTE Only digital display phones will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese displays All displays and default messages in the system are provided in American English British English Japanese and Spanish Station programmed messages including those programmed through t
303. h a PCDPM support up to four 50 button DSS BLF Units There can be a total of 20 of these 50 button DSS BLF Units on the system The presence of the optional Mini DSS does not affect the number of units supported With Executive Display Standard Display Professional Display and Associate Dis play Phones Executive Professional Standard and Associate Display Phones equipped with a PCDPM support up to four 60 button DSS BLF Units There can be a total of 20 of these 60 button DSS BLF Units on the system NOTE Because each 50 and 60 button DSS Unit is powered by an AC transformer and is connected to the phone s PCDPM the Units do not require a DKSC or DKSC 16 DKSC 16 circuit that is separate from the phone With Executone IDS Phones IDS phones can be equipped with up to three 48 button DSS Units The IDS phone does not require a PCDPM There can be a total of 80 IDS 48 button DSS Units on the system Each 48 button DSS Unit requires an EKSC cir cuit NOTE For details about the 48 button DSS BLF Unit see a version 7 0 or earlier Eclipse Installation and Maintenance Manual Although the 50 button Unit is designed for Model 8560 and 8520 Phones and the 60 button Unit is designed for Executive Professional Standard and Associate Display Phones you can use either DSS BLF Unit on any of these phones Each single unit provides one button access to 50 or 60 extension numbers and or other features resources For instructions on progr
304. h station in the extension list as a separate agent it will not ring all of the stations on the list at once If the hunt group is set for linear or distributed order a call will ring at all stations on an extension list at once when the call reaches that point in the hunt group list ACD Agent IDs ACD hunt group members are referred to as agents Agents log in to the ACD hunt group to receive calls and log out to halt ACD hunt group calls An ACD hunt group can be pro grammed to circulate calls to agents in two ways e Agent IDs If the hunt group is programmed to use ACD Agent IDs each agent is assigned an Agent ID number which he or she enters during the login procedure described below The hunt group calls are routed to logged in agents according to their Agent ID number instead of their station extension Because the Agent ID is not associated with any station extension the agent can use any station in the system to log in and does not have to use the same station every time e Members If the hunt group is not programmed to use Agent IDs it will have a list of stations and will send calls to the stations where agents are logged in NOTE For optimum system performance there should not be more than 1000 Agent IDs in any hunt group and no more than 2000 Agent ID entries in all hunt groups com bined ACD Agent IDs can be included in Extension Lists which allow several ACD Agents to receive a call at once When a call camp
305. hange the button into any other type of button such as a speed dial or feature button even though it is assigned to a user programmable button Any Inter Tel phone button can be designated as a secondary extension button but buttons with lamps are recommended so that the secondary extension button can show call status The table on the next page shows the definition for each possible lamp flash rate The secondary extension button shows only calls that appear under the Call buttons at the pri mary station Any calls on individual trunk buttons at the primary station are considered pri vate calls and will not appear on the secondary extension button Page 85 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Normally the secondary extension button will not show intercom calls However if the pri mary station does not have an IC button intercom calls will appear under a Call button and therefore will appear on the secondary extension button If the primary station is a single line set all calls will appear on the secondary extension button After answering a call on the secondary extension button the station user can transfer it back to the primary station using one of the following methods e Transfer to hold To transfer the call to hold at the primary station press the secondary extension button announce the call if desired and then hang up e Transfer to ring To transfer a call to the primary station pre
306. he Emergency Call feature is used When the Emergency Call feature code defaults to 911 is dialed at intercom dial tone the Emergency Call feature will select a trunk defaults to Trunk Group 1 and then automatically dial Emergency Number 1 If a station user accesses a trunk or ARS and dials Emergency Numbers 1 10 the dialed number will automatically override all toll restrictions and trunk access programming If the system is installed in an area where 911 service is not available it is suggested that the number for the local police or fire department or the telephone company operator be substi tuted If the database programmer renders this feature inoperative by removing all trunk access and or by removing the dialed digit string the database program will present a warning message indicating that the feature has been disabled and requiring the programmer to acknowledge or change this condition before being allowed to continue Like all other feature codes the 911 feature code can be changed to another 1 to 5 digit code if necessary but it is not recommended An emergency number will be blocked if there are no trunks or emergency numbers programed in the database or all trunks in a trunk group are busy If the Emergency Call feature is programmed to use ARS route group 1 local calls will be used even if its dial patterns are reprogrammed Emergency calls by default use the first local trunk group and will not be sent usin
307. he Forward feature codes When the IE button is pressed the display shows a menu of call forwarding options The user must then select the desired option by pressing the corresponding button next to the display If the BD button is programmed to use any other Forward feature code 355 358 the forwarding options will not be displayed when the ITI button is pressed Any Inter Tel phone user can make any user programmable button a MEM button that uses any one of the forwarding fea ture codes 355 358 Secondary extension buttons described on page 85 can be assigned to user programmable buttons during keymap programming If so the phone user can determine the primary station that is associated with the secondary extension button by using the feature button programming procedures given below TO DISPLAY THE CURRENT BUTTON ENTRIES 1 While on hook enter the Review Keys code 396 The display shows PRESS THE KEY TO REVIEW 2 Press the feature or speed dial button s to be displayed The display shows the feature username or speed dial location name and KEY VALUE feature code extension num ber or location code For a secondary extension button the display shows SECOND ARY station TO RETURN THE BUTTONS TO DEFAULT VALUES While on or off hook enter the Feature Key Default feature code 395 If off hook hang up The display shows FEATURE KEYS DEFAULTED TO PROGRAM A FEATURE CODE IN A USER PROGRAMMABLE BUTTON OR ASSIGN A PRIM
308. he administrator s phone can include English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination In displayed lists such as directories the English Spanish characters are alpha betized before the Japanese characters Therefore Japanese names will be at the end of the list When programming a feature that requires a time and date an English Spanish phone user will enter the date in the order month day year and the time in the order time AM PM The Japanese phone user will enter the date as year month day and the time as AM PM time The displays show the time and date differently as well For example the English Spanish dis play will show the time and date as 12 25 TUE NOV 28 and the Japanese display will show TUE 11 28 12 25 Multilingual Capability System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Secondary Language Selection There is a field provided for each station in the system called Secondary Language This field corresponds to the Change Language feature 301 In version 5 2 this feature toggles between the System Primary Language and the System Secondary language In versions 5 3 and later this feature toggles between the System Primary Language and the station s Second ary Language or it can specify a language This allows any station in the system to have its own secondary language or use the System Secondary Language giving the system the ability to support more than just
309. he caller will hear either the subscriber s recorded greeting recorded directory name or if no recording has been made the mailbox number XXX is not available prompt The caller can then record a message If the caller is using the Automated Attendant feature and accepts the name the caller is trans ferred to the selected destination station or mailbox if it is available If a station extension is dialed and the destination is not available the caller is sent to the associated mailbox if one exists REQUESTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION After a name is selected from the directory the caller has the option of requesting additional information When requested the mailbox number extension number and name are played if they have not been disallowed Individual mailboxes and extension IDs can be programmed as Private in Database Program ming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed by a caller who knows the number but the associated mailbox and extension number information are not available to the caller only the name is played Mailboxes and extension IDs can also be programmed as Unlisted That means that the num ber will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number USING THE DIRECTORIES TO USE A DIRECTORY 1 Dial the voice mail access number You hear the recorded system greeting 2 Press EM to access the Directory Services applicati
310. he message press 2 576 To leave a voice mail message press 1 577 To make a return call press 2 578 Please hold while your call is being transferred to an outside number 579 580 Not used 581 has just listened to the original message 582 This mailbox has 583 This message was canceled by the originator 584 I m sorry there are no network mailboxes available for node 585 For the directory press now 586 I m sorry you cannot reply to this network message 587 The following message could not be delivered to 588 This nonsubscriber message could not be delivered to Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 63 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 64 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 589 Enter the number of the remote extension 590 To cancel this message press 591 Fax on demand was unable to deliver one or more faxes Please view the Fax Delivery Report for details 592 I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number 593 Message received from an outside number with no Caller ID information 594 I m sorry do not have valid Caller ID information 595 the network 596 Your call is being handled by the Inter Tel voice processing system Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004
311. he phone uses or which characters are in the name the phone user will be able to see the speed dial names exactly the way they were programmed In lists such as speed dial directories the English Spanish char acters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters Japanese names will be at the end of the list System speed dial numbers are subject to toll restriction unless a system wide option has been enabled that allows any station to dial any system speed dial number regardless of toll restric tion The system speed dial numbers are stored using location codes 000 999 When dialed the numbers appear on a display phone unless they have been programmed as non display num bers Display phone users can also view system speed dial numbers and names without dialing however with non display numbers only the name is displayed System speed dial codes 000 999 can be stored in user programmable phone buttons by fol lowing the directions given on page 167 These buttons allow one button dialing of system speed dial numbers The system speed dial numbers and names are stored in battery backed RAM and will not be erased in the event of a power failure The system speed dial numbers and names are programmed by the installer or at any adminis trator station Refer to page 31 for administrator programming instructions Speed Dialing System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers T
312. he title Documents are stored in the fax library using the system administrator s mailbox To do so a fax machine places a call to the system administrator s mailbox and sends the document See page 47 for instructions Fax On Demand transmits a cover sheet with each faxed document that includes the recipient s extension number your company name as programmed in the database the date the number of pages to be sent and a list of included documents If you wish you can store a company logo to be used on the cover sheet The logo can be up to 5 5 inches tall if it is larger the sys tem automatically cuts it off at the 5 5 inch mark The logo document is stored like other fax documents using the system administrator s mailbox If you have several fax documents you may want to create and store a catalog document that callers can request before continuing their selections For example the catalog can include the document number title description of the contents number of pages and last revision date for each document Fax documents can be saved and restored using the Voice Processing Save And Restore data base program The system Save And Restore operation has no effect on fax documents How ever if the system database 1s defaulted all fax documents are deleted The digit translation node used for fax document selection should have a greeting that explains how to select documents For example it can say something like W
313. hen you are finished press EM Then press EJ again to accept the name Or press Kl to replay the name you just recorded or Ei to erase and re record it Maintaining Mailboxes and Group Lists Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 IMPORTING FAX DOCUMENTS If you have a fax card in your Voice Processor you can use the voice mail administrator s mailbox to import fax documents Imported documents can then be requested by callers who use the Call Routing Announcement application that is programmed to provide the Fax On Demand service TO IMPORT A FAX DOCUMENT 1 a BR WON Importing Fax Documents Using a fax machine dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press El to identify yourself as a mailbox owner Enter the system administrator mailbox number and password Press Ell to access the System Administrator Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press El to select the Import Fax option Note that if the Fax On Demand feature is not enabled the system will not accept this digit The system may inform you of one the following if not con tinue to the next step All system fax ports are busy Hang up and try again later The system already contains the maximum number of fax documents allowed Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional doc uments
314. hen your button a Call button or individual trunk button is fluttering lift the handset and or press the fluttering button or the ENNIE button for an outside call You are connected to the caller Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the call TRANSFER RECALLS Transfer to Hold If a call is transferred to another station and is not answered before the appropriate Transfer timer expires and if it was not transferred to hold the call recalls the transferring station s recall destination defaults to the station and the Recall timer is started The call rings until the Recall timer expires If unanswered it recalls the transferring party s attendant and the Aban doned Call timer is started If the transferring station has no attendant the call continues to recall at the transferring station If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected by the system In a network a station s transfer recall destination can be an off node device TO ANSWER A TRANSFER RECALL Inter Tel Phones When the recall rings at your station the display shows username RECALLING FROM username Lift the handset and or press the button Press the medium flashing Call button or individual trunk button or press the button if the call is not automatically connected Single Line Sets If you hear a repeating signal of four tones and a paus
315. hrough the prompts until you reach the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming session If a system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following Delayed Reset Press Kll or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The display shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Kll or the IMMEDIATE menu button to reset the system now NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 3 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 PUES a Press 3 or TRUNK menu button i ENTER TRUNK OPTION UD 7 Press 1 or INDIVIDUAL TRUNK Press 2 or TRUNK GROUP menu button menu button ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION L v wr v ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION 4 Enter desired trunk extension number Malis i SEE NEXT PAGE r i INDIVIDUAL TRUNK OPTION Press 1 or ANSWER SUPERVISION menu button p ANS SUPERVISION OPTION L 4 Y Y Y Press 1 or POLARITY Press 2 or VALID Press 3 or VALID REVERSE menu bu
316. ic mode IET button unlit alphanumeric mode button lit In alphanumeric mode the number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 77776444844 would enter SMITH When adjoining char acters are located under the same button press the ITI button once to advance to the next character For example 5666 BEIDE 66337777 would enter JONES The letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons NOTE Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones have a Message Lamp located on the upper right hand corner of the phone If programmed for the Message feature this lamp will also light while in alphanumeric mode The intercom directory is automatically updated whenever usernames and or extension number information is reprogrammed The outside directory is updated whenever a system speed dial number or name is reprogrammed Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directory System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Only administrator stations will be able to view administrator feature codes using the directory If the Diagnostics Mode feature is enabled you will also be able to see the diagnostic feature codes NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C i 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l P 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e
317. ide and you hear Do Not Disturb tones when placing an intercom call you may use the following procedure to break through Do Not Disturb and complete the call DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE INTER TEL PHONES WITH THIS FEATURE ENABLED ONLY Do Not Disturb Override When you hear Do Not Disturb tones while placing an intercom call press the Special button and enter the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 If the called station is idle the call rings as a private intercom call If the called station 1s busy your call camps on Page 251 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REMOTE FEATURE PROGRAMMING The Remote Programming feature allows a user to place a phone in Do Not Disturb mode DND or forward the station s calls either from another station or through DISA Each station has a password to limit access to this feature See page 162 for information about DISA In a network Remote Programming can be performed on one node for any Inter Tel phone that is programmed as an off node device on that node You must go through DISA for remote pro gramming of any phones that are not programmed as off node devices STATION PASSWORD The station password is used only for the Remote Programming feature NOTE To prevent unauthorized use of the call forward feature all stations using Remote Pro gramming should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the extension number or
318. idual Trunk Keys 81 82 Information Messages 265 Initializing a Subscriber Mailbox or Extension ID 295 Input Panel 102 Inside Track 108 Installation and Configuration 99 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 2 Intercom feature code directory 238 network 241 number display 164 speed dial 238 Intercom Calls 176 automatic answer 170 callback queue 180 181 campon 180 messages 65 182 off hook voice announce 187 placing calls 178 private 176 receiving calls 177 Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback 180 Internet Protocol IP devices 99 local loop support 160 MGCP 104 PhonePlus 99 Single Line Adapter SLA 99 SoftPhone 99 Internet Protocol Card IPC 74 Internet Protocol Resource Card IPRC 74 Inter Station Messages 65 182 alternate message source 186 answering 184 canceling message you sent 184 canceling waiting message 185 indications 182 mailboxes 182 silent 183 viewing 184 Inter Tel AIM Phone 93 Introduction hardware 73 IP Internet Protocol devices 99 IP and SIP Devices IPSLA 99 peer to peer P2P 105 phones 99 softphone 100 troubleshooting 107 IP Devices IP PhonePlus 99 IPSLA 99 IP SoftPhone 99 Model 8660 99 IP Limitations 99 IP Softphone 100 J Japanese Prompts and Displays 11 alphanumeric 13 date and time 10 Do Not Disturb 18 248 multilingual capability 172 reminder messages 19 258 system speed dialing 32 230 K Keymaps 80 Keymaps Switching 169 L Lamp Option Card LOC 96
319. idual trunk or Call button flashes slowly and the display shows the call cost and elapsed time Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users may press one of the following menu buttons OUTSIDE DIR This button appears only if you are using ARS Press the but ton to use the outside directory as described on page 238 STN SPEED DIAL Press this button to use a station speed dial number as described on page 232 SYS SPEED DIAL Press this button to use a system speed dial number as described on page 230 REDIAL Press this button to redial the last number dialed or saved as described on page 243 e Single progress tone Enter a forced account code using the dialpad buttons or a pre programmed speed dial button refer to page 195 The display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE and the digits as they are entered You hear outside dial tone when the code is accepted On Inter Tel phones an individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly e Repeating reorder tones You are restricted from the trunk group chosen choose another trunk group Or you are restricted to using ARS only try again using ARS see page 191 The display shows OUTGOING ACCESS DENIED After dialing the call you can place it on hold transfer it set up a conference enter optional account codes etc as described in this manual Executive Display Profes sional Display and Model 8560 Phones have menu buttons for easy use of outside call
320. igned a feature code Using the station s dialpad these codes are entered to select trunks process calls and use special features Complete explanations of the features and instructions for using them begin on the next page The codes shown on the following pages are the values that are assigned when the system is in the default state If desired they can be changed in Database Programming to any one to five digit value Changing a feature code may affect the accessibility of other features Message Lamp TRUNK ACCESS CODES System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 These feature codes are used for selecting trunks when placing outgoing calls FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Automatic Route Selection ARS 92000 Allows the system to select the desired route for placing a call as programmed in the database The ARS premium feature is required Trunk Group Access 1 208 92001 Selects an available trunk from a programmed group of 92208 trunks for placing an outside call Emergency Calls 911 Entering this feature code selects an outgoing trunk and automatically dials the programmed emergency number defaults to Trunk Group 1 and 911 Outgoing Call 8 Selects an outgoing trunk according to the programmed outgoing access mode for that station Inter Tel phones use the OUTGOING button or a Call button These feature codes may differ depending on the software version STATION
321. ile can be detached from the message and stored on the computer To use Level 1 Unified Messaging the customer must have an existing e mail system based on Message Application Programming Interface MAPI Vendor Independent Messaging VIM or Simple Mail Transport Protocol Post Office Protocol SMTP POP3 The following list shows the e mail systems that are supported and the protocols on which they are based e Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Outlook Exchange MAPI e cc Mail or Lotus Notes VIM e Internet mail SMTP POP3 For complete instructions on using Unified Messaging refer to the Unified Messaging User Guide part number 550 8111 Page 307 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 308 The e mail message sent by the voice mail will have the following components To The TO line will contain the recipient s e mail address From The FROM line will contain the e mail address of the Voice Processor If an E Mail Real Name has been programmed for the Voice Processor it will also be shown on this line Subject The SUBJECT line will contain the line lt ength of message gt Message for MB lt number gt from lt source gt If the message is marked priority the subject line will be preceded by the word PRIORITY The source of the voice mail message will appear as one of the following MB lt number gt x lt extension number the voice mail system an u
322. imer Yes Yes Call goes to announcement station once after Announce ment timer expires then goes to overflow station after each expiration of Overflow timer If an announcement or overflow station has call forward enabled hunt group calls will follow the forward and the forwarding destination station will act as the announcement or overflow station Announcement and Overflow Stations Page 135 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 136 Voice Processor Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations When a Voice Processor application is used as an announcement or overflow station calls to the application automatically stop circulating through the hunt group if the caller selects a valid digit translation option such as pressing a digit to select an extension from a Call Routing Announcement menu and the call is transferred This allows the application to send the call to other stations without the call being pulled back into the hunt group when a hunt group sta tion answers the call However if the caller does not dial a valid digit translation option the call will be pulled back if a hunt group member answers NOTE Standard Display Associate Display Axxess Basic Eclipse Basic Model 8500 Model 8520 and Model 8560 Phones do not send DTMF tones on intercom calls and therefore cannot stop circulating through the hunt group by dialing a digit A Call Routing Announcement
323. in Or press the Special button and enter 5 again Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired parties are on conference wait hold or the maxi mum allowed number has been reached Connect all waiting parties in the conference Phones with menu buttons Press the CONNECT TO CONFERENCE menu but ton All parties are connected The display shows CNF IN PROGRESS The CNF but ton and a Call button flash slowly You can use the following menu buttons HOLD Press this button to place the conference on hold DISCONNECT Press this button to remove your station from the conference If there are no other stations in the conference all parties are disconnected If there is still another station in the conference the parties remain connected ADD PARTY This button appears only if you have not reached the maximum number of allowed parties Press this button to leave the conference parties con nected while you place another call to be added to the conference MUTE Press this button to turn the phone microphone on or off during the confer ence TRANSFER CNF Press this button and enter an extension number to transfer the conference to another station or the voice mail application Other Inter Tel Phones Press the button again Or press the Special button and enter E again All parties are connected
324. ination mailbox or group list number 031 Logon canceled 032 Enter your password Then press POUND 033 There have been 3 invalid attempts to log onto your mailbox 034 Invalid password 035 Thank you for calling Good bye 036 To access voice mail features you must change your system assigned pass word 037 You have not finished setting up your mailbox 038 Subscriber access denied 039 Because this is the first time you are accessing your mailbox you must record your name for the company directory Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 040 Since you are accessing your mailbox for the first time you should be aware of a few standard features To cancel an option you have accessed and return to the previous menu press STAR To accept your recording or dialing sequence or to advance to your next message press POUND For help you may press 0 at any time you are at a menu and voice mail will replay the current menu and or give you additional information Certain voice mail features such as remote messaging are available from your mailbox only if authorized by your system administrator Your mailbox is now fully set up 041 Your password may be up to 12 digits 042 Enter your new password then press POUND If you don t
325. information for example Caller ID or ANI will be identified on the phone s display with the call information If disabled the display will show the DID or DNIS informa tion for the call if available In the default state is it enabled e Display Outside Name If the Display Outside Name station flag is enabled the phone user can switch between the outside party name and number when connected to a CO call with outside party information The phone user enters the Display Outside Party Name On Off feature code 379 In addition the enhanced ring in displays will provide the user with more information such as both Caller ID name and number if available or tell the user if a Caller ID number is blocked or out of area This is a station flag that applies to Inter Tel phones only In the default state this flag is enabled The system will provide the user with advanced displays for direct ring in calls if the station has Expanded CO Call Information On Displays and Outside Party Call Information Has Priority station flags enabled by default they are enabled A typical direct ring in display would look like the following TRNK GRP 1 RINGING IN However with the enhanced displays the system will attempt to display the name of the out side caller on line 1 and the number of the outside caller on line 2 When a CO call rings into the system the system uses the following criteria to determine the name that will appear on the
326. ing a user can see intercom directory names and extension numbers for all devices that are programmed as off node devices on the local node Devices that are repre sented by wildcard off node extensions will not show up in the intercom directory To use the directory the user enters a letter a string of letters a valid extension number or a valid feature code If searching for a name the full name need not be entered The system will find the closest match and show the number and its associated name on the phone display Or the user can scroll alphabetically through the stored list of names It is not possible to scroll through the extension numbers or feature codes numerically extensions and features scroll alphabetically Directory names can include English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination In the directories English Spanish characters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters There fore Japanese names will be at the end of the list NOTE When using Japanese as the Primary or Secondary language you can only search for IC and CO directory names based on the last name You cannot search based on the first name Keypad buttons are used to enter the desired English Spanish or Japanese Katakana letters numbers and punctuation Refer to the chart on the next page Only digital display phones can be used for viewing Japanese prompts The station user can switch between numeric and alphanumeric modes Numer
327. ing 345 For more information about operating modes and IP Devices see the latest version of the ZP Devices Installation and Configuration Manual Page 106 IP and SIP Devices Power Supplies System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Each SIP and IP device must use a compatible power supply Because there are so many power supply options it is strongly recommended that you refer to the IP Devices Power Supply Matrix located in the P Devices Installation Manual when selecting a power supply for the IP or SIP device IP Troubleshooting The following table lists some possible errors that you may encounter when programming or using IP or SIP devices For detailed troubleshooting information see the latest version of the IP Devices Installation and Configuration Manual Problem Probable Cause Solution IP SIP Phone displays VOIP RESOURCE IS UNAVAIL ABLE The number of programmed IP devices exceeds the number of available voice channels and all programmed voice channels are in use Make sure all available voice channels are set to VoIP If necessary consider adding another IPRC or a daughter card A call was established between two IP SIP phones but there is no audio The IP phones are pro grammed for P2P audio but they do not support the same vocoder Remove the IP devices from the Network Group Consider adding them to a Network Group that contains IP devi
328. ing the recording or at any time while it is playing the caller may then dial an extension or mailbox number Automated Attendant Recall Destination If a call is not answered after being trans ferred by the automated attendant the call returns to recalls the Automated Attendant Recall Destination The Recall Destination announces that the station is unavailable and allows the caller to leave a message if the station has an associated mailbox or dial another extension Call Routing Announcement Call Routing Announcements can be used two ways A Call Routing Announcement application can be used in place of a playback device When called the Call Routing Announcement application will play a recording and then hang up The Call Routing Announcement application can use Digit Translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for access to a mailbox a fax on demand function or a station or hunt group that has an associated mailbox or extension ID Each digit can lead to a digit translation node that has its own digit translation values This layered Call Routing Announcement digit translation creates a tree of programmable digit translation nodes Directory Services Directory services provide callers with a list of mailboxes and extension IDs Record A Call This feature allows a station user to record an ongoing call in a mail box message When a station user enters the Record A Call feature code the sys
329. ing zones 50 when using a CP Server When the system is in the default state all Inter Tel phones are assigned to paging zone 1 to provide an all page zone Inter Tel phones trunks and the external paging port s can be assigned to any all or none of the paging zones as desired NOTE Placing a large number of Inter Tel phones in a paging zone may affect system perfor mance If system operation is affected when a page is placed to a particular page zone remove some Inter Tel phones from that zone or change to external paging for the area served by that page zone In a network all Inter Tel phones and trunks within a page zone must reside on the same node as the page zone However a page zone can contain external page ports on other nodes NOTE Because the external paging ports have intercom numbers 91000 and 91001 stations can place an intercom call to the external paging ports instead of using the Page feature to make a page over the external paging speakers Pages are not heard on Inter Tel phones that have been removed from paging using the feature code as described below are in Do Not Disturb are ringing or are in use Also background music on phones and on external speakers connected to phone speaker leads is interrupted for pages If a trunk in a paging zone is unplugged the page cannot be completed If desired Inter Tel phone users can program feature buttons to select the paging zones 0 9 or 0 49 using paging ac
330. interface jacks see chart on next page Service order code SOC as applicable see chart on next page Facility interface code FIC see chart on next page Ringer equivalence number REN as applicable see chart on next page NOTE The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be con nected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area The telephone company should also be given notice upon final disconnection of this equipment from the particular line s It is also the responsibility of the customer to provide the telephone company with reg istration numbers of any other devices which are configured for connection to the tele phone network This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone com pany Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for informa tion If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify the customer in advance that service may be temporarily discontinue
331. ion number 241 To select a day recording press 1 242 To select a night recording press 2 Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 57 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 243 If this is the correct recording press POUND 244 Warning no recording has been made 245 Invalid application entered 246 is not a valid recording number 247 252 Not used 253 This is a return receipt verifying the message sent has been heard 254 I m sorry Private messages cannot be for warded 255 This is the message center calling for 256 If you are the correct person press POUND 257 One 258 TWO 259 Three 260 Four 261 Five 262 Six 263 Seven 264 Eight 265 Nine 266 Ten 267 Eleven 268 Twelve 269 Thirteen 270 Fourteen 271 Fifteen 272 Sixteen 273 Seventeen 274 Eighteen 275 Nineteen 276 Iwenty 277 Thirty 278 Forty 279 Fifty 280 Sixty 281 Seventy 282 Eighty 283 Ninety 284 Hundred 285 This mailbox is currently full and cannot receive new messages 286 Oh 287 of which are priority 288 Priority message received 289 Otherwise press STAR Page 58 Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMI
332. ion status No Answer If the call is not answered at the principal station before the System Forwarding Initiate timer expires the system sends the call to the forwarding path Busy If the principal station is busy the system immediately sends the call to the forwarding path Both No Answer and Busy can be selected together to form a Not Available status Do Not Disturb If the principal station is in Do Not Disturb the system immedi ately sends the call to the forwarding path Immediate The system immediately sends the call to the forwarding path The principal station user cannot answer an immediately forwarded call but can reverse transfer it from the forwarding point e Day mode night mode status The system day night mode is used to determine if a forwarding path is taken Either day mode night mode or both may be specified For an example refer to the diagram below In the example the principal station user wants direct ring in or transferred calls to ring at his or her station during day mode The principal station has a forwarding path with two forwarding points a hunt group and voice mail If the principal does not answer the call it follows the forwarding path to forwarding point 1 a hunt group If the hunt group does not answer the call it would continue on the forwarding path and go to the principal station s voice mailbox forwarding point 2 If the principal station is an Inte
333. ion users can chain forwards from station to station providing the forwards do not form a loop and the chain does not include more than 10 stations The conditional forward features 1f busy if no answer if busy no answer may form a loop that the system cannot detect until a call is placed to the forwarding station For example if two station users forward their calls to each other using the Forward If Busy feature the system accepts the requests However if a call rings in while both stations are busy the forwards create an illegal loop In this case the call camps on to the called station and that station s display shows INVALID FORWARD PATH If more than one station has ring in for a trunk group direct ring in calls on that trunk group will forward to extension numbers but not outside numbers or voice mail ports The display of the phone receiving the forwarded call will show it as a forwarded call and the Call button or individual trunk button flashes to show ring in The individual trunk button also flashes on the phone that is being forwarded Calls cannot be forwarded to restricted outside telephone numbers or stations in Do Not Dis turb If the station that is programmed to receive your forwarded calls is later placed in Do Not Disturb and you receive a call you will momentarily see a display showing that the desti nation station is in Do Not Disturb the call will remain at your station NOTE Direct ring in calls that are forw
334. ional System Equipment 107 108 Options Card OPC 108 Outbound Fax 306 Outgoing Access 151 162 Outgoing Access Allowed Answer and Ring In Assignments 151 Outside Caller Use Of Voice Mail 305 Outside Calls 189 account codes 195 automatic answer 170 callback queue 194 campon 194 header 189 on hook dialing monitoring 193 placing 189 receiving 192 remote message notification 293 Outside Party Call Information 149 Outside Party Call Information Has Priority 149 Overflow Stations 134 135 P P2P Peer to Peer 105 Page Zone Keys 81 82 Pager Notification 291 Paging 123 246 247 324 Passwords 301 extension ID 275 mailbox 289 295 301 programming 18 station 252 PC Data Port Module PCDPM 89 187 PCDPM 187 Peer to Peer P2P Audio 105 Personal Greeting 301 Personal Number 291 Personal Options 301 Phone 192 211 displays 149 features 164 handsfree enable disable 176 LEDs 86 Phones 74 75 8 line AIM 93 all transient displays 166 alternate menu display 78 alternate transient display timer 166 automatic answer 170 caller information 149 circuit number display 79 DSS BLF button 34 DSS BLF key 81 hot dialpad 116 IP and SIP 99 keymaps 80 LCD 78 LEDs 86 88 optional equipment Page 317 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 data device 90 data port module 90 headsets 88 loud ringing adapter 90 MDPM 89 PCDPM 89 PCDPM bitrate 90 ring tone selection 165 secondary extension keys
335. is a repeating 6 second cadence that rings once for 4 seconds followed by 2 seconds of silence Page 96 AgentSet System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Off Premises Extensions OPX Off premises extensions are remote single line DTMF sets that are connected to the Inter Tel system through telephone company OPX circuits or customer provided circuits Off premises station users gain access to the features by hookflashing pressing and releasing the hookswitch quickly and entering feature codes Some telephone company off premises extension OPX networks do not recognize certain sin gle line set ring cadences used in the system This incompatibility results in an inability to pro vide certain ring signals to off premises extensions Because of this the system is equipped with a station option Extended Ring Cadences which allows the ring cadences be altered for individual single line circuits OFF PREMISES EXTENSIONS DKSC B1 OPX Axxess SLA B2 Axxess or other system AgentSet Page 97 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 DIGITAL DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF UNITS The Inter Tel system supports three types of DSS BLF Consoles Units The unit used depends on the phone MINI DSS UNITS Page 98 With Model 8560 and Model 8520 Phones Model 8560 and 8520 Phones equipped wit
336. is method should be used by analog voice mail units TO LEAVE A SILENT MESSAGE Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones While on hook press the IET button Then press the LEAVE MESSAGE menu button The dis play shows LEAVE MESSAGE ON EXTENSION Enter the desired extension num ber The number is shown on the display If desired you can press the IC DIRECTORY menu button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Refer to page 238 for instructions Other Inter Tel Phones While on hook enter the Silent Message feature code 367 Then dial the extension number of the desired station Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Silent Message feature code 367 Then dial the extension number of the desired station and hang up Page 183 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication That You Left Occasionally you may wish to cancel a message waiting indication that you left before the station user responds to the message If the message was left with the station s message center you cannot cancel the message waiting indication only the message center can cancel that message Use the procedure outlined below to cancel a message that you left TO CANCEL A MESSAGE YOU LEFT 1 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones While on hook press the button Then press the CANCEL MESSAGE menu button The dis play shows
337. isplay phones and single line sets use Quick Spell Display phone stations use the Exact Spell method Quick Spell callers press a single digit or button from their digital telephone dialpad for each letter or character entered For example dialpad button Ell shows ABC button EJ shows DEF etc To enter JONES you would press EB Ki IG Ell EM Some char acters are not shown on the buttons for Q press KM for Z press EM for punctuation marks press the Klll button e Exact Spell callers press the dialpad buttons to enter the name The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered as shown on the chart below When adjoining characters are located under the same button press IDE once to advance to the next character For example 5666 BE 66337777 would enter JONES NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 1 amp 1 2 A B C 2 3 D E F 3 4 G H Y 4 5 J K L 5 6 M N O 6 7 P Q R S 7 8 T U V 8 9 W X Y Z 9 0 0 After the digits have been entered the caller presses EM to begin the search The Automated Attendant application plays the name that most closely matches the digit s that were entered If E is pressed without entering any digits the caller will hear the first name in the directory If a user presses Ell at any time while spelling a name the system will play a helpful prompt instructing the caller how
338. ive the call first shows ring flash on the associated individual trunk button if it has one or a Call button until the call is answered or the No Answer Advance timer expires and the call moves to the next station e Ifhunt group camp on is allowed and all stations on the hunt group list are unavailable busy in Do Not Disturb or with hunt group remove enabled an intercom or outside call will camp on and the stations will receive the following indications Busy stations receive hunt group camp on tones if enabled and display If there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash There is a programmable station flag that can disable the camp on tones for hunt group calls Stations with Hunt Group Remove enabled receive camp on tones and display If there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash Stations with Do Not Disturb enabled receive no camp on indications but if there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash The first station that becomes available receives ringing and a flashing trunk or Call button The camp on and ring flash indications end at the other stations The associated trunk button will be steadily lit at those stations to show that the trunk is busy Hunt Group Call Processing Page 131 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 e Ifhunt group camp on is not allowed a
339. l Calls to local numbers are restricted Calls 08 Denied Calls to programmed denied numbers defaults to Numbers 1900NXXXXXX and 976XXXX are restricted 09 Allowed Calls to programmed allowed numbers defaults to Numbers 1800NXXXXXX are allowed even if number also matches a dial pattern in a restricted class of service that is assigned to the station application or trunk group being used System speed dial numbers can be programmed to bypass COS restrictions on a system wide basis If the option is not enabled all system speed dial numbers are subject to toll restriction Because a condition may exist where a critical or life threatening situation needs to be reported using the Emergency Call feature code will override all toll restrictions and trunk access programming Note that if the trunk group is not subject to toll restriction neither the trunk group or station COS is checked unless the call was placed using ARS All ARS calls are subject to station toll restriction only Class Of Service COS System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 EMERGENCY CALL FEATURE NOTICE It shall be the responsibility of the entity or person s completing installation and mainte nance of hardware or software described herein to research comply with and be responsi ble for the specific governmental rules and regulations regarding Emergency Outgoing Access 911 of the geographic location in which s
340. l application places a call to the caller s fax machine as soon as a fax port is available unless one of the following occurs e If the fax was requested outside of the programmed fax delivery times the system will wait until the Fax Delivery Start Time on an allowed day of the week before it attempts to send the document The Fax Delivery Start and Stop times determine when faxes can be sent Start and stop times can be set to any time period up to 24 hours The programmer can also determine which days of the week faxes will be sent e If other calls are going out and the programmed Maximum Number of Outgoing Calls has been met the system waits for an available outgoing call to send the fax e Jfa fax port or trunk is not available or if a requested document is not available the system delays delivery until the resource or document is available e If a requested document has been deleted the system will complete the delivery but will indicate on the cover sheet that the document is no longer available e If a fax delivery fails after one or more pages have been transmitted the system remembers which pages were not sent and tries again to send only those pages For example if the transmission failed in the middle of page 3 of 5 the system would attempt to send only pages 3 4 and 5 on the retry The cover sheet on the retry will say This fax is the continuation of and the description for the fax will include continued in t
341. l be about one second of white noise at this point Both parties should avoid speaking during this white noise This white noise is used to calibrate the echo canceling circuitry After the white noise there will be a confirma tion tone that both parties will hear except for Executive Display and Professional Display Phone users who will hear the tone but the other party will not Then the user will be con nected in an enhanced handsfree call If the speakerphone cannot be calibrated correctly due to trunk conditions the enhanced speakerphone will not be enabled and the display will show CANNOT ENABLE ENHANCED MODE NOTE It is normal for an outside party to hear a minimal amount of his or her own echo when speaking to a Digital Phone in enhanced speakerphone mode This is usually acceptable to most callers on local calls and on most long distance calls However on some T1 and long dis tance calls involving significant delays for example cross country T1 calls overseas calls or calls via satellite the amount of echo may be objectionable and the enhanced speakerphone mode should not be used on these types of long distance calls If an enhanced speakerphone call is placed on hold and then taken off hold on an Executive or Professional Display Phone it remains an enhanced speakerphone call For all other digital phones if the call is placed on hold the call is returned to standard speakerphone mode A station can only have one enhanced
342. l hold at that station If the Hold timer expires while a call is on transfer hold the call will recall the station The station user must return to the call on hold and begin the transfer process again There may be some reduction in voice volume when an out side call is transferred to an outside telephone number depending on the quality of the trunks being used TRANSFER TO CONNECT STATION FLAG If the Transfer To Connect Allowed station flag is enabled an announced transfer call includ ing an announced transfer from voice mail connects immediately with the destination once the transferring party hangs up If the flag 1s disabled the recipient must press a Call button or the button to answer the transferred call If the user has a headset enabled or if the sta tion user picks up the handset for the initial call and the transferring party disconnects the transferred party will hear a single tone and then be immediately connected without any further action from the station user Calls will not automatically connect in handsfree speakerphone mode This flag applies only to Inter Tel phones and is disabled by default Call Transfer Page 203 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TRANSFER TO RING Page 204 TO TRANSFER A CALL OR CONFERENCE 1 Inter Tel Phones While on a call press the button or press the Special but ton and enter the Transfer to Ring feature code 345 You hear intercom dial tone
343. l status information to an external device Its primary use is for automatic call distribution products such as the Call Cen ter Suite System OAI Third Party Call Control is a protocol that allows system command ori ented tools to be used on the system System software versions 6 0 and later do not support Level 1 System OAI Contact Inter Tel for more information regarding products and develop ment materials for these features Digital Phone LED Rates AGENTSET System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The AgentSet is used in place of an Inter Tel phone with an attached PCDPM It is connected to a Digital Keyset Card DKSC or DKSC 16 port just as a phone would be It has a jack for plugging in an Inter Tel handset or headset It also has a serial connector DB9 for attaching it to a PC The AgentSet does not require a transformer or external power source To operate properly the AgentSet must be programmed for headset mode This can be done in one of the following ways e Enable Headset Mode via Station Programming in the system database e Atthe AgentSet unplug the headset or handset to take the AgentSet off hook and enter the Headset On Off feature code 317 to enable headset mode Then plug in the headset or handset NOTE There is nothing to prevent the user from disabling headset mode using the Headset On Off feature code at the station Because the AgentSet does not have feature buttons a dialing
344. larm messages indicate that a minor alarm has occurred but that general system operation was not affected e Severe Messages These messages indicate that a severe error has occurred in the sys tem The messages can be programmed to be sent to any output device attached to the system This includes devices attached to the CPU card Options cards and phone data ports Messages can be printed through only one system port at a time The print width is adjustable 64 80 or 132 characters to accommodate different output devices When a line of information is longer than the programmed width the information is printed on subsequent lines and preceded with to indicate the continuation The system database also has a reserved area for recording the history of messages to allow service personnel to request a report at any time The message history area has enough memory to maintain a record of at least 50 of the most recently generated messages When the reserved area is full the more recent messages begin to replace the older ones so that the most recent messages are available In a network setting each node has its own message print programming message print output port and message print output port backup There should be a message print terminal at each node to monitor node and network performance and aid in troubleshooting e Ifa node s Message Print output port is a node the network sends Message Print records to the specified nod
345. larms based on severity and allows system administrators to view and han dle critical alarms before addressing minor alarms You can then clear the individual alarm or clear all the alarms in the queue up to 30 When clearing alarms individually the alarms are displayed in order of severity The Emergency Alarm when an extension has dialed emer gency services is the only priority 1 alarm Other prioritized alarms have a 2 3 or 4 priority based on the severity of the alarm Not all alarms have a number 1 2 3 or 4 priority The numbered priority scheme is limited to alarms that can cause a major or minor system reset Those alarms in the Alarm Queue that have a numbered priority 1 4 are displayed before the alarms that do not receive a numbered priority Alarms that do not have a numbered priority are prioritized in the queue by date and time Page 39 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 40 When alarms are generated The highest priority alarm is placed in the front of the queue regardless of when lower priority alarms are generated For example if A114 priority 3 and A116 priority 4 are currently in the queue but A119 priority 2 is generated A119 is placed first in the queue Alarms with the same priority level are placed in the queue based on the time the alarm was generated For example if A010 priority 3 is generated at 10 30 AM and A012 priority 3 is generated at 10
346. lay shows SWAP extension WITH EXTENSION Enter the second extension number to be swapped using the same methods previously described The display shows DATABASE UPDATED NOTE If you cancel or terminate the feature without entering the second extension number the system discards any changes that have not yet been saved and the display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED If the entered extension is the adminis trator station performing the swap the same extension number as the target station or the wrong device type the display shows CONFLICTING EXTENSION When the display shows ENTER SYSTEM OPTION press EJ again to exit to the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming session If a system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following Delayed Reset Press Kll or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The display shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Kll or the IMMEDIATE menu button to reset the system now NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress System Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 2 System Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 v Press 2 or SYSTEM menu button VA
347. lay shows the selected message If you enter an invalid message number you will hear reorder tones and the display shows INVALID DND MESSAGE NUMBER try again If desired customize the second line of the message Use any combination of the fol lowing methods a Remain in numeric mode Press the dialpad buttons to enter the desired number Use the pound button EJ for a hyphen and the asterisk button Ell for a colon Inter Tel phone users can press the ITI button once to leave a space or press the button to backspace b Change to alphanumeric mode Inter Tel phones only Press the IWEJE button the button lights or the USE ALPHA MODE menu button then enter the desired characters Refer to the chart above Inter Tel phone users can press the ITE button once to advance or twice to leave a space or press the El button to backspace C Use speed dial and or redial numbers Inter Tel phones only In either numeric or alphanumeric mode you can speed dial a number using the speed dial button or feature code In numeric mode you can press the button to enter the stored characters You may chain speed dial and or redial numbers together Terminate programming Inter Tel Phones Press the Speaker or the ACCEPT button or lift and replace the handset The DITE button lights Display phones show selected message Date and time appear on the second line if there is no customized message Single Line Sets Hang up TO CANCE
348. le Caller ID press Ell or the CALLER ID menu but ton When the display shows SET CALLER ID press Hf or ON to enable the fea ture or press Kl or OFF to disable it Then press J or ACCEPT to continue Hybrid Balance To set the hybrid balance of the trunk to normal or short press i or the HYBRID BALANCE menu button When the display shows HYBRID BALANCE OPTION press Kl or the NORMAL menu button or press El or the SHORT menu button Then press EB or ACCEPT to continue DTMF Dial Pulse Signaling To set the trunk for DTMF or dial pulse signaling press Ell or the SIGNALING menu button When the display shows ENTER SIG NALING OPTION press or the DTMF menu button or press El or the PULSE menu button Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue Trunk Group Number To assign the trunk to a trunk group press Ell or the TRUNK GROUP menu button When the display shows ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION enter the desired trunk group number using one of the methods described on page 25 Busy Trunk To temporarily remove the trunk from service press Ell or the BUSY TRUNK menu button When the display shows MARK TRUNK BUSY press EE or the ON menu button or press Ell or the OFF menu button Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue C To exit press EM or ACCEPT to move backward through the prompts until you reach the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt 5 To Program A Trunk Group Press Ell or the TRUNK GROUP menu button Then program the trunk group as follows
349. lk to Data base Programming and the AVDAP Turning this feature on helps the Inter Tel Engineers debug the messaging between Call Processing and Database Programming or Call Processing and the AVDAP Diagnostic ASAI Snoop On 9927 This feature code turns on the ASAI output to Message Print ASAI is the protocol the system uses to talk to Data base Programming and the Voice Processor Turning this feature on helps the Inter Tel Engineers debug the mes saging between Call Processing and Database Program ming or Call Processing and the AVDAP Diagnostic Heap Dump 9943 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Dump Extension 9933 Allows an Inter Tel field technician to dump out a device or structure when debugging a problem The system dumps the internal data structures for that extension to message print If you press the pound button you are prompted for a command The command allows you to enter an alphanumeric string of the structure to dump Page 124 Administrator Feature Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Diagnostic Dump Node Information 9936 The user can easily dump node information to Message Print using a single feature code Pressing the Dump Node Information feature code dumps specified node information to Message Print for diagnostic purpose
350. ll display MES SAGE PENDING in this case When users attempt to log in to a remote hunt group on a node running an earlier version of System software the phone display in version 5 3 or later will show NOT AN ACD HUNT GROUP If users on a node running an earlier version of system software try to log into a hunt group on a node running version 5 3 or later the display will show the mes sage NOT AN AGENT IN THIS ACD GROUP The ACD Wrap Up functions perform as in previous versions with the exception of pri ority Due to timing issues involved in sending messages across the network the fol lowing prioritization method is used for hunt groups with remote members The first criterion is priority level The hunt group with the highest priority gets the available agent first In the event of a tie in priority hunt groups located locally take priority over those located on remote nodes In cases where ties in priority occur within the local node the hunt group with the longest camped on call will receive the available agent Given off node ties in priority the first hunt group to camp on will receive the available agent Operational Changes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups e Deletion of ACD Agents is different in version 5 3 or later because agents must be defined globally In previous versions deletion of an agent resulted in removal of the agent from any hu
351. ll hear a warning and must enter the number again C To set up time of day for notification Press KM Then when prompted enter the time at which you wish to have the message notification start and stop Enter the times with two digits for the hour and two digits for the minutes If entering the time in 12 hour format you will be prompted to press EE for AM or press KM for PM NOTE If you wish to have 24 hour notification program the starting and ending times to be the same d To set up the days of the week for notification Press EM Then press Hj for mes saging Monday Friday KM for all days or Kl to select individual days If you selected individual days you will be prompted to press digits 1 7 which correspond to the days Sunday through Saturday Your selection will be played back e To select all or priority only message notification Press EM Then press for all messages or Kl for priority messages only f The options prompt returns Either select another option as described above or press EJ to save the settings and exit Page 303 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 304 10 11 12 To change your Fax Destination Number press Kl for More Options and then press EB a Enter the number of your fax destination followed by Ed b To accept press EM Or to erase the number and re enter it press IE To change your Message Retrieval method press Kl for More Options
352. lly as long as n number of calls are present at a primary station This period is determined by the DKTS Secondary Exten sion Key Alerting Tone timer If n is set to 0 the secondary station will never receive the burst of ringing This option is programmed individually for each secondary exten sion button during keymap programming e Transient Call Indication On Call Answer This programmable station flag deter mines whether the station user will see a call display when answering a call by pressing the secondary extension button or reverse transferring the call If enabled the display will tell if the call was ringing recalling transferred or holding at the primary station The secondary extension button can be located on an Inter Tel phone or on a DSS BLF Unit There are two ways to make a secondary extension button Create a secondary extension button in the keymap and determine which station it will represent This will be the same for all stations assigned to that keymap e Setthe default value of a user programmable button to secondary extension button in the keymap This allows each station user assigned to that keymap to determine the associated station for his or her secondary extension button See page 167 for button programming procedures User programmable buttons cannot be made into secondary extension buttons by the station user they can only be created in the database Also the station user cannot c
353. lowed Answer and Ring In Assignments Page 151 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION ARS Page 152 NOTE The Automatic Route Selection premium feature is required to use ARS ARS is a money saving feature that allows the system to be programmed to select the least expensive route for placing outgoing calls It can be used for placing outgoing calls and trans ferring or forwarding calls to outside telephone numbers Stations can be restricted to using only ARS for placing outgoing calls Also because users do not have direct access to trunks on other nodes ARS is the only way users can place calls using the other nodes trunks ARS is programmed using route groups and facility groups e Route Groups A route group contains dialing patterns and facility groups The dialing patterns are used to determine the calls that will be routed through the route group For example the default dial pattern for Route Group 1 is N any number of digits beginning with digit 2 9 If a number is dialed that begins with 1 it will not be routed through this route group Each route group has an ordered list of facility groups that contains lists of local trunk groups and or nodes There can be 100 facility groups in the system The facility groups should be programmed so that the least expensive route is checked and if available is selected first If the least expensive facility group is not
354. lows you to cancel voice messages you have sent to other subscribers provided the messages have not yet been heard by their recipients and they were not sent to a group list TO CANCEL UNHEARD MESSAGES 1 2 3 4 Dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press El to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and password When you hear the Main Menu list of options press Kl to select Message Options Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 phone users will also see Message Options on their display menu The next prompt gives you the option of canceling unheard messages Press EE to con tinue When prompted enter the number of the mailbox that has the unheard message Then you will be asked to confirm the mailbox you selected by pressing ES It will tell you how many messages you have waiting at the mailbox and play them for you After each message you can e Press Kl to replay the message e Press El to add to the message e Press to forward the message to another mailbox e Press EZ to listen to the previous message e Press El to replay the message envelope e Press R to listen to the next message e Press Kil to save the message in your mailbox and remove it from theirs e Press J to delete the message Canceling Unheard Messages Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PERSONAL
355. ly the ACD hunt group s that you requested in step 2 that do not use Agent IDs If you were already logged in the display shows ALREADY LOGGED INTO hunt group If you are not a member of the entered hunt group the display shows NOT AN AGENT IN THIS HUNT GROUP and you hear reorder tones Start over If off hook hang up Repeat this procedure to log in to additional ACD groups if nec essary TO LOG OUT OF AN ACD HUNT GROUP 1 While on or off hook enter the ACD Agent Logout feature code 327 One of the fol lowing will occur If you were logged in to only one hunt group you hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF Aunt group The procedure is complete Hang up if you were off hook If you were logged in to more than one hunt group you hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGOUT ACD NUMBER Go to the next step If you were not logged in to any hunt group the display shows NOT LOGGED INTO ANY ACD GROUP and you hear reorder tone Dial the pilot number of the desired ACD hunt group or press pound ES to log out of all of your ACD hunt groups You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF hunt group If you were not logged in to the hunt group number that you entered the display shows NOT LOGGED INTO hunt group Start over If off hook hang up ACD Agent Login Logout System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Rest
356. m queue In networks such as this a broadcast message is sent only when the most recent network alarm is cleared When the message is sent that network alarm is cleared on all nodes in the system Once the alarm is cleared any pre 8 2 nodes will not show any other alarms because these nodes do not have a queue to store alarms 8 2 or later nodes however may still have additional alarms in the queue When this happens each 8 2 node must manually clear the other network alarms For example suppose you have a three node network node 1 running 8 0 node 2 running 8 2 and node 3 running 8 2 Node then generates two network alarms one immediately after the other At this point node 1 shows one network alarm the latest and nodes 2 and 3 show two network alarms Node 1 then clears the alarm and a broadcast message is sent Node 1 now shows no alarms but nodes 2 and 3 still show the first alarm Node 2 then clears the first alarm but a broadcast message is NOT sent Now nodes 1 and 2 show no alarms but node 3 still has one in the queue This alarm will stay in the queue until node 3 clears it or until the alarm is overwritten as previously described ENABLING DISABLING THE CALL PROCESSING CARD MODEM The Call Processing Card CPC available in versions 8 0 and later has a built in modem that can be used for a number of functions Once the modem has been enabled it can be used for Database Programming Message Print and SMDR and for uploadin
357. ment because it will exceed the Maxi mum Fax Library Size 394 For recording options press 3 395 There are 396 calls ahead of you 397 Your call should be answered within 398 You have selected 399 documents 400 Hello you ve reached the Inter Tel voice processing system 401 Hello you ve reached the Inter Tel automated call processing system 402 To change your message search order press 2 403 Your current message search order is first in first out 404 Your current message search order is last in first out 405 To search for messages first in first out press 1 Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 61 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 62 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 406 To search for messages last in first out press 2 407 To change the search order for new messages press 1 408 To change the search order for saved messages press 2 409 499 Not used 500 If you know your party s extension number enter it now 501 To leave a message press 1 502 To try another extension press 2 503 Please hold while your call is being transferred to 504 Not used 505 To return to the menu press 2 506 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered on
358. mer defaults to 15 seconds If the station forwarding point is busy the call will camp on until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires and then it moves to the next for warding point If the station forwarding point is in Do Not Disturb the forwarding path will bypass that sta tion and immediately send the call to the next forwarding point If a forwarding point is a Voice Processor application and the system is unable to communi cate with the Voice Processor the call will bypass the forwarding point A station forwarding point can place calls or transfer calls to the principal HUNT GROUP FORWARDING POINTS If a forwarding point is a hunt group a call following the forwarding path will be sent to the announcement station or overflow station as usual it will advance to the next forwarding point if not answered before the System Forwarding Advance timer expires The call will ring at the hunt group until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires It will then move to the next forwarding point The No Answer Advance timer determines how long the call will ring at each hunt group station as usual If all stations in a hunt group forwarding point have Do Not Disturb or hunt group remove enabled the call will camp on until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires The call will then be sent to the next forwarding point HANDSFREE ANNOUNCE SYSTEM FORWARD OPTION When a call is transferred to the principal station by another
359. ming call traffic It is primarily designed for use by attendants of larger systems those systems with so many stations that using DSS BLF Units is not practical However due to its enhanced functionality including electronic text messaging and directory dialing the Attendant Console is an attractive option for smaller systems as well Inside Track Provides the ability to create customized call management and accounting reports from the system s SMDR data The reports can be used to manage calling costs ana lyze system traffic and track employee productivity If a Voice Processor is not used an optional PollCat Pollable Call Accounting Terminal call record buffer box is also required Optional DSP resources One or more Options Cards may be installed to provide the system with additional Digital Signal Processor DSP resources including Caller ID receivers shared speakerphones standard or enhanced for Basic Digital Standard Display Model 8500 Model 8520 and Model 8560 Phones additional conferencing circuits and additional DTMF receiv ers External music sources External music sources radios tape players etc can be connected to the system to provide music on hold and background music External paging speaker equipment An amplifier and speakers can be connected to the sys tem to provide external paging and background music to large areas such as warehouses load ing docks etc SMDR and error message recording outpu
360. ministrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS System speed dial numbers and names can be programmed by the installer or at any adminis trator station The system speed dial numbers can contain up to 48 digits each and can include hookflashes and or pauses for dialing a series of numbers For example the speed dial number can contain an SCC local number a pause an access code and the telephone number For using PBX trunks the other system s trunk access codes followed by a pause may be included in speed dial numbers The lengths of the hookflash and the pause are determined by the programmable CO Hookflash and Pause Digit timers To program system speed dial numbers use one of the following methods e Use the dialpad to manually dial the number If you make a mistake press to backspace e Press to enter the last number dialed or saved at the station up to 48 digits e Press one of the speed dial buttons on the Inter Tel phone to enter the outside telephone number up to 16 digits programmed under that button Speed dial names can contain up to 16 characters To program speed dial names dialpad but tons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation in English Spanish or Japa nese Katakana When programming speed dial names you can press or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode
361. mited volume range the range depends on trunk characteristics typi cally the range is 1 3 Enhanced speakerphones are explained on the next page The Executive and Professional s speaker can also provide background music if an external music source is installed and is used to receive pages A programming option can be used to disable the phone s speakerphone capabilities Or the user can disable the speakerphone for intercom calls using the Handsfree On Off and or Ring Intercom Always On Off feature code NOTE On certain handsfree to handsfree intercom calls voice volume levels may cause feed back to occur If this happens one station user should pick up the handset Two Display Phones cannot be in enhanced mode while on a call together one phone must be off hook to allow the other phone to enter enhanced speakerphone mode If both phones are on hook there is no benefit to having one phone in enhanced mode Enhanced Speakerphones for Digital Phones The following display and non display digital phones have enhanced speakerphone capabili ties e Model 8000 Series Phones 8560 8520 and 8500 e Executive Professional Standard and Associate Display Phones X Axxess and Eclipse Basic Digital Phones To use an enhanced speakerphone on a Digital Phone the user establishes a call and presses EE the Special button and then the Speaker button or presses SS and enters the Enhanced Speakerphone feature code 310 There wil
362. mming process is summarized in the flowchart shown on page 23 See page 65 for a Program Planning Sheet If necessary you can press E or the Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes at any time during the following procedure TO PROGRAM THE SYSTEM DATABASE NOTE If you wish to change the Japanese DND or reminder message sets make sure your station is set in Japanese mode See page 172 for an explanation of the Change Language fea ture 1 While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 2 Ifa password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to enter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password the dis play shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step 3 The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Display phones show the options STATION SYSTEM and TRUNK Press Ell or the SYSTEM menu button 4 The display shows ENTER SYSTEM OPTION Select one of the following a Do Not Disturb Messages This option allows you to program the DND messages used by the stations To select it press Hl or the DND MESSAGES menu button Then do the following 1 The display shows SELECT DND MESSAGE Enter a message number or scroll to the desired message To scroll to the correct message press the Vol ume button or the SCROLL plus NEXT and PREVIOUS menu buttons 2 When the display shows the desired DND message enter th
363. modes of operation This can be done from either the system administrator s mailbox or through Database Programming The system administrator must enter a valid three digit recording number or a single digit fol lowed by EJ for recordings 1 9 before a custom audiotex recording can be made If a valid number has been entered and a previous recording exists the Voice Processor will play it This includes the two standard default greetings When no recording is associated with a recording number the system administrator will be prompted to create a recording Once the recording is installed it replaces any previous recording The only recordings that can be retrieved are system default recordings 001 and 002 They can be retrieved by default ing the Voice Processor database The maximum recording time for each custom audiotex recording is determined in Database Programming when the maximum greeting lengths are established for all mailbox owners In Database Programming several greetings can be linked together for one application and or use the special UCD ACD hunt group characters that tell the caller how many calls are ahead and how long the wait will be If you use the system administrator s mailbox to record or assign a recording to an application with a list of several recordings your input will change only the first entry in the list You cannot change the other entries using the system administra tor s mailbox Creating Audiote
364. n Agent Help call can use the Hold Transfer Record A Call or other features during the call while the Agent Help Extension is connected However if any inside party has enhanced speakerphones enabled the enhanced mode will be disabled when the Agent Help conference begins and must be re enabled if still desired Page 217 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 218 The Agent Help feature will not function in the following cases If the feature is not enabled in Premium Features any user attempting to enter the Agent Help feature code will hear reorder tones and if at a display phone see a RESERVED FEATURE display The Agent Help Extension cannot be in Do Not Disturb mode or have call forwarding enabled If so the requesting user will hear reorder tones after entering the Agent Help feature code or entering the desired extension number The Agent Help request will not follow the forward or any programmed system forwarding If the station user who enters the Agent Help feature code is on a four party conference call the system will send reorder tones to signal that the Agent Help Extension cannot be added There can be a maximum of four parties in a conference attempting to add the Agent Help Extension would exceed the maximum If there are no conference circuits available when the station user enters the Agent Help feature code the user will hear reorder tones and must try again later when circuits
365. n Off 9860 Places system in night mode or cancels night mode While in night mode the night toll and trunk restriction lists are used and the night transfer relays on the OPC are activated Program Database 9932 Can be used for programming station system and trunk parameters Administrator Feature Codes Page 123 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Program System Speed Dial 9801 Programs system wide speed dial numbers when followed by location codes 000 999 Set Network Date Time 9810 Programs the time and date for all nodes in the system Local time and date can also be reset by individual nodes Set Time Date 9800 Programs system time and date Synchronize Network Time 9811 Synchronizes the minutes past the hour across the network NOTE If a node s time is off by more than 30 minutes syn chronizing the minutes may cause the hour to change Also network time is automatically synchronized every day at 12 30 AM 00 30 using the time setting on the node with the lowest number The Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 must be entered at the administrator s station to enable system diagnostic mode before these feature codes can be used FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Diagnostic ASAI Snoop Off 9926 This feature code turns off the ASAI output to Message Print ASAI is the protocol the system uses to ta
366. n a station user calls a busy station or hunt group the system sends a busy signal The caller can wait off hook to camp on after the Camp On timer expires and hear music while waiting until the called station is available The system periodically sends call waiting signals to the busy station s A user can camp on to busy stations on other nodes and will hear the other node s music on hold while camped on If a station enables Do Not Disturb while an intercom call is camped on the camped on caller is removed from the camped on state and that caller receives Do Not Disturb indications see page 201 Intercom callers cannot camp on to a station that is in Do Not Disturb TO CAMP ON TO AN EXTENSION NUMBER e All Inter Tel Phones If you hear a busy signal when calling an extension number and wish to camp on do not hang up You hear music if enabled while camped on When the station is available a private call is automatically placed and you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered The display shows WAITING FOR username e Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones You may press one of the following menu buttons LEAVE MESSAGE This button appears only if you have called a station Press this button to leave a message waiting indication at the station Refer to page 182 for details LEAVE VOICE MAIL This button appears only if the called station has a voice mailbox Press this button t
367. n account code if the system detects that a long dis tance call a toll call outside of the local area codes has been dialed when ARS is used If the code matches one of the pre programmed forced account codes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Stations with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers e Forced Long Distance Toll Calls Non Validated When this account code type is enabled the user only has to enter an account code if the system detects that a long dis tance call a toll call outside of the local area codes has been dialed when the ARS is used The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Stations with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers e None If the user will not be required to enter an account code this option is selected The user may still use optional account codes or enable the Account Code For All Calls Following feature as desired If the system is installed in a network the network validates account codes against the account code table on the same node as the caller The account code follows the call as it moves from node to node and appears on every SMDR record associated with the call However if an optional account code is entered during the call that account code will be used in the SMDR report If ARS Dial Rule 5 Add Account Code i
368. n be an intercom or outside call and the phone can be on or off hook The call is placed to or received from another modem equipped data device Once the connection is established the phone user presses the button or presses the Special button ES and enters the Data feature code 340 to transfer the call to the data device If the data device does not answer before the Transfer Available timer expires the call recalls the station Transferring a call to the data device using the button places the call without providing ring voltage to the data device The user must manually cause the data device to answer the call Note that if the phone user wishes to cause ring voltage to be applied to the data device the Transfer feature must be used to send the call to the data device While the user is establishing the call using the phone the button is unlit From the time that the user presses the button until the data device answers the button will flash While the data device is on an active call the button flutters on the associ ated phone s indicating that the data call may be retrieved by the phone If the phone is off hook the user will hear dial tone TO PLACE A DATA CALL USING AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 Place or receive an intercom or outside call 2 When you hear modem tone press the button or press the Special button ESSI and enter the Data feature code 340 The button flashes slowly 3 Hang up or press the Speaker button Th
369. n be changed in database programming if desired by disabling the Ring Intercom Always flag The incoming intercom call to the destination station from the data device appears as a normal intercom call with the usual displays and tones If an extension number is dialed and that station is in Do Not Disturb the user will hear Do Not Disturb tone through the data device s speaker if it has one Whenever continuous busy reorder or Do Not Disturb tone is sent by the system the Inactivity Alarm timer is registered The button is lit while the tones are present If the timer expires before the data device hangs up off hook alarm tone is sent and the button flutters rapidly until the device hangs up Note that once the button begins fluttering the voice path on the phone attached to the data port module is released and can be used for other call processing applica tions Note that the absence of a lamp or button will not interfere with these timing parameters but the user will not have a visual indication of them If the data port places an outside call the system performs toll restriction using the data port s class of service If an illegal extension number or access code is dialed the user will hear reor der tone through the data device s speaker Call cost information for a data call is displayed on an associated phone only when the data call is connected to a phone s primary voice path If an attempt is made to initiate a data
370. n for PM You hear a progress tone when it is accepted and the display momentarily shows the selected reminder message and time NOTE If an invalid time is entered you hear reorder tones and must enter the time again Display phones show INVALID TIME TO RECEIVE A REMINDER MESSAGE 1 Atthe selected time you hear eight short tones and the message is displayed Do one of the following If your station is idle go to the next step If you are on a call the message will display for 10 seconds After you hang up the reminder message returns and must be cleared If you are programming your Inter Tel phone the programming function is interrupted The message will display but will not interrupt programming you can continue After programming is completed the reminder message will return and must be cleared 2 To clear the message Remain on hook and press EM The display shows EXPIRED REMINDER MESSAGE CLEARED TO CANCEL ALL OF YOUR REMINDER MESSAGE REQUESTS While on hook enter the Cancel Reminder Message feature code 306 The display shows REMINDER MSGS CANCELED You cannot view or cancel individual mes sages Reminder Messages Page 259 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECORD KEEPING AND MAINTENANCE FEATURES CALL COST ACCOUNTING Page 260 NOTE The system s Call Cost Accounting feature is intended to provide a cost estimate that is applied to the various classes of calls Due to
371. n hook and press the asterisk EJ button or the DELETE menu button The message is canceled 2 Ifthe WEJ button continues to flash there is another message The display shows the next message Either respond to it or cancel it TO CANCEL A MESSAGE WITHOUT ANSWERING AT A SINGLE LINE SET OR WITHOUT DISPLAYING MES SAGES AT AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 If you receive message waiting indications enter the Cancel Current Message feature code 368 The message is canceled 2 Ifyou continue to receive message waiting indications there is another message Either respond to it or cancel it Canceling a Waiting Message Page 185 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 186 Alternate Message Source The Alternate Message Source feature was developed to enable a voice processing system to leave messages through a station or hunt group that is designated as its alternate message source When a message is left on the voice processing system for a station user that has an assigned mailbox the called station receives the message waiting indications If it is a display phone the display shows MESSAGE RECEIVED FROM alternate message source rather than from the voice mail circuit When the station user retrieves the message an intercom call is placed to the alternate message source To make efficient use of multi port analog voice mail units not Voice Processor voice mail applications the ports are placed in a voic
372. n is not available to the caller only the name is played Extension IDs can also be programmed as Unlisted That means that the number will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application to stations with extension IDs can be screened announced or unannounced Programming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to stations with extensions IDs See page 206 for details Page 275 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT The Call Routing Announcement application can be used as a simple playback device that plays a message and then hangs up to disconnect the call This is especially useful for program ming hunt group announcement and overflow stations Or the Call Routing Announcement application can use digit translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for access to a station hunt group or mailbox CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITHOUT DIGIT TRANSLATION Y Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a recording Call Routing Announcement hangs up If this is an announcement or overflow station the call returns to the hunt group CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITH DIGIT TRANSLATION Y Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a greeting Y Y Caller
373. n or a forward ing point has manual call forward enabled using the Pl button or one of the Call Forwarding feature codes the Call Forward feature overrides System Forwarding If a forwarding point has the Call Forward feature enabled a system forwarded call will ring at the for ward destination until it is answered or the System Forward Advance timer expires then the call moves on to the next forwarding point If a station forwarding point is manu ally forwarded to voice mail the call will not follow the manual forward to the Voice Processor it will ring at the station forwarding point PRINCIPAL STATION USING BOTH SYSTEM AND MANUAL CALL FORWARD Principal Station 2nd System Forwarding Point 1st System Forwarding Point Unanswered calls atthe Principal Station will be Manual Forward sent here Destination FORWARDING POINT USING MANUAL CALL FORWARD System forwarded calls from Principal Station will be sent here if not answered at 1st Forwarding Point 1st System Forwarding Point Principal Station 2nd System Forwarding Point Manual Forward Destination FORWARDING POINT FORWARDED TO VOICE PROCESSING System forwarded calls from Principal Station will be sent here if not answered at 1st Forwarding Point 1st System Forwarding Point Principal Station 2nd System Forwarding Point FORWARD Voice _ BH Processing Unit Manual Forw
374. n the system data base Type This field indicates the following Alarms The field shows ALARM for system faults that have not stopped system operation Information Messages The field shows INF The condition requires no attention Warning Messages The field shows WRN The condition requires attention because it may affect system performance Severe Messages The field shows SVR The condition requires attention because it has affected or will affect system performance System Error Message Printing System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 e Realm This field does not appear for Alarm messages This two character field indi cates the realm responsible for the message The field will contain one of the following abbreviations DB indicates that the message applies to the system database These problems can often be fixed with appropriate database programming HW indicates the messages concerns the system hardware Typically these prob lems are corrected by adjusting or replacing the affected hardware EG is indicative of a software error which will most likely require the intervention or attention of an Inter Tel software engineer e Source This field does not appear for Alarm messages This two character field indi cates the software source responsible for the message CP indicates that Call Processing is the source OS refers to the Opera
375. n user Dialing other numbers does not change the stored number It only changes when a new number is stored e Last number dialed The last number manually dialed or speed dialed is automatically stored It changes every time the user dials a telephone number This is the default value of the Redial feature The Last Number Saved and Last Number Dialed features work differently depending on the station status when it is used as shown in the table below Individual station programming determines the mode of the Redial feature Last Number Dialed or Last Number Saved The Redial feature code 380 performs the redial function programmed under the button Non display system speed dial numbers cannot be redialed at a display phone STATION STATUS WHEN REDIAL FEATURE IS USED STATION HAS LAST NUMBER SAVED STATION HAS LAST NUMBER DIALED Idle station Saves the last trunk access code and telephone number that was dialed A trunk is selected using the same trunk access code as used to place last out side call and the last telephone number is dialed Intercom dial tone on or off hook Saves the last trunk access code and telephone number that was dialed A trunk is selected using the same trunk access code as used to place last out side call and the last telephone number is dialed On an intercom call Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the
376. nalog device that can be used with a PCDPM and connected to a modem for data applications or it can be con nected to a single line set The port itself has an individual extension number and com plete station programming setup including its own trunk access and toll restriction information See page 90 for data device information Special programming is required to enable the phone circuit to support some of the PCDPM and MDPM functions Station users can adjust the bit rate bps of the serial port on the PCDPM connected to the phone if it is not configured for a DSS BLF unit The rate can be set to 300 600 1200 2400 or 4800 1200 2400 or 4800 if it is a system serial port Digital Phone LED Rates Page 89 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 90 TO CHANGE THE BIT RATE OF YOUR PCDPM 1 While on hook enter the Program Bit Rate feature code 393 If the port is not configured for a DSS BLF unit the display shows ENTER BIT RATE f it is configured for DSS BLF the display shows CANNOT PROGRAM BIT RATE 2 Enter a valid rate 300 600 1200 2400 or 4800 Executive Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the appropriate menu button in the display The display shows BIT RATE UPDATED f the entered baud rate was already in effect it shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED Data Port Module for 12 Line and 24 Line Analog Phones All GMX 24 line and IMX 12 and 24 line Analog Phones may be equip
377. nate the OHVA call Press the lit Speaker button or have the OHVA caller hang up If you terminate the original call by hanging up the handset you remain con nected to the OHVA call in the handsfree intercom mode TO BLOCK AN OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL OHVA ENABLED INTER TEL PHONES ONLY 1 While on a call using the handset you hear a camp on tone The display shows CALL ANNOUNCE FROM username To cause the intercom call to camp on press the Speaker button The button flashes If you wish to send Do Not Disturb signals to the camped on call press the DITE but ton Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 OUTSIDE CALLS When a trunk is selected for receiving or placing an outside call the voice channel is seized and cannot be used by any other station unless the Conference feature is used see page 209 If the desired trunk is busy the station user can camp on or request a callback queue Other features that apply to both outside and intercom calls are discussed later in this section of the manual They include placing calls on hold call waiting call transfer reverse transfer confer encing and call forwarding Refer to page 151 for an explanation of outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments PLACING OUTSIDE CALLS Outside Calls Inter Tel phones can be programmed to select a trunk a trunk group or ARS when a Call but ton is pressed In the
378. nctions and programmable features including dual tone multi frequency DTMF or dial pulse signaling types of trunks loop start ground start T1 TI PRI TI E amp M DID Caller ID DNIS and ANI trunk groups outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments call routing tables day and night modes of operation automatic route selection ARS trunk and toll restriction area office code number plans emergency calls and direct inward system access DISA Station Instruments This section describes the station instruments of the system Available station instruments include digital and analog phones single line sets and Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Units Intercom Outside and General Call Processing Features Several sections explain the use of the station features that are available to all station users including intercom call features outside call features and general call processing features Attendant Features This section explains the special attendant only features and the use of the DSS BLF Unit Administrator Features This section explains the special administrator only features Record Keeping and Maintenance Features For record keeping purposes the system offers station message detail recording SMDR A system error reporting feature pro vides self diagnostic information to make the system easier to service ACCESS TO THE FEATURES Inter Tel phones have feature buttons that allow
379. nd all stations on the hunt group list are unavail able the hunt group members will not have any camp on indications Callers will hear one of the following Intercom callers will hear busy signals Callers on a trunk not needed to return busy signal such as a T1 E amp M will hear busy signals Callers on a trunk needed to return busy signal such as a non T loop start will hear ringing and the call will be sent to the primary attendant ISDN callers hear busy signals Stations within the hunt group can receive direct trunk ring in intercom forwarded or trans ferred calls to their individual extension numbers without affecting other stations in the hunt group HUNT GROUPS AND CALL FORWARDING Hunt group programming affects the Call Forwarding feature in the following ways e Hunt group calls follow unconditional forward If a station in a hunt group is in the unconditional call forward mode to another station calls to the hunt group will follow the station forwarding request A forwarded hunt group call will ring at the forwarding destination until the No Answer Advance timer expires If it is not answered before the timer expires the call will return to the hunt group and continue circulating through the hunt group list e Conditional forward dependent on timer interaction Stations that are busy and have their calls forwarded conditionally no answer busy or unavailable to another station will receive th
380. nd enter the Message feature code 365 The station will receive a message waiting indication The display shows HANG UP OR WAIT FOR MESSAGE CENTER Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter the Message feature code 365 To have the called party call you Hang up or press a trunk button or the but ton to disconnect before the Message Wait timer expires The display shows MES SAGE LEFT FOR username To leave the message with the called party s message center Do not hang up When the Message Wait timer expires a private call is automatically placed to the called party s message center If the message center is a voice mail hunt group the called party s mailbox is automatically dialed after the voice mail unit answers the call Leave your message with the message center and hang up The called station receives message waiting indications If the message center does not answer the call that is placed after the timer expires the display will show that the message was from your station and you will be called when the station user responds to the message indica tions The display shows MESSAGE LEFT FOR username NOTE If the station you are calling does not have a designated message center you will hear dial tone immediately after pressing the YET button The station will receive a message waiting indication Silent Messages Silent messages can be placed while on or off hook without making an intercom call to the sta tion Th
381. nd strength of the DTMF tones generated by the off premises phone itself If the system cannot recognize a DTMF digit the call is automatically sent to the primary attendant When a DISA user calls a station extension number the call rings as a direct ring in call even if the called station is busy or in Do Not Disturb The DISA caller hears music or ringing determined by a system wide option in Database Programming until the Transfer Available or Transfer Busy timer expires Then if the call is not answered it recalls the called station s attendant If the called station is forwarded the call follows the programmed forward When a hunt group pilot number receives a call through DISA the call rings or circulates according to how the hunt group is programmed 1 e linear or distributed If a caller dials a valid hunt group pilot number that has no members assigned to it the call automatically rings at the primary attendant station until the Abandoned Call timer expires If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected Day and Night Modes Security Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Security Codes DISA trunks can be assigned security codes up to eight digits in length that are required for access to the system The installer can program separate codes for each DISA trunk group to be used during day and or night modes NOTE To prevent unauthorized
382. nd the Voice Processor will con vert the file to WAV attach it to an e mail message and deliver the e mail message to the address specified in the mailbox s E Mail Address field NOTE Due to the nature of network connections Voice Processor software is designed to handle a network failure gracefully If the network link from the Voice Pro cessor to the e mail server is down the Voice Processor will store the messages in a queue If the network does not come back up in 15 minutes the Voice Processor will deliver all pending messages in the queue back to the voice mailboxes and temporarily disable the e mail queue until the network is available This means that new messages will remain in the mailboxes and will not be converted to e mail messages until the net work link is restored Level 1 Unified Messaging is a one way feature That is the user cannot reply to the sender of a voice mail message using e mail If a user attempts to reply the message will be sent to the administrator s E mail Address instead of to the sender of the voice mail message The user should forward the message or send a new message instead of replying In Levels 2 and 3 the user can reply to any message from another mailbox using the Outlook Exchange Reply or Reply to All options E mail messages containing WAV files can be forwarded to other e mail addresses or stored on the computer s local drive just like any other e mail message Or the WAV f
383. ne to provide the secondary voice path needed for the OHVA feature The analog phones and Executone IDS Phones do not require any additional equipment NOTE IP and SIP endpoints do not support OHVA To enable the OHVA the following must be completed e The OHVA system flag must be enabled When the system is in the default state this flag is enabled e Each OHVA equipped Inter Tel phone can be programmed for placing and or receiving OHVA calls By default OHVA is disabled at the station level e Other Inter Tel phones and single line sets can be programmed for placing OHVA calls as desired Inter Tel phones without PC Data Port Modules or secondary voice paths and single line sets cannot receive OHVA calls since they do not have secondary voice path circuitry By default OHVA is disabled at the station level e DSS BLF equipped digital display phones can be programmed to override the Camp On and OHVA Screening timers and make immediate OHVA calls This is a useful option for attendant stations Any combination of OHVA enabled and disabled stations is available through database pro gramming For example all attendants may be programmed to make but not receive OHVA calls while other stations are allowed to receive but not place OHVA calls OHVA calls cannot be processed if the secondary voice path or the speakerphone of the called phone is not available This occurs when the phone has a different OHVA call in prog
384. network date and time and re synchronize clocks in the network e Make database changes see page 12 for a list of programming areas e Enable disable and reset local and off node Call Processing Card modems e Program system speed dial numbers on the local node e Receive and clear displayed system and network alarms e Use diagnostic mode features Freeze and unfreeze the database history for the local node or any node in the net work using programmed freeze zones Print error logs Seize specific devices for troubleshooting purposes Any Inter Tel phone station can be programmed to be an administrator station by the database programmer or by another administrator station NOTE Single line sets can not be used as an administrator station If a non administrator station user attempts to use the administrator features the user will hear reorder tones and the display will show CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEATURE Introduction Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PLACING THE SYSTEM IN NIGHT MODE An administrator station can place the local node in day or night mode The day night mode determines which lists the system will use for trunk access toll restriction etc Night mode also affects the night transfer relays on the Options Card OPC The relays are activated when the system is placed in night mode See SPECIFICATIONS in the Installation Manual for details TO TURN NIGHT MODE ON OR
385. nference hookflash The other parties remain connected 2 Place an intercom or outside call to the other party to be included in the conference or return to a call on hold Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 3 To connect all parties in a conference Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 again 4 To add another party Repeat steps 1 3 again EXITING A CONFERENCE There are several options for leaving the conference e Exit the conference by hanging up The other parties remain connected only if at least one is a station inside party You cannot return to the conference If there are no sta tions remaining in the conference it is disconnected e Leave the conference and allow the outside parties to remain connected by pressing the button or entering the Conference feature code You can return to the confer ence at any time e Endthe conference and place all of the parties on individual hold You can return to the parties one at a time e Place the entire conference on hold The conferenced parties remain connected NOTE If a user attempts to place a conference call on system hold the conference will be placed on individual hold Add Parties to a Conference Page 211 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 212 Exiting and Re Entering the Conference TO EXIT THE CONFERENCE AND LEAVE THE OTHER PARTIES CONNECTED ANY INSIDE PARTY Inter Tel Phones During
386. ng the associated Call or button Single Line Sets During the conference hookflash and hang up The parties are still connected in a con ference To place the parties on individual hold Lift the handset and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You can then return to each party individually by entering the Individual Hold feature code again Exiting and Re Entering the Conference System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold Any inside party involved in a conference can place the conference on hold at his or her sta tion The other conference parties remain connected and can converse The station user that placed the conference on hold can then place calls or use system features while the conference is on hold Then the user can return to the conference on hold Note however that a confer ence may not be terminated while it is on hold Once a station user has moved a conference to hold the user may if desired establish another conference Because each conference is established under a separate Call button it is possible for the user to have access to any individual conference for further call processing If the user elects to use the button for conference access the button will rotate through the conferences in priority order The button will always reflect the status of the top priority conference The priority order for the button when multiple conferen
387. nguage Do Not Disturb message 02 VOICE PROCESSOR Page 174 When a Voice Processor application receives a call from a station or trunk the system tells the application which language is programmed for that device For example e Jfa trunk programmed for American English rings in to an application the Voice Pro cessor will play the American English prompts e Jfa station programmed for Japanese calls voice mail the station user will hear Japa nese prompts e Jfa station programmed for American English receives a call on a trunk that is pro grammed for Japanese and then transfers the call to voice mail the caller using the trunk will hear Japanese voice prompts e Ifa Japanese station is forwarded to voice mail a caller on an American English station or trunk will hear the American English prompts the user recorded mailbox greeting will be heard in the language in which it was recorded when the call is forwarded When using a Call Routing Announcement application with digit translation the individual Voice Processor applications assigned to the digits can be programmed to override the device language and provide prompts in one language only Using this method you can program a Call Routing Announcement tree that offers callers a choice between languages For example e The Call Routing Announcement application could have a greeting that says Thank you for calling For English prompts press 1 NIHONGO WA 2 WO OSHITE
388. nknown caller an outside caller at lt phone number If the message is from an extension ID or a mailbox the programmed username will be shown inside parentheses after the number For example mailbox 1000 ADMIN Received on The RECEIVED ON line contains the date and time that the voice mail was received by the mailbox Priority Private or Certified If the voice mail message was sent with a delivery option the body will contain the line Message marked lt PRIORITY PRIVATE or CER TIFIED gt Note that this is for informational purposes only and does not affect the e mail message itself For example if a voice mail message is marked for certified deliv ery the sender will receive a confirmation when the recipient listens to the voice mail message using the mailbox However the sender will not receive confirmation when the recipient reads the e mail WAV file attachment The WAV file attachment will appear as a file with the name VM WAV To listen to the message the user must play the WAV file using multimedia software such as Sound Recorder Level 1 LEVELS 2 AND 3 Levels 2 and 3 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 To use Level 2 or 3 Unified Messaging you must have the following An existing e mail system based on Microsoft Outlook Exchange MAPI The mailboxes E mail Gateway fields are programmed for Unified Messaging For complete instructions on using
389. nnot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic System History 9974 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic View Displays 9983 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Seize Device 9973 Used during troubleshooting to seize a specific trunk or station by indicating the board number port number and device number System History Freeze 9993 The system fault history can be halted frozen or re enabled using these feature codes when diagnostics mode System History Unfreeze 9998 is enabled The fault history is used by service personnel when troubleshooting the system Page 126 Administrator Feature Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 EXTENSION NUMBERS Extension numbers are recognized as feature codes by the system When the system is in the default state the extension numbers are assigned as follows Attendant 0 Stations 1000 1999 Hunt groups 1 75 2000 2074 or 2000 2299 Voice Processor Applications 2500 2999 Page Zones 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 Used only for programming a feature button to select a page zone External Page Ports 91000 91003 Individual Trunks 94000 95999 Determined by card slot and device number Used for programming and troubleshooting Extension Numbers Page 127 System
390. ns 171 Multilingual Capability 2s2 lt dscectacece RERO RR UAR RA ACIER RH sae es 172 vri h sa sea a aeei aE Ua rp erm 172 Language Selections caes acer wed Nac ea MEC hea ase C ANES d 172 Secondary Language Selection 2o seas sk e hr ERE RR RR Ea 173 iu PRETI 173 Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages 00 cece eee 174 Multi Language Feature on Network Operation 00 00 e eee eee eee 175 licen 25 24 bd cake 175 Intercom Calls 5249s a ee eects kd ed ees acce eR 1 doce ado cb cd oe ded a dus 176 Programming for Private Intercom Calls llle 176 Ring Intercom Always so posts psu pace ERROR A RES PR EORR C PRATER 176 Handsfree Buable Disable iau as ey e E SO HAE xS ux d Y a Y 176 Station To Station Calling cde neck xd Ra pac EN bud ede ba bu C Erb bad 177 Receiving Intercom Calls ug eccadacea sek vines acne Bac A RC Ra ce d aaded 177 Placing Intercom Calls 45324 exte Fx RRRAXERFAT n X ORA ERA RR RR EN EUREN 178 Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback ieu ea hh Ex y EX EY nn 180 Camp OW eae ca eee ea eS en bee Ka ee ae Md UC OE E Tage XXL 180 Busy Station Queue Callback 0 0 eee teens 181 Inter Station MGSsages a4 ka oca 3 ROC o eR o p nee ees DR elle a CR hee Rea ode 182 Leaving MIBSSINGS uod eur xar SER WR AE pO aee LO a e So Ne od 183 Silent Message Spenar ure x Rr EE Nau e Sa e X EX NAE VS E dt ra 183 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication That You Left
391. ns answer supervision signals to the public telephone network when answered by the called station answered by the attendant routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the equipment user and routed to a dial prompt This equipment also returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the public telephone network Permissible exceptions are a call is unanswered busy tone is received and reorder tone is received This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes Failure to provide equal access capabili ties is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules TYPE OF PORT FACILITY INTERFACE RINGER EQUIV SERVICE ORDER USOC JACK INTERFACE CODE FIC ALENCE NO REN CODE SOC CONNECTOR 2 Wire Loop 02LS2 0 6B RJ21X 2 Wire Loop Ground 02LS2 02GS2 3 6B 4 4B E RJ21X 2 Wire Ground 02GS2 0 6B RJ21X OPX Class C OL13C 9 0F RJ11C RJ21X 2 Wire DID 02RV2 T 0 0B AS 2 RJLIC RJ21X D4 Superframe AMI 04DU9 BN 6 0Y RJ48C D4 Superframe with 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C B8ZS Extended 04DU9 1KN 6 0Y RJ48C Superframe ESF ESF with B8ZS 04DU9 1SN 6 0Y RJ48C Primary Rate ISDN 04DU9 1SN 6 0Y RJ48C Also interfaces with Class A and B When using T1 facilities to provide DID service do not use the DID facility interfa
392. nsfer Methods and information about receiving screened and announced calls Page 301 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO PROGRAM PERSONAL OPTIONS 1 2 3 Page 302 Dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press EM to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and password When you hear the Main Menu list of options press Ell to select the Personal Options Menu You may then do any or all of the following steps To change your personal greeting press N You have the following options a C Press Hl to record and or enable your primary personal greeting or E to record and or enable your alternate greeting The system plays your current greeting if one exists To replay the greeting you can press I Press E to erase and re record your greeting as follows 1 Record your greeting after the tone then press EB 2 Press EJ again to accept your greeting Or you can press Ell to replay your greeting El to add to your greeting or to erase and re record your greet ing Press Kl to enable the system default mailbox greeting The system greeting is automatically enabled Press EM to exit without changing your greeting To change your recorded directory name press EM a b After the tone record your first and last name then press ES Press EJ again to accept your recorded name
393. nt groups in which the agent was a member and also logged the agent out With node spanning hunt groups deleting an agent from a hunt group can be done from the node on which the hunt group resides or from a remote node If an agent is deleted on the node containing hunt group s of which he is a mem ber then the agent is removed from all hunt group s on that node and is logged out Ifthe agent is deleted from a remote node the agent is logged off from that node but remains a member of any hunt group s located on other nodes e Deletion of ACD Hunt Groups in previous versions resulted in all member stations being logged out In version 5 3 or later this will apply to off node logged in stations also When the hunt group is deleted all remotely logged in stations will be logged out e I fthe extension number of an ACD Hunt Group is changed any local or remote stations that are logged in will reflect the change If links are down at the time of the change remote nodes will not receive the change and an import export process will be neces sary to update the information on the affected nodes e Removing an Agent ID from a hunt group agent list logs out any station local or remote that is logged in to that hunt group using that Agent ID e With the node spanning features of ACD hunt groups changing Agent IDs can be done from two possible locations on the node where the group resides or on a node where the logged in station r
394. nt status the display shows FREEZE ZONE XX ALREADY FROZEN or UNFROZEN 4 Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn off diagnostics mode The dis play shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF Freezing Unfreezing the System History Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATOR FEATURES The voice mail administrator can use special features that are not provided to other mailbox owners The system administrator mailbox has all standard mailbox features plus the ability to do the following Record a broadcast message Perform mailbox and group list maintenance Create and select custom audiotex recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant recordings call routing announcements and hunt group overflow and announcement station recordings Import fax documents Customize voice mail prompts To access the system administrator s mailbox the system administrator dials the voice mail access number presses EM to access the main menu enters the system administrator s mailbox number then presses Kl to reach the System Administrator Menu There is not a prompt for entering the E BROADCASTING MESSAGES The system administrator has the ability to make a single recorded message and send it to all Standard and Receive Only mailboxes Extension IDs do not receive Broadcast Messages TO RECORD A BROADCAST MESSAGE 1 a BON Dial the voice mail application access
395. nter Tel phone with a speed dial button Press the speed dial button of the desired number The number is dialed Display phones show the number Inter Tel phone without a speed dial button Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 Then do one of the following to dial the number e Usea location code Dial the desired speed dial location code 0 9 e Scroll through the displayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the Volume NEXT or PREVIOUS button e Use the Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone menu Use the menu buttons to select the desired speed dial location Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers Page 237 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTERCOM SPEED DIAL AND FEATURE CODE DIRECTORY Page 238 NOTE The feature does not apply to single line sets The Directory feature enables display phone users to look up intercom extension numbers and usernames system speed dial numbers and names or system feature codes Once the desired information has been displayed the user may automatically dial the number store the number in a station speed dial location select a different number name terminate the directory routine or switch to the other directory A directory search can be performed when a call is waiting on conference or transfer hold at the station NOTE The Directories premium feature is required to use the system directory In a network sett
396. ntercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directory eee 238 House PONG 4 eewsre xai em e doe oe Kop ae o Re tien eni ace oe a ape c R8 241 R diali 25s esuckeerx eire oW Re eHOR C CR EAQUE AUCH ACA RO awn eee IE eo 243 Redireet Call 45 rehrh eem eo uH CROCO CR RERO HARE ORC REA WO HR 245 T T 246 Remove from Paging is2xesadekbek sak a a ARRAS RERRCEFERSRULER FE EE essi 247 Do Not Dist rD o4 da RERERRERE RU ED EEDEDENESTERE DAE Xd CR y ex EE ROCHE ORO 247 Do Not Disturb Override 0 2422 wk ERECREEENAAREXAXE AAA ATE ed See REX dA E ae 251 Remote Feature Programming 4 2 3v 3t ERA AER EXT A Ed 252 D fa lt Station oo ha SEER EE ERE EORR DUE AA WERE Ea EIC ER EET ROR 256 PHOoOKIDBIC iik R ERR REREPDREEREREEETEQE RE SAX CDNA EE Txe3 Ede 33 ad RE 257 Reminder M ssag s usage 34 RE REALE Edi Trisin Er ECESE ENEE E i 258 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features ccc eee cece e ee eee wees 260 Voice Processing Features 269 Introductiot s Via su sese no mmi ea cee C EHCR RAO DE CEA HAGAE ewe EA CC Ra KC 271 Automated Attendant 23 443 e REGERE REOR KE REOR CROCO READER RACE OE EC on 272 Call Routing Announcement eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ehh hh nh n nn 276 Fax On Demand i yee ae dee EPR XR ERE ERE RROE KORE DRE RE REE REOR UE C Rd 279 Directories ou da EERE I EURECRO RC OEC EDO ERO ACA E RECORDER 281 Becord A C allis say eke eb OR CREER DOR He EARN AE EDE i 284 Sche
397. ntering a forward destination the programmed forward is canceled 6 To turn off Call Forward Enter 355 and then hang up instead of entering a destina tion You hear a confirmation tone Remote Forward Programming Page 255 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 DEFAULT STATION A station user can enter one feature code that will return the following features to their default states Returning a station to default Cancels the following features if in effect Do Not Disturb Manual Call Forwarding Queue Request Account Code For All Calls Following Background Music Ring Intercom Always Headset Mode Restores the following features if disabled Handsfree Page Receive Hunt Group Replace System Forwarding Returns phone volumes to default levels Returns phones to the standard keymap If the phone is a member of one or more ACD hunt groups logs into the hunt group s Does not affect PCDPM bit rate This feature is especially useful for installers and troubleshooters who need to know exactly how a given station is programmed TO RETURN THE STATION TO DEFAULT Page 256 Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook enter the Default Station feature code 394 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows STATION DEFAULTED f off hook hang up Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Default Station feature code 394 You hear a confirma
398. ntil the ACD agent answers it However every time an ACD hunt group call is received after the first call the agent will hear the ring burst in the headset and the call will be automatically connected This flag overrides the station s Transfer To Connect station flag which is disabled by default Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag Page 143 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 144 Group Call Pick Up When the Group Call Pick Up feature is enabled a call ringing in to a hunt group or one of its stations can be picked up at any other station Users can enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and dial a hunt group s pilot number to pick up a call that is ringing in to the hunt group s pilot number or to any station within that hunt group The system follows the priority list shown below to determine which call is picked up The system follows the hunt group list always beginning with the first station on the list to check each station in the hunt group and then the overflow station for one type of call at a time If there is more than one call of the same type at the selected station the call that was received by the station first is picked up Holding calls and queue callbacks cannot be picked up 1 Calls to the hunt group pilot number 2 CO calls a Direct ring in calls b Transferred calls c Recalls d Camped on calls 3 IC calls a Direct ring in calls b Transferred calls c
399. nto all RESERVED FEATURE into group INTO ALL ACDS local but no remote groups ACD Hunt Groups Span Nodes Database Programming ACD hunt groups have options allowing the addition of phone off node devices single line off node devices and hunt group member extension lists containing local or off node stations or both If the Remote Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature is not included in the node s software license the off node options will not appear in the list when program ming members for ACD hunt groups Page 145 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 146 Operational Changes The Station Monitor feature remains limited to a single node Members who are logged in to a remote node or who are logged in to the supervisor s node from a remote node cannot be monitored Hunt groups with remote members rely on network links between nodes Node avail ability and software version compatibility affect hunt group log in procedures as fol lows Hunt group members attempting to log in to all hunt groups will be logged in to only those hunt groups on nodes that are reachable The display on the user device will only indicate log in results for reachable nodes Members logging out of all hunt groups will be logged out of groups on reachable nodes immediately and will automatically be logged out of groups on unreachable nodes as soon as the link to the node is restored The phone wi
400. number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press EM to identify yourself as a mailbox owner Enter the system administrator mailbox number and password Press Ell to access the System Administrator Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press Hf to send a broadcast message Record your message To pause while recording Press KM To continue press any button except I To erase and re record your message Press KB If you exceed the maximum allotted time for message length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send it If voice mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot accept your message Hang up and try again later When you have completed your message you have the following options If you are satisfied with your message hang up OR press EM for more options If you wish to hear your message press KM If you wish to add to your message press Kl and continue your message as described in step 6 To erase and re record your message press KM Voice Mail Administrator Features Page 45 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MAINTAINING MAILBOXES AND GROUP LISTS Page 46 Using the system administrator s mailbox you may provide basic voice mail mailbox and group list system maintenance This maintenance includes the following e Record the name of a standard mailbox extension ID or a group list
401. o call the station s voice mailbox QUEUE Press this button to request a callback when the resource is available as described on the next page Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Busy Station Queue Callback When a called station is busy or in Do Not Disturb the caller can request a callback queue and hang up until the station is available This can be done even if the call camps on Each sta tion can have only one active queue callback request at a time The Queue Callback feature can also be used when calling a hunt group if all stations are unavailable A user cannot queue onto busy resources on another node Queue callbacks must be answered before the Queue Callback timer expires If a callback is not answered the queue is canceled If the station is busy when called back the queue request is placed behind any other waiting queue requests Queue callbacks do not follow forwarding and are not blocked by Do Not Disturb mode TO REQUEST A CALLBACK FROM A STATION 1 Inter Tel Phones When you hear a busy signal or Do Not Disturb signal a repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause when calling an extension number press the QUEUE menu button Or press the Special button enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up The display shows QUEUE REGISTERED FOR username Single Line Sets When you hear a busy signal or Do Not Disturb signal when
402. o record elapsed time in seconds the ELAPSED TIME field will show S XXXXXX XXXXXX represents the number of seconds for calls up to 999999 seconds long For calls lasting longer than 999999 seconds ELAPSED TIME will show HH MM hours and minutes rounded up to the nearest minute The SMDR output report is printed as shown in Figure 12 on the following page A page head ing with the day of the week date month year and column headings is generated just after midnight to show the change in date A header is also printed after output from another system source alarm informative message etc using the same output device interrupted the SMDR output Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 12 SMDR Report Format TYP EXT TRUNK DIALED DIGITS START ELAPSED COST ACCOUNT CODE XXX XXXXXXXXXXX lt 28 characters gt HH MM HH MM SS XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXX TYP Call type abbreviations for Free 000 Local LOC Toll Local TLC Toll Long Distance TLD Operator International O l DISA DSA Conference CNF DID DNIS non DISA DID Incoming IN Network NET Depending on how your system is programmed the operator and international calls may be displayed separately If so the operator calls are displayed under OP and the international calls are displayed under INT EXT The extension number
403. olding at the station or hunt group a priority list determines which call is reverse transferred Calls are selected in the following order and if more than one call of the same type is at the station the calls are picked up in the order they were received 1 Ringing calls 2 Camped on calls 3 Holding outside calls 4 Holding intercom calls If a call is reverse transferred from a hunt group announcement or overflow station and a sta tion in the hunt group becomes available the call will be disconnected from your station immediately when answered by the hunt group station Group Call Pick up When the Group Call Pick Up feature is enabled a call ringing in to a hunt group or one of its stations can be picked up at any other station Users can enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and dial a hunt group s pilot number to pick up a call that is ringing in to the hunt group s pilot number or to any station within that hunt group See page 144 for details about the Group Call Pick Up feature NOTE Group Call Pick up does not affect DSS lamp status any differently than standard hand group calls or individual calls There is a programmable station flag called Transient Call Indication On Call Answer that determines whether the station user will see a call display when reverse transferring a call or using a secondary extension button If the flag is enabled the display will indicate whether the call was ringing recalling
404. olio p oe OR CC o poU CR Qd ed d oq i i CR B cn RR Ee ota 130 Trunk Feat r s siesta neh eet eit Ce o e ea oat ERE C Id dip a o e e eio ooa 148 Inter Tel Phone Features 4 29ek ark he REOR OO 944 18 909 440 CREAR X UC UR ROH C 164 Multilingual Capability 4 2 o OC e ER RERO oe xe ie dn 172 Intercom Calls 4rd ae she eg ew wean een ew ADR eed ACROE U eR EEE 176 Iut r Station Messages 4 sud eL CORE ERRARE RO ROR EES TOR OEE ECCO RR 182 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA eeeeeeee enhn hn nnn 187 Outside Calls usa duce dO REE KSEE REESE EENE ER MERE Paxddd VR PPE PE EFE GS 189 Placing Calls On Hold 45 acce a XO RONG ECAR CR Qe RC ACROOAAC COR CREWS 198 Call Waiting qa OE Ob RYCR CARA RUE RA CR IR NGROGCACN RON A RUE eee eg 201 Table of Contents AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 CONTENTS PAGE Call DrAUSIGE oue ses tx bte C oen ORE aedes e C8 dH b Rae SOR RR X e re n 203 Call Screening 5e ode yere OE EIROHCR ER PRO E ARA RU Ib Re RON RERO ACCU CHOR 206 Reverse Transfer uiua em Eo WR CC CR OR RC RE RO ACE OR oe RO DR eR 208 Conference C alls iege eure EORR CRI eR PRORA REACH RR ECCE eos 209 R tord X C all uuiu ae e V RR CC RC OR RC CREE RO ad eee erento tens 214 Agent Help Mee 216 System Forwarding 42aseee ra ess 00044 eitt E OCA I ES E EEEE ES 219 Call Forwarding iude erre E see a wee censier i E eee S 225 Speed DISBE 4 cde ed xp eror ned e ho de Re e ORC OR CEA neers ed TR ees 230 I
405. ollowing Feature Page 197 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PLACING CALLS ON HOLD There are several ways to place intercom and outside calls on hold While on hold the caller hears music if equipped There are three hold applications in the system e Individual hold places the call on hold at one station It can then be picked up directly at that station or it can be picked up at another station using the Reverse Transfer fea ture e System hold places the call on hold so that it can then be picked up directly at any Inter Tel phone that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or out going access for the associated trunk or at the station that placed it on hold Attempting to place a conference on system hold will place the conference on individual hold Intercom calls cannot be placed on system hold Single line sets cannot place calls on system hold attempting to do so at a single line station will place the call on individual hold In a network setting when a user puts a trunk on system hold only that user and users on the same node as the trunk can access the call e Consultation hold allows a single line set user to pause during a call use other system features and then return to the caller by hookflashing If a single line set user attempts to hang up after placing a call on consultation hold the call recalls the station If a call remains on hold until the Hold timer expires i
406. on 3 The buttons on your telephone are labeled with letters Use Quick Spell non display phone or single line or Exact Spell display phone to enter the desired name as described on page 282 then press EM If you wish to exit from the directory without selecting a name press EB or hang up 4 The voice mail application will play the selected name Do one of the following e To accept the name Press EM e To hear the previous name in the directory Press KB e To hear additional information for the selected name if allowed Press EM e Tohear the next name in the directory Press KM e To spell a different name Press El and repeat step 3 e Toswitch the first last name sort order Press Ei Listening to the Next Previous Name Page 283 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECORD A CALL Page 284 NOTE The Record A Call premium feature is required to use Record A Call If the Voice Processor has a Record A Call application the users can enter a feature code to record ongoing calls in their designated Record A Call mailboxes Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox message The Record A Call mailbox records the call as a voice mail message All parties will be included in the recording If desired the Record A Call mailbox can be programmed to play a message announcing that the Record A Call feature is in progress There can be separate mes
407. on If a system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following Delayed Reset Press Kll or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The display shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Kll or the IMMEDIATE menu button to reset the system now NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Station Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 1 Station Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 poe eee v Press 1 or STATION menu button r A ENTER STATION EXTENSION L d v Enter desired station extension number then y Press 1 or STATION FLAGS v Press 2 or STATION INFO Press 3 or TOLL RESTRICTION menu button menu button menu button STATION INFO OPTION TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION Select flag to program sen L x 1 Y r i Press 1 or Press 2 or Press 1 or COS Press 2 or COS ATTENDANT USERNAME DAY menu button NIGHT menu button Press 1 or Press 2 or menu button menu button for day mode for night mode ON menu button OFF menu button to enable to disable i E 4 SET DAY NIGHT COS XX i 4 Enter Ent
408. on 180 181 trunk 194 R Realm 267 Recall attendant 129 attendant forwarding of 129 hold 129 198 199 system forwarding 224 transfer 205 unsupervised call 129 Receive Network Alarms 37 39 Receiving Intercom Calls 177 Receiving Outside Calls 192 Record all conference calls 261 all DID DNIS calls 261 all DISA calls 261 all free calls 261 all incoming calls 261 all international calls 261 all local calls 261 all network calls 262 all operator 261 all ring in diagnostics 261 all toll local calls 261 all toll long distance calls 261 all trunk to trunk calls 262 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features 260 Record A Call 5 214 271 281 284 tone 214 tone interval timer 214 Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts 51 Recovering Deleted Messages 298 Red and Green LEDs 88 Redialing 243 feature code 123 324 last number dialed 243 last number saved 243 Redirect Call 121 245 Reminder Messages 18 174 258 Remote Do Not Disturb Programming 253 Remote Feature Programming 252 call forwarding 255 do not disturb 253 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Remote Forward Programming 255 Remote Messaging 289 291 301 Remote Notification Cascade 291 Remove From Paging 247 Remove Replace Hunt Group 133 Remove Replace Paging 247 Reports 267 Requesting Additional Information 283 Resetting the Call Processing Card Modem 42 Responding to Messages 184 Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag 143
409. on a call hookflash to place the call on consultation hold You hear three short tones followed by dial tone You can place a call or enter a feature code NOTE If you hang up while the call is on consultation hold the call will immediately recall your station If you hang up after dialing an extension number the call will transfer to that station Return to the caller on hold by hookflashing TO ANSWER A HOLD RECALL System Hold When the recall rings at your station the display shows station or trunk RECALL ING Lift the handset or press the button Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the ANSWER menu button Single line sets are automatically connected Inter Tel phone users may need to press the flashing Call or individual trunk button Page 199 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MICROPHONE MUTE Page 200 Whether handsfree or using the handset you can temporarily turn off your microphone while on a call The call is still connected you can hear the other party but they cannot hear you Since the call is not placed on hold no timer is activated The button is lit when the microphone is muted the light will go off when you press the button to re enable the microphone If you receive an off hook voice announce call see page 187 you can press the but ton while speaking to the off hook voice announce caller to mute the handset microphone The
410. one button dialing of feature codes Informa tion is programmed in the database to determine the arrangement of the feature buttons and their default values If desired some of the phone feature buttons can be designated as user programmable buttons See page 167 for more information SPECIAL BUTTON AND HOOKFLASH Introduction Depending on the feature and system programming users can either enter feature codes imme diately after lifting the handset or while on hook or they must signal the system before enter ing the feature code Inter Tel phone users signal the system by pressing the Special button which is represented by JEM on the phone Single line DTMF set users perform a hook flash press and release the hookswitch quickly If the user does not enter a code or begin dial ing before the Dial Initiation timer expires the system sends reorder tones Page 115 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MESSAGE LAMP Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones have a Message Lamp located on the upper right hand corner of the phone This lamp is programmable and is defaulted to the Message feature code 365 If you change the feature code associated with this lamp it will flash when the feature is active For example if you program the lamp for Individual Hold 336 the lamp will flash when a call is held at the station NOTE Version 7 0 or later system software is required to support the Message Lamp SPEAKER
411. onference calls 209 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 do not disturb 248 emergency calls 159 handsfree calls 176 house phone 241 message print 265 messages 182 music on hold 171 night mode 162 Record A Call 214 record a call 284 reminder messages 258 remote feature programming 252 reverse transfer 208 ringin 151 setting time 11 speed dialing 230 synchronizing time 12 Network Alarms 37 39 Network and Local Primary Attendants 128 Network Group diagnostics 42 Network Group Diagnostics 105 Network History freeze unfreeze history 44 Networking 2 New Messages 296 Next Key 81 82 Night Mode 9 162 Night Transfer 109 Node and Circuit Number On Power Up 79 Nodes 4 271 277 alarms 37 39 number on phone display 79 primary attendant 128 Non Associated 291 Notification Numbers 293 Numeric Mode 13 32 O Off hook Voice Announce 187 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA 187 blocking 187 using the MUTE button 187 200 Off Premises Extensions OPX 96 Off Premises Stations 108 One Attendant Operation 129 One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation 129 On Hook Dialing Monitoring 193 On Hook Monitoring 193 Open Architecture Interface OAI 94 Operational Changes 146 Operator Destination mailbox 290 voice processor 273 287 Optional Account Codes 196 Optional Data Devices 90 Optional DSP Resources 108 Optional Equipment 109 data device 90 data port module 90 headsets 88 MDPM 89 PCDPM 89 Opt
412. or CALLER DIALS Fax with that number is selected 1997 1998 or 1999 CALLER DIALS 2 Selects Fax Document 1999 Product List CALLER DIALS 3 Selects Fax Document 1998 Price List CALLER DIALS 4 Selects Fax Document 1997 Training CALLER DIALS End Fax Selections System requests dialing infor mation and send fax then returns to Main Menu CALLER DIALS Cancel Fax Selections System returns to greeting Page 278 Sample Call Routing Announcement Tree FAX ON DEMAND Fax On Demand Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The Fax On Demand feature provides fax services to callers It is a specially programmed Call Routing Announcement application that uses digit translation to allow callers to select the doc uments they wish to have faxed to them With Fax On Demand callers can use a DTMF telephone to request one or more documents from the company s fax library This library of fax documents is also used in the Unified Mes saging faxing feature When the request is completed the Voice Processor places a call to the caller s fax machine to deliver the requested documents The Fax On Demand process is shown in the following steps 1 The caller reaches the Call Routing Announcement application either through direct ring in or transfer After listening to the introductory recording the caller selects a do
413. or personal phone notification press 2 152 For notification of all new messages press 1 153 For priority only press 2 154 Please enter the destination telephone number and wait for further instructions 155 The new number is 156 Please enter the start time 157 Please enter the stop time 158 I m sorry You must program a telephone number first Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 55 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 56 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 159 Invalid time 160 For AM press 1 161 Please select the days of the week on which you wish to be notified 162 Not used 163 Please enter your mailbox number 164 Today 165 Yesterday 166 January 167 February 168 March 169 April 170 May 171 June 172 July 173 August 174 September 175 October 176 November 177 December 178 First 179 Second 180 Third 181 Fourth 182 Fifth 183 Sixth 184 Seventh 185 Eighth 186 Ninth 187 Tenth 188 Eleventh 189 Twelfth 190 Thirteenth 191 Fourteenth 192 Fifteenth 193 Sixteenth 194 Seventeenth 195 Eighteenth 196 Nineteenth 197 Twentieth 198 Twenty first 199 Twenty second 200 Twenty third Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004
414. or press repeatedly until the name is erased Then press EB or ACCEPT To leave the name the same Press EJ or ACCEPT When the display shows ENTER NUMBER enter the number up to 48 digits to be stored using the dialpad one of the speed dial buttons or the button f neces sary use the button to back up and erase existing numbers Display phones show the number as it is entered To include pause or hookflash in the number press the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound three times for a hookflash F or four times for a pause P Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone users can press the ES ES FLASH or PAUSE menu buttons to enter special characters You cannot exceed 48 digits Press EB or ACCEPT to save the number You hear a single progress tone when the number is accepted Your display shows SYS SPD BIN XXX UPDATED TO ERASE SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NAMES OR NUMBERS 1 While on hook enter the Program System Speed Dial feature code 9801 Display phones show PROGRAM SYS SPD 000 999 Enter the speed dial location code 000 999 The display shows ENTER NAME cur rent name You may erase the name and or number To erase the name Press repeatedly until the name is erased or press CLEAR To erase the number Press EJ or ACCEPT to display the ENTER NUMBER prompt then press repeatedly until the number is erased or press CLEAR Press EJ or ACCEPT to exit You hea
415. ork administrator Make sure the affected device is not behind a firewall or NAT NOTE This alarm is displayed only if the Insufficient Bandwidth Alarm flag is enabled in Database Programming System Flags 3400 199 amp 200 299 CALL TECHNICIAN These alarms indicate that an equipment failure has occurred that requires the atten tion of service personnel When calling for service be prepared to provide them with the alarm information as well as what was taking place when the alarm occurred if anything TO RESPOND TO A MINOR ALARM FROM ANY ALARM DISPLAY STATION A major alarm message MAJOR ALARM appears on all display phones in the event of a sys tem wide failure If the major alarm appears on a group of phones the associated Keyset Card may have failed The warning might also appear on a single phone if the phone or its cabling may be defective Because they indicate that all or part of the system is inoperative major alarms require immediate attention from service personnel Page 38 Network Alarms Clearing Alarms Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Clearing Alarms An administrator can clear a network wide alarm on the local node only or on every node in the network To clear an alarm you can use either the administrator feature codes or the menu buttons on your phone TO USE THE FEATURE CODES TO CLEAR ALARMS Enter the appropriate feature code to clear the alarm
416. ot Disturb DND messages e Program up to ten passwords for the Database Programming feature e Program station extensions e Swap extensions Trunk Programming e Individual trunk answer supervision type caller information hybrid balance signaling type DTMF or pulse and trunk group assignment e Trunk group answer access ring in toll restrictions and trunk lists Page 12 Synchronizing Network Time Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Entry to the Database Programming feature at the administrator station can be protected using a password A password would prevent unauthorized users from altering the system database NOTE Passwords are very important to system security Without sufficient password protec tion the telephone system database is vulnerable to unauthorized access Depending on the database changes you make the system may require a reset after program ming If so the system will prompt you for a reset and ask if it should be done immediately or delayed Delaying the reset would prevent interruption in service However if a reset is required it should be done as soon as possible to permit proper system operation NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Entering Alphanumeric Information When entering alphanumeric information such as a username reminder message or Do Not Disturb message press or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu but ton to switch back and
417. own in interruptions per minute IPM STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM Auto dial modem Ring signal is being Data call is in is dialing and the sent to the data progress and acces DATA data port is device Red LED sible A continuous unavailable Red flutter indicates that LED the data device is off hook Red LED Intercom call is in Recalling intercom Intercom call is Intercom call is on IC progress Green call is camped on camped on waiting hold Green LED LED Green LED Green LED Speakerphone is on or ready for SPEAKER US Or station programming is in progress Red LED Conference is in Conference is recall A conference party is CNF progress Green ing your station on conference wait LED Green LED hold Green LED Microphone is MUTE muted Red LED Calls are being FWD forwarded Red LED Station is in alpha Message is waiting MSG numeric mode Red LED Red LED Your station is in DND Do Not Disturb Red LED SPEED Station is busy or Station is in Do Not Station has a call Continuous flutter unplugged Disturb Red LED ringing in Red LED indicates that the sta DIAL or DSS Red LED tion was left off hook Red LED All stations in hunt Hunt group has a call HUNT group are unavail camped on Bron able Red LED Red LED Call is active at your Call is recalling from Call or
418. ows callers to send and receive recorded messages from any station or DTMF telephone Dial pulse signaling is not recognized by the Voice Processor Callers using dial pulse phones will be routed to the voice mail application s Dial 0 Destination for assistance VOICE MAIL AND MESSAGE NOTIFICATION RETRIEVAL APPLICATIONS Two types of applications are combined to provide the voice mail feature Voice Mail and Mes sage Notification Retrieval Voice Mail Voice Mail This application handles all calls that are directed to voice mail other than the Message Notification Retrieval application placed by subscrib ers and non subscribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this appli cation s extension number This application can also be the mes sage center for the subscribers stations Message _ Notification Retrie val Only one Message Notifi cation Retrieval application may be created for the system When station users respond to message indications left by voice mail they reach the Message notifica tion Retrieval application and are prompted only for their password CALL TO VOICE MAIL Y options Voice mail answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of Y Y Caller selects option Caller does not select an option Y Y Y
419. p Application if available Outside Party Number provided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level Outside Party Number provided by ANI service if enabled at the system wide flag level Number Absence Reason such as Caller ID OUT OF AREA or PRIVATE blocked message RINGING IN display ANI and Caller ID information is also sent to the voice mail application to provide the caller s telephone number as part of the message envelope SINGLE LINE SET DISPLAYS System software V8 1 and later supports the transmission of Caller ID to single line sets This feature uses the calling party information that the system cabinet receives from the central office CO Once programmed on hook single line sets display the calling party s phone number after the first ring when they receive an incoming CO call The Caller ID information is also displayed if the single line set receives a transferred call from another station that has calling party information NOTE Caller ID is not transmitted to single line adapters SLAs Single Line Set Displays System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 OUTGOING ACCESS ALLOWED ANSWER AND RING IN ASSIGNMENTS Each trunk group has programmed lists of stations for outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments for day and night modes e Outgoing access assignment for a particular trunk group or node trunk group permits the station user to place
420. p is programmed for digit 3 the recording should say something like For customer support press 3 The system provides a choice between Primary and Secondary Language prompts and dis plays The available languages are American English British English Spanish and Japanese The system selects the language to use for each call as determined by the trunk station and Voice Processor programming When using a Call Routing Announcement application with digit translation the individual Voice Processor applications assigned to the digits can be pro grammed to override the device language and provide prompts in one language only Using this method you can program a Call Routing Announcement tree that offers callers a choice between languages See page 172 for more information DIGIT TRANSLATION NODES A digit translation node is a digit translation destination that allows further digit translation options Unlike extension and mailbox destinations a digit translation node does not move the call to a specific location Instead it offers additional dialing options A digit translation node can use any of the Actions including transfers to other digit translation nodes The use of digit translation nodes allows the programmer to create a Call Routing Announce ment with several layers to form a digit translation tree The tree can be made up of digits with destinations and or digit translation nodes with additional translations An
421. pad or a speaker it must be con nected to a PC that is equipped with an OAI product that emulates an Inter Tel phone The OAI product 1s used for dialing and feature access The AgentSet also requires an Inter Tel headset or handset Only Inter Tel equipment should be used Other manufacturer s equipment may not be compatible with the AgentSet If the user wishes to receive audible signals at the headset there 1s a station flag that will send a single tone to the headset when a call is ringing Refer to page 89 SINGLE LINE SETS AgentSet Industry standard single line DTMF sets can be installed on the system and or used as an off premises extension OPX On premises single line circuits can be used for installing AC ring ing single line sets playback devices and other single line devices The single line sets are connected to Single Line Cards SLCs or 16 Port Single Line Cards SLC 16s Or they can be connected to Single Line Adapter SLA circuits which are in turn connected to available Digital Keyset Card DKSC or DKSC16 circuits Off premises stations can be connected to SLAs T1 Cards T1Cs or T1 E1 Cards e ach SLC can support up to eight on premises single line stations and each SLC 16 can support up to sixteen stations The SLC and SLC 16 will support message lamps on sin gle line sets if the optional Lamp Option Card is installed on the SLC or SLC 16 e ach SLA can support any combination of up to two single lin
422. pad buttons to enter the time in hours and minutes For example enter 0900 for 9 00 If you entered the time incorrectly the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time 4 Ifthe system is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM AM 1 PM 2 Press or the AM menu button for AM or press Kl or the PM menu button for PM The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED If you press any button other than 1 or 2 the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time NOTE If using a station programmed for Japanese the prompts will be reversed and you will set the AM PM before the hour and minutes Setting System Date and Time Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SETTING NETWORK DATE AND TIME Occasionally the network time or date needs to be reset for example when the system is defaulted or for daylight saving time Any administrator can change the date and time that appears on all display phones and in the SMDR reports in the network The day of the week is automatically calculated and set by the system when the date is entered TO SET THE NETWORK DATE AND TIME NOTE If you make a mistake press to backspace or press EJ or CANCEL to leave it unchanged and start over 1 While on hook enter the Set Network Date and Time feature code 9810 Your display shows DATE current date If you do not need to change the date press
423. past the hour across the network without changing the hour This is useful when the nodes are in different time zones NOTE If a node s time is off by more than 30 minutes synchronizing the minutes may cause the hour to change Also network time is automatically synchronized every day at 12 30 AM 00 30 using the time setting on the node with the lowest number An administrator can synchronize the clocks in all nodes in the network using the following procedure TO SYNCHRONIZE NETWORK TIME While on hook enter the Synchronize Network Time feature code 9811 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows NETWORK TIME SYNCHRONIZED PROGRAMMING THE DATABASE USING AN ADMINISTRATOR S STATION Any administrator station can perform database programming using an Inter Tel phone How ever it requires a display phone and an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone is strongly recommended NOTE If using an analog phone you will need to use the PREVIOUS NEXT or UP DOWN but tons in place of the Volume button in the instructions in this section The database areas that can be programmed by an administrator station include the following Station Programming e Create or delete Administrator stations e Create or delete Attendant stations e Create or delete House Phones Assign stations to Attendants e Program usernames Program station toll restriction System Option Programming e Program Do N
424. pe cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers e Forced All Calls Non Validated With this account code type the user must enter an account code before placing an outside call The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Stations with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers e Forced Local Toll Calls Validated This account code type requires the user to enter an account code after dialing a local toll call number a toll call within the local area codes or a long distance call when using ARS If the code matches one of the pre pro grammed forced account codes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Stations with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers e Forced Local Toll Calls Non Validated This account code type requires the user to enter an account code after dialing a local toll call number a toll call within the local area codes or a long distance call when using ARS The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Stations with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside telephone numbers Page 195 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 196 e Forced Long Distance Toll Calls Validated When this account code type is enabled the user only has to enter a
425. pear under a Call Station To Station Calling button Inter Tel Phones When the button or Call button is fluttering and the dis play shows calling station TFR FROM transferring station lift the handset and press the button or Call button Or while on hook press the button or Call button to speak handsfree You are connected to the caller Executive Dis play Professional Display Model 8560 Phone and some Executone Phone users have the same menu button options as described for a ringing intercom call Single Line Sets When you hear a page announcing that a call is holding at your sta tion lift the handset at your station and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the caller Page 177 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 178 Placing Intercom Calls When placing an intercom call begin dialing before the Dial Initiation timer expires If the timer expires the system drops the connection and sends reorder tones TO PLACE AN INTERCOM CALL NOTE In the procedure below if you want to place a private non handsfree call to an Inter Tel phone press the pound EJ button before dialing the extension number 1 For all Inter Tel phones To use the handset Lift the handset If the phone has a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER To use the speakerphone Skip to step 2 begin dialing The Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXTENSION
426. pecially useful when a voice mail hunt group is assigned as an attendant NETWORK AND LOCAL PRIMARY ATTENDANTS Page 128 One attendant can be designated as the primary attendant who can receive unsupervised out side call recalls hunt group recalls and calls that cannot be matched to patterns in call routing tables When Axxess systems are installed in a network there are two types of primary attendants e Node Attendants There can be a primary attendant for each node e Network Primary Attendant There can be a network primary attendant programmed on each node There is usually one Network Primary Attendant shared by all of the nodes When the network needs to direct a call to an attendant it attempts to direct the call to the network primary attendant first If the network primary attendant is unavail able it directs the call to the attendant on the node where the call originated If there is no network or local primary attendant calls that would normally go to the primary attendant as described above are handled as follows e Ifthe system has seized the call but it has not been sent to a station the call is discon nected e Jfthe call has been sent to a station it remains at the station and rings until answered e I fthe call is not seized and not sent to a station the caller will hear ringing until he or she hangs up The call will not ring at any station Attendant Stations System Features AXXESS ADMINIST
427. ped with optional Data Port Modules refer to REPLACEMENT PARTS for the part number The module con tains a four conductor RJ11 modular jack that can be used to connect either a data device such as a personal computer equipped with a modem or a loud ringing adapter LRA and an external signaling device such as a loud bell horn flashing light etc to the phone Refer to page 90 for operating instructions Optional Data Devices A customer provided modem equipped data device such as a data terminal or a personal com puter may be attached to an Inter Tel phone that has an optional data port module installed Model 8560 Model 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display and Associate Display Phone users can adjust the bit rate bps of the PCDPM connected to the phone The rate can be set to 300 600 1200 2400 or 4800 1200 2400 or 4800 on a system serial port To adjust the bit rate of your PCDPM refer to the instructions on page 89 The circuit with the data port module can be programmed to be associated with one or more other phones The associated phone s should have a button that will show the status of the data device and will allow easy transfers between the phone and the data device Data calls are transmitted over the data port voice path This leaves the attached phone s voice path available for normal phone operation However receiving off hook voice announce OHVA calls at an Model 8560 Model
428. phone function when speakerphone resources are not avail able the user will hear reorder tones and the display will show NO SPKRPHN AVAIL STAY OFF HOOK If the user attempts to change to the speakerphone and hangs up during a call when speaker phones are unavailable the user will be forced into a monitor only mode The user will be able to hear the other party but will not be allowed to transmit to them In this mode the user s button will be lit and the display shows NO SPKRPHN AVAIL COME OFF HOOK Pressing the lit button will result in a burst of reorder tone you must lift the handset to speak NOTE On certain handsfree to handsfree intercom calls voice volume levels may cause feed back to occur If this happens one station user should pick up the handset Two Display Phones cannot be in enhanced mode while on a call together one phone must be off hook to allow the other phone to enter enhanced speakerphone mode If both phones are on hook there is no benefit to having one phone in enhanced mode Page 75 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 76 Executive and Professional Display Phone Speakerphones Each Executive and Professional Display Phone has a built in integrated speakerphone that allows on hook dialing and handsfree operation on outside calls and inside intercom calls The speakerphone can be used in standard mode or in enhanced mode which allows for full duplex operation over a li
429. play phones show the source and time of the message When the called party responds to the message indication a call is auto matically placed to your station Leave a message with the called party s message center Display phones show that a message was left with the phone user s assigned message center When the called party responds to the message indication a call is automatically placed to his or her message center To signal that a message is waiting a called Inter Tel phone s WEJM button flashes and the display shows the number of waiting messages Each time the IEJ button is pressed the display shows the message source for each of the waiting messages in the order they were received For messages from stations the display shows MSG station and the date and time of the message For messages from voice mailboxes the display shows XX MESSAGES FROM MBOX XXXX to indicate the number of waiting messages in each mailbox that left a message This is especially helpful at stations with multiple mailboxes For single line sets a system programming option can be enabled that sends six short message waiting tones when the user lifts the handset or presses the hookswitch NOTE Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones have a Message Lamp located on the upper right hand corner of the phone If programmed for the Message feature this lamp flashes lights whenever the IIIS button flashes lights See page 116 for details Any station Voice Processor
430. plication make sure it is compatible with Windows CE NET e Because Windows CE NET has limited RAM available for executing programs users may experience much slower processing times than they are accustomed to on their desktop PC NOTE The Help for Windows CE NET is provided by Microsoft and it is available on the Start menu To view the Help for Windows you must minimize the telephone application Because the operating system for the Model 8690 has been customized certain options that are mentioned in the Help may not be available on the phone Page 101 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 102 Backlight If the phone remains idle for several minutes the backlight on the screen will time out and the screen will go dark To wake the screen either lift the handset or touch the screen The instructions below explain how to change the timeout value for the backlight TO CHANGE THE DEFAULT VALUE FOR THE BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 1 Press Start Settings Control Panel Double press Display Select the Backlight tab Select the Automatically turn off backlight while on external power option Select the amount of time you want the phone to remain idle before the backlight turns off Timeout choices include oR WwW N 2 minutes 5 minutes default 10 minutes 15 minutes e 30 minutes 6 Press OK Input Panel Windows CE NET includes an on screen keyboard function called the Inpu
431. press 4 112 To replay the message press 1 113 To use your primary greeting press 1 114 To select your alternate greeting press 2 115 To select the system greeting press 3 116 After the tone please record your greeting then press POUND Default Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROMPT CONTENT Continued 117 Greeting saved 118 After the tone please record your name then press POUND 119 Name saved 120 Your message envelope is currently set to return 121 all information 122 time and date 123 message source 124 and 125 message length 126 To turn on all envelope options press 4 127 For message source press 2 128 For message length press 3 129 This option is now off 130 This option is now on 131 For time and date press 1 132 Your message envelope will play all options 133 is turned on to call you at 134 AM 135 PM 136 Extension ID number 137 Every day 138 Monday through Friday 139 Sunday 140 Monday 141 Tuesday 142 Wednesday 143 Thursday 144 Friday 145 Saturday 146 To turn this number on or off press 1 147 To change the phone number press 2 148 To change times of day press 2 149 To change days of the week press 3 150 For pager notification press 1 151 F
432. press Kl or the RING IN NIGHT menu button When the display shows ENTER STATION EXTENSION enter stations into the list one at a time as described above for Answer Access Toll Restriction To program the toll restrictions for the trunk group press E or the TOLL RESTRICTION menu button When the display shows TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION press the numbers that correspond to the toll restrictions you wish to program as follows 1 COS for day or night mode To program the toll restriction class of service for day mode press Kl or the COS DAY menu button To program class of ser vice for night mode press El or the COS NIGHT menu button The display shows SET DAY or NIGHT COS XX If this is not the COS you wish to program scroll to the correct COS by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward The default COS numbers are listed below See page 155 for definitions COS 01 is not used for trunks When the correct COS is displayed press Hj or the ON menu button to enable the toll restriction Or press El or the OFF menu button to disable it If desired repeat this step to program additional COS toll restrictions Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue COS 02 Deny Area Office COS 03 Deny Operator COS 04 Deny Toll Access COS 05 Deny International COS 06 Deny Equal Access COS 07 Deny Local Calls COS
433. press the Special button and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up The display shows QUEUE REGISTERED FOR trunk name Single Line Sets When you hear a busy signal while selecting a trunk or if you are camped on hookflash and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 Hang up 2 Your station rings when the queued trunk is available Display phones show TG XXXX or group name IS NOW AVAILABLE 3 Inter Tel Phones Lift the handset and or press the fast flashing Call button individual trunk button or the button Then dial the desired telephone number The associated Call button or individual trunk button flashes slowly If ARS was used when the call was placed originally the number is dialed automatically Single Line Sets Lift the handset and dial the desired number If all DTMF decoders are busy when your station is called back the system sends repeating reorder tones instead of dial tone and the queue is canceled If ARS was used when the call was placed originally the number is dialed automatically Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO CANCEL A QUEUE BEFORE THE CALLBACK Inter Tel Phones While on hook press the CANCEL QUEUE button or QUEUE button Or enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 The display shows QUEUE REQUEST CANCELED Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the cancel Queue Callback feature code 6 Hang
434. programmed for the Voice Processor it will also be shown on this line Subject The SUBJECT line will contain the line Fax received from lt source gt The source will be the Call Routing Application number or the mailbox number from where the fax is received for example CRA 2505 or MB 1000 Received On The RECEIVED ON line contains the date and time that fax was received FAX TIF file attachment The file attachment will appear as a file with the name FAX TIF To view the fax the user must display the TIF file using graphics software Automatic Fax Detection Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Index Symbols All Transient Displays Station Flag 166 DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer Station Flag And Timer 166 Hot Dialpad Buttons vs SPCL Key Required For Feature Code En try Flag 116 Send Alert Burst To Headset Station Flag 89 Transient Call Indication On Call Answer Station Flag 166 8 Line Dual Circuits 93 8 Line IMX AIM Analog Phones On Dual Circuits 93 A Absorbed Digits 155 Accept Key 81 Accepting a Name 283 Access to a Mailbox 294 Access to the Features 115 Account Codes 195 all calls following 197 forced 195 on outside calls 190 standard 195 ACD Agent IDs 140 ACD Agent IDs Automatic Connect Flag 143 ACD Agent Login Logout 141 ACD Agent Wrap Up Timer 143 ACD Call Distribution 139 ACD Hunt Groups 139 agent wrap up 143 agents 141 142 b
435. programming session is dropped potentially corrupting the database For this reason Inter Tel strongly recommends that you assign the modem extension to a DSS BLF button Occasionally the CPC modem will need to be reset if it is unable to answer an incoming call or out of sync with the external modem TO RESET THE MODEM NOTE A modem reset drops any call that is currently connected to the modem 1 Enter the Modem Reset 9869 feature code The display shows RESET MODEM EXT 2 Enter the extension of the modem local or off node to reset The display shows MODEM RESET NOTE If an invalid modem extension is entered the display shows INVALID MODEM EXTENSION USING THE NETWORK GROUP DIAGNOSTICS FEATURE NOTE The Network Group diagnostics feature works on Inter Tel proprietary IP devices for the local node only It does not work across nodes Version 8 1 supports a Network Group Diagnostics feature that allows an administrator to ver ify that the Network Groups are programmed properly When the Network Group Diagnostics feature code is entered the phone system initiates pings from each Inter Tel IP device and determines if the other devices respond to the ping If a device does not respond to the ping or if a firewall is detected the system issues a Message Print message see page 265 It is recom mended that you enable a port for Message Print before you run this diagnostics feature NOTE Because this feature affects system pe
436. pt your message Hang up and try again later When you have completed your message you have the following options e To hear your message Press El e To add to your message Press Kl and continue your message e To erase and re record your message Press EJ e To use the special delivery option Press Go to the next step e To send your message Press EM If you wish to mark the message certified pri vate and or priority do so before completing this step If you wish to send another message return to step 5 Page 299 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 10 You can do one or more of the following if you selected special delivery options above e Press EM to mark the message private This prevents the recipient from forward ing it to other subscribers e Press Ell to mark the message certified When a certified message is heard by the recipient you will receive a receipt notice e Press J to mark the message priority This will place your message ahead of all other waiting messages in the receiving mailbox e Press El to cancel delivery options After the message has been sent with special delivery options you may choose to do either of the following e Press EM and enter another mailbox number to send the message to another desti nation e Press to exit CANCELING UNHEARD MESSAGES Page 300 The Cancel Unheard Messages feature al
437. pty because no names are recorded for any of the system s mail boxes and extension IDs callers will not hear the prompt that allows access to the directory However if the caller does press EM or a Directory menu button the user will be instructed that the selection is invalid and returned to the initial instructions Recorded names are added to the directories when the owner of the mailbox or extension ID has initialized the name If the mailbox or ID is not initialized the directory will include only the mailbox number or extension ID number Group Lists are not included in either type of directory The caller uses the dialpad buttons to enter the name The application then plays the closest matching directory name that corresponds to the digits entered by a caller Once the name has been played the system will return a menu of options including the following e Listening to the previous or next name in the directory e Listening to additional information This option is not available 1f the mailbox or exten sion ID number has been classified in the database as a Private number e Spelling a new name e Toggling from a last to first name search mode e Accepting the name Page 281 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 LOCATING A NAME Page 282 Entering a Name There are two methods used for entering a name Quick Spell and Exact Spell Outside callers and station users with non d
438. qual Access Digits 262 Suppress Outside Party Number 262 Suppress Toll Digits 262 Suppress Trunk Number 262 Suppressed Digits 262 Surge Spike Protector 108 Swap Extension 21 Synchronize Network Time 12 Synchronizing Network Time 12 System Administrator 45 289 System Administrator Features 8 System Alarms 37 System and Network Alarm Reporting 37 System Battery Back Up 108 System Error Reporting 265 System Error Message Printing 265 System Feature Programming at Administrator 18 System Features 111 115 System Forwarding 219 advance timer 219 enable disable 223 handsfree announce option 203 221 initiate timer 219 recalls 224 ring principal once 220 System Hardware 71 System History 44 System Hold 198 199 System Memory and Storage 103 System OAI 94 139 System Option Programming 12 System Programming 18 System Programming Using an Administrator s Station 18 System Prompts 51 System Registry 104 System Report Programming 267 System Speed Dialing 230 feature code 123 324 location codes 230 on display number 230 pauses hookflashes 31 PBX 31 programming 31 toll restriction override 156 230 System Speed Dial Buttons 230 T T1 Card TIC OPX 95 Task Bar 101 Page 320 Telephone system 2 Ten Emergency Numbers 159 Ten emergency numbers 159 Text 267 the system in night mode 9 Time 266 Time Display 10 164 Time Display Network 11 Toll Restriction 155 ARS 153 call forwarding 227 COS 155 programming 14 speed dial o
439. queue call Call is on hold CALL station Green LED hold or transfer back is ringing inor Green LED Green LED camped on waiting Green LED Trunk is in useat Trunk is in use at Trunk is recalling Trunk is ringing in or Trunk is on hold another station in your station Green from hold or transfer camped on waiting Red LED if on a conference at LED Red LED Red LED if on another station or your station or is another station or green if at your sta unplugged green if at your sta tion TRUNK Red LED tion Or busy trunk queue callback to your sta tion Green LED This applies only to Inter Tel phones with red green LEDs Digital Phone LED Rates Page 87 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Red and Green LEDs Inter Tel Model 8000 Series Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display Asso ciate Display and Basic Digital Phones have red and green LEDs in the button lamps When both colors are used a green lamp generally indicates that the call is active ringing or holding at your station see below for a possible exception for direct ring in calls When the lamp is red the call is active ringing or holding at another station Trunk access allowed answer per mission and the feature being used for example System Hold or Call Transfer determine whether you can pick up a red call from another station There are two system wide programming op
440. r DNIS not DISA Trunk DID or DNIS Information Ring Trunk DID or DNIS Information ring in DID DNIS or DNIS with DISA Blank if answered DISA digits if DISA calls do not generate a ring in ring in unanswered record Caller ID ANI or ANI Outside Party ANI or Caller ID Ring Outside Party ANI or Caller ID ANI DNIS Outside Party ANI or Caller ID and Ring Outside Party ANI or Caller ID Trunk DID or DNIS Information and Trunk DID or DNIS Information None Blank Blank Ring in records appear only if ring in diagnostic records are enabled as described on page 261 SMDR Report Format Page 263 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 12 SMDR Report Format Continued START ELAPSED COST ACCOUNT CODE Page 264 This shows the time that the call became valid see page 261 for an explanation For an unan swered ring in it shows the time the call began ringing It is shown in 24 hour time 00 00 23 59 This shows the call length from the START time above until disconnect or the length of time an unanswered call was ringing If the option is enabled that shows call duration in seconds calls up to 999999 seconds long appears as S XXXXXX XXXXXX represents the number of seconds and calls lasting longer than 999999 seconds appear as HH MM hours and min utes This is the approximate cost of the call XX XX based on the database information If cost exceeds 99 99 it i
441. r If a caller fails to make an entry before the Inactivity Alarm timer expires the caller is prompted again to make an entry The caller cannot access trunks or enter feature codes through the Automated Attendant appli cation Trunk access codes and feature codes are considered invalid numbers AUTOMATED ATTENDANT CUSTOM AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS Page 274 Custom audiotex recordings are made using the voice mail administrator s mailbox as described on page 48 Each recording is associated with a recording number and assigned to the application s in Database Programming or using the system administrator s mailbox Automated Attendant Recall Destination Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 EXTENSION ID Extension ID Extension IDs are used in conjunction with transferring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Extension Directory The extension ID allows callers to be transferred to stations and applications that do not have mailboxes It also allows the station or application to have a recorded name in the directory This feature is set up and initialized using Database Program ming and voice mail features If an Extension ID has been created in Database Programming for a station extension number either the principal owner of the extension or the voice mail administrator must set up initial ize the ID with a new password and record a name for use in the Extension Directory At default
442. r Tel phone the ring principal once option can be set that will signal the principal station when a NO ANSWER call begins to follow the forwarding path i The signal to the principal station consists CALL IS SENT TO FWD POINT 1 HUNT GROUP of a display CALL SENT TO FORWARD PATH and a single burst of ring tone The call cannot be answered at the principal sta tion but can be reverse transferred from the CALL IS SENT TO FWD POINT 2 VOICE MAIL system forward point CALL RINGS IN TO PRINCIPAL STATION If a call rings in to multiple stations and one or more of those stations has system forwarding the call will not follow any of the forwarding paths Agent Help requests will not follow any forwarding path If a principal station or a station forwarding point is a member of a hunt group calls placed to the hunt group s pilot number are unaffected by system forwarding The hunt group calls will be received at the station as usual and will not enter the system forwarding path A call follows only the forwarding path of the principal even if a forwarding point has a for warding path of its own The call that originated at the principal station will follow only the principal station s forwarding path System Forwarding System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INDIVIDUAL STATION FORWARDING POINTS The ringing duration at each station forwarding point is determined by the System Forwarding Advance ti
443. r a single progress tone when accepted Your dis play shows SYS SPD BIN XXX UPDATED Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Page 33 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 PROGRAMMING AND USING DSS BLF BUTTONS Page 34 Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF buttons located on a DSS BLF unit Mini DSS unit or an Inter Tel phone provide one button access to extension numbers If the button is equipped with a lamp you can visually monitor the status of the associated extension DSS BLF buttons are not available on single line sets NOTE You can program a DSS button for an off node device but not for wildcard off node extensions Together the lamps in the buttons create a busy lamp field that indicates the status of the resource e g station trunk hunt group or feature assigned to the buttons The table shown below explains what DSS lamps indicate about the associated resource IF THE LAMP IS THEN Solidly Lit The associated resource is busy or all stations in the associated hunt group are unavailable in Do Not Disturb busy or with hunt group remove enabled Or the associated feature is enabled Slow Flash The associated resource is in Do Not Disturb Fast Flash The associated resource has a call ringing in or a call is camped on to the hunt group This option is programmable If DSS ring flash is disabled a call ringing in to a station will show
444. r the node broadcasts or receives network wide alarms e The Send Network Alarms flag determines whether a node will broadcast alarms that occur on that node to the rest of the network e The Receive Network Alarms flag determines whether the node will receive and dis play alarms sent by other nodes in the network To differentiate between network wide and local alarms network wide alarms appear on administrator phones preceded by NET ALARM and local system alarms are preceded with SYS ALARM Network wide alarms will override system alarms on an administrator s phone display On remote nodes network wide alarms will indicate the name of the node on which the alarm occurred The node name is obtained from the username Managing System and Network Alarms Page 37 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO RESPOND TO A MINOR ALARM FROM ANY ALARM DISPLAY STATION 1 When a minor alarm indication appears write down the alarm information 2 While on hook clear the alarm by entering the Clear System Alarm feature code 9850 or the Clear Network Alarm feature code 9851 The display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED 3 Take the appropriate action as indicated in the following table ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION ACTION NEEDED 10 XXXXX OFF HOOK A station remained off hook and inactive until the Inactivity Alarm timer expired The display and the SMDR indicate which station is off hook
445. r to peer P2P audio feature see page 105 IP and SIP Phone Identification At first glance IP and SIP phones look nearly identical to digital phones Additional ports on the back of the phone used for LAN and power connections identify a phone as an IP or SIP phone IP and SIP phones operate like digital phones installed on the system except for the lim itations listed below The IP SLA operates like a standard single line set except for the limitations listed below Installation and Configuration To install and configure IP and SIP devices you must know the required network settings and be familiar with the associated hardware and software For installation and configuration infor mation for all IP and SIP devices refer to the latest P Devices Installation and Configuration Manual IP Limitations Currently IP devices SIP and Axxess IP have the following limitations They do not have a secondary voice path and cannot support off hook voice announce OHVA e They do not support the enhanced speakerphone mode feature e They cannot use a PCDPM or MDPM e They do not support the DSS BLF units e They do not support Desktop Open Architecture Interface OAI applications e While using peer to peer P2P audio SIP and IP devices do not support the Agent Help Record A Call and Station Monitor features Page 99 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 100 IP SoftPhone The IP
446. rammer to supply the correct Emergency Calling Party Number for each station If an off premises extension is used for dialing 911 the 911 operators will see Calling Party Number or the address of the location of the system not the off premises address Off pre mises personnel should be prepared to give the correct address and other pertinent information if it is not programmed as the Calling Party Number IP Devices and Local Loop Support System V7 0 or later supports IP based solutions for providing local Public Switched Tele phone Network PSTN connectivity using the IPRC card and a third party Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP gateway The system requires software V7 0 or later and IPRC firm ware V1 3 or later The firmware supports up to 32 IP Phones SLAs SoftPhones and Loop Start Adapters LSAs Support for IP based local loop does not require Premium Features Up to 32 ports of an IPRC can be programmed to be loop start adapter ports MGCP gateway trunks The IPRC statically maps Voice over IP resources on a one to one non blocking basis for each loop start port within the MGCP device Inter Tel currently supports the following gateways e AudioCodes MP 100 Foreign Exchange Office FXO Gateway Supports up to four loop start line FXO ports e AudioCodes MP 104 FXO Gateway Supports up to four loop start line FXO ports Although the MP 104 is similar to the MP 100 each gateway uses a different switch type for config
447. ran sient displays to be controlled by the DKTS Alternate Transient Display timer The DKTS Alternate Transient Display timer can be set to 1 255 tenths of a second 0 1 25 5 seconds The default value is 10 tenths of a second 1 second This timer affects only those Inter Tel phones with the DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer flag enabled TRANSIENT CALL INDICATION ON CALL ANSWER STATION FLAG Page 166 This programmable station flag determines whether the station user will see a call display when answering a call by pressing a secondary extension button or by reverse transferring If enabled the display will tell if the call was ringing recalling transferred or holding at the other station Extension Number Username Time and Date Display System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 USER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS NOTE This feature does not apply to single line sets Individual Inter Tel phone buttons can be designated as user programmable in the keymaps during database programming The installer can program the default feature codes and the sta tion user can reprogram the feature codes as desired Default phone feature codes are shown on page 84 Up to 35 user programmable phone buttons can be programmed to enter any of the general feature codes Inter Tel display phones have a special key when the buttons are in the default state However it can be reprogrammed to use any of t
448. re busy and the station is enabled for ARS camp on the call will camp on to the facility group until a trunk is available Checks for toll restrictions and outgoing access Before the number is modified by the facility group s dial rules the system checks the station toll restrictions and outgo ing access to determine whether the call is allowed All calls placed using ARS are toll restricted regardless of whether the selected trunk is subject to toll restriction How ever Emergency Call feature calls are never toll restricted If allowed the system con tinues to the next step If not allowed the system sends reorder tones and the call is not placed Adds or deletes digits according to the facility group chosen Each facility group has a programmed set of dial rules that tells the system what to dial For example if the selected route group requires that the number contain 1 but no area code the dial rules include the 1 and drop the area code Dials the modified telephone number If the number is allowed the system seizes an idle trunk in one of the selected trunk groups waits for the Dialing Wait After Connect timer to expire and then dials the number Automatic Route Selection ARS Page 153 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 154 When ARS is used the station user hears dial tone when the feature code is entered manually or automatically using a Call button the ARS button or
449. rectory Name EN Replay EN Record Password Accept EA Change Envelope Options 4 Erase and Re Record EB If no recording exists ENVELOPE OPTIONS See Making a Recording Time and Date On Off MAKING A RECORDING Message Source On Off 2 During your recording Message Length On Off Pause ER All Options Enabled 4 Erase and Re Record No Options Enabled E After you finish Accept Settings EB EITHER Hang up Cancel Previous Menu OR For options EM GREETING OPTIONS RECORDING OPTIONS Primary Greeting zm Replay Your Recording EB Alternate Greeting EN Add to Your Recording EN System Greeting Erase and Re Record 3 Cancel Previous Menu Cancel Accept the Recording EAR RECORDING OPTIONS Replay Your Greeting Name Add to Your Greeting Name EB Erase and Re Record Accept the Greeting Name EN Cancel Previous Menu SENDING A MESSAGE During your message Pause EN Erase and Re Record After your message EITHER Hang up OR For options ER RECORDING OPTIONS Replay Your Message EN Add to Your Message EN Erase and Re Record Cancel Accept the Recording EB ASSIGN CUSTOM RECORDINGS Day Mode EN Night Mode 2 A If recording plays Accept EAR Cancel Previous Menu If no recording exists See Making a Recording Part No 550 8001 Issue 8 2 January 2004
450. ress has an active data call in progress is on an active handsfree intercom or outside call has handsfree disabled has a call being changed from handset to speakerphone has a headset enabled or is in Do Not Disturb Also OHVA calls are not possible if the caller is placing a private intercom call or has the Ring Intercom Always feature enabled NOTE To place an OHVA call using a single line set the Ring Intercom Always feature must be disabled To disable this feature lift the handset and dial 377 Ring Intercom Always ON OFF feature code on the single line set By default this is enabled If you press the button while speaking to an off hook voice announce caller on the speakerphone the handset microphone will be muted and the caller on the handset will not hear you or the OHVA caller When you press again the handset microphone is re enabled Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA Page 187 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 188 TO PLACE AN OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL 1 When placing an intercom call to a busy OHVA enabled Inter Tel phone do not hang up You hear busy signals until the Camp On and OHVA Screening timers expire If you hear music after the Camp On timer expires con ditions for an OHVA call were not met and you are OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE PHONE WITH PCDPM FS E ae ACTIVE CALL ON Ext 1103 Ext 1002 HANDSET Display shows INTERCOM Caller places a call
451. rformance it is recommended that you run the diagnostics program when the system is idle i e after normal business hours TO RUN THE NETWORK GROUP DIAGNOSTICS 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Enter the Network Group Diagnostics feature code 9963 by default The display shows NET GRP CHECK YES 1 NO 2 3 When prompted press 1 or ACCEPT to start the diagnostics feature The display shows NET GROUP DIAG IN PROGRESS When the diagnostics is complete the phone displays one of the following messages e NET GROUP CHECK COMPLETED Indicates that all IP devices within the Network Groups are capable of communicating via P2P audio e NET GROUP CHECK ERRORS FOUND Indicates that either some of the IP devices are offline or there are NATs firewalls located between the devices Check Message Print to determine which errors occurred Page 42 Resetting the Call Processing Card Modem Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SEIZING A DEVICE Seizing a Device For troubleshooting purposes the Seize Device feature code allows an administrator to enable diagnostics mode and then seize a specific trunk or extension by entering the board circuit and device number The Seize Device is affected by trunk restriction The administrator s station must have outgo ing access permission for the trunk to s
452. rican English British English Japanese and Spanish and uses the designated language If the desig nated language does not exist in the voice mail system the system uses the default Primary language instead DIRECTORIES If Multilingual Support is enabled directory users will be able to enter English Spanish and Japanese Katakana characters as needed Procedures for using the directories are given on page 238 In directories the English characters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters There fore Japanese names will be at the end of the list after the English names CHANGE LANGUAGE FEATURE CODE A station user can change the assigned language for the station by entering the Change Lan guage feature code only when the station is idle TO CHANGE THE STATION S LANGUAGE Inter Tel Phones Enter the Change Language feature code 301 to change your sta tion between the Primary and Secondary Language as desired The display changes to the current language Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Change Language feature code 301 to change your station between the Primary and Secondary Language as desired To verify the current language you can call a Voice Processor application that does not override the device language An Inter Tel phone user can assign the Change Language feature code to any user programma ble button Changing a phone s language automatically changes any display For example if a
453. riginating the emergency call against the trunk group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List An idle trunk is seized and the system automatically dials Emergency Number 1 e If the user dials the emergency feature code from a station with ARS programmed as the Emergency Extension a The Emergency Call feature routes the call based on the station s Emergency Extension b The call is routed to Route Group 1 C The call tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 d The trunk group or node trunk group validates the station originating the emer gency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List e Jf the call is denied it tries the next member in the facility group If each member denies the call the call tries the next facility group in Route Group 1 s list If everything is denied due to Emergency Outgoing Access the call is routed once again to Route Group 1 The call then tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 The trunk group or node trunk group does not validate the station originating the emergency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List If no trunks are available the call tries the next member in the facility group If all of the members are unavailable the call camps on to Route Group 1 until a trunk is available Emergency Call Feature Page 157 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 158 e If the user accesses a t
454. rmation tone If you have a display it shows PASSWORD SAVED Your station returns to the idle state Page 252 Remote Feature Programming System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO CHANGE THE STATION PASSWORD USING REMOTE PROGRAMMING 1 If calling from an outside telephone access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone If programming from another station lift the handset or press the Speaker button Enter the Remote Programming feature code 359 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Enter the extension to be programmed You hear a confirmation tone If you have a dis play it shows ENTER PASSWORD f you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the extension s password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone If you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASSWORD Outside callers will be returned to dial tone and stations will return to the idle state Enter the Program Station Password feature code 392 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows NEW PASSWORD Enter the new password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone Enter the new passwor
455. rotocol that allows a PC attached to a PCDPM on a Model 8560 Model 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display or Associate Display to emulate an Inter Tel phone for call handling This protocol will allow devices such as PC phones operators consoles ACD supervisors and integrated contact management tools to be developed for the system There can be as many Desktop Interface devices on the system as there are Model 8560 Model 8520 Executive Display Professional Display Standard Display and Associate Display Phone circuits The only limitation is on Desktop Interface devices that require DSS BLF status updates such as operators consoles The system can support up to 20 DSS BLF status requests from external devices at one time Therefore if the device requires continuous DSS BLF status updates only 20 can be installed on the system at one time Devices that require one time or infrequent DSS BLF updates are not limited by this capacity except that only 20 requests for updates can be processed at one time There is a limit of four Attendant Consoles per system because of the number of requests they require and the amount of information that is shared with the system Another Premium Feature System OAI is a system level communications protocol that allows command oriented tools to be developed for the system System OAI is available in two levels Events and Third Party Call Control System OAI Events provides cal
456. round Music On Off 313 Inter Tel Phones Only Turns on and off background music heard through the phone speaker Analog phones have a default MUSIC button Call Forward All Calls 355 Immediately forwards all calls to another station or to an outside telephone number Inter Tel phones use the FWD button Call Forward If Busy 357 Immediately forwards all calls to another station or to an outside telephone number when the station is in use Call Forward If No Answer 356 Forwards all calls to another station or to an outside tele phone number if not answered within a predetermined time Call Forward If No Answer Busy 358 Forwards all calls to another station or to an outside tele phone number if not answered within a predetermined amount of time or immediately if the station is in use Change Language 301 A station user can change the assigned language for the station by entering the Change Language feature code while the station is idle CO Hookflash 330 Sends a timed hookflash over the trunk while on an out side call includes conference calls Conference Connects from three to four parties in a conference A conference consists of any combination of inside and out side parties Inter Tel phones use the CNF button Data 340 Inter Tel Phones Only Allows operation of a data device attached to a phone that has a PC Data Port Module and a Modem Data Port
457. roup the display shows CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEATURE Wrap Up Mode for Holding ACD Calls There is a system flag called Wrap Up Mode For Holding ACD Calls If enabled it places an ACD agent s station in wrap up mode when an ACD call is placed on hold However the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is not activated This prevents the agent from receiving addi tional ACD hunt group calls after he or she places an ACD call on hold while the station is idle The station can still receive non ACD calls as usual If the flag is disabled the agent will be available to receive additional ACD calls as soon as an ACD call is placed on hold In the default state this flag is disabled This flag applies to any type of hold including individual system transfer and conference wait hold If the call is terminated or if it is reverse transferred by another station the ACD agent s station will be made available to receive incoming ACD calls If the agent wishes to terminate the wrap up mode while an ACD call is on hold he or she can use the procedure described in the previous section ACD Agent ID Automatic Connect Flag When the ACD Agent ID flag is enabled and the agent is using a headset ACD hunt group calls will automatically be connected following a short ring burst This feature will not work if the agent is not using a headset When the ACD agent logs in or removes the station from Do Not Disturb mode the first call will ring u
458. runk access see page 170 any ringing call is auto matically answered when the handset is lifted or the Speaker button is pressed Page 241 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 There is a flag called House Phone Mode that affects single line house phones The house phone can be programmed to return to dial tone after a call is disconnected normal mode This allows the user to enter a feature code or place a call Or the dial tone can be disabled restricted mode to prevent the user from performing any operation other than placing a house phone call In the default state this is normal The interaction of the House Phone Mode flag with the programmed speed dial number and system feature is shown below connected to hangs up before the house phone user and can use another feature code or dial a number SITUATION DAY NIGHT NORMAL MODE RESTRICTED MODE House phone user lifts the Complete Dials the extension number Dials the extension number handset extension House phone user lifts the Blank User receives intercom dial tone User receives reorder tone handset House phone user lifts the Incomplete System dials the partial number System dials partial number then handset extension and waits for further digits times out after Long Interdigit number timer expires and sends reorder tones House phone is connected Dials an out System inserts a hookflash in the
459. runk or trunk group and dials any Emergency Number 1 10 the trunk or trunk group does rot validate the station originating the emergency call against the trunk group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List An idle trunk is seized and the system automatically dials the emergency number e If the user accesses ARS and dials any Emergency Number 1 10 a The call is routed to Route Group 1 b The call tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 c The trunk group or node trunk group validates the station originating the emer gency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List d If the call is denied the call tries the next member in the facility group If each member denies the call the call tries the next facility group in Route Group 1 s list If everything is denied due to Emergency Outgoing Access the call is routed once again to Route Group 1 The call then tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 The trunk group or node trunk group does not validate the station originating the emergency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List If no trunks are available the call tries the next member in the facility group If all of the members are unavailable the call camps on to Route Group 1 until a trunk is available NOTE Inter Tel highly recommends that only local trunks be installed and used for emergency trunk access and that only local trunks be programmed in Route Gro
460. rward No Answer timer expires the request 1s considered rejected To signal to the other parties that the Agent Help Extension has joined the call a system wide Agent Help Tone flag can be enabled during database programming If the flag is disabled there will be no alerting tone A timer called the Agent Help Tone Interval timer determines how often this tone is generated If the timer is set to 0 the tone is generated only when the Agent Help Extension enters the call a party is added to the call or the call is placed on hold and retrieved If the Agent Help feature code is assigned to an Inter Tel phone feature button with a lamp the lamp status shows the following e The lamp flashes when the Agent Help Extension is being called e Thelamp goes off if the Agent Help request is rejected or the feature is terminated e The lamp is lit solidly when the Agent Help Extension is in the conference When the requesting station user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected The Agent Help Extension can leave the call at any time without affecting the other parties by hanging up If the other party or parties hangs up first the requesting station and the Agent Help Extension remain connected in an intercom call The requesting station can cancel the request or remove the Agent Help Extension from the call by re entering the Agent Help fea ture code thereby terminating the feature If necessary the requesting station in a
461. rward to an Outside Number Page 227 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 HOW TO FORWARD CALLS TO AN EXTENSION OR OUTSIDE NUMBER Station users can also forward calls using the Remote Programming feature described on page 252 Page 228 TO FORWARD CALLS 1 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones Press the IDE button The display shows SELECT TYPE OF FORWARD Press the menu button for the desired forwarding option ALL NO ANSWER BUSY or NO ANSWER BUSY The display shows ENTER FORWARD DEST Other Inter Tel Phones While on or off hook press the ITI button or enter one of the following feature codes Display phones show ENTER FORWARD DEST e Call Forward All Calls 355 e Call Forward If No Answer 356 e Call Forward If Busy 357 e Call Forward If No Answer Or Busy 358 Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter one of the feature codes listed above If forwarding to an extension number or pilot number do one of the following e Press a DSS BLF button e Dialthe extension number or pilot number to receive the calls e Dial 0 to forward to your attendant e Inter Tel phone users only Press the button or MESSAGE CENTER menu button to forward calls to your message center e Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users only Press the VOICE MAIL button to forward to your mailbox Executive Display Professional Display and Model
462. s Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names When entering the outside telephone numbers use one of the following methods e Use the dialpad to manually dial the number e Onan Inter Tel phone press the button to enter the last number up to the first 16 digits dialed or saved at the station e Onan Inter Tel phone press the button and enter the system speed dial location code 000 999 to store one of the system speed dial numbers in a station speed dial location If the number is over 16 digits only the first 16 digits are stored Non dis play system speed dial numbers cannot be stored in station speed dial locations If desired outside telephone numbers can be preceded with a trunk access code to allow one button dialing of outside telephone numbers For example a button programmed with 89619000 would select a trunk using the Outgoing Calls feature code 8 then dial 961 9000 A station extension number can be preceded with a pound to always speed dial private intercom calls to the station Or a 4 may be entered before a station extension number or hunt group pilot number to reverse transfer pick up calls from that station or hunt group If either of these options is used normal handsfree intercom calls cannot be placed using that sta tion speed dial location or speed dial button and the speed dial button will not show the sta tion s status An outside telephone number can be preceded by a trunk acc
463. s CE NET desktop appears followed by the Loading Application Appearance dialog box This dialog box signals that the telephone application is launching Once it has launched the telephone interface covers the entire desktop except the taskbar To minimize the telephone interface and access the desktop area of the screen press the tele phone icon or the Show Desktop icon located on the task bar as shown below The phone inter face is minimized and you have access to the desktop To restore the phone interface press either icon again start fg sous 3 1 9 2 38 PM Telephone Application Icon Taskbar Show Desktop Icon The version of Windows CE NET running on the Model 8690 Phone has been customized spe cifically for the phone This version is different from Windows PC operating systems and Win dows handheld mobile device operating systems When using Windows CE NET users may notice the following differences e The Windows Viewer applications that are included in the operating system do not have the full functionality that their counterparts do on Windows PC operating systems These applications include Word Excel PowerPoint Media Player and Internet Explorer e A range of applications tools and functionality normally included in PC operating sys tems such as Microsoft Outlook administrator tools fonts etc are not included with Windows CE NET e Some applications will not work with Windows CE NET Before running an ap
464. s enabled the account code must be entered before the end of dialing for it to be included in the dialed digits Forced standard and all calls fol lowing account codes are automatically entered before the digits If using an optional account code it must be entered after seizing a trunk but before dialing the number to be included in the ARS digits Optional Account Codes Optional account codes can be entered at any time during a call These user defined codes are not pre programmed but must be within the maximum length set in programming If entered optional account codes are printed in the SMDR report for that call in place of standard or forced account codes that may have been used TO ENTER AN OPTIONAL ACCOUNT CODE AFTER SELECTING A TRUNK OR WHILE ON AN OUTSIDE CALL 1 Inter Tel Phones Press the Special button and enter the Optional Account Code fea ture code 390 Display phones show ENTER ACCT CODE The outside party if any does not hear you enter the code Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter the Optional Account Code feature code 390 The outside party if any hears music until step 2 is completed 2 Enter the account code using the dialpad Inter Tel phone users may press a speed dial button to enter an account code number that has been stored in that speed dial number location Display phones show numbers You hear a single progress tone when the code is accepted Single line users are reconnected when the s
465. s on to an ACD hunt group that uses Agent IDs only the agents currently logged in to the hunt group will receive camp on indications ACD hunt group supervisors will receive visual camp on displays if they are programmed as members of the hunt group and have the ACD Agent Logout feature enabled ACD Agent IDs System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ACD Agent Login Logout ACD hunt group members are AGENT ID IN UCD ACD HUNT GROUP referred to as agents Agents can HUNT GROUP log in to and out of the ACD hunt Ext 2000 group at any time While logged in HUNT GROUP the agent will receive calls through ANNOUNCEMENT the ACD hunt group When the agent STATION is logged out calls to that ACD hunt group will bypass the station The OVERFLOW Hunt Group Remove Replace fea STATION ture described on page 133 does not have any effect on ACD hunt group LALN calls when entered by an ACD agent Agent ID However placing the agent s station can be logged in Do Not Disturb will halt all ACD in or out and non ACD hunt group calls RECALL STATION There are three feature codes that can be used for logging in to and out of the ACD hunt groups ACD Agent Login ACD Agent Logout and ACD Agent Login Logout The first two perform only one operation The third Login Logout is a toggle feature code that logs the sta tion in or out of all associated ACD h
466. s or her sta tion and when calling another station that is in Do Not Disturb is determined by the station s programmed language That is if a station is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Japanese messages when programing a Do Not Disturb message If that station calls an Ameri can English programmed station that has selected Do Not Disturb message 02 the Japanese station s user will see the Japanese version of message 02 NOTE Only digital display phones will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese prompts Page 248 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The second line of the message can be customized with a numeric alphanumeric message of up to 16 characters English Spanish and or Japanese characters The customized message is entered as described below When entering a customized Do Not Disturb message you can press the IE button or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound EJ button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk E button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode When program ming a customized Do Not Disturb message the station is automatically in numeric mode e In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are us
467. s printed without the decimal point XXXXX If it exceeds 99999 is shown instead If there is no cost the field is blank This is a standard forced or optional account code up to 16 digits An optional account code overrides standard or forced account codes The field is blank if no account code was used NOTE If an asterisk appears at the end of the record as shown in the sample it indicates that the call was terminated because the system detected a disconnect signal from the trunk that is the caller hung up before the station user on the call SMDR Report Format System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGE PRINTING The system has a self diagnostic feature that monitors the system When a system fault or other noteworthy condition is detected the software determines the impact of the condition and clas sifies it as an alarm major or minor or other message type If the Message Print option is enabled the messages are sent to the designated output port For a complete list of Diagnostics codes refer to the Inter Tel Diagnostics Manual The programmer may enable any combination of the error message types The available mes sage types are e Information Messages These messages give information concerning system opera tion e Warning Messages The warnings in these messages indicate that a condition exists which may affect system performance e Alarm Messages A
468. s show the number dialed unless it is a non display number If you hear reorder tones your station is restricted from dialing the selected number If the display shows INVALID BIN NUMBER you entered an invalid speed dial location code TO DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AT A SINGLE LINE SET 1 2 Lift the handset and select an outgoing trunk Hookflash and enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 You hear a confirmation tone Enter the location code 000 999 for the desired number The number is automatically dialed If you hear reorder tones your station is restricted from dialing the selected number Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers Page 231 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 STATION SPEED DIALING Page 232 For convenience each station user can program up to 10 16 digit station speed dial numbers Single line sets use speed dial location codes 0 9 Inter Tel phones use speed dial buttons if programmed in the Inter Tel phone s keymap or location codes 0 9 Together the lamps in the Inter Tel phone speed dial buttons create a busy lamp field that indicates the status of the sta tions programmed under the buttons refer to the lamp status chart on page 86 Speed dial but tons can contain outside telephone numbers feature codes station extension numbers or hunt group pilot numbers Station speed dial codes can be stored in user programmable buttons to create speed dial but ton
469. s the same meaning as the Primary Language message The default mes sages are 01 MEETING 11 CALL ENGINEERING 02 STAFF MEETING 12 CALL MARKETING 03 SALES MEETING 13 CALL ACCOUNTING 04 CANCEL MEETING 14 CANCEL DND 05 APPOINTMENT 15 CANCEL CALL FWD 06 PLACE CALL 16 TAKE MEDICATION 07 CALL CLIENT 17 MAKE RESERVATION 08 CALL CUSTOMER 18 REVIEW SCHEDULE 09 CALL HOME 19 LUNCH 10 CALL CORPORATE 20 REMINDER System Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 When two languages are enabled and reminder messages are changed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Language message 02 is changed to GO TO AIRPORT a similar mes sage should be programmed for the Secondary Language message 02 e Program new extension numbers for stations The extension number for any station can be changed by an administrator The new extension number cannot conflict with an existing number e Swap extensions An extension number can be relocated swapped to another station To swap extensions the two affected stations must meet the following criteria Both devices must reside on the same node as the administrator who performing the swap Both devices must be the same type 1 e both digital phones or both single line sets Neither device can be the administrator phone performing the swap The System Wide Database Progra
470. sages for day and night modes A Record A Call tone can be programmed to alert callers at the beginning of the recording Also it can be programmed to beep periodically throughout the recording There are two ways a station can be programmed to use this feature The station can use its personal mailbox or any other mailbox as the assigned Record A Call mailbox No other mailbox can be selected This is the default programming for all stations e The station can be programmed with a default mailbox but with the option of selecting a different mailbox If the user chooses to not enter a mailbox number the system auto matically selects the default mailbox When the requesting station user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected If all parties on the call hang up except the requesting station user an intercom call will remain con nected between the requesting station and the Record A Call application This allows the user to make additional comments before ending the recording When the station user turns off Record A Call or ends the call being recorded the Voice Pro cessor delivers the message to the mailbox The station associated with the mailbox will receive message waiting indications as usual See page 296 for message retrieval instructions The programmer can set a maximum length for Record A Call messages The Record A Call Maximum Message Length timer can be set at 0 600 minutes A 0 setting allows messages
471. scade should be programmed with a longer Pager Notification Retry timer so that the system does not continu ously cycle through the cascade levels Continuous cycling is also prevented somewhat by a per mailbox 15 call limit Due to FCC regulations the Voice Processor can allow a mailbox to make only 15 calls in rapid succession without a 10 minute pause All Messages Priority Only and Each New Message Flags Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Notification Numbers Each cascade level has a programmed notification number that can be an extension number or an outside telephone number When an outside telephone number is used the system will access an outgoing trunk using the code programmed for that level that contains a pre programmed trunk access code and fol lowed by an outgoing access termination feature code 1f needed Notification calls to outside telephone numbers can be sent to a pager or to a number where a person will answer personal number Notification Numbers If the call goes to a pager the system will dial the programmed Pager Dial String then disconnect the call The dial string should include any digits that the paging company requires when the call is answered the pager LCD number and the pager termination code if needed Also if desired the pager string can be programmed to show the num ber of the mailbox that placed the call and or the number of waiting messages in the
472. se number and a specified num ber of digits that identify the dialed number DNIS This is a form of DNIS that does not have a specified number of digits The system receives a star before the DNIS digits to signal the beginning of the dialed number Then there is another star after the digits to signal the end of the DNIS infor mation ANI DNIS This is a two stage address service that provides both the caller s tele phone number and the dialed number It combines the ANI and the DNIS features described above Trunk Features System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 INTER TEL PHONE DISPLAYS Whether call information appears on the Inter Tel phone display and what information appears is determined by station flags in the database The flags are e Expanded CO Call Information On Displays This station flag determines whether call information trunk name or call information is displayed at the phone If it is enabled the Outside Call Party Information Has Priority flag described below deter mines what is displayed If it is disabled the programmed trunk group username will appear on the display In the default state this flag is enabled e Outside Party Call information Has Priority If the Expanded CO Call Information flag is enabled as described above this flag determines what information is displayed at the phone If enabled any call that is received on a trunk that provides outside call
473. search a In numeric mode IEBI button unlit Press the dialpad buttons to enter a valid feature extension or speed dial location number Press to backspace if necessary Press the SEARCH menu button or press WEJM to change to alphanu meric mode and then press EM to begin the search b In alphanumeric mode IE button lit Press the dialpad buttons to enter the desired characters Refer to the chart above Press Pl once to advance or twice to leave a space Press to backspace Press EJ or the SEARCH menu but ton to begin the search The closest match will be displayed Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can return to the initial entry by pressing the START OVER menu button Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directory Page 239 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 4 If desired press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll for ward alphabetically through the directory or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to scroll backward 5 Do one of the following e To store the selected number in a station speed dial location Press the desired speed dial button You hear confirmation tone when the number is accepted e To automatically dial a displayed extension number Press EM the but ton or the ACCEPT button If an intercom call is camped on and the but ton is lit pressing the button answers the waiting call and termin
474. sfied with your recording hang up Or press EM for more options If you wish to hear your recording press KB If you wish to add to your recording press Kl and continue your recording as described in step 3 To erase and re record your recording press KM Creating Audiotex Recordings Page 49 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 50 TO ASSIGN CUSTOM AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS TO SPECIFIC APPLICATION EXTENSION NUMBERS 1 2 3 4 5 10 Dial the voice mail access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press El to identify yourself as a mailbox owner Enter the system administrator mailbox number and password Press Ef to access the System Administrator Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu list of options press E to select the Custom Recordings options The next prompt asks if you wish to make a custom recording or select a custom recording Press EM select a recording When prompted enter the extension number of the application to be programmed For example if users dial 299 to reach voice mail enter 299 to program the voice mail greeting Or press EMI to exit to the System Administrator Menu When prompted select whether the recording will be played during day mode by pressing Kl or during night mode by pressing EB When prompted enter the desired recording number 001 500 If a recording exists it is played If not you hear
475. sfree On Off 319 Inter Tel Phones Only Disables enables the phone s handsfree intercom answering Incoming intercom calls ring as private calls if handsfree answering is disabled Headset Enable Headset Disable Headset On Off 315 316 317 Inter Tel Phones Only The enable code signals the sys tem that a headset has been connected to the phone The disable code returns the phone to normal operation The on off feature code can be used to toggle the feature on or off Station Feature Codes Page 119 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Continued Hold Individual 336 Places a call on hold so that it can be picked up directly at that station or through a reverse transfer from any other station Inter Tel phones use the HOLD button Hold System 335 Places an outside call on system hold It can be picked up directly at any phone that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk or by the station that placed it on hold If used on conference or intercom calls the system places the call on individual hold Hunt Group Remove Hunt Group Replace Hunt Group Remove Replace 322 323 324 Removes the station from its assigned hunt group s or places it in again Does not affect non hunt group calls The remove replace feature code can be used to toggle the feature
476. signals e Single progress tone Your call is being placed The associated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users have the same options as described for outgoing calls on the pre vious page e Busy signals then music All of the trunks in the route group are busy Do one of the following 1 Camp on and wait for the trunk 2 Request a callback queue The system places your station in a queue for the trunk When you hear ringing and the display shows TG XXXX or group name IS NOW AVAILABLE lift the handset Inter Tel phone users may also need to press the fast flashing Call button or individual trunk button or the button You hear dial tone and digits being dialed The associated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly e Repeating reorder tones You are restricted from the number dialed or from using the route selected The display shows INVALID OUTSIDE NUMBER or RESTRICTED OUTSIDE NUMBER If the number that you dialed does not match any of the programmed ARS route group patterns the display shows UNABLE TO ROUTE CALL Page 191 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECEIVING OUTSIDE CALLS TO RECEIVE AN OUTSIDE CALL Page 192 Inter Tel Phones You will hear one of the following signals when receiving an outside call Repeating long tones and a Call button or individual trunk button is flashing at the fast
477. sired message When pro gramming a message in speed dial memory you can use the Special button to enter a hookflash F in place of the IPIE button to advance or insert spaces or to enter a pause P to change numeric alphanumeric modes within the message The Special button can also be used to enter or in the speed dial number Station users can also place their stations in Do Not Disturb using the Remote Programming feature described on page 252 Page 249 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 250 TO ENABLE DO NOT DISTURB MODE 1 Inter Tel Phones While on hook press the DIDI button or enter the Do Not Dis turb feature code 370 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 Display phones show SELECT DND MESSAGE 01 20 Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or the Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 You hear a progress tone To select message 01 DO NOT DISTURB Inter Tel Phones Press the Speaker button or lift and replace the handset The EDD button lights Single Line Sets Hang up To select any of the 20 pre programmed messages Enter the desired number 01 20 or press the SCROLL menu button to begin scrolling Display phone users may scroll through the messages by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to go forward or the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to go backward the disp
478. speak ers and any external paging speakers in the page zone Analog phones have a default PAGE button Page On Off 325 Inter Tel Phones Only Halts pages through the phone speaker or allows them to be received again Program Bit Rate 393 Model 8560 Executive Display Professional Display Model 8520 Standard Display and Associate Display Phones Only This allows a user to change the bit per second bps rate of an attached PCDPM s serial port Program Keys 397 Inter Tel Phones Only User programmable feature but tons and station speed dial buttons can be programmed using this feature code Page 120 Station Feature Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Continued Program Station Password 392 The Station password is used for the Remote Program ming feature The password can be changed by entering the Program Station Password feature code at the station or when using the Remote Programming feature Queue Request Requests or cancels an automatic callback when a busy trunk or station becomes available Analog phones have a default QUEUE button Record A Call 385 If the system is programmed with a Record A Call applica tion the stations can be programmed to use the Record A Call feature It allows users to enter a feature code whenever they want to record an ongoing call in their
479. ss the button and then the secondary extension button You can announce the call if desired before hanging up to complete the transfer Because the calls that appear on the secondary extension button are active only at the primary station they will not follow call forwarding or system forwarding paths at the station with the secondary extension button Light Emitting Diode LED Indications The Inter Tel phone Call buttons trunk buttons speed dial buttons hunt group buttons and some of the feature buttons contain light emitting diodes LEDs The LED flash rates indicate the status of the stations trunks and features FIGURE 8 xecutone Phone LED Rates CALL DEVICE STATUS LAMP RATE Call Active 500ms on 500 ms off slow flash Device in DND Call Holding 500ms flutter 500 ms on 500 ms flutter 500 Data Call In Progress ms off fluttering flash Secondary Extension Holding Call Ringing 250ms on 250 ms off fast flash Queue Callback Help Record A Call In Progress Secondary Call Ringing Device Ringing DSS or Speed Dial button Call Transferring Call Recalling 250ms on 50 ms off urgent flash Message Waiting Call On System Hold 50 ms on 50 ms off flutter Device Idle DSS or Speed Dial button Device Busy Solidly lit Page 86 Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 9 Digital Phone LED Rates The following rates are sh
480. ssing both ends at once Secondary Extension Key This type of button allows a station user to have one button access to calls ringing or holding at another station It should be assigned to a button with a lamp so that the secondary extension button can show the call status If desired a station can have several secondary extension buttons each associated with a different station For details see page 85 SPKR Key This button is used for turning the phone speaker or headset on and off Speed Dial Keys Each keymap can have up to 10 speed dial buttons Each speed dial button can be programmed by the phone user to dial one digit string If assigned to a button with a lamp the lamp will show the status of an extension number if it is associ ated with that button Trunk Group Key These buttons are associated with specific trunk group access codes and are used for placing outgoing calls on trunks in the selected trunk group If assigned to a button with a lamp the lamp will be lit if all trunks in the trunk group are in use Inter Tel Phones Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Undefined Key Any button can be left undefined if it will not be needed It can be programmed like a user programmable button as described above If the phone user or programmer returns the phone to default values the button will return to being unde fined Up Key This button type is not required for Di
481. station user and the principal sta tion s system forward is set for the no answer station status a system wide option deter mines what the caller hears as shown in the table below HANDSFREE SYS FORWARD ANN OPTION OPTION RESULT Disabled Intercom and or The intercom call from the transferring station enters the outside calls for forwarding path after the System Forwarding Initiate timer warded expires The transferring station user hears ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered Enabled Outside calls for The transferring station user will place a handsfree call to warded the principal station and can announce the transfer the System Forwarding Initiate timer does not start until the transfer is completed Enabled Intercom calls for The handsfree announce option is overridden and the warded intercom call from the transferring station enters the for warding path after the System Forwarding Initiate timer expires The transferring station user hears ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered Enabled or Calls forwarded to The transfer is completed when the transferring station Disabled voice mail hangs up The principal station s mailbox number is auto matically dialed Individual Station Forwarding Points Page 221 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 MANUAL CALL FORWARDING AND SYSTEM FORWARDING Page 222 If the principal statio
482. station user s extension number does not match a mailbox number and the station user forwards calls to voice mail the caller will hear the main voice mail greeting and must enter a mailbox number When a mailbox receives a message the message notification station is signaled If it is an Inter Tel phone the WRJ button is lit and the display shows that a message has been received A single line set will receive message waiting signals if enabled system wide CASCADING REMOTE MESSAGE NOTIFICATION Remote Messaging is a subscriber feature that is enabled through database programming Sub scribers may program a series of specific telephone numbers a cascade for the voice mail system to call when new messages are received by their mailboxes Refer to page 301 for sub scriber instructions on using Personal Options to set up remote messaging Primary and Alternate Notification Each mailbox can have a Primary and or an Alternate notification cascade of numbers The notification numbers are programmed to be accessed during specific days and times The voice mail system monitors subscriber mailboxes continuously During monitoring if new messages have been received the system will check to see if Primary notification is turned on If it is the system will check the day and time programming If the current time is within the programmed notification day and time the voice mail system will make the notification call s to the numbers in the Prim
483. swered by entering a feature code to select the type of call access The four variations are as follows e No Automatic Call Access The user hears intercom dial tone when the handset is lifted and must press a Call or individual trunk button or the button to answer an outside call or press the button or Call button if there is no button to answer an intercom call e Automatic Intercom Call Access Only The user can answer ringing intercom calls by simply lifting the handset but outside calls must be answered by pressing a Call button an individual trunk button or the button e Automatic Outside Call Access Only The user can answer ringing outside calls by lift ing the handset but ringing intercom calls must be answered by pressing the button or Call button if there is no button e Automatic Access For All Calls The user can answer any ringing call by lifting the handset If no call is ringing the user hears intercom dial tone when the handset is lifted This is the way single line sets work When the system is in the default state all Inter Tel phones have this type of call access NOTE In any of the above variations Inter Tel phone users may still receive handsfree intercom calls if enabled The selected option determines how all types of ringing intercom or outside calls direct calls transferred calls recalls etc are answered If more than one call is ringing at the station the first call received is the first
484. system s design include e Advanced microprocessor technology e Modular easily replaceable hardware with add on capabilities for optional features e Flexible programming to customize many system and station features NETWORKING Page 2 With system software versions 5 0 and later you can connect two or more phone systems to form a network that provides a seamless interface between the systems To the user the net work appears as though it is one integrated system With few exceptions the user can perform all of the functions across the network that he can within a single phone system In this manual all references to a network mean two or more connected systems Each sys tem in a network is called a node The maximum capacities for networking are listed in the following table FEATURE DEVICES CAPACITY System Nodes per network 63 Local devices per node 1792 Off node devices per node 8000 Devices per network 40 000 The maximum number of stations and trunks that can be installed is limited by the number of voice channels and or system memory resources available Introduction Introduction AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR DUTIES As a system administrator you can provide the following services e Place the local phone system or other systems in the network in night or day mode e Setthe date and time of the local system e Setthe network d
485. system is validating mailbox numbers f you do not enter a mailbox number before you hang up the caller will be connected to the voice mail unit and must enter the mail box number after listening to the introductory voice prompts C Transfer to park If transferring to a park location complete the transfer Then page the desired party and announce the call The party must reverse transfer the call Note that if the call is not answered it will recall your station if transferred directly or it will recall the called park location s attendant if transferred to hold If desired wait for an answer and announce the call If you are calling a device such as an automated attendant that does not accept call announcements the display shows HANG UP TO FINISH TRANSFER You have the following options To complete the transfer Hang up or press another Call button The display shows CALL TRANSFERRED TO username To return to the caller Press the fluttering Call button trunk button or but ton Inter Tel phone or hookflash twice single line set To try another station Press the button or press the Special button and enter the Transfer to Ring feature code 345 Then dial another extension number To transfer the call to hold when calling a station Inter Tel phones only Press the button or the TRANSFER TO HOLD menu button Or press the Special button and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The call will not ring or send c
486. t will select that feature When there is only one prompt on a line like DO NOT DISTURB then pressing the button on either side of the prompt will select it NOTE Version 7 0 or later system software is required to support the menu display and but tons on the Model 8560 There is a system wide flag called Alter nate Keyset Menu Displays that deter HOLD SYS HOLD mines the display that Model 8560 TRANSFER CNF Executive and Professional Phone users TRANSFER TO HOLD will see during an outside call In the MUTE MORE default state the display shows the follow ing menu with Transfer To Hold on the first menu and Flash on the More menu If the Alternate Keyset Menu Displays flag is enabled the Model 8560 Executive and us NN SEER ME PIED Professional Phone users will see the fol FLASH lowing menu with Flash on the first menu MUTE MORE and Transfer To Hold on the More menu Enabling the Alternate Keyset Menu flag allows Centrex features to be accessed more easily using the FLASH menu option FIGURE 6 Model 8560 Phone Displays Page 78 LCD WITH SIX 16 CHARACTER LINES 8 LCD MENU SELECTION KEYS Inter Tel Phones System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 7 Executive Phone Display LCD WITH SIX 16 CHARACTER LINES 8 LCD MENU SELECTION KEYS C c cC Two Line LCD The Model 8520 Standard and Associate Display Phones have a two line Liquid Crystal Dis play
487. t Panel To access the Input Panel press the Input Panel icon located in the far right corner of the taskbar Then select LargeKB large keyboard To relocate the Input Panel press the title bar with the sty lus and drag it to another area of the screen To hide the Input Panel press the Input Panel icon and then press Hide Input Panel When a feature requires the user to enter characters the Input Panel pops to the front of the screen If you connect an external keyboard to your phone it is recommended that you disable the Input Panel TO DISABLE THE INPUT PANEL 1 Press Start Settings Control Panel Double press Input Panel Disable the Allow applications to change the input panel state option Press OK Save the registry see page 104 and reset the phone O10 N IP and SIP Devices System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 System Memory and Storage The Model 8690 Phone ships with 128 MB of RAM and 64 MB of flash RAM The telephone application is pre loaded on the device with approximately 5 MB of RAM available to the user CAUTION The Model 8690 Phone does not have a built in hard drive Storage memory will not sur vive a reset or an upgrade to the operating system unless the files are stored in the Mounted Volume folder on the phone My Computer Mounted Volume or on a host that is accessible from the Model 8690 Phone Desktop shortcuts and any preferences that have not been saved in
488. t be provided Directory names can be sorted by first or last name Refer to page 286 for information about using the directory Dial the operator access destination If the caller needs further assistance dialing 0 will access the Voice Processor s programmed operator destination Or if the caller is on a rotary telephone and cannot enter a digit the call will be automatically transferred to the operator destination The operator access destination is programmed in the data base There can be separate destinations for day and night modes NOTE Due to the natural characteristics of the trunk the volume level of DTMF tones transmitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the system and Voice Processor This natural degradation in tone volume may adversely affect the reli ability of the Automated Attendant feature Other factors which can affect automated attendant performance are trunk noise and the quality and strength of the DTMF tones generated by the off premises phone itself AUTOMATED ATTENDANT APPLICATIONS There are a number of different uses for this feature Here are two examples Direct ring in calls to a busy attendant could be forwarded to an automated attendant using the Call Forward If Busy feature or system forwarding Calls could ring in directly to an automated attendant application s extension number when the system is in day and or night mode Automated Attendant Applications Page 273
489. t devices Output devices can be connected to record the data generated by the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and error message recording features The device can be a printer magnetic tape floppy disk etc Surge spike protector A surge spike protector should be installed to reduce the effects of AC voltage surges and spikes that may cause system malfunctions false logic and or damage to the electronic components System battery back up To provide back up power in the event of an AC power failure or brownout condition the system power supply can have optional battery back up using an unin terruptable power supply UPS unit or a standby power supply SPS unit Facsimile FAX machine A FAX machine may be connected to an available single line cir cuit Off premises stations Single line DTMF sets can be connected to the system from a remote location The connection is made through a telephone company OPX circuit or a customer pro vided trunk Optional System Equipment System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Playback devices A playback device answering machine can be used in place of the Voice Processor interface to help process calls The device answers a call plays a message then dis connects from the call or transfers it to a hunt group to allow the caller access to other system resources Power failure transfer equipment Power failure transfer equipment can be installed to con nect
490. t recalls the station where it is on hold and the Recall timer is started If it 1s still unanswered when the Recall timer expires it recalls the station s attendant and the Abandoned Call timer is started If the station does not have an attendant the call continues to recall at the station that placed it on hold If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected by the system For users convenience the system has two Hold timers Hold and Hold Alternate In the default state the Alternate timer is set for a longer time period than the Hold timer However both timers are programmable The Alternate Hold Timer station flag determines which timer each station will use If the flag is disabled the station uses the Hold timer If it is enabled the station uses the Alternate timer NOTE Inter Tel phone users can avoid the Hold timer by muting the microphone during a call instead of placing the call on hold If this is done the caller will not hear music on hold and will not recall the station INDIVIDUAL HOLD Page 198 TO PLACE AN INTERCOM OR OUTSIDE CALL ON INDIVIDUAL HOLD 1 While on the call Inter Tel Phones Press the Hold button or press the Special button and enter the Indi vidual Hold feature code 336 You hear intercom dial tone and the Call button indi vidual trunk button or button flutters Single Line Sets Hookflash and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336
491. tem places a call to the station s assigned Record A Call application When the application answers the system sets up a conference call with the station s Record A Call mailbox If programmed the mailbox plays a greeting to indicate that recording is in progress STAR The Scheduled Time Based Application Routing STAR enhances the pro grammability of the voice mail application greetings With STAR applications can be programmed to play alternative greetings for holidays and weekends A STAR applica tion is a table of up to 20 entries that serves as a routing table which tells the Voice Processor which application will be used based on day and time information in the table The applications are programmed to play the greetings not the STAR applica tion The STAR routes the call to the right application Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Information Storage SMDR informa tion can be stored on the Voice Processor s hard disk and then processed using call record sorting software such as Inter Tel s Inside Track Voice Mail This application handles all calls that are directed to voice mail other than through the Message Notification Retrieval application by subscribers and non sub scribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options Stations can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this appli cation s Page 271 Voice Processing Features AXXESS
492. ter the Remote Programming feature code 359 If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phone users can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number 3 Enter the extension to be forwarded If you have a display it shows ENTER PASS WORD f you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again 4 Enter the extension s password followed by EE If you have a display it shows ENTER FEATURE CODE NOTE f you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASSWORD and the call is disconnected Station users will hear reorder tones 5 Toturn on Call Forward a Enter one of the following Call Forward feature codes f you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again Call Forward All Calls355 Call Forward If Busy 357 Call Forward If No Answer356 Call Forward If No Answer Busy358 b Enter the forwarding destination This can be an extension number or a trunk access code followed by an outside telephone number If the forward destination is an extension number programming 1s complete and the call is disconnected automatically If the forward destination is an outside number hang up to complete the program ming If the station is not permitted to forward to the destination entered you will hear reorder tones and can try again If you hang up before e
493. ter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password the dis play shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Phones also show the options STATION SYSTEM and TRUNK Press Kl or the TRUNK menu button The display shows ENTER TRUNK OPTION Page 25 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 4 To Program an Individual Trunk Press Kll or the INDIVIDUAL TRUNK menu but ton Then program trunk options as follows a The display shows ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION Enter the extension number of the trunk to be programmed using one of the methods described on page 25 b The display shows INDIVIDUAL TRUNK OPTION Enter one of the following options To view the last two options on a display phone press the arrow or gt gt menu button at the bottom of the display Answer Supervision To program the answer supervision for the trunk press Kl or the ANS SUPERVISION menu button When the display shows ANS SUPERVI SION OPTION press Kll or the POLARITY REVERSE menu button for the polarity reversal supervision type Or press Kl or the VALID CALL menu button for Valid Call timer supervision Or press Kl or the VALID POLARITY menu button for Valid Call timer with Polarity Reversal supervision Then press EB or ACCEPT to continue Caller ID To enable or disab
494. that supports 16 characters per line When the phone is not in use the LCD shows the station extension number username time of day and date Other displays include reminder messages Do Not Disturb messages numbers dialed call sources elapsed time of calls current call costs error messages station status pro gramming messages etc The displayed information is described throughout the instructions in this section of the manual Older Inter Tel phone types are available in a standard or display model The non display phones can be converted to display phones by installing LCD Units refer to REPLACEMENT PARTS for unit part numbers Installation instructions are in the INSTALLATION section of the manual NOTE Most Analog IDS and Wave phones also have an LCD display that supports 16 char acters per line LCD Contrast Adjustment The contrast for the Model 8000 Series Display Phones is adjustable There are eight different contrast levels available The LCD Contrast Control feature is supported on software versions 7 0 and later TO ADJUST THE LCD CONTRAST ON THE MODEL 8560 PHONE 1 While the phone is idle press the Special button gg and enter the LCD Contrast fea ture code 303 2 EITHER Select LIGHTER or DARKER on the menu buttons OR Use the Volume button to make your selection OR Press the desired level 1 8 3 Press the Speaker button or ACCEPT to save your change The Model 8520 Phone has a contrast control
495. the conference press the button and hang up The button and a Call button flutters NOTE If all remaining parties are outside parties and the Hold timer expires while you are out of the conference the conference recalls your station The recall rings at your station and the button flashes at the medium rate The display shows CONFER ENCE RECALLING Press the button to return to the conference If the recall is not answered before the Recall timer expires it will recall the attendant To return to the conference Lift the handset and or press the button again Single Line Sets During the conference hookflash and hang up NOTE If the Hold timer expires while you are out of the conference the parties recall your station When the recall rings at your station lift the handset to answer the recall If the recall is not answered before the Recall timer expires it will recall the attendant To return to the conference Lift the handset and or enter the Conference feature code 5 Ending the Conference and Placing All Parties on Hold TO END THE CONFERENCE AND PUT ALL PARTIES ON HOLD ANY INSIDE PARTY Inter Tel Phones During the conference press the button and hang up The button and a Call button flutters The parties are still connected in a conference To place the parties on individual hold Press the Hold button or enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You can then return to each party individually by pressi
496. the destination message print node out of order In addition to the messages the following error indications will occur in the event of a system alarm If a major system alarm occurs MAJOR ALARM appears on all display phones If the major alarm appears on a group of phones the associated Keyset Card has failed The warning might also appear on a single phone if the phone is defective If all phones on the system are inoperative the alarm message is sent to the system s primary serial port on the CPU A minor alarm sends a message to the primary attendant and to administrators if pro grammed to receive alarms Each message record includes the following fields Page 266 Sequence Number This field shows the order in which the faults occurred If there is a skip in a series of sequence numbers it indicates that a message was logged that is not programmed to be printed Time The Time field shows the time that the fault occurred This field shows the hours and minutes in 24 hour format as HH MM Date The Date field shows the date that the indicated fault occurred The date shows the month and date as MM DD Fault Code The Code field holds the associated number of the indicated fault This field is four characters in length and the first character is an M for messages or A for minor alarms Each of the different system faults that the system is capable of detecting is assigned a unique number M100 M999 or A001 A299 i
497. the user does not respond immediately a second set of prompts is played Most prompts are interruptible and users can press the desired button at any time during the prompt The prompt will then stop and the system will act on the requested choice Page 288 Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Applications MAILBOXES Mailboxes Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 A mailbox is a storage location on the Voice Processor PC hard disk that stores all messages that have been directed to it The hard disk also stores prompts greetings and special pro gramming Each Subscriber member of the voice message system is assigned a unique mailbox number At system default the passwords are the same as the mailbox numbers For example the default password for mailbox 1001 is 1001 There are three types of mailboxes on the voice mail system Standard Receive Only and Sys tem Administrator There can also be Extension IDs which are stations that do not have mail boxes but that are included in the recorded directory The Standard mailbox owner receives all of the available subscriber options as autho rized through database programming Standard mailbox features include Listening to new messages Recording and sending messages Deleting and restoring messages Saving messages Personal options greeting password etc Remote messaging if authorized thro
498. the wide variation in charges among network car riers the system s call cost calculation cannot be used as a prediction of actual charges This feature can only be used as a management tool to estimate call cost The Call Cost Accounting feature estimates the cost of outgoing and incoming calls displays it on the Inter Tel phones and prints it in the SMDR reports The cost is based on the type of call telephone number dialed the elapsed time of the call the day of the week and the time of day A table in the database supplies the rates for all types of calls including multiplicative factors for evening and weekend rate changes on outgoing calls The equation for calculating call cost is Daytime Rate X Multiplicative Factor X Connect Time The multiplicative factor adjusts the daytime per minute call cost for evening and weekend rates of outgoing calls For example the evening call cost multiplier is 0 65 1f calls are 3596 less expensive after 5 00PM The daytime rate D evening E multiplicative factor and night weekend N W multiplicative factors are used on the following schedule SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 8AM N W D D D D D N W TO 5 PM 5PM E E E E E E N W TO 11PM 11PM N W NAW N AW NAW NAW NAW NAW TO 8 AM NOTE The system s Call Cost Accounting feature is intended to provide a cost estimate that is applied to the various classes of calls Due to the wid
499. tification and quick mailbox access Directory Services Directory services provide callers with a list of mailboxes and extension IDs Automated Attendant The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide automated call answering service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated attendant When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instructions After hearing the recording or at any time while it is playing the caller may then dial an extension or mailbox number Automated Attendant Recall Destination If a call that is transferred by the auto mated attendant is not answered before the Transfer Voice Processor timer expires the call recalls the Automated Attendant Recall Destination The Recall Destination announces that the station is unavailable and allows the caller to leave a message if the station has an associated mailbox or dial another extension Call Routing Announcement Call Routing Announcements can be used two ways A Call Routing Announcement application can be used in place of a playback device The playback device function is especially useful for programming hunt group announcement and overflow stations When called the Call Routing Announcement application will play a recording and then hang up The Call Routing Announcement application can use Digit Translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for acc
500. tination by pressing EJ f the number was not associated with a mailbox it will ask you to enter a mailbox number If the message was from an outside caller you cannot leave a voice mail message Press EM to make a return call Your call will be transferred automatically to the caller s extension or telephone number if available Zf the extension num ber is not available you will have the option of leaving voice mail Jf the tele phone number is not available you cannot reply to the message Press to forward a copy of the message to another subscriber If you want to include introductory comments press Kl and record an introduction If not press EE to forward the message without an introduction Press J to listen to the previous message Press Ej to play the introductory message envelope again Press Gi to listen to the next message Press Hi to save the new message in your mailbox Press Eli to delete the message from your mailbox Page 297 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 RECOVERING DELETED MESSAGES This feature allows you to undo the Delete Message operation and restore previously deleted messages The messages will be restored to your saved message queue You have a set amount of time to recover messages depending on database programming up to 24 hours After that voice mail will erase them Page 298 TO RECOVER DELETED MESSAGES 1 2 3 4 Di
501. ting System SS refers to the System Software AL refers to a Voice Processor link e Text The Text field holds a text message that identifies the particular fault indicated by the record This field is at least 40 characters in length and may extend onto subsequent lines if necessary to present adequate information about the fault The information printed on an additional line is preceded with the character to indicate the continua tion e Auxiliary When necessary additional information may be printed as part of a message on separate lines This additional information is referred to as auxiliary text To iden tify this text as pertaining to the previous message each line 1s preceded with the lt character POWER FAILURE CAPABILITIES The Central Processor CPU Card contains relay contacts that can be used for power failure transfer which allows one or more single line sets to select predetermined trunks in the event of a processor board failure or a power failure Additional equipment is required CUSTOMIZED SYSTEM PROGRAMMING REPORTS Customized system programming reports can be created through the database The program mer can select the programming area to be reported and then select the information that will be included When extension numbers are listed in a report they can be sorted by name extension number or circuit number Reports can also be titled Power Failure Capabilities Page 267 System F
502. tion of the call indicating that the data path is in use but may be picked up by associated phones TO ANSWER A DATA CALL USING THE DATA DEVICE 1 When the data device receives a call the button flashes on the associated phone s If the data device does not have an auto answer modem follow the procedures for the data device s communications software and instruct the device to answer the incoming call The button flutters while the call is in progress 2 Operate the data device according to the manufacturer s instructions Digital Phone LED Rates System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Termination of a data call may be accomplished in one of three ways Your data device can hang up This causes the trunk or intercom channel to be released terminating the call to the other data device The other data device may hang up When the call 1s disconnected the button 1s unlit Depending on the type of device used the data device may detect the loss of car rier and automatically terminate the entire connection If the data device does not have this capability you must manually cause the data device to hang up The data call can be transferred to an associated phone s primary voice path releasing the data device and then disconnected by the phone Note however that the button will flutter rapidly if the data device does not hang up before the Inactivity timer expires TO TERMINATE DATA DEVICE CONNECTION
503. tion tone followed by dial tone Hang up Default Station HOOKFLASH Hookflash System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 A timed hookflash may be required for Inter Tel phone and single line users to use certain tele phone company or PBX features The CO Hookflash feature code sends a timed hookflash over the trunk when entered A hookflash will restart the call cost display and toll restriction plus it will start a new line in the SMDR printout However the call will remain under the same Call button The Hookflash feature can be enabled or disabled on a trunk group by trunk group basis It can be used on any outside call including conference calls The duration of the hookflash can be changed by reprogramming the LS GS CO Hookflash timer default value is 0 6 seconds If the system is not installed behind a PBX the Hookflash timer must be programmed to be compatible with the system s trunks TO SEND A TIMED HOOKFLASH WHILE ON A TRUNK Inter Tel Phones Press the Special button and enter the Hookflash feature code 330 Single Line Sets Hookflash and then enter the Hookflash feature code 330 Page 257 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REMINDER MESSAGES NOTE This feature does not apply to single line sets Reminder messages are set like an alarm clock to signal an Inter Tel phone at a specified time The user can select the message and time up to 24 hours in ad
504. tion using Record A Call cannot be monitored In other words to use Record A Call and station monitoring simulta neously the supervisor must first be monitoring the station and the station not the supervisor must initiate the recording Record A Call Record A Call System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The Record A Call feature code can be assigned to a user programmable feature button If the feature button has a lamp it flashes while the Record A Call conference is being set up and is lit while the feature is active The programmer can set a maximum length for Record A Call messages The Record A Call Maximum Message Length timer can be set at 0 600 minutes A 0 setting allows messages of any length limited only by the available disk space The default is 30 minutes This overrides the mailbox s maximum message length setting However if a Record A Call message exceeds the maximum message length the mailbox will be considered full until that Record A Call message is deleted As with any other conference call any inside party involved in a Record A Call conference can use the Hold Transfer Agent Help or other features However if any inside party has enhanced speakerphone enabled the enhanced mode will be disabled when the conference begins and must be re enabled if desired NOTE Record A Call is not supported on an IP or SIP device engaged in a P2P call see page 105 TO USE RECORD A CALL
505. tional account code is also entered the optional account code will override the all calls following account code for that call only All subsequent calls will be associated with the all calls following account code To cancel this feature the feature code is entered without an account code just press EJ to ter minate programming TO ENTER AN ACCOUNT CODE AND USE IT FOR ALL FOLLOWING CALLS 1 Inter Tel Phones Enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 Display phones show ENTER ACCT CODE Single Line Sets Lift the handset and enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 2 Enter the account code using the dialpad Inter Tel phone users may press a speed dial button to enter an account code number that has been stored in that speed dial number location If an account code is entered that has fewer than the programmed maximum number of digits press EM to terminate the code Display phones show numbers You hear a single progress tone when the code is accepted TO CANCEL THE ACCOUNT CODE FOR ALL CALLS FOLLOWING FEATURE 1 Inter Tel Phones Enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 Display phones show ENTER ACCT CODE Single Line Set Lift the handset and enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 2 Ifon hook lift and replace the handset or press Ell to exit Jf off hook hang up Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls F
506. tions that control these LEDs e Allow Green LEDs This flag gives the installer the option of having all red green phones and red only phones operate the same or allowing the red green phones to use the green LEDs If this flag is enabled the dual color phones will use both the red and green LEDs If it is disabled the phones will operate in red only mode like the phones without green LEDs In the default state the flag is disabled e Use Green LEDs For Direct Ring This flag determines whether direct ring in calls cause a red or green lamp If the flag is enabled direct ring in calls to your station will be green If disabled all direct ring in calls will cause the LED to be red In the default state this flag is enabled NOTE The Allow Green LEDs flag must be enabled in order for this flag to operate Connecting a Headset For convenience an electret headset can be used at any Inter Tel phone The Speaker button is used to connect and disconnect calls when the headset is attached Some headsets have a power saver mode that disables the headphone after a period of silence To prevent these headsets from missing portions of incoming calls there is a station flag called Headset Connect Tone Enabling this flag allows the phone to generate a tone that activates the headset before connecting to an incoming call In the default state it is disabled The Model 8520 and 8560 Phones have headset jacks on the back of the phones This
507. to enter a name Display phone users will receive Exact Spell instructions all other users will hear Quick Spell instructions Changing the First Last Name Search Each directory can be programmed to be organized by last name or by first name Callers accessing a directory receive system voice prompts that ask them to enter the first or last name of the person for whom they wish to leave a message If an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 Phone with menu buttons is used to access a directory the caller may switch back and forth from looking up a last name to a first name simply by pressing the corresponding menu button Callers using other Inter Tel phones or single line sets can press KM to toggle between last and first name Locating a Name Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Listening to the Next Previous Name After a name has been played the caller can listen to the previous name in the directory by pressing Kl To listen to the next name the caller can press E The directory lists are circular That is when the end of the list is reached the next name played will be the first name in the directory Or if the caller scrolls to the beginning of the list the previous name played will be the last name in the directory ACCEPTING A NAME When the caller is using the voice mail feature and accepts a name the caller is transferred to the corresponding mailbox Then t
508. to place a call using any other method A restricted user can still select individual trunks if the trunks are designated as exempt from ARS Only as described on page 155 were transferred were placed on hold or are recalling or ringing Trunk restriction determines which trunks in the ARS route group can be selected by the station or application 02 Deny Area This restriction is divided into eight user groups to allow the use Office of varying area office code restriction tables This is useful for reducing restrictions for some of the stations applications or trunk groups while increasing restrictions for others Each station application and trunk group is assigned a day mode and a night mode user group in Database Programming Within each user group area codes can be designated as restricted allowed or extended Restricting an area code prevents users from placing calls to that area code Allowing an area code allows all office codes within that area code Designating an area code as extended allows the programmer to determine which office codes up to 800 are allowed or restricted within that area code 03 Deny Calls to operator numbers are restricted Operator 04 Deny Toll Calls to numbers containing a toll string defaults to 1 are Access restricted 05 Deny Calls to international numbers are restricted International 06 Deny Equal Calls that begin with equal access digits 10XXX or 101XXXX Access are restricted 07 Deny Loca
509. to the chart on the follow ing page Then press EM or ACCEPT f you make a mistake use the button to back up and erase existing characters or the CLEAR button to erase the whole entry e To erase the current name and leave it blank Press CLEAR or press repeatedly until the name is erased Then press EB or ACCEPT e To leave the name the same Press EJ or ACCEPT Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names Page 233 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 3 When the display shows ENTER NUMBER do one of the following e To enter or change a number Dial the extension number or telephone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored To include a hookflash or a pause in the number press the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound 7 three times for a hookflash or four times for a pause You can enter more than one or hookflash in a row by pressing the SIDE button to move to the next character not necessary after pauses If you make a mistake press to back up and erase or press El or CANCEL to leave the number unchanged then start over at step 1 e To erase an existing number and leave it blank Press LIU until the number is erased 4 Press J to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KA
510. to use Record A Call If your system is programmed with a Record A Call application the stations can be pro grammed to use the Record A Call feature It allows users to enter a feature code whenever they want to record an ongoing call in their designated Record A Call mailbox Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox messages When a user requests the Record A Call feature the system establishes a conference call with the current call parties and a mailbox If there are no conference circuits available when the user requests Record A Call or if there are already four parties on the call the user hears reor der tones and cannot use the feature The Record A Call mailbox records the call as a voice mail message All parties will be included in the recording If desired the Record A Call mailbox can be programmed to play a message announcing that the Record A Call feature is in progress There can be separate mes sages for day and night modes To signal to the other parties that the Record A Call feature is in use a system wide Record A Call Tone flag can be enabled during system programming If the flag is disabled there will be no alerting tone If enabled the beep will occur periodically throughout the call The Record A Call Tone Interval timer determines how often this tone is generated If the timer is set to 0 the tone is generated only when the feature is first activated There are two
511. ton 41 reset 42 Create or Delete Administrator Stations 14 Attendant Stations 14 House Phones 14 Creating Audiotex Recordings 48 Custom Audiotex Recordings 48 274 277 Customized System Programming Reports 267 Customized Voice Mail Prompts 51 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 D Data Device 90 Data Port Module 12 line and 24 line analog phones 90 specifications 90 Database Programming 12 Database Programming Additions 145 Database Programming at Administrator Station 12 Database Programmed Account Codes 195 Date 266 Date and Time Display 10 11 164 Day and Night Modes 162 Default Phone Feature Keys 84 Default Station 256 Deleted Message Recovery 298 Desktop OAI 94 Diagnostic Dump Node Information 125 Diagnostics network 44 system 44 Dial Initiation Timer 115 Dial Patterns Strings 152 155 Dial Rules 152 196 Dial 0 Destination mailbox 290 Voice Processor 273 287 Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers 237 Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers 231 DID DNIS 2 148 261 262 DID E amp M Receive Busy Instead of Camp On 201 Digit Translation 277 nodes 277 programming 277 Digital Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF Units 98 Digital Keyset Card DKSC or DKSC 16 74 Digital Phone 187 Digital Phone Data Port Modules 89 Digital Phone Desktop Interface 94 Digital Signal Processor DSP conferencing 209 resources 108 Direct Inward System Access DISA 162 163 Direct Station Selection
512. tones A call is ringing in Lift the handset you are connected to the caller You hear a call ringing in on another station and you have allowed answer Lift the handset and enter the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 You are con nected to the lowest numbered trunk ringing in for which you have allowed answer TO RECEIVE A CALL THAT WAS TRANSFERRED TO HOLD When you hear a page announcing that an outside call is holding at your station a Call button or individual trunk button is fluttering Inter Tel Phones Lift the handset and or press the fluttering Call button or individual trunk button or press the ENAME button You are connected to the caller Single Line Sets Lift the handset and press the Hold button or enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the caller Receiving Outside Calls System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 ON HOOK MONITORING An Inter Tel phone user with a speakerphone can monitor the call listen to a recorded mes sage wait for the call to be answered or wait on hold and then speak handsfree when answered TO USE ON HOOK MONITOR 1 While on a call press the Speaker button and hang up f you do not want to be heard and if the MUTE button is not lit press the button or MUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the Microphone Mute On Off feature code 314 You can hear the other party if the microphone is muted you cannot
513. triction Or press Ell or the COS NIGHT menu button to program night mode toll restriction 2 The display shows SET DAY or NIGHT COS XX If this is not the COS you wish to program scroll to the correct COS by pressing the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or PREVIOUS to scroll backward The default COS numbers are as follows See page 155 COS 01 ARS Only COS 02 Deny Area Office COS 03 Deny Operator COS 04 Deny Toll Access COS 05 Deny International COS 06 Deny Equal Access COS 07 Deny Local Calls COS 08 Denied Numbers COS 09 Allowed Numbers 3 When the correct COS is displayed press or the ON menu button to enable the toll restriction Or press El or the OFF menu button to disable it 4 Ifdesired repeat steps c2 and c3 to program additional COS toll restrictions 5 Press EM or ACCEPT to save the COS programming The display shows DATABASE UPDATED and then returns to the TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION prompt 6 Press EM again to exit to the ENTER STATION OPTION prompt When the display shows ENTER STATION OPTION press EJ again to exit to the ENTER STATION EXTENSION prompt You can then program another station by repeating these steps or press EB or ACCEPT once more to exit to the ENTER DATA BASE OPTION prompt When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming sessi
514. tton CALL menu button POLARITY menu button Press 2 or ra E poc ID d SET CALLER ID menu button bre Y Y Press 1 or ON Press 2 or OFF menu button menu button Press 3 or HYBRID BALANCE menu button p HYBRID BALANCE OPTION L d Press 4 or SIGNALING menu button Press 5 or TRUNK GROUP menu button Press 6 or TRUNK BUSY menu button Y y Press 1 or NORMAL Press 2 or SHORT menu button menu button m s AT ANY LEVEL L ENTER SIGNALING OPTION pies eus diae 7 E ton to cancel any unsaved 4 a Vv changes and back up to exit programming Press 1 or DTMF Press 2 or PULSE menu button menu button Press or ACCEPT to save changes and back up p ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION one dicpiayilevel Y INFORMATION IN THIS CHART IS SHOWN AS Enter the trunk group number FOLLOWS Ly MARKTRUNKBUSY YOUR INPUT v Y apnom Press 1 or ON Press 2 or OFF i PHONE DISPLAYS A menu button menu button Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Page 29 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FIGURE 3 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Continued CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE Enter the number of the trunk group to be programmed TRUNK GROUP OPTION Press 1 or r
515. tton for every trunk Down Key This button type is not required for Digital Phones It is intended for Ana log Phone use No further programming is necessary This button can be used scrolling backward through displays When the phone is idle it can be used for adjusting volume in place of the Volume button Digital Phones use the Volume button DSS BLF Key A DSS BLF button will dial the associated extension number when pressed If assigned to a button with a lamp it will also show the status of the associ ated station as described for DSS BLF Units on page 34 DSS BLF buttons cannot be changed by the station user Feature Key These are programmed with feature codes The feature code appears in the same button location on all stations assigned to the keymap and cannot be changed by the phone user Forward Key The forward button can be programmed with any of the Call Forward ing feature codes The forwarding code used by the button can be changed by the phone user Hunt Group Key Like a DSS BLF button this button dials a hunt group pilot number when pressed and if assigned to a button with a lamp will show the status of that hunt group Page 81 System Hardware AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 82 Individual Trunk Key This button is associated with one trunk It can be used for placing outgoing calls and for picking up calls on hold and answering incoming calls on that trunk Intercom IC Ke
516. ture operates e The Agent Help Extension field determines the station that is called when the Agent Help feature code is entered at the station This can be set to any valid extension num ber for a station extension list or hunt group or it can be set to None e TheUser Keyed Extension flag if enabled allows the user to select the station that will receive the Agent Help request even if a default Agent Help Extension is programmed as described above AGENT USER HELP EXT KEYED RESULT Ext number Disabled The Agent Help Extension is called when the feature code is entered Ext number Enabled The user is prompted to enter the desired number after the feature code is entered If a number is not entered before the dialing timer expires the programmed Agent Help Exten sion number is dialed automatically None Enabled The user is prompted to enter the desired number after the feature code is entered None Disabled The user hears reorder tone if the feature code is entered When a station user enters the Agent Help feature code a private call is placed to the station s Agent Help Extension While the call is ringing at the supervisor s extension neither the requesting user nor any other parties on the call can hear the private call ringing If the supervi sor answers the call the system creates a conference to include the supervisor in the requesting user s original call If the
517. tures VOLUME CONTROLS On Inter Tel phones volume is controlled in the following ways On Model 8500 8520 and 8560 Phones illustrations of speakers f and iil represent higher and lower volume levels Press the fi end of the button to lower the volume and the m0 end of the button to raise the volume On the Executive Standard and Axxess Basic Phones an illustration on the button that looks like this 4 Gl represents higher and lower volume levels Press the lower end in place of the down arrow and the higher end in place of the up arrow On the Professional Associate and Eclipse Basic Phones arrows on the key represents higher and lower volume levels On some analog phones speaker volume and ring tone volume are controlled by two thumbwheels on the right hand side of the phone The other Inter Tel phones have separate VOL UP and VOL DOWN keys NOTE The volume adjustment button on the digital phones also can be used for scrolling through displays The analog phone volume buttons are used only for adjusting volume they need to have PREVIOUS and NEXT buttons programmed in their keymaps to scroll through dis plays TO CHANGE VOLUMES ON AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 Press the appropriate button to raise or lower the volume using one of the procedures listed below A confirmation tone will alert you when you have reached the highest or lowest possible volume On display phones the display shows VOLUME LEVEL X The
518. two languages If a station s Secondary Language field is programmed to be Use Primary Language the Change Language feature will do nothing because the station will toggle between the System Primary Language and the station s Secondary Language which is the System Primary Lan guage If a station s Secondary Language field is programmed to be Use Secondary Language the Change Language feature will act like version 5 2 and toggle between the System Primary Language and the station s Secondary Language which is the System Secondary Language This is the system default If a station s Secondary Language field is programmed to be Japanese the Change Language feature will toggle between the System Primary Language and the station s Secondary Lan guage which is Japanese The Language field for stations indicates what language the station is currently set to This field used to toggle between the Use Primary Language and Use Secondary Language It can be set to any specific language along with the Use Primary Language and Use Secondary Lan guage The side effect of changing the Language field is that if you change it to Japanese and the station s Secondary Language field is set to Spanish then the user will have no way to get back to Japanese if they enter the Change Language feature code This is because the first time the user enters the feature code the system will toggle the station to the Use Primary Lan guage The next time th
519. ty reversal is detected depending on system programming Outgoing calls become valid immediately if placed on hold or transferred Incoming calls are always valid immediately Station call data can be recorded on a customer provided printer or an alternate device such as a magnetic tape or floppy disk The Voice Processor PC can also be used to capture Station Message Detail Recording SMDR information The SMDR information is stored in a file on the Voice Processor PC hard disk for later retrieval Selectable SMDR options include any combination of the following See page 260 for an defi nition of call cost types e Record All Incoming Calls Records all incoming calls that are answered except DID DNIS calls e Record All Local Calls Records all calls that use the local call cost e Record All Free Calls Records all calls that use the free call cost e Record All Ring in Diagnostics A ring in message is recorded for every incoming call whether answered or unanswered to indicate how long it rang e Record All Toll Local Calls Records all calls that use the toll local call cost e Record All Toll Long Distance Calls Records all calls that use the toll long dis tance call cost e Record All Operator Calls Records all calls that use the operator call cost e Record All International Calls Records all calls that use the international call cost e Record All DISA Calls Records all DISA calls
520. u During or after the greeting press EM to identify yourself as a subscriber Enter your mailbox number and personal password When you hear the Subscriber Menu press El to send a message Dial the desired mailbox number or group list number f you do not know the mailbox number you can press EM to access the company directory to locate and select the mail box See page 286 for directory instructions Group lists are not included in the direc tory If the mailbox is full a prompt will notify you that the mailbox cannot receive mes sages However it will allow you to leave a message at another mailbox Leave your message with another subscriber or try again later After hearing the subscriber s name press E to accept it The subscriber s mailbox message is played To skip this message press EM When you hear the tone record your message When finished hang up or press EM and go to the next step NOTE If the system detects silence for longer than 5 seconds it will prompt you to speak up The recording if any will remain unchanged e To pause while recording Press EM To continue press any button The pause length is determined by the Pause Voice Mail timer e To erase your message Press KB If you exceed the maximum allotted time for message length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send the message as it is If voice mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot acce
521. ual configuration is defined by the type of cards and the number of circuits in use on the system The following list explains the func tion of the various Keyset Cards e Digital Keyset Card DKSC DKSC 16 DKSC 16 Provides eight or 16 circuits for connecting digital display and non display phones Digital Keyset Card circuits can be equipped with a Single Line Adapter SLA and programmed to support two single line sets instead of an Inter Tel phone e Analog Keyset Card AKSC Executone Keyset Card EKSC Provides up to 12 circuits for connecting GMX and IMX Analog phones Executone IDS phones and Executone Wave phones and devices to the system e Single Line Card SLC SLC 16 or SLC 16 Provides eight or 16 circuits for con necting on premises AC ringing single line DTMF sets and playback devices The SLC 16 is available for software versions 8 2 and later e Internet Protocol Card IPC Supports up to eight IP SoftPhone devices The IPC provides the functionality that is required to make phone calls through the IP network using the telephone system e Internet Protocol Resource Card IPRC Supports up to 32 V8 1 and later IP SIP devices The 32 device IPRC provides the functionality that is required to make phone calls through the IP network using the telephone system Thee 32 device IPRC cannot be installed behind a firewall or Network Address Translation NAT Page 74 Station Instruments System Hardware AXXESS
522. uch functions are performed The system will immediately allow access to local emergency facilities whenever a station user enters the Emergency Call feature code defaults to 911 When activated the Emergency Call feature will select a trunk or route the call based on the device programming The digit s required to call the local emergency services facility defaults to 911 are then automatically dialed Because a condition may exist where a critical situation needs to be reported this fea ture will override all toll restrictions and trunk access programming In versions prior to 7 0 when a user dialed 911 at intercom dial tone the system selected an idle trunk using the trunk access code programmed for this feature defaults to Trunk Group 1 or an individual line code direct trunk access In versions 7 0 and later however the emer gency extension is programmable on a per station basis In addition Day Night Emergency Outgoing Access lists are provided to validate the extension making the emergency call When a user dials 911 at intercom or CO dial tone emergency outgoing access is granted based on how system programming and what the user dialed as described below e fthe user dials the emergency feature code from a station with a trunk or trunk group programmed as the Emergency Extension the Emergency Call feature routes the call based on the station s Emergency Extension The trunk or trunk group does not validate the station o
523. ugh database programming A Receive Only mailbox type may only listen to new messages save delete or recover them and access personal options This type of mailbox is restricted from recording and sending messages and has no access to remote messaging There can be only one voice mail administrator The voice mail administrator has all of the options a Standard mailbox subscriber has plus these features Record and send broadcast messages to all subscribers of the voice mail system Provide mailbox and group list maintenance Record and select Custom Audiotex Recordings Extension IDs are used in conjunction with transferring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Extension Directory The extension ID allows callers to be trans ferred to station extensions which do not have mailboxes and allows the station user to record a directory name and set up a password Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application to a station with a mailbox can be screened announced or unannounced Separate program ming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to stations with mailboxes Page 289 Voice Processing Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 During database programming each mailbox is assigned a dial 0 operator destination When a caller presses Ell while listening to the mailbox s personal greeting or recording instructions or while recording
524. ume level is automatically saved e Tochange handset progress tone volume Press the desired arrow while listening to intercom dial tone through the handset e To change speakerphone progress tone volume Press the desired arrow while listening to intercom dial tone through the speakerphone To save the setting on a digital phone Press both edges of the Volume button at the same time The display shows VOLUME SAVED To save the setting on an analog phone Press the pound E SAVE or ACCEPT button The display shows VOLUME SAVED If this step is not performed the phone will return to the previous volume level when the call or tone ends except for the ringing alert tone or background music volume which is automatically saved at the most recent volume level TO RETURN AN INTER TEL PHONE TO DEFAULT VOLUME LEVELS While on or off hook enter the Default Station feature code 394 If off hook hang up The display shows STATION DEFAULTED NOTE Entering this feature code also cancels Do Not Disturb manual call forwarding background music ring intercom always all calls following account code headset mode and queue requests and restores handsfree mode pages hunt group calls and system forwarding SELECTABLE RING TONE The tone of the phone ring signals all tones except call waiting can be changed by the user to create distinctive ringing If stations are placed close together changing the tone makes each station s ring
525. unt group mode on or off You hear dial tone Hunt Group Remove Replace and Do Not Disturb Page 133 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 UCD HUNT GROUPS Page 134 NOTE The Uniform Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature is required to use UCD fea tures Uniform Call Distribution UCD hunt groups provide additional features to improve hunt group efficiency The features added when UCD is enabled are as follows e Announcement and overflow stations pick up unanswered calls when the hunt group stations are busy e Hunt group priority ranking will place calls to one hunt group before another at stations that are members of more than one hunt group e Hunt group supervisors can monitor outside calls of any member of the hunt group Announcement and Overflow Stations Announcement and overflow stations are individual stations that receive unanswered calls when all of the hunt group stations are unavailable They are not usually included in the hunt group list Announcement and overflow stations can be separate stations or they can be the same station Also each of the hunt groups can have the same announcement and overflow sta tions or they can be assigned different stations In a network the announcement and overflow stations can be off node devices Call rings in to Ext 2000 Ext 1000 Ext 1006 I Ext 1007 Y Ext 1011 E Ext 1012 Y Ext 1020
526. unt groups at once If the toggle feature code is pro grammed in a user programmable button with a lamp the lamp will be lit when the agent is logged in to an ACD hunt group and available to receive calls and it will be unlit when the agent is logged out TO LOG OUT OF ALL OF YOUR ACD HUNT GROUPS AT ONCE USING THE LOGIN LOGOUT FEATURE CODE While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login Logout feature code 328 The display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF ALL ACDS and you hear a confirmation tone Hang up if off hook TO LOG IN TO ALL OF YOUR ACD HUNT GROUPS AT ONCE USING THE LOGIN LOGOUT FEATURE CODE 1 While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login Logout feature code 328 f you were already logged in the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF ALL ACDS and you hear a confirmation tone f you were not logged in continue to the next step 2 The display shows AGENT LOGIN AGENT ID Do one of the following To log in to all ACD hunt groups for which you have an Agent ID Enter your Agent ID The display shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that use the Agent ID that you entered Hang up if off hook If another agent is already logged in at this station you hear reorder tones and the display shows DIFFERENT AGENT ID ALREADY USED You must have the other agent log out before you can use that station To log
527. up ACCOUNT CODES Account Codes Account codes are 3 to 12 digit codes that can be used in conjunction with the Station Mes sage Detail Recording SMDR feature to aid record keeping Account codes can be assigned to measure telephone use and or to identify calls for customer billing There are Standard Forced and Optional types of account codes The account code when used is recorded in the SMDR report as soon as the call is completed If more than one account code is entered during a call the last account code that was entered is recorded Database Programmed Account Codes Any station can be assigned a standard account code or one of six types of forced account codes four are ARS dependent Or if desired the station can have no associated account code There can be up to 256 standard and 256 forced account codes in the database 512 of each in a triple or quad cabinet system The account code types are e Standard Standard account codes automatically appear in the SMDR printout to iden tify calls from this station The station user is not required to enter any digits during the call e Forced All Calls Validated If this type of account code is enabled the user must enter a forced account code before an outside call can be placed If the code matches one of the pre programmed forced account codes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Stations with this account code ty
528. up 1 Programming a node in Route Group 1 may cause the system to access a trunk on a separate node when ARS is used for emergency access If this occurs Emergency Out going Access is no longer validated The system will allow the Dialing Wait After Connect timer to expire and will then dial the digit string programmed in the database as the emergency number At the time the call is processed a minor alarm will be generated by the system and sent to all administrator stations Also if the Message Print option is enabled the alarm message is sent to the designated output port EMERGENCY CALL FEATURE CALL PLACED TO 911 AXXESS DATABASE af EMERGENCY EXT E J TRUNK GROUP 1 92001 4 e OR ALARM 11 DIRECT TRUNK ACCESS DISPLAYED Station user EMERGENCY No 911 Ma dials 911 MESSAGE PRINTOUT IF ENABLED Emergency Call Feature System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Emergency Outgoing Access Lists As of version 7 0 the system supports two outgoing access lists called Emergency Day Outgo ing Access and Emergency Night Outgoing Access These lists which are similar to the Day Night Outgoing Access lists are programmable for CO Trunk Groups and Node IP Connection Groups These lists default to the Auto Extension List PP051 Auto All Stations Ten Emergency Numbers The system can store up to ten emergency numbers that are dialed when t
529. up will receive direct ring in calls on trunks in that trunk group On Inter Tel phones with ring in the individual trunk or Call button flashes and the display indicates a ringing call Allowed answer for the trunk group is automatically assigned to a station with ring in When Inter Tel phones have outgoing access or ring in assignments the associated individual trunk buttons show the status of their trunks Stations that do not appear on any of the lists cannot place or directly receive outside calls they are limited to intercom calls conferences transferred calls and retrieving calls on system hold A call on system hold can only be picked up at the station that placed it on hold or at a station that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk A private trunk group with one or more trunks can be established by programming outgoing access ring in and allowed answer permission for the trunk group to only one station ANSWER FEATURE CODE For calls that are ringing or holding at the station the user may enter the Answer feature code 351 or press the button When more than one call is ringing or holding the fol lowing priority list determines which call is answered first e Ringing calls ring ins recalls callbacks or transfers are answered in the order they were received e Calls on individual hold are answered in the order they were placed on hold Outgoing Access Al
530. upplied by another PBX that does not use the public network or when the site is located close to the central office Normal The normal balance can be used by most trunks DTMF or dial pulse signaling Trunks can be set for DTMF or dial pulse signals Trunk group assignment Trunks can be assigned to trunk groups on an individual basis Busy trunk This feature allows you to temporarily remove a trunk from service While the trunk is out of service it cannot be used for placing outgoing calls However incoming calls on analog trunks will ring in and can be answered Incoming calls on ISDN trunks cannot be answered The trunk will remain out of service until the Trunk Busy Out timer expires or you place the trunk back in service Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Trunk groups Day Night Answer Access You can program separate lists for stations with allowed answer access in day and night modes Day Night Ring In You can program separate lists of stations with ring in for day and night modes Change Toll Restrictions You can program toll restriction classes of service for the trunk groups Classes of service are described in detail on page 155 Trunk List Each trunk group has a programmed list of individual trunks The Trunk Database Programming process is summarized in the flowchart shown on page 29 See page 65 for a Program Planning Sheet NOTE If necessary
531. ure code the second time puts the ISDN view feature into full mode In this mode the system out puts all ISDN message to message print in full format i e each ISDN information element Entering the feature code one more time turns this feature off Diagnostic Major Reset 9962 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Mark As Leaks 9945 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Mark As Quiescent 9946 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Minor Reset 9964 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Administrator Feature Codes Page 125 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Diagnostic Network Freeze Zone 9939 The system fault history for any freeze zone in the network System Histories can be halted frozen or re enabled using these feature Diagnostic Network Unfreeze Zone 9989 codes when diagnostics mode is enabled The fault history System Histories can then be extracted from each zone and used by service personnel when troubleshooting the system Diagnostic Network Group 9963 Verifies that the system Network Groups are programmed correctly When the
532. uring the device The MP 100 uses DIP switches and the MP 104 uses a command line switch fb The MP 104 on an IPRC V8 1 firmware supports the peer to peer P2P audio feature For details on the gateway device see the latest version of the P Devices Installation Manual Calling Party Number Field System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 The following diagram illustrates a remote site with an MGCP gateway FIGURE 10 Example of a Remote Site without an MGCP Gateway Application j IP Endpoint ITF Caller dials 911 911 Operator In Phoenix AZ Caller ID Display 480 961 9000 Axxess System Located in Phoenix AZ 480 961 9000 Remote Site Located in Orange CA 714 283 1600 FIGURE 11 Example of a Remote Site with an MGCP Gateway Application Caller ID Display 714 283 1600 911 at MGCP In Orange CA i e AudioCodes Axxess System Located in Phoenix AZ 480 961 9000 WE IP Endpoint Remote Site Located in Orange CA 714 283 1600 NOTE The MGCP gateway is intended to connect to the PSTN Connecting the MGCP gate way to single line ports on other phone systems is currently not supported When configured with an MGCP Gateway you can program the system so that when 911 is dialed from an IP device the calling name and number associated with the IP device not the system is sent to the
533. utton once to advance or twice to leave a space or press the button to backspace Use speed dial and or redial numbers Inter Tel phones only In either numeric or alphanumeric mode you can speed dial a number using the speed dial button or feature code In numeric mode you can press the button to enter the stored characters You may chain speed dial and or redial numbers together Hang up to complete the programming To turn off Do Not Disturb Enter the Do Not Disturb Off feature code 371 The On Off feature code cannot be used in remote programming The call is automatically disconnected when the feature code is accepted f you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again Remote Do Not Disturb Programming System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 REMOTE FORWARD PROGRAMMING TO FORWARD A STATION USING THE REMOTE PROGRAMMING FEATURE NOTE After each entry non display phone users will hear a confirmation tone Outside callers using a DISA line will hear confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone Display phone users will not hear confirmation tones but will see a prompt asking for the next entry 1 If calling from an outside telephone access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone If programming from another station lift the handset or press the Speaker button 2 En
534. vance Twenty different reminder messages are available These messages can be reprogrammed by the installer or using an administrator s station At the programmed time the reminder message signals the station with eight short tones A display phone shows the message until it is canceled a non display phone receives tones only If the station is busy the user still hears the tones and the message displays for 10 seconds dur ing the call then the display returns after the user hangs up Reminder displays interrupt but do not affect programming Messages can be changed by the installer or administrators station if desired They are limited to 16 characters The default messages are 01 MEETING 11 CALL ENGINEERING 02 STAFF MEETING 12 CALL MARKETING 03 SALES MEETING 13 CALL ACCOUNTING 04 CANCEL MEETING 14 CANCEL DND 05 APPOINTMENT 15 CANCEL CALL FWD 06 PLACE CALL 16 TAKE MEDICATION 07 CALL CLIENT 17 MAKE RESERVATION 08 CALL CUSTOMER 18 REVIEW SCHEDULE 09 CALL HOME 19 LUNCH 10 CALL CORPORATE 20 REMINDER In a network each node has its own list of reminder messages that can be used only on that node The system has default reminder messages in both the Primary and Secondary Languages However messages using Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through an adminis trator s station see page 18 The language of the messages seen by the station user is determined by the station s pro grammed language That is if a station
535. verride 156 230 Transfer 203 attendant transfer timer 129 conference 209 conference to voice mail 203 DSS BLF Unit 36 167 methods 206 277 301 recall 205 to a system forward 203 to hold 86 203 205 to park 36 204 to park locations 203 toring 86 203 204 to voice mail 36 204 voice processor timer 274 Transferring Conference Calls 203 Transfers and Outside Calls 203 Transfer To Connect Allowed Station Flag 203 Transient Call Indication 166 Transient Call Indication on Call Answer 85 166 208 Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue 194 Trunk Features 148 Trunk Group Keys 81 82 Trunk Groups allowed answer 151 outgoing access 151 private 151 programming 24 ringin 151 subject to toll restriction 155 toll restriction COS 155 Trunk Programming 12 24 Trunk Programming Using an Administrator s Station 24 Trunks 173 access codes 116 answer supervision 24 busy out programming 24 caller information 148 DTMF dial pulse signals 24 features 148 hybrid balance 24 programming 24 TSAPI 94 Two Line Phone Liquid Crystal Display LCD 79 Two Stage Caller Identification 148 Type 266 Index AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 U UCD Hunt Groups 134 136 announcement stations 134 overflow stations 134 priority level 136 priority list 136 supervisors 136 supervisors and station Monitoring 137 Unannounced Calls 207 Unanswered System Forward Calls 224 Undefined Keys 83 Undelete Message 298 Undeliver
536. want a password press POUND now 043 You new password is 044 The number entered is too long 045 To accept this entry press POUND 046 To erase and re enter press 3 047 Password erased 048 Password saved 049 Your mailbox is full and cannot receive any new messages Please delete old messages 050 Not used 051 Not used 052 Your mailbox is almost full Please delete any messages you no longer need so new messages may arrive 053 You have 054 You have one new message 055 hew messages 056 of which is priority 057 You have no new messages 058 You have one saved message 059 Saved messages 060 Remote messaging is currently enabled 061 To listen to new messages press 1 062 To record a message press 2 063 To listen to saved messages press 3 064 For personal options press 4 065 To setup remote messaging press 5 066 For your primary setup press 1 067 For your alternate setup press 2 068 If this is the correct destination press POUND 069 To send this message now press POUND 070 For special delivery options press 9 071 To return to the previous menu press STAR 072 Message canceled 073 To mark this message private press 1 074 To mark this message for certified delivery press 2 Default Voice Mail Prompts Page 53 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 54
537. was previously programmed as a speed dial button TO CREATE A SPEED DIAL LOCATION IN A USER PROGRAMMABLE BUTTON 1 While on hook enter the Program Keys feature code 397 Display phones show PRESS THE KEY TO PROGRAM Press the desired feature button The display shows the current feature user or speed dial location name and KEY VALUE feature or name Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 or the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows SELECT STN SPEED or SELECT SYS SPEED Enter the desired speed dial bin number 0 9 for station 000 999 for system The dis play shows the current contents of that bin To program a new number in a station speed dial bin follow the instructions given on page 235 Administrators can use the procedures on page 31 to program system speed dial locations User Programmable Feature Buttons System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 STANDARD ALTERNATE KEYMAP SWITCHING In Database Programming each Inter Tel phone is assigned a standard keymap and can also have an alternate keymap The user can switch between the keymaps by entering a feature code Having two keymaps provides the user with access to more features or trunks In most situa tions the user would have one button programmed with the Switch Keymap feature code 399 in each keymap so that it would be easy to change the keymap If the user programmed button has a lamp the lamp is lit
538. ways a station can be programmed to use this feature The station can be programmed to use its personal mailbox or another mailbox as the assigned Record A Call mailbox Only this assigned mailbox can be selected This 1s the default programming for all stations e The station can be programmed with a default mailbox but with the option of selecting a different mailbox If the user chooses to not enter a mailbox number the system auto matically selects the default mailbox In a network setting the Record A Call destination does not have to be on the same node as the station but the Voice Processor must be programmed with a mailbox for that station When the requesting station user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected If all parties on the call hang up except the requesting station user an intercom call will remain con nected between the requesting station and the Record A Call application This allows the user to make additional comments before ending the recording When the station user turns off Record A Call or ends the call being recorded the system delivers the message to the mailbox The associated station will receive message waiting indi cations as usual In software versions 7 004 and later or 8 002 and later a monitored station can initiate a Record A Call session without terminating call monitoring Hunt group supervisors however cannot initiate a Record A Call while monitoring a station and a sta
539. when the alternate keymap is active When keymaps are switched any user programmable buttons in the maps retain their user pro grammed values they are not returned to default during the switch However if the keymaps do not have the same user programmable buttons in the same positions the location of individ ual buttons may change when the keymaps change If a user switches keymaps during an outside call the call will appear on the appropriate trunk or Call button for that keymap The button assignment may not be the same for both keymaps For example it could appear under a Call button on one map and an individual trunk button on the other If a button is not available in the currently active keymap when a call rings in the user will still see the correct display hear ringing and can answer as usual TO SWITCH BETWEEN KEYMAPS WHEN THE STATION IS IDLE While on hook enter the Switch Keymap feature code 399 The display shows STANDARD KEYMAP IS ACTIVE or ALTERNATE KEYMAP IS ACTIVE TO SWITCH BETWEEN KEYMAPS DURING A CALL While on a call press the Special button and enter the Switch Keymap feature code 399 The display momentarily shows STANDARD KEYMAP IS ACTIVE or ALTERNATE KEYMAP IS ACTIVE Standard Alternate Keymap Switching Page 169 System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 AUTOMATIC CALL ACCESS Page 170 This feature allows an Inter Tel phone user to determine the way incoming calls are an
540. without saving your changes Press or CANCEL to exit The dis play shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED and then returns to the ENTER STATION OPTION prompt Station Information This option allows you to select an attendant for the station or program the station s username To select it press Kl or the STATION INFO menu button The display shows ENTER STATION INFO OPTION Select one of the following 1 Attendant To assign an attendant to serve this station press or the ATTENDANT menu button The display shows ENTER ATTENDANT EXTENSION Enter the desired extension number When the circuit informa tion is displayed press EM again to return to the ENTER STATION INFO OPTION prompt The display shows DATABASE UPDATED Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PER FORMED Username To change the username of the station press Ell or the USER NAME menu button The display shows ENTER USERNAME Enter the new name as described on page 13 Or to cancel your entry press or CAN CEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED Page 15 Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Page 16 C Toll Restriction This option allows you to set the station class of service for day and or night modes To select it press Ell or the TOLL RESTRICTION menu but ton Then do the following 1 The display shows TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION Press Kj or the COS DAY menu button to program day mode toll res
541. x Recordings Administrator Procedures AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 TO RECORD CUSTOM AUDIOTEX RECORDINGS 1 2 3 4 5 Dial the voice mail application access number You hear the main menu During or after the greeting press EM to identify yourself as a mailbox owner Enter the system administrator mailbox number and password Press Ell to access the System Administrator Menu When you hear the System Administrator Menu press J to select the Custom Record ings option The next prompt asks if you wish to make a custom recording or select a custom recording Press Klll make a recording When prompted enter the desired recording number 001 500 If a recording exists it is played If not go to the next step After the recording has played you have the fol lowing options To hear the recording again press KM If you wish to leave the recording unchanged press EJ If you wish to re record the recording press Kl and continue to the next step When prompted record the greeting or message To pause while recording press KM To continue press any button If you exceed the maximum allotted time for recording length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record or save it If the Voice Processor PC disk is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot accept your recording Hang up and try again later When you have completed your recording you have the following options If you are sati
542. y The button allows access to intercom channels for placing and answering calls If an button is not assigned an intercom call will appear under a Call button Next Key This button type is not required for Digital Phones It is intended for Ana log Phone use This button is used for scrolling forward through displays Digital Phones use the Volume button Page Zone Key A page zone button is programmed with one of the page access codes 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 depending on the software version for quick access to page zones 0 9 or 0 49 respectively Previous Key This button type is not required for Digital Phones It is intended for Analog Phone use This button is used for scrolling backward through displays Digi tal Phones use the Volume button Programmable Key Up to 35 user programmable buttons can be designated and given default values in the keymap database They can then be reprogrammed to enter any of the trunk group access codes extension numbers or feature codes by the individual phone users as desired Or they can be programmed as system or station speed dial bins or as secondary extension buttons see below The phone user or programmer can return the buttons to default values at any time Save Key This button type is not required for Digital Phones It is intended for Ana log Phone use This button is used for saving volume levels or programmed phone fea tures Digital Phones use the Volume button by pre
543. you hear single line message waiting tones six tones after lifting the handset or hookflashing when the station is idle enter the Message feature code 365 Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to either the station that left the message or your message center If the called station does not answer is busy or is in Do Not Disturb you may hang up or leave a message at that station before hanging up You will continue to receive message waiting indications IIIS button flash or tones unless you left a message while attempting to retrieve the message or canceled the message after hanging up The message waiting indications are canceled when you are actually connected with the called station Message indications from voice mail will only be cleared if you save or delete the waiting voice mail message The button will re light if you clear the message indication without saving or deleting the voice mail 2 If message waiting indications continue there is another message Repeat this proce dure Canceling a Waiting Message NOTE Message indications from voice mail will only be cleared if you save or delete the wait ing voice mail message The IET button will re light if you clear the message indication with out saving or deleting the voice mail TO CANCEL A DISPLAYED MESSAGE WITHOUT ANSWERING AT AN INTER TEL PHONE 1 When the message you wish to cancel is displayed as described on the previous page remain o
544. ystem accepts the account code If an account code is entered that has fewer than the programmed maximum number of digits press J to return to the call Pressing will cancel the account code entry Optional Account Codes System Features AXXESS ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE January 2004 Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls Following Feature You can use the Account Code For All Calls Following feature to enter an account code once and apply it to all calls placed from that phone until the feature is canceled The account code is stored in system memory and is used for all calls made by that station It affects other account code programming as follows e Forced If forced account codes are enabled for the station the all calls following account code is used for all calls and the station user will not be prompted to enter an account code until the all calls following code is canceled NOTE If account codes are validated and the Account Code For All Calls Following is an invalid code calls will not be allowed at the station until the code is removed or reprogrammed e Standard If standard account codes are enabled for the station the all calls follow ing account code overrides the standard code e None If no forced or standard account codes are enabled for the station the all calls following code will be used as an optional account code e Optional In the event that this feature is in effect and an op
545. zed in the flowchart shown on page 17 See page 65 for a Program Planning Sheet NOTE If necessary you can press the asterisk EJ or Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes at any time during the following procedure TO PROGRAM STATIONS 1 While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 2 Ifa password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to enter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password or do not press EM the display shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step 3 The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Display phones also show the options STATION SYSTEM and TRUNK Press Kll or the STATION menu button 4 The display shows ENTER STATION EXTENSION Enter the extension number of the station to be programmed using one of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When the circuit information is displayed press EJ again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the exten sion number username and circuit number of the station that most closely matches the partial extension number Press Ell or ACCEPT to program the displayed station or scroll to

Inter-Tel Axxess Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents